XC60 OwnersManual MY18 en-InT TP24641

XC60
O W N ER' S MA N UA L
VÄLKOMMEN!
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo Manual) and
car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your pas- on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).
sengers. Volvo strives to be one of the safest cars in the world. Your
We encourage everyone to always wear their seatbelt in this and other
Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental
cars. Please do not drive if you are under the influence of alcohol or
requirements.
medication – or have an impaired ability to drive in some other way.
To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you read
the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's manual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
OWNER INFORMATION YOUR VOLVO SAFETY
Owner information 16 Volvo ID 26 Safety 42
Owner's manual in centre display 17 Creating and registering a Volvo ID 26 Safety during pregnancy 42
Navigate in the owner's manual in 18 Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure 28 Whiplash Protection System 43
the centre display
IntelliSafe-driver support 31 Seatbelts 44
Owner's Manual in mobile devices 20
Sensus - online connectivity and 32 Putting on and taking off seatbelts 45
Volvo Cars support site 20 entertainment
Seatbelt tensioner 46
Reading the owner's manual 21 Software updates 35
Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner* 47
The owner's manual and the environment 23 Recording data 35
Door and seatbelt reminder 47
Terms & Conditions for Services 36
Airbags 49
Customer Privacy Policy 36
Driver airbags 49
Important information on accessories 37
and auxiliary equipment Passenger airbag 50
Installation of accessories 37 Activating and deactivating passen- 52
ger airbag*
Connection of equipment to the car's 38
diagnostic socket Side airbags 54
Showing the car's identification number 39 Airbags 55
Driver distraction 39 Safety mode 55
Starting and moving the car after 56
safety mode
Child safety 57
Child seats 58
Upper mounting points for child seats 58
Lower mounting points for child seats 59
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for 60
child seats
Child seat positioning 60
2
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Child seat mounting 62 Instruments and controls in left-hand 72 Activating and deactivating centre display 107
drive car
Table for location of child seats 64 Navigating in the centre display's views 107
using the car's seatbelts Instruments and controls in right- 73
hand drive car Managing tiles in centre display 111
Table for location of i-Size child seats 66
Driver display 75 Function view in centre display 114
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats 67
Driver display settings 79 Moving apps and buttons in centre 116
display
Fuel gauge 80
Symbols in the centre display's status bar 116
Trip computer 80
Keyboard in centre display 118
Show trip data in the driver display 82
Changing keyboard language in cen- 121
Resetting the trip meter 83 tre display
Show trip statistics in the centre display 83 Enter the characters, letters and 121
words manually in the centre display
Settings for trip statistics 84
Changing the appearance in the 123
Time and date 85 centre display
Outside temperature gauge 85 Switching off and changing the vol- 123
Indicator symbols in the driver display 86 ume of the system sound in the cen-
tre display
Warning symbols in the driver display 88
Changing system units 124
License agreement for the driver display 89
Changing system language 124
Application menu in driver display 95
Opening settings in the centre display 124
Handling the application menu in the 96
driver display Open contextual setup in the centre 125
display
Messages in the driver display 97
Changing settings in the centre display 126
Managing messages in the driver display 98
Resetting user data for change of 126
Handling a message saved from the 99 ownership
driver display
Resetting settings in the centre display 127
Overview of centre display 101
Setting types in the centre display 127
Managing the centre display 104
3
LIGHTING WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Table showing centre display settings 128 Lighting control 144 Windows, glass and mirrors 160
Driver profiles 129 Adjusting light functions via the cen- 145 Pinch protection for windows and 160
tre display sun blinds
Selecting driver profile 130
Adjusting headlamp level 146 Reset sequence for pinch protection 161
Renaming a driver profile 131
Position lamps 147 Power windows 161
Resetting settings in the driver profiles 131
Daytime running lights 147 Operating power windows 162
Linking remote control key to driver 131
profile Dipped beam 148 Rearview and door mirrors 163
Message in centre display 132 Using main beam 149 Adjusting rearview mirror dimming 164
Managing messages in the centre display 133 Active main beam 149 Angling the door mirrors 165
Handling a message saved from the 134 Using direction indicators 151 Panorama roof* 166
centre display
Active bending lights* 152 Operating the panorama roof* 168
Head-up display* 134
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* 152 Automatic closing of the panoramic 170
Activating and deactivating the head- 136 roof's* sun blind
up display* Rear fog lamp 153
Using windscreen wipers 171
Settings for head-up display* 136 Brake lights 154
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* 172
Voice recognition Emergency brake lights 154
137
Using the rain sensor 172
Using voice recognition Hazard warning flashers 154
138
Using the rain sensor's memory function 173
Controlling a telephone with voice Using home safe lighting 155
139
recognition Using windscreen and headlamp washers 174
Approach light duration 155
Voice control of radio and media 140 Using the rear window wiper and washer 175
Interior lighting 156
Settings for voice recognition 140 Using automatic rear windscreen 176
Adjusting interior lighting 157 wiping when reversing
4
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL CLIMATE
Manual front seat 178 Climate 194 Activating and deactivating the 211
heated steering wheel*
Power front seat* 179 Climate zones 194
Activating and deactivating automatic 211
Adjusting the power front seat* 179 Climate control - sensors 195 start of heated steering wheel*
Storing memory function in power 180 Perceived temperature 195 Activating auto climate control 212
operated front seat* Controlling climate control with voice 196 Activating and deactivating air recir- 212
Using stored memory in a powered 181 recognition culation
front seat Air quality 197 Activating and deactivating time set- 213
Massage settings in the front seat* 181 Clean Zone* ting for air recirculation
197
Adjusting massage settings* in the 182 Clean Zone Interior Package* Activating and deactivating max defroster 213
front seat 198
Interior Air Quality System* 198 Activating and deactivating the 215
Adjusting the length of the seat 183 heated windscreen*
cushion in the front seat Activating and deactivating the air 199
quality sensor* Activating and deactivating automatic 216
Adjusting the side support* in the 183 start of heated windscreen*
front seat Passenger compartment filter 199
Activating and deactivating the 216
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the 184 Air distribution 200 heated rear window and door mirrors
front seat
Changing air distribution 200 Activating and deactivating automatic 217
Adjusting the passenger seat from 185 starting of the heated rear window
the driver's seat* Opening, closing and aiming the air vents 201 and door mirrors
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat 186 Table of air distribution options 203 Regulating fan level for front seat 217
Adjusting the head restraints in the 189 Climate controls 206 Regulating fan level for rear seat* 218
rear seat Activating and deactivating heated 208
front seat* Regulating temperature for front seat 219
Steering wheel controls and horn 190
Activating and deactivating automatic Regulating temperature for rear seat* 219
Steering lock 191 209
start of heated front seat* Synchronising temperature 220
Adjusting the steering wheel 191
Activating and deactivating heated 209 Activating and deactivating air condi- 221
rear seat* tioning
Activating and deactivating ventilated 210 Parking climate* 222
front seat*
Preconditioning* 222
5
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Starting/stopping preconditioning* 223 Lock confirmation 234 Locking and unlocking from inside 263
the car
Preconditioning time setting* 224 Lock indication setting 235
Unlocking the tailgate from the 264
Adding and editing time setting for 224 Remote control key 235 inside of the car
preconditioning* Locking and unlocking with the 237 Activating and deactivating child 265
Activating and deactivating time set- 225 remote control key safety locks
ting for preconditioning* Settings for remotely controlled and 239 Automatic locking when driving 266
Removing time setting for precondi- 226 inside unlocking
tioning* Opening and closing the power*- 266
Unlocking the tailgate with the 239 operated tailgate
Climate comfort when parking* 227 remote control key
Programming maximum opening for 269
Starting and switching off climate 227 Remote control key range 240 power operated tailgate*
comfort when parking* Replacing the battery in the remote 241 Opening and closing the tailgate with 270
Symbols and messages for parking 228 control key
foot movement*
climate control* Ordering more remote control keys 244 Private locking 272
Heater* 229 Red Key - restricted remote control key* 244 Activating and deactivating private 272
Parking heater* 230 Red Key settings* 245 locking
Additional heater* 231 Detachable key blade 246 Alarm* 273
Activating and deactivating automatic 231 Locking and unlocking with the 247 Activating and deactivating alarms* 275
start of auxiliary heater detachable key blade
Reduced alarm level* 276
Immobiliser 248 Double lock* 276
Type approval for the remote control 250
key system Temporarily deactivating double locks* 277
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* 259 Detection of unknown car component* 277
Keyless locking and unlocking* 260
Settings for Keyless entry* 261
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* 261
Antenna locations for the start and 262
lock systems
6
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driving support systems 280 Activating and starting Cruise Control 295 Starting overtaking assistance with 311
Adaptive Cruise Control
Speed-dependent steering force 280 Managing speed for the Cruise Control 296
Limitations for overtaking assistance 311
Stability system Roll Stability Control 281 Deactivate Cruise Control and set it 297 with Adaptive Cruise Control
in standby mode
Electronic stability control 282 Changing target with Adaptive 312
Reactivating Cruise Control from 297 Cruise Control
Sport mode for electronic stability control 283 standby mode
Activating/deactivating Sport mode 283 Automatic braking with Adaptive 312
Deactivating Cruise Control 298 Cruise Control
in Electronic Stability Control
Distance Warning* 299 Limitations for Adaptive Cruise Control 313
Limitation for sport mode in Elec- 284
tronic Stability Control Head-up display for Distance Warning 299 Change between Cruise Control and 314
Symbols and messages for elec- 285 Activating/deactivating Distance Warning 300 Adaptive Cruise Control
tronic stability control Symbols and messages for Adaptive 316
Setting the time interval for Distance 300
Speed Limiter 286 Warning Cruise Control
Activating and starting the Speed Limiter 287 Limitations of Distance Warning 301 Pilot Assist 318
Managing speed for the Speed Limiter 287 Adaptive Cruise Control* 302 Pilot Assist and Collision risk warning 321
Deactivate the Speed Limiter and set 288 Adaptive Cruise Control and Collision 305 Head-up display for Pilot Assist if 322
it in standby mode risk warning there is a risk of collision
Reactivating the Speed Limiter from 289 Head-up display for Adaptive Cruise 305 Activating and starting Pilot Assist 323
standby mode Control if there is a risk of collision Managing speed for Pilot Assist 324
Deactivating the Speed Limiter 289 Activating and starting Adaptive 306 Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist 325
Cruise Control
Limitations for Speed Limiter 290 Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist 326
Managing speed with Adaptive 307
Automatic Speed Limiter 290 Cruise Control Overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist 328
Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed 292 Setting time interval for Adaptive Start overtaking assistance with Pilot 328
Limiter 308
Cruise Control Assist
Changing the tolerance for the Auto- 293 Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive Limitations for overtaking assistance 329
matic Speed Limiter 309
Cruise Control with Pilot Assist
Limitations for Automatic Speed Limiter 293 Overtaking assistance with Adaptive Change the target with Pilot Assist 329
311
Cruise Control 294 Cruise Control
Automatic braking with Pilot Assist 330
7
Limitations of Pilot Assist 330 Rear Collision Warning 359 Driver Alert Control 375
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* 332 Limitations of Rear Collision Warning 359 Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control 376
Radar unit 333 BLIS* 360 Select rest stop guidance in the 377
event of a warning with Driver Alert
Limitations for radar device 334 Activate/deactivate BLIS 361 Control
Recommended radar device mainte- 337 Limitations of BLIS 362 Limitations of Driver Alert Control 377
nance
Recommended maintenance for BLIS 362 Lane assistance 377
Type approval for radar device 338
Messages for BLIS 364 Steering assistance with lane assistance 379
Camera unit 342
Cross Traffic Alert* 365 Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid 380
Limitations for camera unit 343
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert 366 Select assistance option for lane 380
Recommended camera device main- 346 assistance
tenance Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert 366
Recommended maintenance for 367 Limitations of Lane assistance 380
City Safety™ 346
Cross Traffic Alert Symbols and messages for lane 382
Parameters and subfunctions for City 347 assistance
Safety Messages for Cross Traffic Alert 368
Road Sign Information* 369 Lane assistance symbols in the 384
Setting the warning distance for City 349 driver display
Safety Activating/deactivating Road Sign 370
Information Steering assistance at risk of collision 385
Detection of obstacles with City Safety 350
Road Sign Information and sign display 370 Activating/deactivating Steering 385
City Safety in cross traffic 352 assistance in the event of a collision risk
Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic 353 Road Sign Information and Sensus 372
Navigation Steering assistance upon risk of run-off 386
City Safety steering assistance for 353 Steering assistance level in the event 386
evasive manoeuvre Road Sign Information with Speed 372
Warning and Settings of a run-off risk
Limitations of City Safety steering 354 Activating/deactivating Steering 387
assistance when taking evasive action Activating/deactivating Speed warn- 373
ing in Road Sign Information assistance in the event of run-off risk
City Safety when evasive manoeu- 354 Limitations for steering assistance 387
vres are prevented Road Sign Information with Speed 374
Camera Information upon risk of running off the road
Limitations of City Safety 355 Steering assistance upon risk of 388
Limitations of Road Sign Information 374
Messages for City Safety 358 head-on collision
8
STARTING AND DRIVING
Activating/deactivating Steering 389 Limitations for park assist camera 405 Starting the car 418
assistance in the event of a risk of a
head-on collision Recommended parking camera 406 Switching off the car 419
maintenance
Limitations for steering assistance 389 Ignition positions 420
upon risk of head-on collision Symbols and messages for Park 407
assist camera Selecting ignition mode 421
Steering assistance upon risk of 390 Alcohol lock* 422
rear-end collision* Park Assist Pilot* 408
Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot 408 Bypass of the alcohol lock* 422
Activating/deactivating Steering 391
assistance on risk of rear-end collision* Parking with Park Assist Pilot 409 Before starting the engine with the 423
alcohol lock
Limitations for steering assistance 391 Leaving a car park with Park Assist Pilot 412
upon risk of rear-end collision Brake functions 423
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* 413
Symbols and messages for steering 393 Foot brake 423
assistance upon risk of collision Recommended Park Assist Pilot 414
maintenance Brake assistance 424
Park Assist* 394 Braking on wet roads
Messages for Park Assist Pilot* 415 425
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and 395 Braking on gritted roads
along the sides 425
Brake system maintenance 425
Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot 396
Parking brake 426
Limitations of Parking assistance 396
Activating and deactivating the park- 426
Recommended Park Assist Pilot 397 ing brake
maintenance
Automatic parking brake activation 428
Symbols and messages for Park 398 setting
Assist Pilot
Parking on a hill 428
Park assist camera* 399
In the event of a fault in the parking 428
Parking cameras' camera views 400 brake
Park assist lines for parking camera 402 Automatic braking when stationary 429
Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot 404 Activating and deactivating the auto- 430
for parking camera matic brake at a standstill
Starting the park assist camera 404 Help when starting on a hill 430
9
Auto braking after a collision 431 Activating and deactivating low- 453 Towbar* 471
speed driving* using a function button
Gearbox 431 Specifications for towbar* 472
Hill descent control* 454
Manual gearbox 432 Extendable and retractable towbar* 473
Activating and deactivating hill 455
Gear positions for automatic gearbox 433 Removable towbar* 475
descent control* with the function button
Changing gear with steering wheel 434 Driving with a trailer 476
Economical driving 455
paddles*
Preparations for a long trip 456 Trailer stability assist* 477
Gear selector inhibitor 436
Winter driving 457 Checking trailer lamps 478
Deactivate automatic gear selector 436
inhibitor Driving in water 457 Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* 479
Kick-down function 437 Opening and closing the fuel filler flap 458 Towing 480
Gear shift indicator* 437 Filling fuel 458 Fitting and removing the towing eye 481
All-wheel drive* 439 Handling of fuel 459 Recovery 483
Drive modes* 439 Petrol 460 HomeLink®* 484
Changing drive mode* 441 Petrol particle filter 461 Programming HomeLink®* 484
Drive mode ECO 442 Diesel 461 Using HomeLink 486
Activating and deactivating drive 444 Empty tank and diesel engine 462 Type approval for HomeLink®* 487
mode ECO with the function button
Diesel particulate filter 463 Compass 487
Start/Stop function 444 Emission control with AdBlue® 464 Activating and deactivating the compass 488
Driving with start/stop function 445 Handling AdBlue® 464 Calibrating the compass 488
Deactivating the Start/Stop function 446
temporarily Checking and filling with AdBlue® 465
Conditions for the Start/Stop function 447 Symbols and messages for AdBlue® 467
Level control* and shock absorption 449 Overheating in the engine and drive 469
system
Settings for level control* 452 Overloading the starter battery 470
Low speed control* 452 Using jump starting with another battery 470
10
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Sound, media and Internet 492 Settings for video 508 Switch between Bluetooth-con- 521
nected phones
Audio settings 492 Media via Bluetooth® 508
Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone 522
Apps 493 Connecting a device via Bluetooth® 509
Managing phone calls 522
Downloading apps 494 Media via USB port 509
Managing text messages 523
Updating apps 495 Connecting a device via USB port 509
Settings for text messages 524
Deleting apps 496 TV* 510
Managing the phone book 524
Radio 496 Using the TV* 510
Settings for phone 525
Start radio 497 Settings for TV* 511
Settings for Bluetooth devices 526
Changing radio band and radio station 497 Apple® CarPlay®* 511
Internet-connected car* 526
Searching for radio stations 498
Using Apple® CarPlay®* 512 Connecting the car to the Internet
Setting radio favourites 527
499 via a mobile device (Bluetooth)
Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* 513
Settings for radio 499 Connecting the car to the Internet
Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®* 514 528
RDS radio 501 via a mobile device (Wi-Fi)
Android Auto* 515
Digital radio* 501 Connect the car to the Internet via 528
Using Android Auto* 515 car modem (SIM card)
Link between FM and digital radio* 502
Settings for Android Auto* 516 Settings for car modem 529
Media player 502
Tips for using Android Auto* 517 Sharing Internet access from the car 530
Media playback 503 via a Wi-Fi hotspot
Phone 517
Controlling and changing media 504 No or poor Internet connection 531
Connecting a phone to the car via 518
Searching media 505 Bluetooth for the first time Remove Wi-Fi network 531
Gracenote® 506 Connecting a phone to the car via 520 Wi-Fi technologies and security 532
CD player* Bluetooth automatically User terms and conditions and data
507 532
Connecting a phone to the car via 520 sharing
Video 507 Bluetooth manually Activating and deactivating data sharing 532
Playing a video 507 Disconnecting a Bluetooth-con- 521 Compatible media formats
nected phone 533
Playing back DivX® 508
11
WHEELS AND TYRES
Technical specifications for USB devices 534 Tyres 546 Emergency puncture repair kit 565
Storage space on hard disk 534 Dimension designation for tyre 547 Using a puncture repair kit 566
License agreement for audio and media 535 Dimension designation for wheel rim 548 Inflating tyres with the compressor 569
from the puncture repair kit
Tyres' rotation direction 549
Tread wear indicators on the tyres 549
Checking tyre pressure 550
Adjusting tyre pressure 550
Recommended tyre pressure 551
Tyre pressure monitoring system* 552
Calibrate the system for tyre pres- 553
sure monitoring*
See tyre pressure statue in the cen- 555
tre display*
Action in the event of warning for 556
low tyre pressure
When changing wheels 557
Tool kit 557
Jack* 557
Wheel bolts 558
Removing a wheel 559
Fitting the wheels 561
Spare wheel* 562
Taking out the spare wheel 563
Winter wheels 563
Snow chains 564
12
LOADING, STORAGE AND MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Volvo service programme 590 Bulb specifications 608
Passenger compartment interior 572 Data transfer between car and work- 590 Starter battery 609
Tunnel console 573 shop via Wi-Fi
Support battery 612
Electrical sockets 574 Download Center 591
Symbols on the batteries 613
Using electrical sockets 576 Managing system updates via the 591
Download Centre Fuses and central electrical units 614
Using the glovebox 577 Replacing a fuse 615
Car status 592
Sun visors 579 Fuses in engine compartment 616
Book service and repair 592
Cargo area 579 Fuses under glovebox 619
Sending car information to a workshop 594
Recommendations for loading 579 Fuses in cargo area 622
Raise the car 595
Roof load and loading on load carriers 581 Cleaning the interior 626
Opening and closing the bonnet 597
Bag hooks 581 Cleaning the centre display 626
Servicing the climate control system 598
Load retaining eyelets 581 Cleaning the head up display* 627
Head-up display when replacing the 599
Through-load hatch in the rear seat 582 windscreen* Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining 628
Fitting and removing cargo cover* 582 Engine compartment overview 599 Cleaning the seatbelts 628
Operating cargo cover* 584 Engine oil 600 Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats 628
Fitting and removing safety grilles* 585 Checking and filling with engine oil 601 Cleaning leather upholstery 629
Fitting and removing the safety net* 586 Topping up coolant 602 Cleaning the leather steering wheel 630
First aid kit 588 Bulb replacement 604 Cleaning interior plastic, metal and 630
Exterior lamp positions 605 wood parts
Warning triangle 588
Replacing the dipped beam bulb 605 Cleaning the exterior 631
Replacing the main beam lamp 606 Polishing and waxing 631
Replacing daytime running light 607 Handwashing 632
bulb/position lamp bulb, front Automatic car wash 633
Replacing the front direction indica- 607 High-pressure washing 634
tor bulb
Cleaning the wiper blades 634
13
SPECIFICATIONS ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and 635 Type designations 646 Alphabetical Index 665
trim components
Dimensions 649
Cleaning wheel rims 636
Weights 651
Rustproofing 636
Towing capacity and towball load 652
Car paintwork 637
Engine specifications 654
Touching up minor paintwork damage 637
Engine oil — specifications 655
Colour codes 639
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil 657
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window 639
Coolant — specifications 658
Replacing windscreen wiper blades 640
Transmission fluid — specifications 658
Wiper blades in service position 641
Brake fluid — specifications 658
Filling washer fluid 642
Fuel tank - volume 659
Tank capacity for AdBlue® 659
Air conditioning — specifications 659
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions 661
Approved tyre pressures 662
Performance 663
14
OWNER INFORMATION
OWNER INFORMATION
Owner information The car's centre display1 Printed information

Owner's information is available in several differ- In the centre display, drag down There is a supplement to the
ent product formats, both digital and printed. the top view and tap on owner's manual1 in the glove-
The owner's manual is available in the car's cen- Owner's manual. Available box that contains information
tre display, as a mobile app and on the Volvo here are options for visual navi- on fuses and specifications, as
Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a gation with exterior and interior well as a summary of important
supplement to the owner's manual available in images of the car. The informa- and practical information.
the glovebox, with specifications and fuse infor- tion is searchable and is also There is also a Quick Guide available in printed
mation, amongst other things. A printed owner's divided into categories. format that helps you to get started with the most
manual can be ordered. commonly used functions in the car.
Mobile app
In App Store or Google Play, Depending on equipment level selected, market,
search for "Volvo Manual", etc. additional owner's information may also be
download the app to your available in printed format in the car.
smartphone or tablet and select
A printed owner's manual and associated supple-
the car. Available in the app are
ment can be ordered. Contact a Volvo retailer to
video tutorials and options for
order.
visual navigation with exterior
and interior images of the car. It is easy to navi-
gate between the different sections in the IMPORTANT
owner's manual and the content is searchable. The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven safely in traffic and that applica-
Volvo Cars support site ble laws and regulations are followed. It is
Go to support.volvocars.com also important that the car is maintained and
and select your country. Here handled in accordance with Volvo's recom-
you can find owner's manuals, mendations in the owner's information.
both online and in PDF format.
On the Volvo Cars support site If there should be a difference between the
there are also video tutorials information in the centre display and the prin-
and further information and ted information then it is always the printed
help regarding your Volvo and your car owner- information that applies.
ship. The page is available for most markets.
1A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display.
16
OWNER INFORMATION
NOTE Owner's manual in centre display The information in the owner's manual can be
A digital2 version of the owner's manual is availa- accessed directly via the owner's manual home-
Changing the language in the centre display page or its top menu.
ble in the car's centre display.
may mean that some owner information is not
The digital owner's manual can be accessed from Contextual owner's manual
compliant with national or local laws and reg-
the top view, and in some cases the contextual
ulations. Do not switch to a language that is
owner's manual can also be accessed from the
difficult to understand as this may make it dif-
top view.
ficult to find your way back in the structure on
screen.
NOTE
Related information The digital owner's manual is not available
• Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17) while driving.
• Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 20)
Owner's manual
• Volvo Cars support site (p. 20)
• Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
The contextual owner's manual is accessed from the top
view.
When the contextual owner's manual is available,
it is shown to the right of Owner's manual in
the top view.
Pressing the contextual owner's manual opens
an article in the owner's manual that is related to
the content that is shown on the screen. E.g.
press Navigation Manual - an article that is
The owner's manual is accessed from the top view. related to navigation opens.
To open the owner's manual - drag down the top This only applies to some of the apps in the car.
view in the centre display and tap on Owner's For third party apps that are downloaded, it is not
manual. possible, for example, to access app-specific arti-
cles.
2 Applies for most markets. }}
17
OWNER INFORMATION
|| Related information Navigate in the owner's manual in Opening the menu in the top menu
• Navigate in the owner's manual in the centre the centre display – Press in the upper list in the owner's
display (p. 18) The digital owner's manual can be accessed manual.
• Navigating in the centre display's views from the centre display top view in the car. The > A menu containing various options for
(p. 107) content is searchable and it is easy to navigate finding information opens:
between different sections.
• Downloading apps (p. 494) Homepage
Tap on the symbol to go back
to the start page in the owner's
manual.
Categories
The articles in the owner's
manual are structured into
main categories and subcate-
gories. The same article can be
found in several appropriate
The owner's manual is accessed from the top view.
categories in order to be found
– To open the owner's manual - drag down the more easily.
top view in the centre display and tap on
1. Press Categories.
Owner's manual.
> The main categories are shown in a list.
There is a range of different options for finding
information in the owner's manual. The options 2. Tap on a main category ( ).
can be accessed from the owner's manual home- > A list of subcategories ( ) and articles
page and from the top menu.
( ) is shown.
3. Tap on an article to open it.
To go back, press the back arrow.
18
OWNER INFORMATION
Quick Guide 2. Tap on a hotspot. Information

Press the symbol to access a > The title of the article about the area is Tap on the symbol to obtain
page with links to a selection of shown. information about which version
articles that can be particularly of the owner's manual is availa-
3. Tap on the title to open the article.
useful to read in order to get to ble in the car as well as other
know the most common func- To go back, press the back arrow. useful information.
tions of the car. The articles Favourites
can also be accessed via cate- Press the symbol to access the
gories, but are collected here for quick access. articles saved as favourites. Tap Using the search function in the top
Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety. on an article in order to read it menu
Hotspots for exterior and interior in its entirety. 1. Tap on in the top menu of the owner's
Exterior and interior overview manual. A keyboard appears in the lower part
images of the car. Different of the screen.
parts are designated with hot- 2. Type in a keyword, such as "seatbelt".
spots that lead to articles about Saving or deleting articles as favourites
those parts of the car. Save an article as favourite by pressing at the > Suggestions for articles and categories
top right when an article is open. When an article are shown while letters are being entered.
has been saved as a favourite the star is filled in: 3. Tap on the article or category to access it.
.
Related information
To remove an article as a favourite, press the star • Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
again in the current article.
• Keyboard in centre display (p. 118)
Video
Press the symbol to view brief • Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
1. Press Exterior or Interior. instruction videos for various
> Exterior or interior images are shown with functions in the car.
so-called hotspots in place. The hotspot
leads to articles about the corresponding
part of the car. Swipe horizontally over the
screen to browse among the images.
19
OWNER INFORMATION
Owner's Manual in mobile devices in the owner's manual and the content is search- Volvo Cars support site
The owner's manual is available as a mobile able. More information on your car is available on the
app3 from both the App Store and Google Play. Volvo Cars website and support site.
The app is adapted for smartphones and tablets.
Support on the Internet
Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site. The
support site is available for most markets.
It contains support for functions such as web-
based services and functions, Volvo On Call*, the
navigation system* and apps. Videos and step-
by-step instructions explain different procedures,
e.g. how to connect the car to the Internet via a
mobile phone.
Downloadable information
Maps
For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation, there
The owner's manual can be is the facility to download maps from the support
downloaded as a mobile app page.
from the App Store or Google Owner's manuals as PDF
Play. The QR code provided Owner's manuals are available for download in
here takes you directly to the The mobile app is available from both the App Store and
Google Play. PDF format. Select car model and model year to
app. Alternatively, you can download the manual as required.
search for "Volvo manual" in Related information
the App Store or Google Play. • Reading the owner's manual (p. 21) Contact
The app contains a video along with exterior and The support site contains contact details to cus-
interior images where different parts of the car tomer support and your nearest Volvo retailer.
are highlighted with so-called hotspots, which
lead to articles about the area in question. It is
easy to navigate between the different sections
3 For certain mobile devices.
20 * Option/accessory.
OWNER INFORMATION
Log in to Volvo Cars website Reading the owner's manual Options/accessories

Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to A good way of getting to know your new car is In addition to standard equipment, the owner's
www.volvocars.com. When you have logged in it is to read the owner's manual, ideally before your manual also describes options (factory fitted
possible to get an overview of service, agree- first journey. equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted
ments and warranties, amongst other things. Reading the owner's manual is a good way to extra equipment).
Here there is also information about accessories become familiar with new functions, get advice All types of option/accessory are marked with an
and software adapted for your car model. on how best to handle the car in different situa- asterisk: *.
tions and learn how to make the best use of all
Related information the car's features. Please pay attention to the The equipment described in the owner's manual
• Volvo ID (p. 26) safety instructions contained in the owner's man- is not available in all cars - they have different
ual. equipment depending on adaptations for the
needs of different markets and national or local
The intention of this owner's information is to laws and regulations.
explain all of the possible features, functions and
options included in a Volvo vehicle. It is not In the event of uncertainty over what is standard
intended as an indication or guarantee that all of or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo retailer.
these features, functions and options are
Special texts
included in every vehicle. Some terminology used
may not exactly match terminology used in sales,
marketing and advertising materials. WARNING
Development work is constantly underway in Warning texts appear if there is a risk of
injury.
order to improve our product. Modifications may
mean that information, descriptions and illustra-
tions in the owner's manual differ from the equip- IMPORTANT
ment in the car. We reserve the right to make
modifications without prior notice. "Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
damage.
Do not remove this manual from the car - if prob-
lems should arise then the necessary information
about where and how to seek professional help NOTE
will be missing. NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
© Volvo Car Corporation the use of e.g. features and functions.
}}
* Option/accessory. 21
OWNER INFORMATION
|| Footnote Warning of personal injury White ISO symbols and white text/image on
The owner's manual contains information in cer- black or blue warning field and message field.
tain locations in the form of a footnote at the bot- Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if
tom of the page or at the end of a table. This the warning is ignored, may result in damage to
information is an addition to the text that it refers property.
to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a Information
table then letters are used instead of numbers
for referral.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show menu and
message texts. In the owner's manual the
appearance of these texts differs from the normal
text. Examples of menu texts and message texts:
Phone, New message. Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white
text/image on black message field. Used to indi-
Decals cate the presence of danger which, if the warning
The car contains different types of decal which is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or
are designed to convey important information in a fatality.
simple and clear manner. The decals in the car
Risk of property damage White ISO symbols and white text/image on
have the following descending degree of impor-
black message field.
tance for the warning/information.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and location in
the car. The information that applies to your
particular car is available on the respective
decals for your car.
22
OWNER INFORMATION
Procedure lists • Coolant The owner's manual and the

Procedures where action must be taken in a cer- • Engine oil environment
tain sequence are numbered in the owner's man- The Owner's Manual is printed on paper origi-
ual: Related information nating from controlled forests.
Related information refers to other articles con-
When there is a series of illustrations for
taining closely associated information. The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)® symbol
step-by-step instructions each step is num-
shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's
bered in the same way as the corresponding Images
illustration. manual comes from FSC®-certified forests or
Illustrations used in the owner's manual are other controlled sources.
Lists of letters appear adjacent to the series sometimes schematic and are intended to pro-
of illustrations where the order of the instruc- vide an overall picture or example of a certain
tions is not significant. function. Illustrations may deviate from the car's
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered appearance depending on equipment level and
and are used to illustrate a movement. market.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a To be continued
movement when the relative order is of no }} This symbol is located furthest down to the
relevance. right when an article continues on the following
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- page.
step instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers. Continued from previous page Related information
|| This symbol is located furthest up to the left • Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 28)
Position lists when an article continues from the previous
Red circles containing a number are used in page.
overview images where different components
are pointed out. The number recurs in the Related information
position list featured in connection with the • Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
illustration that describes the item. • Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 20)
Bulleted lists • Volvo Cars support site (p. 20)

A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
23
YOUR VOLVO
YOUR VOLVO
Volvo ID Related information Creating and registering a Volvo ID

Volvo ID provides access to a wide range of per- • Creating and registering a Volvo ID (p. 26) It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different
sonalized Volvo services1 online. • Book service and repair (p. 592) ways. If the Volvo ID is created at volvocars.com
or with Volvo On Call app, the Volvo ID must
It is possible to create a Volvo ID from the car, also be registered to the car to enable use of the
volvocars.com or Volvo On Call app2. Certain various Volvo ID services.
functions and services require that the car is reg-
Create a Volvo ID with the app
istered to a personal Volvo ID. Registering the
1. Download the Volvo ID app from Download
Volvo ID to the car makes a wide range of Volvo
Centre in the centre display's app view.
services available directly from the car.
2. Start the app and register a personal email
Examples of services:
address.
• Volvo On Call* - Volvo ID is used when log-
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
ging in to the Volvo On Call app.
sent to the specified email address.
• Send to Car - Makes it possible to send an
> A Volvo ID has now been created and
address from an Internet map service directly
automatically registered to the car.
to the car.
Volvo ID services can now be used.
• Book Service and Repair - Register your pre-
Create a Volvo ID on the Volvo Cars website
ferred workshop/retailer at volvocars.com to
be able to book service directly from the car. 1. Go into www.volvocars.com and log in3 using
the icon at the top right. Select Create Volvo
Advantages of Volvo ID ID.
• One user name and one password to access 2. Enter a personal email address.
online services, i.e. only one username and
one password to remember. 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
• If the username/password for a service (e.g.
Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is also > A Volvo ID has now been created. Read
changed automatically for other services. below to learn how to register the ID to
the car.
1 The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.
2 If you have Volvo On Call*.
3 Available in certain markets.
YOUR VOLVO
Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo On Call 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
app4 sent to the email address linked to your
1. Download the latest version of the Volvo On Volvo ID.
Call app from a smartphone, via e.g. App > Your Volvo ID is now registered to the car.
Store, Windows Phone or Google Play. Volvo ID services can now be used.
2. Choose to create a Volvo ID from the app's Related information
start page and enter a personal email • Volvo ID (p. 26)
address.
• Downloading apps (p. 494)
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
• Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 591)
> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read
below to learn how to register the ID to • Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
the car.
Registering your Volvo ID to the car

If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the
Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as fol-
lows:
1. If not done already, download the Volvo ID
app from Download Centre in the app view.
NOTE
To download apps, the car must be con-
nected to the Internet.
2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your

email address.
4 Cars with Volvo On Call*.
YOUR VOLVO
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure products and solutions in order to reduce the
Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on negative impact on the environment.
the development of safer and more efficient
Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core val- inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air Fuel consumption
ues and influences all operations. The environ- outside thanks to the climate control system. Since a large part of a car's total environmental
mental work is based on the whole life cycle of impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo
Your Volvo complies with stringent international
the car and takes into account the environmental Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel con-
environmental standards. All Volvo's manufactur-
impact it has, from design to scrapping and recy- sumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air
ing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this
cling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel con-
supports a systematic approach to the opera-
product developed must have less impact on the sumption in each of their respective classes.
tion's environmental issues, which leads to con-
environment than the product it replaces. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower
tinuous improvement with reduced environmental
Volvo's environmental management work has impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
resulted in the development of more effective that environmental laws and regulations in force
and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal are complied with. Volvo also requires that its
environment is also important to Volvo - the air partners must also meet these requirements.
28
YOUR VOLVO
Contributing to a better environment type of waste should be discarded - an author- Interior

An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only ised Volvo workshop is recommended. The material used in the interior of a Volvo is
contributes to a reduced impact on the environ- carefully selected and has been tested in order to
ment, but also means reduced costs for the Efficient emission control be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details
owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept are hand-made, such as the seams of the steer-
reduce fuel consumption and thereby save "Clean inside and out" – a concept that encom- ing wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is
money and contribute to a better environment - passes a clean interior environment as well as monitored in order not to emit strong odours or
here is some advice: highly efficient emission control. In many cases substances that cause discomfort in the event of
the exhaust emissions are well below the applica- e.g. high heat and bright light.
• Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds ble standards.
above approx. 80 km/h (approx. 50 mph) Volvo workshops and the environment
and below 50 km/h (approx. 30 mph) lead to Clean air in the passenger Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a
increased energy consumption. compartment long service life and low fuel consumption for
• Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's An air filter helps prevent dust and pollen enter- your car. In this way you also contribute to a
recommended intervals for service and main- ing the passenger compartment via the air intake. cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
tenance of the car. The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures are entrusted with the service and maintenance
• Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system.
engine when stationary for longer periods. traffic outside. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in
Pay attention to local regulations. which workshop premises shall be designed in
The system cleans the air in the passenger com- order to prevent spills and discharges into the
• Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops partment from contaminants such as particles, environment. The workshop staff have the knowl-
and uneven speed contribute to increased hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level edge and the tools required to guarantee good
fuel consumption. ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the environmental care.
• Use preconditioning* before starting in cold air intake is closed and the air is recirculated.
conditions - it improves starting capacity and Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, Recycling
reduces wear in cold weather. The engine queues and tunnels for example. Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it
reaches normal operating temperature more IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Pack- is also important that the car is recycled in an
quickly, which decreases consumption and age (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
reduces emissions. allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is
with the remote control key. therefore requested to contact a retailer for refer-
Also remember to always dispose of environmen-
ral to a certified/approved recycling facility.
tally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a work-
shop in the event of uncertainty about how this
}}
YOUR VOLVO
|| Related information
• Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 661)
• Economical driving (p. 455)
• Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 223)
• The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 23)
• Air quality (p. 197)
YOUR VOLVO
IntelliSafe-driver support brake pulse warnings are given in the event of a • Seatbelts (p. 44)
IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept for car risk of collision to help the driver act in time. If the • Airbags (p. 49)
safety. IntelliSafe comprises a number of sys- driver does not react to the warning and the risk
of collision is assessed as imminent then City • Whiplash Protection System (p. 43)
tems, both standard and optional, whose pur-
pose is to make a car journey safe, to prevent Safety can automatically brake the car.
injuries and to protect passengers and other Lane assistance (LKA) is another example of a
road users. function that can help prevent accidents by help-
ing the driver - on motorways and similar larger
Support roads - to reduce the risk of the car accidentally
IntelliSafe includes driver support functions such
leaving its own lane.
as Adaptive cruise control* which helps the driver
to maintain an even speed combined with a pre- The function Steering aid during increased
selected time interval to the vehicle ahead. collision risk can help the driver reduce the risk
of the car leaving its lane unintentionally and/or
Pilot Assist5 helps the driver to drive the car colliding with another vehicle or obstacle by
between the lane's edge markings using steering actively steering the car back into its lane and/or
assistance as well as to maintain an even speed, swerving.
combined with a preselected time interval to the
vehicle ahead. Protection
Park Assist Pilot* helps the driver to park in or With the aim of protecting the driver and passen-
leave a parking space. gers, the car is equipped with seatbelt tensioners
which can tension the seatbelts in critical situa-
Other examples of systems that can help the tions and in collisions. The car also has airbags
driver are the Active main beam, Cross Traffic and inflatable curtains, as well as Whiplash
Alert (CTA)* and Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* Protection System (WHIPS), which protects
systems. against whiplash injuries.
Prevention Related information
City Safety is a function that can contribute to • Driving support systems (p. 280)
preventing accidents. The function can prevent or
mitigate a collision with pedestrians, cyclists,
• Active main beam (p. 149)
larger animals or vehicles. Visual, acoustic and • Safety (p. 42)
5 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
YOUR VOLVO
Sensus - online connectivity and Information when it is needed, where it

entertainment is needed
Sensus makes it possible to surf the Internet, The different displays in the car provide informa-
use different types of apps and make the car a tion at the right time. The information is shown in
Wi-Fi hotspot. different locations based on how it should be pri-
oritised by the driver.
This is Sensus
Sensus offers an intelligent interface and online

connectivity with the digital world. An intuitive
navigation structure makes it possible to receive
relevant support, information and entertainment
when it is necessary, without distracting the
driver.
Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are
connected with entertainment, online connectiv-
ity, navigation* and the user interface between
driver and car. It is Sensus that makes communi-
cation possible between you, the car and the out-
side world.
YOUR VOLVO
Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised.
Head-up display* traffic warnings, speed information and naviga- Driver display
tion* information. Road Sign Information and
incoming phone calls are also shown in the head-
up display. The display is operated via the right-
hand steering wheel keypad and via the centre
display.
12-inch* driver display.

The head-up display shows selected information
that the driver should deal with as soon as possi-
ble. Such information may, for example, include
}}
YOUR VOLVO
|| Many of the main functions of the car are con-

trolled from the centre display, a touch screen
which reacts to touch. The number of physical
buttons and controls in the car is therefore mini-
mal. The screen can even be operated while
wearing gloves.
From here, for example, you can control the cli-
mate control system, the entertainment system
and seat position*. The information that is shown
in the centre display can be acted on by the
driver or someone else in the car when the
opportunity arises.
8-inch driver display.
Voice recognition system
The driver display shows information on speed The voice recognition system
and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being can be used without the driver
played. The display is operated via the two steer- needing to take his/her hands
ing wheel keypads. off the steering wheel. The sys-
Centre display tem can understand natural
speech. Use voice recognition
to, for example, play back a
song, call someone, increase the temperature or
read out a text message.
Related information
• Head-up display* (p. 134)
• Driver display (p. 75)
• Overview of centre display (p. 101)
• Voice recognition (p. 137)
• Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
• Sharing Internet access from the car via a
Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 530)
YOUR VOLVO
Software updates Recording data driving conditions. Similarly, the system never
So that you as a Volvo customer get the best As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance, registers who is driving the vehicle or the geo-
experience of your car, Volvo continuously devel- certain information about the vehicle's operation, graphic location of the accident or near-miss sit-
ops the systems in the cars and the services that functionality and incidents are recorded in the uation. However, other parties, such as the police,
you are offered. car. could use the recorded data in combination with
the type of personally identifiable information
You can update the software in your Volvo to the This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special
latest version when your car is serviced at an Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to regis- equipment and access to either the vehicle or the
authorised Volvo dealer. The latest software ter and record data related to traffic accidents or EDR is required to be able to interpret the regis-
update gives you access to new functions and collision-like situations, such as times when the tered data.
improvements, as well as previous improvements airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle
In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a
included with previous software updates. in the road. The data is recorded in order to
number of computers designed to continually
increase understanding of how vehicle systems
For more information about released updates and check and monitor the function of the car. They
work in these types of situations. The EDR is
answers to frequently asked questions, please go can record data during normal driving conditions,
designed to record data related to vehicle
to support.volvocars.com. but in particular register faults affecting the vehi-
dynamics and safety systems for a short time,
cle's operation and functionality, or upon activa-
usually 30 seconds or less.
NOTE tion of the vehicle's driver support function (e.g.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record City Safety and the auto brake function).
Functionality after updating may vary depend- data related to the following in the event of traffic
ing on market, model, model year and options. Some of the recorded data is required to enable
accidents or collision-like situations:
service and maintenance technicians to diagnose
• How the various systems in the car worked and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehi-
Related information cle. The registered information is also needed to
• Sensus - online connectivity and entertain- • Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts
were fastened/tensioned enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out
ment (p. 32) in laws and by government authorities. Informa-
• Managing system updates via the Download • The driver's use of the accelerator or brake
tion registered in the vehicle is stored in its com-
Centre (p. 591) pedal
puter until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.
• The travel speed of the vehicle
In addition to the above, the registered informa-
This information can help us better understand tion can be used in aggregate form for research
the circumstances in which traffic accidents, inju- and product development with the aim of contin-
ries and damage occur. The EDR only records uously improving the safety and quality of Volvo
data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs. cars.
The EDR does not record any data during normal
}}
35
YOUR VOLVO
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described Terms & Conditions for Services Customer Privacy Policy
information being disclosed to third parties with- Volvo offers services so that you can drive your Volvo respects and safeguards the personal
out the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with Volvo as safely and as comfortably as possible. integrity of everyone visiting our website.
national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be These services include everything from assis- This policy regards to the handling of customer
forced to disclose information of this nature to tance in emergencies to navigation and various data and personal information. The purpose is to
the police or other authorities who may assert a maintenance services. give current, past and potential customers a gen-
legal right to access such. Special technical eral understanding of:
equipment which Volvo and workshops that have Before using the services, it is important for you
entered into agreements with Volvo have access to read the Terms & Conditions for Services at • The circumstances in which we gather and
to is required to be able to read and interpret the support.volvocars.com. process your personal data.
recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the infor-
Related information • The types of personal data we gather.
mation, which is transferred to Volvo during serv- •
icing and maintenance, is securely stored and
• Customer Privacy Policy (p. 36) The reason we gather your personal data.
managed and that its management complies with • How we handle your personal data.
relevant legal requirements. For further informa- This policy can be read in its entirety at
tion - contact a Volvo retailer. support.volvocars.com.
Related information
• User terms and conditions and data sharing
(p. 532)
• Terms & Conditions for Services (p. 36)
• Recording data (p. 35)
36
YOUR VOLVO
Important information on WARNING Installation of accessories

accessories and auxiliary We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only
The driver always bears the ultimate responsi-
equipment bility that the car is used safely and that laws install Volvo approved original accessories, and
The incorrect connection and installation of and regulations in force are followed. that installation of accessories is only carried out
accessories and extra equipment can negatively by trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
It is also important that the car has mainte-
affect the car's electronic system. cians. Certain accessories only function when
nance and service according to Volvo's rec-
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only ommendations, the owner's information and associated software is installed in the car's com-
install Volvo approved original accessories, and the service and warranty booklet. puter system.
that installation of accessories is only carried out
by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians.
If the on-board information differs from the • Volvo original accessories are tested to
printed owner's manual then the printed infor- ensure that they function with the car sys-
Certain accessories only function when associ- mation always has precedence.
ated software is installed in the car's computer tems for performance, safety and emissions
system. control. In addition, a trained and qualified
Related information Volvo service technician knows where acces-
The equipment described in the owner's manual • Installation of accessories (p. 37) sories may or may not be safely installed in
is not available in all cars - they have different • Connection of equipment to the car's diag- your Volvo. Always seek the advice of a
equipment depending on adaptations for the nostic socket (p. 38) trained and qualified Volvo service technician
needs of different markets and national or local before installing any accessories in or on
laws and regulations. • Reading the owner's manual (p. 21) your car.
Options or accessories described in this manual • Accessories that are not approved by Volvo
are marked with an asterisk. In the event of may not have been specifically tested for use
uncertainty over what is standard or an option/ with your car.
accessory, contact a Volvo retailer. • Some of the car's performance or safety sys-
tems can be negatively affected if you install
accessories that have not been tested by
Volvo, or if you permit someone without
experience of the car to install accessories.
• Damage that is caused by accessories instal-
led in a non-approved or incorrect way is not
covered by any new car warranty. More war-
ranty information can be found in the service
and warranty booklet. Volvo does not accept
}}
37
YOUR VOLVO
|| any liability for deaths, personal injury or Connection of equipment to the NOTE
costs arising as a result of the installation of car's diagnostic socket
non-original accessories. Volvo Cars accepts no liability for the conse-
Incorrect connection and installation of software
quences if unauthorised equipment is con-
or diagnostic tools may have a negative effect on
Related information nected to the On-board Diagnostic socket
the car's electronic system.
• Important information on accessories and
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only
(OBDII). This socket should only be used by
auxiliary equipment (p. 37) trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
install Volvo approved original accessories, and
cians.
that installation of accessories is only carried out
by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians.
Certain accessories only function when associ- Related information
ated software is installed in the car's computer • Important information on accessories and
system. auxiliary equipment (p. 37)
Data link connector (On-board Diagnostic, OBDII) is

under the instrument panel on the driver's side.
38
YOUR VOLVO
Showing the car's identification Driver distraction WARNING

number The driver is responsible for doing everything
When contacting a Volvo retailer concerning possible to ensure the safety of themselves, their • Never use a hand-held mobile phone
while driving. In some areas it is forbidden
your Volvo On Call subscription, for example, passengers and other road users. Part of this
for the driver to use a mobile phone while
you will need the car's identification number responsibility is avoiding distractions such as
the car is moving.
(VIN6). carrying out an activity that is not related to oper-
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre ating the car in a driving environment. • If the car is equipped with a navigation
display. system you must only set and change the
Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with con- itinerary when the car is parked.
2. Continue to System System tent-rich entertainment and communications sys-
tems. This could be mobile phones with hands-
• Never program the audio system while
Information Vehicle Identification the car is moving. Program the radio's
Number. free, navigation systems and audio systems with
presets when the car is parked and then
lots of functions. You may also have other porta-
> The car's identification number is shown. use the programmed presets for faster
ble electronic devices for your own convenience.
and simpler use of the radio.
Used correctly, in a safe way they can enrich the
driving experience. If they are used in the wrong • Never use laptops or hand-held comput-
way they could distract you. ers while the car is moving.
We wish to give the following warnings regarding

such systems, to indicate Volvo's concern for Related information
your safety. Never use a device or function in the • Sound, media and Internet (p. 492)
car in such a way that it will distract you from the
task of driving safely. Distractions can lead to
serious accidents. Apart from these general
warnings, we offer the following advice regarding
the new functions that may be in the car:
6 Vehicle Identification Number
39
SAFETY
SAFETY
Safety WARNING Safety during pregnancy

The vehicle is equipped with several safety sys- It is important that the seatbelt is used correctly
If the warning symbol remains illuminated or
tems that work together to protect the vehicle's is switched on during driving and the mes- during pregnancy, and that pregnant drivers
driver and passengers in the event of an acci- sage SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to adjust their seating position.
dent. workshop is shown in the driver display, it
means that part of one of the safety systems Seatbelt
The car is equipped with a number of sensors does not have full functionality. Volvo recom-
that react in the event of an accident and activate mends that an authorised Volvo workshop
different safety systems, such as different types should be contacted as soon as possible.
of airbags and seatbelt tensioners. Depending on
the specific accident situation, such as collisions
at different angles, roll-over or driving off the WARNING
road, the systems react in different ways to pro- Never modify or repair the car's various safety
vide the best protection. systems yourself. Defective work in one of the
systems can cause malfunction and result in
There are also mechanical safety systems such serious personal injury. Volvo recommends
as Whiplash Protection System. The car is also that an authorised Volvo workshop should be
constructed so that a large part of the force of a contacted.
collision is distributed to beams, pillars, floor, roof
and other parts of the body. If the specific warning symbol is broken The diagonal section should wrap over the shoul-
The car's safety mode may be activated after a then the general warning symbol is illu- der then be routed between the breasts and to
collision if an important function in the car has minated instead and the driver display the side of the abdomen.
been damaged. shows the same message.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and
Warning symbol in driver display Related information as low as possible under the abdomen. – It must
The warning symbol is illuminated in • Safety during pregnancy (p. 42) never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the
slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as
the driver display when the car's elec- • Seatbelts (p. 44)
close to the body as possible. In addition, check
trical system is set in ignition position
II. The symbol is extinguished after
• Airbags (p. 49) that there are no twists in the seatbelt.
approx. 6 seconds if the car's safety system is • Whiplash Protection System (p. 43)
Seating position
fault-free. • Safety mode (p. 55) As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
• Child safety (p. 57) must adjust the seat and steering wheel such
that they can easily maintain control of the vehi-
42
SAFETY
cle as they drive (which means that they must be Whiplash Protection System
able to easily operate the foot pedals and steer- Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) reduces
ing wheel). The aim should be to position the the risk of whiplash injuries. The system consists
seat with as large a distance as possible between of energy absorbing backrests and seat cushion,
abdomen and steering wheel. as well as a specially designed head restraint in
the front seats.
Related information
WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end
• Safety (p. 42)
collision, where the angle and speed of the colli-
• Seatbelts (p. 44) sion and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
• Manual front seat (p. 178) have an influence.
• Power front seat* (p. 179) When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat back-
rests are lowered backward and the seat cush-
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under
ions move downward to change the seating posi- the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent
tion of the driver and front seat passenger. Its WHIPS from functioning.
movement helps to absorb some of the forces
that can arise and cause whiplash. WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
WARNING rear seat cushion and the front seat's back-
WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts. rest.
Always use a seatbelt. If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered then
any load must be secured to prevent it from
sliding up to the front seat backrest in the
WARNING event of a collision.
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
yourself. Volvo recommends that an author-
ised Volvo workshop should be contacted. WARNING
If the front seats have been subjected to a If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a
major load, such as in conjunction with a colli- rear-facing child seat is used in the rear seat,
sion, the seats must be replaced. Some of the the corresponding front seat must be moved
seats' protective properties may have been forward so that it does not make contact with
lost even if they do not appear damaged. the lowered backrest or child seat.
}}
SAFETY
|| Seating position Seatbelts WARNING

For optimum protection from WHIPS the driver Heavy braking can have serious consequences
and passenger must have the correct seating Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
if the seatbelts are not used. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
position and make sure that the system's func- It is important that the seatbelt lies against the workshop should be contacted.
tion is not obstructed. body so it can provide maximum protection. Do
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
Set the correct seating position in the front seat not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
before driving starts. designed to protect in a normal seating position. the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
the seatbelt's protective properties may have
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear
centre of the seat with as little space as possible
WARNING
damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced
between the head and the head restraint. Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new
hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre- seatbelt must be type-approved and designed
WHIPS and child seats vents the belt from tightening properly. for installation at the same location as the
The protection provided by the car to children replaced seatbelt.
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
WARNING
not diminished by WHIPS. Related information
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
Related information belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may • Safety (p. 42)
• Safety (p. 42) diminish the protection provided by the airbag • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 46)
in the event of a collision.
• Manual front seat (p. 178) • Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 45)
• Power front seat* (p. 179) • Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 47)
• Rear Collision Warning (p. 359)
SAFETY
Putting on and taking off seatbelts 3. In the front seats the seatbelt can be
Make sure that all passengers have fastened adjusted for height.
their seatbelts before starting to drive.
Putting on seatbelts
1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure it
is not twisted or damaged.
NOTE
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
• if it is pulled out too quickly
• during braking and acceleration The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down over
the arm).
• if the car leans heavily.
4. Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling
Press together the seat mounting and move the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the
2. Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab in shoulder.
the seatbelt up or down.
the intended buckle.
> A loud "click" indicates that the belt has Position the belt as high as possible without
locked. it chafing against your throat.
WARNING
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. The seatbelts
and buckles would otherwise possibly not
function as intended in the event of a colli-
sion. There is a risk of serous injury.
The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the
abdomen).
}}
45
SAFETY
|| WARNING Seatbelt tensioner sioner are restored automatically, but they can
The car is fitted with standard seatbelt tension- also be restored manually.
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
ers and electric* seatbelt tensioners that can
tension the seatbelts in critical situations and IMPORTANT
WARNING collisions. If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to Standard seatbelt tensioner electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger
hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre- side will also be deactivated.
All the seatbelts are equipped with a standard
vents the belt from tightening properly.
seatbelt tensioner.
The seatbelt tensioner tensions the seatbelt in WARNING
WARNING the event of a collision with sufficient force in Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor order to more effectively restrain the occupant. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The workshop should be contacted.
seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not Electric seatbelt tensioner*
function as intended in the event of a colli- If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
The driver and front passenger seatbelts are load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
sion. There is a risk of serous injury. equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner. the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
The seatbelt tensioners work together and can the seatbelt's protective properties may have
Taking off seatbelts be activated together with the driver support sys- been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear
1. Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced
tems City Safety and Rear Collision Warning. In if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new
and then let the belt retract. critical situations, such as panic braking, driving seatbelt must be type-approved and designed
2. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in off the road (e.g. the car rolls into a ditch, lifts off for installation at the same location as the
by hand so that it does not hang loose. the ground or hits something in the terrain), skid- replaced seatbelt.
ding, or risk of collision, the seatbelt can be ten-
Related information sioned by the seatbelt tensioner's electric motor. Related information
• Seatbelts (p. 44)
The electric seatbelt tensioner helps to adjust the • Seatbelts (p. 44)
• Seatbelt tensioner (p. 46) occupant to a better position, reducing the risk of • Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 45)
• Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 47) striking the car's interior and improving the effect
of safety systems, such as the car's airbags. • Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner*
(p. 47)
When the critical situation has come to an end,
the seatbelt and the electric seatbelt preten- • Activating and deactivating passenger air-
bag* (p. 52)
SAFETY
• City Safety™ (p. 346) Resetting the electric seatbelt Door and seatbelt reminder
• Rear Collision Warning (p. 359) tensioner* The system reminds unbelted occupants to wear
The electric seatbelt tensioner is designed to be a seatbelt, and also warns about an open door,
reset automatically, but the seatbelt tensioner bonnet, tailgate or fuel filler flap.
can be reset manually if the belt remains
extended. Driver display graphics
1. Stop the car at a safe place.
2. Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it.
> The seatbelt and electric seatbelt ten-
sioner are reset.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of Graphics in the driver display with different types of
the seatbelt's protective properties may have warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is
been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear dependent on the vehicle's speed.
damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced The driver display's graphics show which seats in
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new the car are occupied by belted and unbelted pas-
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed sengers.
for installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt. The same graphic also shows if the bonnet, tail-
gate, fuel filler flap or any door is open.
Related information The graphic can be acknowledged by pressing
• Seatbelt tensioner (p. 46) the O button on the right-hand steering wheel
• Seatbelts (p. 44) keypad.
}}
SAFETY
|| Seatbelt reminder Rear seat Related information

The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two • Seatbelts (p. 44)
subfunctions: • Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 45)
• Provides information on which seatbelts are
being used in the rear seat. The driver dis-
play's graphics are shown when the seatbelts
are in use.
• Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat is
unfastened during a journey by means of a
visual and acoustic reminder. The reminder
will cease once the seatbelt has been put on
again.
Visual reminder in the roof console. Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate
A visual reminder is given in the roof console and and fuel filler flap
by means of the warning symbol in the driver dis- If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or a door is
play. not closed properly, the driver display's graphics
The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed, show what is open. Stop the car in a safe place
driving time and distance. as soon as possible and close the source of the
warning.
The belt status of the driver and passengers is
shown in the driver display graphics when a belt If the car is driven at a speed lower
is buckled or unbuckled. than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the
driver display's information symbol illu-
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt minates.
reminder system.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
Front seat than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the
A visual and acoustic reminder remind the driver driver display's warning symbol illumi-
and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if nates.
either of them is not wearing one.
48
SAFETY
Airbags Deployed airbags Driver airbags

The car is equipped with airbags and inflatable If any of the airbags have deployed, the following As a supplement to the seatbelts, the car is
curtains for driver and passengers. is recommended: equipped with steering wheel airbag and knee
NOTE • Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it airbag1 on the driver's side.
is transported to an authorised Volvo work-
The detectors react differently depending on
shop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.
the nature of the collision and whether or not
the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt • Volvo recommends engaging an authorised
positions. Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of
components in the car's safety systems.
It is therefore possible that only one (or none)
of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The • Always contact a doctor.
detectors sense the force of the collision on
the vehicle and the action is adapted accord- WARNING
ingly so that none, one or more airbags are Never drive with deployed airbags. They can
deployed. make steering difficult. Other safety systems
may also be damaged. The smoke and dust
created when the airbags are deployed can Steering wheel airbag and knee airbag1 on the driver's
WARNING cause skin and eye irritation/injury after inten- side in the front seat.
The airbag system's control module is located sive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with
cold water. The rapid deployment sequence In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags help
in the centre console. If the centre console is to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the
drenched with water or other liquid, discon- and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin
nect the cables to the starter battery. Do not burns. driver as well as the knees and legs.
attempt to start the car since the airbags may A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recom- Related information and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag
mends that it is transported to an authorised
Volvo workshop.
• Safety (p. 42) cushions the initial collision impact for the occu-
• Driver airbags (p. 49) pant. The airbag deflates when compressed by
the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes
• Passenger airbag (p. 50)
into the car. This is completely normal. The entire
• Side airbags (p. 54) process, including inflation and deflation of the
• Airbags (p. 55) airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
1 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets. }}
49
SAFETY
|| WARNING Related information Passenger airbag

• Airbags (p. 49) As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle is
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may • Passenger airbag (p. 50) equipped with an airbag on the passenger side
diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the front seat.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and backs
against the backrest.
WARNING
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious per-
sonal injury.
Front passenger airbag in front seat.
Steering wheel airbag location In the event of a frontal collision, the airbag helps
to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the
This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering
passenger as well as the knees and legs.
wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
Knee airbag1 location and the airbag is inflated. The airbag cushions
The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the the initial collision impact for the occupant. The
instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover airbag deflates when compressed by the collision.
panel is marked AIRBAG. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car.
This is completely normal. The entire process,
WARNING including inflation and deflation of the airbag,
occurs within tenths of a second.
Do not place or attach any object on the top
or front of the panel where the knee airbag is
stowed.
1 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
50
SAFETY
WARNING Label for passenger airbag WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti-
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air-
diminish the protection provided by the airbag bag will always be activated.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
WARNING
possible with their feet on the floor and backs Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
against the backrest. the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
WARNING
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
workshop should be contacted for repair. Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious per- Failure to follow the advice given above can
sonal injury. endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
Passenger airbag location
The airbag is folded up into a compartment Related information
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked • Airbags (p. 49)
AIRBAG. • Driver airbags (p. 49)
• Activating and deactivating passenger air-
WARNING bag* (p. 52)
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located. Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label
becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
SAFETY
Activating and deactivating WARNING Activating passenger airbag

passenger airbag*
If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti-
The passenger airbag can be deactivated if the vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air-
car is equipped with a switch, Passenger Airbag bag will always be activated.
Cut Off Switch (PACOS).
Switch
The switch for the passenger airbag is located on
the passenger end of the instrument panel and is
accessible when the passenger door is open.
Check that the switch is in the required position. Pull the switch outward and turn from OFF
(B) to ON (A).
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag on Please
acknowledge.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/
deactivated with the car in ignition position I
or lower, a message is shown in the driver
display and the following indicator in the roof
console approx. 6 seconds after the car's
electrical system has been set in ignition
ON - the airbag is activated and all front-fac- position II.
ing passengers (children and adults) can sit
safely on the passenger seat.
OFF - The airbag is deactivated and children
in rear-facing child seats can sit safely on the
passenger seat.
SAFETY
2. Confirm the message by pressing the right- Deactivating passenger airbag 2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-
hand steering wheel keypad's O button. hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
Pull the switch outward and turn from ON

(A) to OFF (B).
Passenger airbag off Please
> A text message and a warning symbol in acknowledge. > A text message and a symbol in the roof
the roof console indicate that the airbag console indicate that the airbag for the
for the front passenger seat is activated. front passenger seat is deactivated.
NOTE
WARNING If the passenger airbag has been activated/ WARNING
deactivated with the car in ignition position I
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
passenger seat when the airbag is activated. or lower, a message is shown in the driver must never sit on the passenger seat when
display and the following indicator in the roof the airbag is deactivated.
The passenger airbag must always be acti- console approx. 6 seconds after the car's
vated when front-facing passengers (children electrical system has been set in ignition Failure to follow the advice given above can
and adults) are sitting in the front passenger endanger life or lead to serious personal
seat. position II. injury.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
IMPORTANT
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger
side will also be deactivated.
}}
53
SAFETY
|| Related information Side airbags WARNING

• Seatbelt tensioner (p. 46) The side airbags on the driver's and passenger
• Child seats (p. 58) seats act to protect the chest and hips in the workshop should be contacted for repair.
event of a collision. Defective work in the side airbag system
could cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING
Do not put objects in the area between the
outside of the seat and the door panel, since
this area is required by the side airbag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car seat
covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers
may impede the operation of the side airbags.
The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest WARNING

frames of the front seats and help to protect the Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts.
driver and passengers in the front seat. Always use a seatbelt.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag Side airbags and child seats
inflates between the occupant and the door The protection provided by the car to children
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. not diminished by the side airbag.
The side airbag is normally only deployed on the
side of the collision. Related information
• Airbags (p. 49)
54
SAFETY
Airbags WARNING Safety mode

The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC), Safety mode is a protective state that is trig-
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
helps to prevent the driver and passengers from handles in the roof. The hooks are only gered when a collision may have damaged any
striking their heads on the inside of the car dur- designed for light coats and jackets (not for of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines,
ing a collision. solid objects such as umbrellas). sensors for any of the safety systems, or the
brake system.
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's
headlining, door pillars or side panels. This If the car has been in a collision, the message
could compromise the intended protection. Safety mode See Owner's manual may be
Volvo recommends only using Volvo genuine shown on the driver display with a warning sym-
parts that are approved for fitting within these bol as long as the display is not damaged and the
areas. car's electrical system is still in working order.
This message means that the car has reduced
functionality.
WARNING
Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the
load and the side windows if the car is loaded
WARNING
to above the top edge of the door windows. Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
Otherwise, the intended protection of the restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the Safety mode See Owner's manual mes-
The inflatable curtain is mounted along both headlining, may be compromised. sage is shown in the driver display. Leave the
sides of the headlining and helps protect the car at once.
driver and outer seat passengers of the car. The
WARNING
panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG. If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the attempt to reset the system in order to start and
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
and the inflatable curtain is inflated. move the car for a short distance, if in a danger-
ous traffic situation for example.
Related information
WARNING
• Airbags (p. 49)
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the inflatable curtain system
can cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.
}}
55
SAFETY
|| WARNING Starting and moving the car after 3. Then try to start the car.
safety mode > The car's electronics carry out a systems
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
electronics yourself if the car has been in If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to check and then try to resume normal sta-
safety mode. This could result in personal attempt to reset the system in order to start and tus.
injury or the car not functioning as normal. move the car for a short distance, if in a danger-
Volvo recommends that engaging an author- ous traffic situation for example. IMPORTANT
ised Volvo workshop to check and restore the
car to normal status after Safety mode See Starting the car after safety mode If the message Safety mode See Owner's
Owner's manual has been shown. 1. Check the general damage situation of the manual is still shown on the display the car
car and whether any fuel has been leaking. must not be driven or towed but a vehicle
There must be no smell of fuel either. recovery service must then be used instead.
WARNING Even if the car appears to be driveable, hid-
If there is only minor damage and a check den damage may make the car impossible to
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its loca- has revealed no fuel leaks, starting can be control once moving.
tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported attempted.
to an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING Moving the car after safety mode
Related information Never, under any circumstances, attempt to 1. If the driver display shows the message
• Safety (p. 42) restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Normal mode The car is now in normal
Safety mode See Owner's manual mes-
• Starting and moving the car after safety
sage is shown in the driver display. Leave the
mode after a start attempt, the car can be
mode (p. 56) car at once. carefully moved if standing in a dangerous
• Recovery (p. 483) position.
2. Switch off the car. 2. Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its loca-
tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported
to an authorised Volvo workshop.
56
SAFETY
Related information Child safety NOTE

• Safety mode (p. 55) Children must always sit secure while travelling
When using child safety equipment, it is
• Starting the car (p. 418) in the car.
important to read the installation instructions
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats and
• Recovery (p. 483)
attachment devices) which is designed for fitting
included.
in this particular car. Using Volvo's child safety In the event of questions when fitting child
equipment, you obtain the optimum conditions for safety equipment, contact the manufacturer
a child to travel safely in the car. In addition, the for clearer instructions.
child safety equipment fits in well and is simple to
use. Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
The equipment that should be used is selected correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to
taking account of the weight and size of the child. sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo recommends that children travel in a rear- Related information
facing child seat until as late an age as possible, • Safety (p. 42)
at least until 3-4 years of age, and then in a
front-facing child seat until the child is 140 cm (4 • Child seats (p. 58)
feet 7 inches) tall. • Activating and deactivating child safety locks
(p. 265)
NOTE
Legal provisions about the type of child seat
that must be used for children of different
ages and heights vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.
57
SAFETY
Child seats • i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats Upper mounting points for child
Suitable child seats should always be used (p. 60) seats
when children are travelling in the car. • Child seat positioning (p. 60) The car is equipped with upper mounting points
Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make for child seats on the rear seat's outer seats.
• Activating and deactivating passenger air-
sure that the child seat is positioned, mounted bag* (p. 52) The upper mounting points are primarily intended
and used correctly. for use with front-facing child seats.
Look in the installation instructions for the child Always follow the manufacturer's installation
seat for the correct fitting. instructions when connecting a child seat to the
upper mounting points.
NOTE
The location of the mounting points
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instructions
included.
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
NOTE
Never leave a child seat loose in the car.
Always secure it according to the instructions
for the child seat, even when it is not in use.
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols on
the rear of the backrest.
Related information
The mounting points are located on the rear of
• Child safety (p. 57)
the rear seat's outer seats.
• Upper mounting points for child seats
(p. 58)
• Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 59)
SAFETY
WARNING Lower mounting points for child

seats
The child seat's upper straps must be routed
through the hole in the head restraint leg The car is equipped with lower mounting points
before they are tensioned at the mounting for child seats in the front seat* and the rear
point. If this is not possible, follow the recom- seat.
mendations from the child seat manufacturer. The lower mounting points are designed to be
used in conjunction with certain rear-facing child
seats.
NOTE
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
fitting this type of child seat in cars with fold-
lower mounting points.
ing head restraints on the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points Mounting point locations in the rear seat.
The mounting points in the rear seat are located
NOTE
on the rear section of the front seat's floor rails.
In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage
compartment, this must be removed before Related information
child seats can be attached to the securing • Child seats (p. 58)
points. • Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 58)
• i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats
Related information (p. 60)
• Child seats (p. 58)
• Table for location of child seats using the
• Lower mounting points for child seats car's seatbelts (p. 64)
(p. 59)
• i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats Mounting point locations in the front seat.
(p. 60)
The mounting points in the front seat are located
• Table for location of child seats using the on the sides of the passenger seat's legroom.
car's seatbelts (p. 64)
The mounting points in the front seat are only
mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a switch
to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag*.
SAFETY
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for Lift the covers in order to access the mounting Child seat positioning
child seats points. It is important to position the child seat in the
The car is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX2 mount- right place in the car and this depends, amongst
Related information
ing points for child seats in the rear seat. other things, on the type of child seat and
whether the passenger airbag is activated.
i-Size/ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child • Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 58)
seats that is based on an international standard.
• Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 59)
Always follow the manufacturer's installation • Table for location of i-Size child seats
instructions when connecting a child seat to the (p. 66)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points.
• Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
The location of the mounting points (p. 67)
Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.

Always fit rear-facing child seats in the rear seat
if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is
sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she
could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.
If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rear-
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols2 on facing child seats can be fitted on the front pas-
the upholstery of the backrest. senger seat.
The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are
located behind covers in the lower section of the
rear seat's backrest, in the outer seats.
2 Names and symbols change depending on market.
60
SAFETY
NOTE Label for passenger airbag Related information

Regulations regarding the placement of chil-
dren in cars vary from country to country. • Child seat mounting (p. 62)
Check what does apply. • Table for location of child seats using the
WARNING • Table for location of i-Size child seats

(p. 66)
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat. • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 67)
passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label

becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
61
SAFETY
Child seat mounting NOTE Installation in the rear seat

It is important to remember a number of things
Never leave a child seat loose in the car.
when a child seat is mounted and used, which
Always secure it according to the instructions WARNING
depend on where the child seat is positioned.
for the child seat, even when it is not in use. Child seats with support legs must not be
WARNING mounted in the centre seat, risk of danger.
Booster cushions/child seats with steel Installation in the front seat
braces or some other design that could rest
• When fitting rear-facing child seats, check • Only use child seats that are recommended
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must by Volvo, are universally approved or are
not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
semi-universal, and where the car is included
buckle to open accidentally. • When fitting front-facing child seats, check on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
Do not secure the straps for the child seat that the passenger airbag is activated.
• The outer seats are equipped with the
into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or in • Only use child seats that are recommended ISOFIX fixture system and are approved for i-
springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp by Volvo, are universally approved or are
edges may damage the straps. Size4.
semi-universal, and where the car is included
Do not allow the upper section of the child on the manufacturer's vehicle list. • The outer seats are equipped with upper
seat to rest against the windscreen. mounting points. Volvo recommends that
• ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when child seat's upper straps should be pulled
the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console3 through the hole in the head restraint before
NOTE accessory. being tensioned at the mounting point. If this
When using child safety equipment, it is • If the child seat is equipped with lower is not possible, follow the recommendations
important to read the installation instructions straps, Volvo recommends that the lower from the child seat manufacturer.
included. mounting points are used with these3. • If the child seat is equipped with lower
In the event of questions when fitting child • The ISOFIX guide can be used in order to straps, never adjust the position of the seat
safety equipment, contact the manufacturer facilitate child seat installation. in front after the straps have been fitted in
for clearer instructions. the lower mounting points. Always remember
to remove the lower straps when the child
seat is not installed.
3 The accessory range varies depending on market.

4 Varies depending on market.
62
SAFETY
Related information
• Child seat positioning (p. 60)
• Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 66)
(p. 67)
63
SAFETY
Table for location of child seats NOTE

using the car's seatbelts
Always read the owner's manual section on
The table gives a recommendation for which
installing a child seat before installing one in
child seats suit which locations, and for what
the car.
size of child.
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
child seats) child seats)
Group 0
UA, B X UB UB
max 10 kg
Group 0+
UA, B X UB UB
max 13 kg
Group 1
LC UFA, D UD, LC UD
9-18 kg
Group 2
LC UFA, E UE, LC UE
15-25 kg
64
SAFETY
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
child seats) child seats)
Group 3
X UFA, E UE UE
22-36 kg
U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.
X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group.
A Adjust the backrest to a more upright position.
B Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146).
C Volvo recommends: Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212).
D Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
E Volvo recommends: Booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312).
WARNING
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
Related information
• Child seat mounting (p. 62)
• Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 66)
(p. 67)
• Seatbelts (p. 44)
65
SAFETY
Table for location of i-Size child The child seat must be approved in accordance NOTE
seats with UN Reg R129.
Always read the owner's manual section on
The table gives a recommendation for which i-
Size child seats suit which locations, and for
the car.
what size of child.
Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear- Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-fac- Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
facing child seats) ing child seats)
i-Size child seats X X i-UA, B X
i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing.
X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.
A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
B Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X2 i-Size (type approval E4-129R-000002).
Related information
(p. 67)
(p. 60)
66
SAFETY
Table for location of ISOFIX child The child seat must be approved in accordance NOTE
seats with UN Reg R44 and the car model must be
included in the manufacturer's vehicle list. Always read the owner's manual section on
The table gives a recommendation for which
ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and for
the car.
what size of child.
Weight Size classA Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air- Front seat (with activated air- Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
bag, only rear-facing child bag, only front-facing child
seats)B seats)B
Group 0
E Rear-facing infant seat ILB, C, XD X ILC X
max 10 kg
E Rear-facing infant seat
Group 0+
C Rear-facing child seat ILB, C, E, XD X ILC X
max 13 kg
D Rear-facing child seat
}}
67
SAFETY
|| Weight Size classA Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air- Front seat (with activated air- Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
bag, only rear-facing child bag, only front-facing child
seats)B seats)B
A Front-facing child seat
B Front-facing child seat X ILB, E, F, XD ILF, IUFF X
Group 1
B1 Front-facing child seat
9-18 kg
C Rear-facing child seat
ILB, E, XD X IL X
D Rear-facing child seat
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal catego-
ries.
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.
A For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label.
B Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market).
C Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146).
D Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket.
E Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint does not interfere with the child seat.
F Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
WARNING NOTE NOTE

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size Volvo recommends contacting an authorised
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is classification, the car model must be included Volvo dealer for information about which i-
activated. on the vehicle list for the child seat. Size/ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.
Related information
68
SAFETY

• Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 66)
(p. 60)
69
Instruments and controls in left- Steering wheel adjustment

hand drive car
Horn
The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located. Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Steering wheel and instrument panel Bonnet opening
Display lighting, tailgate unlocking/opening*/

closing*, halogen headlamp levelling
Roof console
Centre display
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media
Gear selector
Start knob
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
Drive mode control*
dipped beam, main beam, direction indica-
tors, front fog lamps/cornering lights*, rear Parking brake
fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Steering wheel paddles for manual gear Front reading lamps and interior lighting Automatic braking when stationary
changing in an automatic gearbox*
Panorama roof* Driver's door
Head-up display*
Display in roof console
Driver display
Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
Right-hand steering wheel keypad Centre and tunnel console
Instruments and controls in right- Display lighting, tailgate unlocking/opening*/

hand drive car closing*, halogen headlamp levelling
The overviews show where the displays and Bonnet opening
controls near the driver are located.
Horn
Steering wheel and instrument panel
Steering wheel adjustment
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Roof console
Memories for power front seat*, door mirror

and head-up display* settings
Central locking
Power windows, door mirrors, electric child

safety lock*
Adjusting front seat Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indica-
Related information tors, front fog lamps/cornering lights*, rear
• Manual front seat (p. 178) fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
• Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 179) Steering wheel paddles for manual gear Front reading lamps and interior lighting
changing in an automatic gearbox*
• Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 191) Panorama roof*
Head-up display*
• Lighting control (p. 144)
Display in roof console
• Starting the car (p. 418) Driver display
• Driver display (p. 75) Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
Centre and tunnel console
Right-hand steering wheel keypad
• Gearbox (p. 431)
}}
|| Driver's door
Centre display
Memories for power front seat*, door mirror
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media
and head-up display* settings
Gear selector Central locking
Start knob Power windows, door mirrors, electric child

safety lock*
Drive mode control*
Adjusting front seat
Parking brake
Related information
Automatic braking when stationary
• Manual front seat (p. 178)
• Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 179)
• Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 191)
• Starting the car (p. 418)
Driver display The driver display is available in two versions, 12-

The driver display shows information about the inch* and 8-inch. Driver display, 12-inch*
car and driving.
The driver display contains gauges, indicators and WARNING
indicator and warning symbols. The content of In the event of a fault in the driver display the
the driver display depends on the car's equip- information on e.g. brakes, airbags or other
ment, settings and which functions are active at safety systems may not be shown. In which
that time. case, the driver cannot check the status of
the car's systems or receive current warnings
The driver display is activated as soon as a door and information.
is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The driver
display extinguishes after a while if it is not used.
To reactivate it, proceed with one of the following: WARNING
If the driver display should extinguish, not illu-
• Depress the brake pedal.
minate on activation/start or be fully or parti-
• Activate ignition position I. ally illegible, the car must not be used. You
• Open one of the doors. should visit a workshop immediately. Volvo
recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.
Location in the driver display:

On the left In the middle On the right
Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols Tachometer/ECO gaugeA
Trip meter Outside temperature gauge Gear shift indicator
OdometerB Clock Drive mode
Cruise control and speed limiter information Messages, in some cases with graphics Fuel gauge
Road Sign Information* Door and seatbelt information Status of the Start/Stop function
– Media player Distance to empty tank
}}
|| On the left In the middle On the right

– Navigation map* Instantaneous fuel consumption
– Phone App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
– Voice recognition –
– CompassA –
A Depends on drive mode selected.
B Accumulated mileage.
Driver display, 8-inch
Location in the driver display:

Fuel gauge Speedometer Media player
Drive mode Road Sign Information* Phone

Gear shift indicator Cruise control and speed limiter information Navigation information*
Tachometer/ECO gaugeA Door and seatbelt information Clock
Distance to empty tank Status of the Start/Stopp function App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
Outside temperature gauge – Instantaneous fuel consumption
Indicator and warning symbols – OdometerB
– – Trip meter
– – Indicator and warning symbols
– – Voice recognition
– – Engine temperature gauge
– – Messages, in some cases with graphics
– – CompassA
A Depends on drive mode selected.
B Accumulated mileage.
Dynamic symbol ferent types of message. An amber or red marker

The dynamic symbol in its basic around the symbol indicates the degree of
form. severity of a control or warning message. With an
animation, the basic shape can be turned into a
larger image in order to graphically indicate
where a problem is situated or to clarify informa-
tion.
The centre of the driver display contains a

dynamic symbol that changes appearance for dif-
}}
||
Examples of indicator symbol.
Related information
• Driver display settings (p. 79)
• Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 88)
• Indicator symbols in the driver display
(p. 86)
• Trip computer (p. 80)
• Messages in the driver display (p. 97)
• Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 96)
78
Driver display settings Selecting theme • Changing settings in the centre display
Settings for the driver display's display options 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top (p. 126)
can be made in the driver display's application view.
menu and in the centre display's settings menu.
2. Tap on My Car Displays Display
Settings in the driver display's app Themes
menu 3. Select a theme (appearance) for the driver
In the app menu, you can choose which informa- display:
tion is shown on the driver display from:
• Glass
• Trip computer
• Minimalistic
• media player
• Performance
• phone
• Chrome Rings.
• navigation system*.
Selecting language
Settings in the centre display 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
Selecting information type
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top 2. Tap on System System Languages and
view. Units System Language to select lan-
guage.
2. Press My Car Displays Driver
Display Information. > A change will affect the language in all
displays.
3. Select what should be shown in the back-
ground: These settings are personal and are saved auto-
matically to the active driver profile.
• Show no information in background
Related information
• Show information for current playing
media • Driver display (p. 75)
• Show navigation even if no route is • Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 96)
set1.
1 The map is only shown with the 12-inch driver display*. The 8-inch driver display only shows guidance.
Fuel gauge Trip computer

The fuel gauge in the driver display shows the The car's trip computer records and calculates
fuel level in the tank. vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption
and average speed whilst driving.
In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, informa-
tion is recorded about both instantaneous and
average fuel consumption. The information from
the trip computer can be shown in the driver dis-
play.
Fuel gauge in the 8-inch driver display:

The bars in the fuel gauge indicate the quantity
of fuel in the tank.
Fuel gauge in the 12-inch driver display:
When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to
The beige zone in the fuel gauge indicates the refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and
quantity of fuel in the tank. changes to amber colour. The trip computer also
When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to indicates the distance to empty tank. Only an
refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and amber-coloured bar remains when the fuel level
changes to amber colour. The trip computer also is critically low. Refuel the car as soon as possi-
indicates the distance to empty tank. ble.
Related information
• Filling fuel (p. 458)
• Fuel tank - volume (p. 659)
80
• Distance to empty tank Distance to empty tank

• Tourist - alternative speedometer The trip computer calculates the remaining mile-
age with the fuel available in the tank.
Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via
system settings in the centre display. The calculation is based on the average fuel con-
sumption over the last 30 km (20 miles) and the
Trip meter remaining drivable fuel quantity.
There are two trip meters, TM and TA.
When the gauge shows "----", there is not
TM can be reset manually and TA is reset auto- enough fuel left to be able to calculate the
matically if the car is not used for at least four remaining mileage. Refuel as soon as possible.
hours.
The following information is registered while driv- NOTE
12-inch driver display*. ing: There may be a slight deviation if the driving
• Mileage style has been changed.
• Driving time
An economic driving style generally results in a
• Average speed
longer driving distance.
• Average fuel consumption.
The values apply from the trip meter's latest Tourist - alternative speedometer
reset. The alternative digital speedometer makes it eas-
ier to drive in countries where speed limit signs
Odometer are in a different unit than that shown in the car's
The odometer records the car's total mileage. instruments.
This value cannot be reset to zero.
The digital speed is then shown in the opposite
Instantaneous fuel consumption unit to that shown in the analogue speedometer.
8-inch driver display.
This gauge shows the fuel consumption that the If the analogue speedometer is graduated in
The following meters are included in the trip mph, the digital speedometer shows the corres-
car has at the moment. The value is updated
computer: ponding speed in km/h and vice versa.
approximately every second.
• Trip meter
Related information
• Odometer • Show trip data in the driver display (p. 82)
• Instantaneous fuel consumption • Resetting the trip meter (p. 83)
}}
• Show trip statistics in the centre display Show trip data in the driver display 1. Open the app menu in the driver display by
(p. 83) The trip computer's recorded and calculated val- pressing (1).
• Driver display (p. 75) ues can be shown in the driver display. (It is not possible to open the app menu
The values are saved in a trip computer app. Via while there is an unacknowledged message
the app menu, you can choose which information in the driver display. The message must first
is shown on the driver display. be acknowledged before the app menu can
be opened.)
2. Navigate to the trip computer app to left or
right with (2).
> The top four menu rows show measured
values for trip meter TM. The next four
menu rows show measured values for trip
meter TA. Scroll up or down in the list with
(3).
3. Scroll down to the option buttons to select
which information to show in the driver dis-
play:
Open and navigate in the app menu2 using the right- • Distance to empty tank
hand steering wheel keypad.
• Odometer
App menu
• Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no dis-
Left/right play of mileage
Up/down
• Instantaneous fuel consumption, average
consumption for TM or TA, alternatively,
Confirm no display of fuel consumption
• Tourist (alternative speedometer).
Select or deselect an option with the O but-
ton (4). The change is made immediately.
2 The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
82
Related information Resetting the trip meter Show trip statistics in the centre
• Trip computer (p. 80) Reset the trip meter using the left-hand stalk display
• Resetting the trip meter (p. 83) switch. Trip statistics from the trip computer are dis-
played graphically in the centre display and pro-
vide an overview that facilitates more fuel-effi-
cient driving.
Open the Driver performance

app in app view in order to
show the trip statistics.
Each bar in the diagram sym-
bolises a distance of 1, 10 or
100 km, alternatively miles. The
bars are filled in from the right as driving pro-
gresses. The bar on the far right shows the value
for the current distance.
– Reset all information in trip meter TM (i.e.
mileage, average consumption, average The average fuel consumption and total driving
speed and driving time) with a long press on time are calculated since the last time the trip
the RESET button on the left-hand stalk statistics were reset.
switch.
A short press on the RESET button resets
only the mileage.
The trip meter TA can only be reset automatically
when the car has not been used for four or more
hours.
Related information
}}
83
|| Settings for trip statistics • Resetting the trip meter (p. 83)
Reset or adjust settings for trip statistics.
1. Open the Driver performance app in app

view in order to show the trip statistics.
Trip statistics from the trip computer3. 2. Press Preferences to
Related information
• change graph scale. Select resolution 1,
10 or 100 km/miles for the bar.
• Settings for trip statistics (p. 84)
• reset data after every trip. Performed
• Trip computer (p. 80) when the car has been stationary for more
than 4 hours.
• reset data for the current trip.
Trip statistics, calculated average consump-
tion and total driving time are always reset
simultaneously.
Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via
system settings in the centre display.
Related information
• Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 83)
84
Time and date Automatic time for cars with GPS Outside temperature gauge
The clock is shown in both the driver display and When the car is equipped with a navigation sys- The outside temperature is shown in the driver
the centre display. tem, Auto Time can be selected. The time zone display.
is then adjusted automatically based on the loca- A sensor detects the temperature outside of the
Clock location tion of the car. For certain types of navigation car.
systems, the current location (country) must also
be set to obtain the right time zone. If Auto Time
is not selected, time and data are adjusted with
arrow up or arrow down on the touch screen.
Summer time
In certain countries, it is possible to select auto-
matic setting of summer time with Auto. For
other countries, summer time can be set with On
or Off.
Related information
Clock location in the 12-inch and 8-inch driver display.
• Changing settings in the centre display Outside temperature gauge location in the 12-inch and
In the centre display, the clock is located at the (p. 126) 8-inch driver display.
top right of the status bar.
If the car has been stationary, the gauge may dis-
In certain situations, messages and information play a temperature reading that is too high.
may cover the clock in the driver display.
When the outside temperature is within the range
Settings for time and date -5 °C to +2 °C (23 till 36 °F) a snowflake symbol
– is also shown in the driver display as a warning
Select Settings System Date and
for potentially slippery conditions.
Time in the centre display's top view to
change settings for time and date format. The snowflake symbol is also illuminated briefly in
the head-up display, if the car is equipped with
Adjust time and date by pressing the up or
one.
down arrow on the touch screen.
Change the unit for the temperature gauge via
system settings in the centre display top view.
}}
85
|| Related information Indicator symbols in the driver Symbol Specification

• Driver display (p. 75) display
Tyre pressure system
• Changing system units (p. 124) The indicator symbols alert the driver that a func-
tion is activated, that a system is operating, or The symbol illuminates when tyre
that a fault or abnormal condition exists. pressure is too low. If there is a
Symbol Specification fault in the tyre pressure system,
the symbol will flash for approx. 1
Information, read display text minute and then illuminate with a
When one of the car's systems constant glow. This may be
does not behave as intended, this because the system cannot detect
information symbol illuminates and or warn of low tyre pressure as
a text appears on the driver display. intended.
The information symbol can also Emissions system
illuminate in conjunction with other
symbols. If the symbol illuminates after the
engine has been started then it
Fault in brake system may be due to a fault in the car's
The symbol lights up when there is emissions system. Drive to a work-
a fault in the parking brake. shop for checking. Volvo recom-
mends that an authorised Volvo
ABS fault workshop is contacted.
If this symbol illuminates then the Left and right-hand direction
system is not working. The car's indicator
regular brake system continues to
work, but without the ABS function. The symbols flash when the direc-
tion indicators are used.
Automatic brake on
The symbol illuminates when the
function is activated and the foot
brake or parking brake is acting.
The brake holds the car stationary
when it has stopped.
86
Symbol Specification Symbol Specification Symbol Specification

Position lamps Active main beam off Stability system
The symbol lights up when the The symbol lights up white when A flashing symbol indicates that
position lamps are switched on. active main beam is off. Position the stability system is operating. If
lamps are switched on. the symbol illuminates with con-
Fault in the headlamp system stant glow then there is a fault in
Main beam On the system.
The symbol illuminates if a fault
has occurred in the ABL function The symbol lights up when main
Stability system, sport mode
(Active Bending Lights) or if beam and the position lamps are
another fault has occurred in the switched on. The symbol illuminates when the
headlamp system. sport mode is activated. Sport
Front fog lamps on mode allows for a more active driv-
Active main beam on ing experience. The system then
This symbol illuminates when the
The symbol lights up blue when the front fog lamp is switched on. detects whether the accelerator
automatic main beam is on. pedal, steering wheel movements
Rear fog lamp on and cornering are more active than
Active main beam off in normal driving and then allows
The symbol lights up white when rear fog lamp is switched on. controlled skidding of the rear sec-
the automatic main beam is off. tion up to a certain level before it
Rain sensor on intervenes and stabilises the car.
Main beam On
Lane assistance
The symbol illuminates when main rain sensor is on.
beam is on and with main beam White symbol: Lane assistance is
flash. Preconditioning on on and road lines are detected.
The symbol illuminates when the Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on
Active main beam on
engine block and passenger com- but road lines are not detected.
The symbol lights up blue when partment heater/air conditioning
active main beam is on. Position are preconditioning the car. Amber symbol: Lane assistance
lamps are switched on. warns/intervenes.
}}
87
|| Symbol Specification Warning symbols in the driver Symbol Specification

display
Lane assistance and rain sensor The warning symbols alert the driver that an Fault in brake system
White symbol: Lane assistance is important function is activated or that a serious If this symbol illuminates, the brake
on and road lines are detected. fault or condition exists. fluid level may be too low. Visit the
Rain sensor is on. Symbol Specification nearest authorised workshop to
have the brake fluid level checked
Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on Warning and rectified.
but road lines are not detected.
Rain sensor is on. The red warning symbol illuminates Parking brake applied
when a fault has been indicated
AdBlue systemA which could affect the safety This symbol illuminates with a con-
and/or drivability of the car. An stant glow when the parking brake
The symbol illuminates when the
explanatory text is shown on the is applied.
AdBlue level is low or in the event
of a fault in the AdBlue system. driver display at the same time. The A flashing symbol means that a
warning symbol can also illuminate fault has arisen. Read the message
A Applies to cars with diesel engines. in conjunction with other symbols. in the driver display.
Related information Seatbelt reminder Low oil pressure
This symbol illuminates or flashes if If this symbol illuminates during
• Warning symbols in the driver display someone in a front seat has not driving then the engine's oil pres-
(p. 88) put on their seatbelt or if someone sure is too low. Stop the engine
in a rear seat has taken off their immediately and check the engine
seatbelt. oil level, top up if necessary. If the
Airbags symbol illuminates and the oil level
is normal, contact a workshop.
If the symbol remains illuminated or Volvo recommends that an author-
illuminates while driving, a fault has ised Volvo workshop is contacted.
been detected in one of the car's
safety systems. Read the message
in the driver display. Volvo recom-
mends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
88
Symbol Specification License agreement for the driver INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
display COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE
Alternator not charging A license is an agreement for the right to oper- DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE
This symbol illuminates during driv- ate a certain activity or the right to use someone FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
ing if a fault has occurred in the else's entitlement according to the terms and WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR
electrical system. Visit a workshop. conditions in the agreement. The following text is OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
Volvo recommends that an author- Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer or CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
ised Volvo workshop is contacted. developer. USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
Collision risk Boost Software License 1.0
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
City Safety warns of a risk of colli- any person or organization obtaining a copy of
sion with other vehicles, pedes- the software and accompanying documentation
trians, cyclists or large animals. covered by this license (the "Software") to use,
reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and
transmit the Software, and to prepare derivative
Related information
works of the Software, and to permit third-parties
• Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 86)
to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all
• Driver display (p. 75) subject to the following: The copyright notices in
the Software and this entire statement, including
the above license grant, this restriction and the
following disclaimer, must be included in all
copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all
derivative works of the Software, unless such
copies or derivative works are solely in the form
of machine-executable object code generated by
a source language processor.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-
}}
89
|| BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" License AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE endorse or promote products derive from this
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993 ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE software without specific prior written
The Regents of the University of California. All REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE permission.
rights reserved. FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
Redistribution and use in source and binary
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
provided that the following conditions are met:
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
1. Redistributions of source code must retain OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
the above copyright notice, this list of CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
conditions and the following disclaimer. WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER
2. Redistributions in binary form must OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
of conditions and the following disclaimer in THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
the documentation and/or other materials ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
provided with the distribution. DAMAGE. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
3. All advertising materials mentioning features BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised" License SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
or use of this software must display the Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet. OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
following acknowledgement: This product CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
includes software developed by the WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
University of California, Berkeley and its OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
provided that the following conditions are met:
contributors. OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
1. Redistributions of source code must retain THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
4. Neither the name of the University nor the the above copyright notice, this list of ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
names of its contributors may be used to conditions and the following disclaimer. DAMAGE.
endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written 2. Redistributions in binary form must
permission. reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE the documentation and/or other materials
REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS `ÀS IS'' AND provided with the distribution.
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE 3. Neither the name of the organisation nor the
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY names of its contributors may be used to
90
BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR distribution) o You can use this software for
Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER> All rights OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF whatever you want, in parts or full form,
reserved. THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF without having to pay us. (`royalty-free'
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote
DAMAGE. this software. If you use it, or only parts of it,
in a program, you must acknowledge
provided that the following conditions are met: The views and conclusions contained in the
somewhere in your documentation that
software and documentation are those of the
1. Redistributions of source code must retain you've used the FreeType code. (`credits')
authors and should not be interpreted as
the above copyright notice, this list of We specifically permit and encourage the
representing official policies, either expressed or
conditions and the following disclaimer. inclusion of this software, with or without
implied, of the FreeBSD Project.
2. Redistributions in binary form must modifications, in commercial products,
FreeType Project License provided that all warranty or liability claims
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner, are assumed by the product vendor. Legal
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license,
the documentation and/or other materials
Introduction The FreeType Project is the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and
provided with the distribution.
distributed in several archive packages; some `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE of them may contain, in addition to the originally distributed by the authors (David
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS FreeType font engine, various tools and Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED contributions which rely on, or relate to, the Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be they
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED FreeType Project. This license applies to all named as alpha, beta or final release. `You'
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF files found in such packages, and which do refers to the licensee, or person using the
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A not fall under their own explicit license. The project, where ùsing' is a generic term
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN license affects thus the FreeType font including compiling the project's source code
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER engine, the test programs, documentation as well as linking it to form a `program' or
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY and makefiles, at the very least. This license èxecutable'. This program is referred to as à
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG program using the FreeType engine'. This
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which license applies to all files distributed in the
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, all encourage inclusion and use of free original FreeType archive, including all source
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR software in commercial and freeware code, binaries and documentation, unless
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; products alike. As a consequence, its main otherwise stated in the file in its original,
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER points are that: o We don't promise that this unmodified form as distributed in the original
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, software works. However, we are be archive. If you are unsure whether or not a
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, interested in any kind of bug reports. (às is' particular file is covered by this license, you
}}
91
|| must contact us to verify this. The FreeType documentation. The copyright notices of the Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals,
project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David unaltered, original files must be preserved in design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner all copies of source files. o Redistribution in o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current
Lemberg. All rights reserved except as binary form must provide a disclaimer that FreeType web page, which will allow you to
specified below. 1. No Warranty THE states that the software is based in part of download our latest development version and
FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED ÀS IS' the work of the FreeType Team, in the read online documentation. You can also
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, distribution documentation. We also contact us individually at: David Turner
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, encourage you to put an URL to the <[email protected]> Robert Wilhelm
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, FreeType web page in your documentation, <[email protected]> Werner
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND though this isn't mandatory. These conditions Lemberg <[email protected]>
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. apply to any software derived from or based
IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE on the FreeType code, not just the
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE unmodified files. If you use our work, you
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY must acknowledge us. However, no fee need
THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF be paid to us.
THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not 3. Advertising The names of FreeType's authors
signed this license, you are not required to and contributors may not be used to endorse
accept it. However, as the FreeType project or promote products derived from this
is copyrighted material, only this license, or software without specific prior written
another one contracted with the authors, permission. We suggest, but do not require,
grants you the right to use, distribute, and that you use one or more of the following
modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or phrases to refer to this software in your
modifying the FreeType project, you indicate documentation or advertising materials:
that you understand and accept all the terms `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine',
of this license. `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in 4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related
source and binary forms, with or without to FreeType: o [email protected]
modification, are permitted provided that the Discusses general use and applications of
following conditions are met: o Redistribution FreeType, as well as future and wanted
of source code must retain this license file additions to the library and distribution. If you
(`licence.txt') unaltered; any additions, are looking for support, start in this list if you
deletions or changes to the original files haven't found anything to help you in the
must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. o [email protected]
92
Libpng License libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through For the purposes of this copyright and license,
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, "Contributing Authors" is defined as the following
your convenience. In case of any discrepancy 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are set of individuals:
between this copy and the notices in the file distributed according to the same disclaimer and
Andreas Dilger
png.h that is included in the libpng distribution, license as libpng-0.96, with the following
the latter shall prevail. individuals added to the list of Contributing Dave Martindale
Authors: Guy Eric Schalnat
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and
LICENSE: Tom Lane Paul Schmidt
If you modify libpng you may insert additional Glenn Randers-Pehrson Tim Wegner
notices immediately following this sentence. Willem van Schaik The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS".
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c) May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied,
2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same including, without limitation, the warranties of
distributed according to the same disclaimer and disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the merchantability and of fitness for any purpose.
license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following following individuals added to the list of The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
individuals added to the list of Contributing Contributing Authors: assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental,
Authors special, exemplary, or consequential damages,
John Bowler
Simon-Pierre Cadieux which may result from the use of the PNG
Kevin Bracey Reference Library, even if advised of the
Eric S. Raymond possibility of such damage.
Sam Bushell
Gilles Vollant Permission is hereby granted to use, copy,
Magnus Holmgren
and with the following additions to the disclaimer: modify, and distribute this source code, or
Greg Roelofs portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee,
There is no warranty against interference with
Tom Tanner subject to the following restrictions:
your enjoyment of the library or against
infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88,
or the library will fulfill any of your particular January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy
purposes or needs. This library is provided with all Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.
faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality,
performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.
}}
93
|| 1. The origin of this source code must not be Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to This software is provided 'as-is', without any
misrepresented. any person obtaining a copy of this software and express or implied warranty. In no event will the
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as associated documentation files (the "Software"), authors be held liable for any damages arising
such and must not be misrepresented as to deal in the Software without restriction, from the use of this software.
being the original source. including without limitation the rights to use,
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or software for any purpose, including commercial
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
altered from any source or altered source applications, and to alter it and redistribute it
and to permit persons to whom the Software is
distribution. freely, subject to the following restrictions:
furnished to do so, subject to the following
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. conditions: 1. The origin of this software must not be
specifically permit, without fee, and encourage misrepresented; you must not claim that you
The above copyright notice and this permission
the use of this source code as a component to wrote the original software. If you use this
notice shall be included in all copies or
supporting the PNG file format in commercial software in a product, an acknowledgment in
substantial portions of the Software.
products. If you use this source code in a product, the product documentation would be
acknowledgment is not required but would be THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", appreciated but is not required.
appreciated. WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, 2. Altered source versions must be plainly
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT marked as such, and must not be
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF misrepresented as being the original
convenient use in "about" boxes and the like:
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A software.
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL)); PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL 3. This notice may not be removed or altered
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is from any source distribution.
supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
"pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31). LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
of the Open Source Initiative. WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
Glenn Randers-Pehrson [email protected] OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
April 15, 2002 zlib License
MIT License The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) <year>
Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders> <copyright holders>
94
SGI Free Software B License Version 2.0. Except as contained in this notice, the name of Application menu in driver display
SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in Application menu (app menu) in the driver dis-
Sept. 18, 2008) advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use play provides quick access to commonly used
or other dealings in this Software without prior functions for certain apps.
Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon
written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is
hereby granted, free of charge, to any person Related information
obtaining a copy of this software and associated • Driver display (p. 75)
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom
the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions: The above copyright notice
including the dates of first publication and either
this permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
The app menu in the driver display can be used instead
all copies or substantial portions of the Software. of using the centre display. The figure is schematic - the
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", layout may vary.
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, The app menu is shown in the driver display and
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT is controlled using the steering wheel's right-
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF hand keypad. The app menu makes it easier to
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A switch between different apps or functions within
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND the apps without having to let go of the steering
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL wheel.
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, App menu functions
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, Different apps give access to different types of
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT functions. The following apps and their associ-
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE ated functions can be controlled from the app
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE menu:
SOFTWARE.
}}
95
|| App Functions Handling the application menu in Opening/closing the app menu
the driver display – Press on open/close (1).
Trip com- Selection of trip meter, selec- The application menu (the app menu) in the (It is not possible to open the app menu
puter tion of what to show in the driver display is operated with the steering while there is an unacknowledged message
driver display, etc. wheel's right-hand keypad. in the driver display. The message must first
Media Selection of active source for be acknowledged before the app menu can
player the media player. be opened.)
> The app menu opens/closes.
Phone Calling a contact from the call
list. The app menu closes automatically after a period
of inactivity or after certain options have been
Navigation Guide to destination, etc. selected.
Related information Navigating and selecting in the app

• Driver display (p. 75) menu
• Overview of centre display (p. 101) 1. Navigate between the different apps that are
available by tapping on left or right (2).
display (p. 96) > Functions for previous/next app are
The app menu and the steering wheel's right-hand key- shown in the app menu.
pad.
2. Browse through the functions for the
Open/close
selected app by tapping on up or down (3).
Left/right 3. Confirm or highlight an option for the func-
tion by pressing on confirm (4).
Up/down
> The function is activated and for some
Confirm options the app menu then closes.
If the app menu is opened again, the functions of
the most recently selected app are shown first.
Related information
• Application menu in driver display (p. 95)
96
Messages in the driver display Service messages

The driver display can show messages to inform Shown below is a selection of important service
or assist the driver in the event of different messages and their meanings.
events.
Message Specification
Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the

engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a work-
shopB.
Turn off Stop and switch off the
engineA engine. Serious risk of
Message in the driver display5.
damage - consult a work-
The driver display shows messages that are of shopB.
high priority for the driver.
Service urgent Contact a workshopB to
The messages can be shown in different parts of Drive to work- check the car immediately.
Message in the driver display4.
the driver display depending on what other infor- shopA
mation is currently being displayed. After a while,
or when the message has been acknowledged/ Service Contact a workshopB to
action taken if required, the message disappears requiredA check the car as soon as
from the driver display. If a message needs to be possible.
saved, it is placed in the Car status app, which is
opened from the app view in the centre display. Regular main- Time for regular service -
tenance contact a workshopB.
Message composition may vary and they can be Shown before the next
shown together with graphics, symbols or buttons Book time for
service date.
for acknowledging the message or accepting a maintenance
request, for example. Time for regular service -
Regular main-
4 With 8-inch driver display.

5 With 12-inch driver display. }}
97
|| Message Specification Managing messages in the driver

display
Time for main- Shown at the next service
date. Messages in the driver display are handled
tenance
using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Regular main- Time for regular service -
Maintenance Shown when the service
date has passed.
overdue
Temporarily A function has been tem-
offA porarily switched off and is
reset automatically while
driving or after starting Message in the driver display7 and the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad.
again.
Left/right
A Part of message, shown together with information on where the
problem has arisen.
B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Confirm
Message in the driver display6 and the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad. Some messages in the driver display contain one
Related information
• Managing messages in the driver display or more buttons for acknowledging the message
(p. 98) or accepting a request, for example.
• Handling a message saved from the driver

display (p. 99)
• Message in centre display (p. 132)

98
Managing a new message Handling a message saved from the Reading a saved message
For messages with buttons: driver display To read a saved message immediately:
1. Navigate between the different buttons that Whether saved from the driver display or the – Press the button to the right of the Car
are available by tapping on left or right (1). centre display, messages are managed in the message stored in Car Status
centre display. application message in the centre display.
2. Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm
(2). > The saved message is shown in the Car
> The message disappears from the driver status app.
display. To read a saved message later:
For messages without buttons: 1. Open the Car status app from the app view
– Close the message by pressing on confirm in the centre display.
(2), or allow the message to close automati- > The app is opened in the bottom tile of
cally after a while. the home view.
> The message disappears from the driver 2. Select the Messages tab in the app.
display. > A list of saved messages is shown.
If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in 3. Tap on a message to expand/minimise.
the Car status app, which is opened from the Saved messages can be seen in the Car Status app.
> More information on the message is
app view in the centre display. The message Car Messages that are shown in
shown in the list and the image to the left
message stored in Car Status application is the driver display and that need
in the app shows information about the
shown in the centre display in conjunction with to be saved are added in the
message graphically.
this. Car status app in the centre
display. The message Car
Related information message stored in Car
• Messages in the driver display (p. 97) Status application is shown
• Handling a message saved from the driver in the centre display in conjunction with this.
display (p. 99)
}}
99
|| Managing a saved message Related information

In maximised mode, some messages have two • Messages in the driver display (p. 97)
buttons available to book service or read the • Managing messages in the driver display
owner's manual. (p. 98)
To book service for a saved message: • Message in centre display (p. 132)
– In maximised mode for the message, press
Request appoint.Call to make
Appointment8 for help in booking service.
> With Request appoint.: The
Appointments tab opens in the app and
creates a request to book service and
repair work.
With Call to make Appointment: The
phone app is initiated and calls a service
centre to book service and repair work.
To read the owner's manual for a saved mes-
sage:
– In maximised mode for the message, press
Owner's manual to read about the mes-
sage in the owner's manual.
> The owner's manual opens in the centre
display and shows information linked to
the message.
Saved messages in the app are deleted automat-
ically each time the engine is started.
8 Market dependent. Volvo ID and selected workshop also need to be registered.
100
Overview of centre display

Many of the car's functions are controlled from
the centre display. Presented here is the centre
display and its options.
}}
101
||
Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively9.
Function view - car functions that are acti- functions are also so-called trigger functions, ting options. Examples of these include
vated or deactivated with a press. Certain which means they open a window with set- Camera. Settings for the head-up display*
9 The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars.
are also made from the function view, but Extra tile - recently used apps or car func- • Changing the appearance in the centre dis-
adjustments are made using the steering tions that do not belong in any of the other play (p. 123)
wheel's right-hand keypad. tiles. Tap on the tile to expand it. • Changing system language (p. 124)
Home view - the first view that is shown Climate row - information and direct interac- • Changing system units (p. 124)
when the screen is started. tion to set temperature and seat heating for
example*. Tap on the symbol in the centre of • Cleaning the centre display (p. 626)
Application view (app view) - apps that have
been downloaded (third-party apps) and the climate row in order to open the climate • Message in centre display (p. 132)
apps for embedded functions, such as FM view with more setting options.
radio. Tap on an app icon to open the app.
Related information
Status bar - the activities in the car are • Managing the centre display (p. 104)
shown right at the top of the screen. Network
and connection information is shown on the
• Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 107)
left-hand side of the status bar, while media-
related information, the clock and indication • Function view in centre display (p. 114)
about on-going background activity are • Apps (p. 493)
shown on the right.
• Symbols in the centre display's status bar
Top view - drag the tab down in order to (p. 116)
access the top view. Settings, Owner's
manual, Profile and the car's saved mes-
• Opening settings in the centre display
(p. 124)
sages are accessed from here. In some
cases contextual settings (e.g. Navigation • Open contextual setup in the centre display
Settings) and the contextual owner's manual (p. 125)
(e.g. Navigation Manual) can also be • Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
accessed in the top view.
• Media player (p. 502)
Navigation - leads to map navigation, with
• Phone (p. 517)
e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the tile to
expand it. • Climate controls (p. 206)
Media - recently used apps associated with • Switching off and changing the volume of
media. Tap on the tile to expand it. the system sound in the centre display
(p. 123)
Phone - the phone function can be reached
from here. Tap on the tile to expand it.
Managing the centre display ing apps can be performed by touching the IMPORTANT
Many of the car's functions are controlled and screen in different ways.
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
regulated from the centre display. The centre An infrared light curtain just above the surface of they may scratch it.
display is a touch screen that reacts to touch. the screen enables the screen to detect a finger
that is just in front of the screen. This technology
Using the touch screen functionality in makes it possible to use the screen even with
the centre display gloves on.
The table below presents the different proce-
The screen reacts differently depending on dures for operating the screen:
whether you press, drag or swipe across it. Two people can interact with the screen at the
Actions such as browsing between different same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the driver
views, marking objects, scrolling in a list and mov- and passenger side respectively.
Procedure Execution Result

Press once. Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.
Press twice in quick suc- Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map*.
cession.
Press and hold. Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map*. Press and hold your finger against
the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location.
Tap once with two fin- Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map*.
gers.
Procedure Execution Result

Drag Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to move apps
or map points on the map*. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.
Swipe/drag quickly Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.
Note that touching the upper section of the screen may cause the top view to open.
Drag apart Zooms in.
Drag together Zooms out.
}}
|| Returning to home view from another • drag the control to the desired temperature,
view • tap on + or − in order to raise or lower the
1. Briefly press the home button below the cen- temperature gradually, or
tre display.
• tap on the desired temperature on the con-
> The last position of the home view is trol.
shown.
2. Briefly press again.
Related information
• Activating and deactivating centre display
> All tiles of the home view are set to their (p. 107)
default mode.
• Moving apps and buttons in centre display
(p. 116)
NOTE
The scroll indicator appears in the centre display when it • Keyboard in centre display (p. 118)
In home view standard mode - briefly press is possible to scroll in the view.
the home button. An animation that describes
access to the different views is shown on the Using the controls in the centre display
screen.
Scrolling in a list, article or view

When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen, it
is possible to scroll downward or upward in the
view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the
view.
Temperature control.
The control is used for many of the car's func-
tions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of one
of the following:
106
Activating and deactivating centre 1. Give a long press on the physical home but- Navigating in the centre display's
display ton below the screen. views
The centre display can be dimmed and reactiva- > The screen goes dark except for the cli- There are five different basic views in the centre
ted using the home button beneath the screen. mate row, which continues to be shown. display: home view, top view, climate view, appli-
All functions connected to the screen are cation view (app view) and function view. The
still running. screen is started automatically when the driver's
2. Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the door is opened.
home button.
> The view that was displayed before the Home view
screen was switched off will be shown Home view is the view that is shown when the
again. screen is started. It consists of four tiles:
Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra tile.
NOTE An app or car function selected from the app or
The screen cannot be deactivated when a function view starts in the respective tile of the
prompt to perform an action is shown on the home view. For example FM radio starts in the
Home button for the centre display. screen. Media tile.
The effect of using the home button that the The extra tile contains the last used app or car
screen dims and the touchscreen no longer function that is not associated with any of the
NOTE other three areas.
reacts to touch. The climate row will still be
shown. All functions connected to the screen are The centre display deactivates automatically
The tiles show brief information about each dif-
still running, such as climate, audio, guidance* when the engine is off and the driver's door is
ferent app.
and apps. When the centre display is dimmed, it opened.
is a good opportunity to clean the screen. The
NOTE
dimming function can also be used to fade the Related information
screen so that it does not disturb while driving. When the car is started, the home view's vari-
• Cleaning the centre display (p. 626)
ous sub-views show information on the cur-
• Changing the appearance in the centre dis- rent status of apps.
play (p. 123)
}}
|| NOTE pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from Climate view

the top downwards across the screen. The climate row is always visible at the bottom of
In home view standard mode - briefly press the screen. The most common climate settings
the home button. An animation that describes In the top view, access is always available to:
can be made directly there, such as setting tem-
access to the different views is shown on the • Settings perature and seat heating*.
screen.
• Owner's manual Press the symbol in the centre of the
• Profile climate row to open the climate view
Status bar • The car's saved messages. and gain access to more climate set-
The activities in the car are shown at the top of tings.
In the top view, access is given to the following in
the screen. Network and connection information some cases: Press the symbol to close the climate
is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar, view and return to the previous view.
while media-related information, the clock and • Contextual setting (e.g. Navigation
indication that background activity is in progress Settings). Change settings directly in the
are shown on the right. top view when an app (e.g. navigation) is run-
ning.
Top view • Contextual owner's manual (e.g. Navigation
Manual). Gain access directly in the top view
to articles in the digital owner's manual that
are related to the content displayed on
screen.
Exit the top view - press outside the top view, on
the home button or at the bottom of the top view
and drag upward. The underlying view is then visi-
ble and available for use again.
NOTE
The top view is not available during starting/
Top view dragged down.
shutdown or when a message is shown on
A tab is located in the centre of the status bar at the screen. It is also not available when cli-
the top of the screen. Open the top view by mate view is shown.
Application view app view, such as the number of unread text Function view
messages for Messages.
Tap on an app to open it. It then opens in the tile
to which it belongs, such as Media.
You can scroll down in the app view, depending
on the number of apps. Do this by swiping/drag-
ging from the bottom and up.
Go back to the home view again by swiping from
left to right10 across the screen, or by pressing
the home button.
Application view with the car's apps. The function view with buttons for different car func-
tions.
Swipe from right to left10
across the screen in
order to access the application view (app view) Swipe from left to right10 across the screen in
from the home view. Apps that have been down- order to access the function view from the home
loaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded view. From here you can activate or deactivate
functions, such as FM radio, are found here. Cer- different car functions, e.g. BLIS*, Lane Keeping
tain apps show brief information directly in the Aid* and Park Assist*.
10 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. }}
|| Depending on the amount of functions, it is also

possible here to scroll downward in the view. Do
this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
Unlike in app view, where an app is opened with
a press, a function is activated or deactivated by
pressing the relevant function button. Some func-
tions (trigger functions) open in a new window
when pressed.
Go back to the home view again by swiping from
right to left10 across the screen, or by pressing
the home button.
Related information
• Managing tiles in centre display (p. 111)
• Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 116)
(p. 124)
• Open contextual setup in the centre display
(p. 125)
• Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
• Driver profiles (p. 129)
• Climate controls (p. 206)
• Apps (p. 493)
• Function view in centre display (p. 114)
10 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
110
Managing tiles in centre display

Home view consists of four tiles: Navigation,
Media, Phone and an extra tile. These views
can be expanded.
}}
111
|| Expanding a tile from default mode
Standard mode and expanded mode of a tile in the centre display.
112
Expanding a tile: In expanded mode, open the Related information

– For tiles Navigation, Media and Phone:
app in full screen - press on • Managing the centre display (p. 104)
the symbol.
Tap anywhere on the tile. When a tile is • Activating and deactivating centre display
expanded, the extra tile in the home view is (p. 107)
temporarily forced away. The other two are • Navigating in the centre display's views
minimised and only certain information is (p. 107)
shown. When the extra tile is tapped, the Press on the symbol to go back
other three tiles are minimised and only cer- to the expanded mode, or press
tain information is displayed. the home button at the bottom
The expanded view provides access to the of the screen.
basic functions of the app.
Closing an expanded tile:
– The tile can be closed in three different ways.
• Tap on the upper part of the expanded
tile.
• Tap on another tile (that tile will then open
in expanded mode instead).
• Briefly press the physical home button
below the centre display.
Opening or closing a tile in full screen

mode
The extra tile11 and the tile for Navigation can
be opened out in full screen mode, with even Home button for the centre display.
more information and more setting options. There is always the option to go back to home
When a new tile is opened in full-screen mode, view by pressing the home button. Go back to the
no information from the other tiles is shown. home view's standard view from full screen mode
- press twice on the home button.
11 Does not apply to all apps or car functions opened via the extra tile
113
Function view in centre display home view by swiping from left to right across Different types of buttons
All the buttons for car functions are located in the screen12. There are three different types of buttons for car
the function view, one of the centre display's functions; see below:
basic views. Navigate to the function view from
Type of button Property Affects car function

Function buttons Have on/off positions. Most buttons in function view are
function buttons.
When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the button.
Press the button to activate/deactivate a function.
Trigger buttons Do not have on/off positions. • Camera
When a trigger button is depressed, a window for the function is opened. For example, it may be • Headrest Fold
a window to change seat position. • Head-up Display Adjustments
Parking buttons Have on, off and scan modes. • Park In
Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning. • Park Out
114
The buttons' different modes
The function is deactivated when the LED indica-

When the LED indicator illuminates in green on a tor is extinguished.
function or parking button, the function is acti-
vated. When a function is activated, extra text
with an explanation for certain functions is
shown. The text is shown for a few seconds and
then the button is shown with the LED indicator
illuminated.
For Lane Keeping Aid, the text Works only at
certain speeds is shown, for example, when the
button is depressed.
Press the button once briefly to activate or deac- When a warning triangle is shown in the right-
tivate the function. hand section of the button there is something not
working as intended.
Related information
• Managing the centre display (p. 104)
(p. 107)
115
Moving apps and buttons in centre NOTE Symbols in the centre display's
display status bar
Hide the apps that you rarely or never use by
The apps and buttons for car functions in the Overview of the symbols that can be shown in
moving them to the bottom, off the visible
app view and function view respectively can be the centre display's status bar.
screen. This way it will be easier to find the
moved and organised as desired.
apps you use more often. The status bar shows activities in progress and, in
1. Swipe from right to left13 to access the app
some cases, their status. Not all symbols are
view, or swipe from left to right13 to access
shown all the time due to the limited space in the
the function view. NOTE status bar.
2. Tap on an app or button and hold it down. Apps and car function buttons cannot be
> The app or button changes size and added to locations that are already occupied. Symbol Specification
becomes slightly transparent. It is then
possible to move it. Connected to the Internet.
Related information
3. Drag the app or button to a vacant space in • Function view in centre display (p. 114)
Connection to the Internet failed.
the view. • Apps (p. 493)
The maximum number of rows available for use in • Managing the centre display (p. 104) Roaming activated.
order to position apps or buttons is 48. To move
an app or button outside the visible view, drag it Signal strength in mobile phone net-
to the bottom of the view. New rows are then work.
added, where the app or button can be located.
Bluetooth device connected.
An app or button can thus be located further
down and is then not visible in the normal mode
Bluetooth activated but no device
for the view.
connected.
Swipe across the screen to scroll up or down in
the view. Information sent to and from GPS.
Connected to Wi-Fi network.
116
Symbol Specification Related information

Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot). (p. 107)
The car then shares the available
connection.
Car modem activated.
USB sharing active.
Process in progress.
Timer for preconditioning active.
Audio source being played back.
Audio source stopped.
Phone call in progress.
Audio source muted.
News is received from the radio

channel.
Traffic information is received.
Clock.
117
Keyboard in centre display

The centre display keyboard makes it possible
make entries using keys. It is also possible to
"draw in" letters and characters on the screen
by hand.
The keyboard can be used to enter characters,
letters and numbers, e.g. to write text messages
from the car, enter passwords or search for arti-
cles in the digital owner's manual.
The keyboard is only shown when entries can be
made on the screen.
118
The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in which the
keyboard is being used.
}}
119
|| Row of suggested words or characters14. entry, all letters are automatically lower case Variants of a letter or character
The suggested words are adjusted as new unless otherwise set with the button.
letters are being entered. Browse among the Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then
suggestions by pressing on the right and left
shown with numbers. Press , which in
arrows. Tap on a suggestion to select it. Note
that this function is not supported by all lan- number mode is shown instead of , to
guage selections. If not available, the row will return to the letter keyboard, or to
not be shown on the keyboard. open the keyboard with special characters.
The characters available on the keyboard Changes text input language, e.g. EN. The
depend on which language was selected available characters and word suggestions
(see point 7). Tap on a character to enter it. (1) vary depending on the selected language.
To make it possible to change languages for
The button works in different ways, depend-
the keyboard, the languages must first be
ing on the context in which the keyboard is
added under Settings.
used - either to enter @ (when an email Variants of a letter or character, e.g. é or è, can
address is entered) or to create a new row Space. be entered by holding down the letter or charac-
(for normal text input). ter. A box is displayed showing possible variants
Undoes entered text. Pressing briefly deletes
Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible, the of letters or characters. Press the required var-
one character at a time. Hold the button
button is not shown. iant. If no variant is selected, the original letter/
depressed to delete characters more quickly.
character is entered.
Used to enter capital letters. Press again to Changes keyboard mode to write letters and
enter one capital letter and then continue characters by hand instead. Related information
with lower-case letters. Another press makes • Changing keyboard language in centre dis-
Pressing the confirmation button above the key-
all letters capital letters. The next press play (p. 121)
pad (not visible in the illustration) confirms the
restores the keyboard to lower-case letters.
In this mode, the first letter after a full stop,
entered text. The appearance of the button dif- • Enter the characters, letters and words man-
fers depending on context. ually in the centre display (p. 121)
exclamation mark or question mark is a capi-
tal letter. The first letter in the text field is • Managing the centre display (p. 104)
also a capital letter. In text fields intended for • Managing text messages (p. 523)
names or addresses, each word automatically
starts with a capital letter. In text fields for
password, web address or email address
14 Applies to Asiatic languages.
120
Changing keyboard language in Switching between different languages Enter the characters, letters and
centre display in the keyboard words manually in the centre
To make it possible to switch between different When a number of languages display
languages for the keyboard, the languages must have been selected in The centre display keyboard allows you to enter
first be added under Settings. Settings, the button in the characters, letters and words on the screen by
keyboard is used to switch "drawing" by hand.
Adding or deleting languages in between the different lan- Press the button on the key-
settings guages. board to change from typing
The keyboard is automatically set to the same with the keys to entering letters
languages as the system language. The keyboard To change keyboard language with list:
and characters by hand.
language can be manually adapted without 1. Give a long press on the button.
affecting the system language. > A list opens.
1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Select the required language. If more than
2. Press System System Languages and four languages have been selected under
Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list
Units Keyboard Layouts.
from the keyboard.
3. Select one or more languages from the list. > The keyboard is adapted to the selected
> It is now possible to switch between the language and other word suggestions are
selected languages directly from the key- given.
board for text input.
To change the keyboard language without dis-
If no languages have been actively selected playing the list:
under Settings, the keyboard retains the same
– One short press of the button.
language as the car's system language.
> The keyboard is adapted to the next lan-
guage in the list without displaying the list. Area for writing characters/letters/words/
parts of word.
Related information
• Changing system language (p. 124) The text field where the characters or word
suggestions15 appear as they are written on
screen (1).
15 Applies to certain system languages. }}
121
|| Suggestions for characters/letters/word/ Writing characters/letters/words by hand Deleting/changing characters/letters written

part of word. It is possible to scroll through 1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts of by hand
the list. a word in the area for hand-written letters
Space. A space can also be created by (1). Write a word or parts of a word above
entering a dash (-) in the area for hand-writ- each other or on a line.
ten letters (1). See the heading "Entering a > A number of suggested characters, letters
space in the free text field with handwriting or words is shown (3). The most likely
recognition" below. choice is found at the top of the list.
Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete
one character/one letter at a time. Wait a IMPORTANT
moment before pressing again to delete the Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
next character/letter, etc. Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping
they may scratch it. across the handwriting field (1).
Return to the keyboard with regular charac-
ter input. – There are several options for deleting/
2. Enter the character/letters/word by waiting a changing characters/letters:
Switch off/on sound when entering. moment.
> The character/letter/word at the top of • Press the intended letter or word in the
Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible, the list (3).
button is not shown. the list is entered. It is also possible to
select a different character by pressing • Press the text undo button (5) to delete
Change text input language. the required character, letter or word in the letter and begin again.
the list. Swipe horizontally from right to left16 over
•
the area for handwritten letters (1). Delete
multiple letters by swiping over the area
several times.
• Pressing the X in the text field (2) deletes
all of the entered text.
16 For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space.
122
Changing row in the free text field with Changing the appearance in the Switching off and changing the
handwriting centre display volume of the system sound in the
The appearance of the screen in the centre dis- centre display
play can be changed by selecting a theme. The centre display can be used to change the
1. Press Settings in the top view. volume of the system sound or switch off the
system sound altogether.
2. Press My Car Displays Display 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
Themes. display.
3. Then select a theme, e.g. Minimalistic or
2. Press Sound System Volumes.
Chrome Rings.
3. Under Touch Sounds, drag the control to
As a supplement to these appearances, it is pos-
Change row by hand by drawing the above character in change the volume/switch off screen touch
sible to choose between Normal and Bright.
the handwriting field17. sounds. Drag the control to the desired vol-
With Normal, the screen background is dark and
Entering a space in the free text field with ume.
the text is light. This alternative is the default for
handwriting recognition all themes. A light variant can also be selected, in Related information
which the background is light and the text is dark. • Overview of centre display (p. 101)
This alternative can be useful in e.g. strong day-
light. • Changing settings in the centre display
(p. 126)
This alternative is always available for the user
and is not affected by the surrounding lighting.
• Audio settings (p. 492)
Related information
(p. 124)
Enter a space by drawing a dash from left to right18.
• Activating and deactivating centre display
• Keyboard in centre display (p. 118) • Cleaning the centre display (p. 626)
17 For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed.

18 For Arabic keyboard - draw the dash from right to left.
123
Changing system units Changing system language Opening settings in the centre
Units settings are defined in the centre display's Language settings are defined in the centre dis- display
Settings menu. play menu Settings. Settings and information for many of the car's
NOTE functions can be managed in the centre display.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display. Changing the language in the centre display
may mean that some owner information is not
2. Continue to System System Languages
compliant with national or local laws and reg-
and Units Units of Measurement. ulations. Do not switch to a language that is
3. Select from the following unit standards: difficult to understand as this may make it dif-
ficult to find your way back in the structure on
• Metric - kilometres, litres and degrees screen.
Celsius.
• Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
Celsius. display.
• US - miles, gallons and degrees Fahren-
heit. 2. Continue to System System Languages
Top view with button for Settings.
and Units.
> The units in the driver display, centre dis- 1. Open the top view by pressing on the tab or
play and head-up display are changed. 3. Select System Language. Languages that by dragging/swiping from the top down-
support voice recognition have a voice recog- wards across the screen.
Related information nition symbol.
• Overview of centre display (p. 101) > The language in the driver display, centre
2. Press Settings to open the settings menu.
• Opening settings in the centre display display and head-up display is changed. 3. Press one of the categories shown and navi-
(p. 124) gate to subcategories and respective set-
Related information tings by pressing again.
• Changing settings in the centre display
(p. 126) • Overview of centre display (p. 101)
4. Press Back to go back in the settings menu.
• Changing system language (p. 124) • Opening settings in the centre display
(p. 124) Press Close to close the settings menu.
(p. 126)
• Changing system units (p. 124)
124
Related information Open contextual setup in the centre Press Close or the physical home button
• Overview of centre display (p. 101) display beneath the centre display to close setup view.
• Changing settings in the centre display It is possible to use contextual setup for most of Most of the car's basic apps have this contextual
(p. 126) the car's basic apps so that you can change set- setting option, but not all.
tings directly in the top view in the centre dis-
• Setting types in the centre display (p. 127)
play. Third party apps
• Table showing centre display settings Third party apps are not included in the car's sys-
(p. 128) tem from the beginning, but are the type that can
be downloaded e.g. Volvo ID. Here the settings
are always made inside the app and not from the
top view.
Related information
(p. 124)
• Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 127)
Top view with button for contextual setting.
The apps installed in the car from the beginning,
e.g. FM radio and USB, are a part of Sensus and
are part of the car's embedded functions. Set-
tings for these apps can be changed directly in
the top view in the centre display.
When contextual setup is available:
1. Drag down top view when an app is in
expanded mode, e.g. Navigation.
2. Press Navigation Settings.
3. Change settings as desired and confirm the
selections.
125
Changing settings in the centre Related information Resetting user data for change of
display • Overview of centre display (p. 101) ownership
You can change Settings and information for • Resetting settings in the centre display In the event of a change of ownership, user data
many of the car's functions via the centre dis- (p. 127) and system settings should be restored to fac-
play. tory settings.
1. Open the top view by pressing on the tab or
• Setting types in the centre display (p. 127)
by dragging/swiping from the top down- • Table showing centre display settings The settings in the car can be reset at different
wards across the screen. (p. 128) levels. Restore all user data and system settings
to the original factory settings in the event of a
2. Press Settings to open the settings menu. change of ownership. In the event of a change of
3. Press on one of the categories and subcate- ownership it is also important to change the
gories to navigate to the required setting. owner of the Volvo On Call* service.
4. Change one or more settings. Different types Related information
of setting are changed in different ways. • Resetting settings in the centre display
> The changes are saved immediately. (p. 127)
A subcategory in the settings menu with different types

of settings (here, a multi-selector button and radio but-
tons).
Resetting settings in the centre 4. Press OK to confirm the reset. Setting types in the centre display
display For Reset Personal Settings, the reset Different types of setting are changed in differ-
It is possible to reset the defaults for all settings must be confirmed by pressing Reset for ent ways. See the table for a description of the
defined in the centre display settings menu. the active profile or Reset for all profiles. various types of setting.
Two types of reset > Selected settings are reset. Setting types
There are two different types of resets for set-
Related information Setting Description
tings in the settings menu:
• Overview of centre display (p. 101) type
• Factory reset - clears all data and files and • Opening settings in the centre display Trigger Starts an app or separate view
resets all settings to their default values. (p. 124) function for more advanced settings
• Reset Personal Settings - clears personal • Changing settings in the centre display through a press on the text, e.g.
data and resets personal settings to their (p. 126) to connect a device with
default values. Bluetooth®.
• Table showing centre display settings
Resetting settings (p. 128) Radio but- Select a setting from several
Follow these instructions to reset your settings. ton options by pressing the required
radio button, e.g. to select a sys-
NOTE tem language.
Factory reset is only possible when the car Multi- Select a level for something by
is stationary. selector pressing the required part of the
button button, e.g. to select a sensitivity
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre level for City Safety.
display. Checkbox Activate/deactivate a function by
2. Continue to System Factory reset. pressing on the box to select/
deselect it, e.g. to select auto-
3. Select the required reset type. matic start of seat heating.
> A pop-up window is shown.
}}
127
|| Setting Description Table showing centre display Subcategories

type settings
The settings menu in the centre display has a Locking
Slider Select a level for something number of main categories and subcategories
within an interval by pressing and Parking Brake and Suspension
where settings and information for many of the
dragging the slider, e.g. to select car's functions are collected. Wipers
volume level.
There are seven main categories: My Car, Sound
Display of No actual setting. Shows infor- Sound, Navigation, Media, Communication,
informa- mation about something, e.g. the Climate and System. Subcategories
tion car's identification number.
In turn, each category contains a number of sub- Tone
Related information categories and setting options. The tables below
Balance
• Overview of centre display (p. 101) show the first level of subcategories. The setting
options for a function or area are described in System Volumes
more detail in the corresponding section of the
owner's manual. Navigation
Some settings are personal, which means that Subcategories
they can be saved to Driver Profiles. Other set-
tings are global, which means they are not linked Map
to a driver profile. Route and Guidance
My Car Traffic
Subcategories
Displays
Media
IntelliSafe Subcategories
Drive Preferences/Individual Drive Mode* AM/FM radio
Lights and Lighting DAB*
Mirrors and Convenience
Subcategories System Driver profiles

Subcategories Many of the settings made in the car can be
Gracenote® adapted according to the driver's personal pref-
Driver Profile erences and can be saved in one or more driver
TV*
profiles.
Date and Time
Video The personal settings are automatically saved in
System Languages and Units the active driver profile. Each key can be linked to
Communication a driver profile. When the linked key is used, the
Privacy and data car is adapted to the settings of that specific
Subcategories
Keyboard Layouts driver profile.
Phone
Voice Control* What settings are saved in the driver
Text Messages profiles?
Factory reset In the car, the settings defined are either per-
Android Auto*
sonal or global. Only personal settings are saved
System Information
Apple CarPlay* in driver profiles.
Bluetooth Devices Related information Settings that can be saved in a driver profile
• Overview of centre display (p. 101) include, amongst other things, screens, mirrors,
Wi-Fi front seats, navigation*, audio and media system,
(p. 126) language and voice control.
Car Wi-Fi Hotspot
• Resetting settings in the centre display Some settings, referred to as global settings, can
Car Modem Internet* (p. 127) be changed but are not saved to a specific driver
profile. Changes to global settings affect all pro-
Volvo On Call*
files.
Volvo Service Networks
Climate
The main category Climate has no subcatego-
ries.
}}
|| Global settings Selecting driver profile 4. Press Confirm.

The global settings and parameters are not When the centre display has been started, the > The driver profile is selected and the sys-
changed when changing between driver profiles. selected driver profile is shown at the top of the tem loads the settings for the new driver
They remain the same regardless of which driver screen. The driver profile last used is the one profile.
profile is active. that will be active next time the car is unlocked. It
is possible to change to another driver profile Related information
Keyboard layout settings are an example of
global settings. If driver profile X is used to add after the car has been unlocked. However, if the • Driver profiles (p. 129)
additional languages to the keyboard, these remote control key has been linked to a driver • Navigating in the centre display's views
remain available for use even if driver profile Y is profile then this is what is selected when the car (p. 107)
is started.
used. The keyboard layout settings are not saved
There are two options for changing to another
• Renaming a driver profile (p. 131)
to a specific driver profile - the settings are
global. driver profile. • Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 131)
Personal preferences Option 1:
If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre dis- 1. Tap on the name of the driver profile shown
play brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by in the top of the centre display when the dis-
this setting. It has been saved to driver profile X - play has been started.
the brightness setting is a personal setting.
> A list of selectable driver profiles is shown.
Related information 2. Select the driver profile required.
• Selecting driver profile (p. 130)
3. Press Confirm.
• Renaming a driver profile (p. 131)
> The driver profile is selected and the sys-
• Resetting settings in the driver profiles tem loads the settings for the new driver
(p. 131) profile.
• Linking remote control key to driver profile Option 2:
(p. 131)
1. Drag down the top view in the centre display.
• Table showing centre display settings
(p. 128) 2. Press Profile.
> The same list as for Option 1 is shown.
3. Select the driver profile required.
130
Renaming a driver profile Resetting settings in the driver Linking remote control key to driver
It is possible to change the name of the different profiles profile
driver profiles used in the car. Settings that have been saved to one or more It is possible to link your key to a driver profile.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre driver profiles can be reset if the car is station- The driver profile along with all of its settings will
display. ary. then be automatically selected every time the car
NOTE is used with that specific remote control key.
2. Press System Driver Profiles.
3. Select Edit Profile. Factory reset is only possible when the car The first time the remote control key is used, it is
is stationary. not linked to any specific driver profile. When the
> A menu opens, where the profile can be car is started, the Guest profile will automatically
edited. be activated.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
4. Tap in the box Profile Name. A driver profile can be selected manually without
> A keyboard appears, and it is possible to 2. Press System Factory reset Reset linking it to the key. When the car is unlocked,
change the name. Tap on to close Personal Settings. the last active driver profile is activated. Once the
the keyboard. 3. Select one of the options Reset for the key has been linked to a driver profile, a driver
active profile, Reset for all profiles or profile does not need to be selected when that
5. Save the name change by pressing Back or
Cancel. specific key is used.
Close.
> The name has now been changed. Related information Linking a remote control key to a driver
• Driver profiles (p. 129) profile
NOTE First select the profile to be linked to the key, if
the profile to be linked is not already active. The
A profile name cannot start with a space, as (p. 127)
the profile name will not then be saved. active profile can then be linked to the key.
Related information display.
• Selecting driver profile (p. 130)
2. Press System Driver Profiles.
3. Select the desired profile. The display returns
to the home view. The Guest profile cannot
be linked to a key.
}}
131
|| 4. Drag down the top view again and tap on Related information Message in centre display
Settings System Driver Profiles • Driver profiles (p. 129) The centre display can show messages to
Edit Profile. • Renaming a driver profile (p. 131) inform or assist the driver in the event of different
events.
5. Select Connect key to link the profile with • Remote control key (p. 235)
the key. It is not possible to link a driver pro-
file to a different key than the one currently
being used in the car. If there are multiple
keys in the car, the message More than one
key is found, put the key you want to
connect on backup reader will be dis-
played.
Message in the centre display's top view.

The centre display shows messages that are of
lower priority for the driver.
Most messages are shown above the centre dis-
Backup reader's location in the tunnel console. play's status bar. After a while, or when any
> When the message Profile connected required action related to the message has been
to key is shown, the key and the driver taken, the message disappears from the status
profile are linked. bar. If a message needs to be saved, it is posi-
tioned in the top view in the centre display.
6. Press OK.
> This key is now linked to the driver profile Message composition may vary and they can be
and will remain linked as long as the shown together with graphics, symbols or a but-
Connect key box is not unticked. ton for activating/deactivating a function linked
to the message.
132
Pop-up messages Managing messages in the centre For messages without buttons:
In some cases, a message is shown in the form display – Close the message by tapping on it, or allow
of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages have Messages in the centre display are handled in the message to close automatically after a
higher priority than messages shown in the sta- centre display views. while.
tus bar and require acknowledgement/action
> The message disappears from the status
before they disappear. Messages that need to be
bar.
saved are positioned in the top view in the centre
display. If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned
in the top view in the centre display.
Related information
• Managing messages in the centre display Related information
(p. 133) • Message in centre display (p. 132)
• Handling a message saved from the centre • Handling a message saved from the centre
display (p. 134) display (p. 134)
• Messages in the driver display (p. 97) • Messages in the driver display (p. 97)
Message in the centre display's top view.

Some messages in the centre display have a but-
ton (or several buttons in pop-up messages) for
e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to
the message.
Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
– Press the button to perform the action or
allow the message to close automatically
after a while.
> The message disappears from the status
bar.
133
Handling a message saved from the Managing a saved message Head-up display*
centre display Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/ The head-up display supplements the car's
Whether saved from the driver display or the deactivating a function linked to the message. driver display and projects information from the
centre display, messages are managed in the – Press the button to perform the action. driver display onto the windscreen. The projec-
centre display. ted image can only be seen from the driver posi-
Saved messages in the top view are deleted tion.
automatically when the car is switched off.
Related information
• Managing messages in the centre display
(p. 133)
Saved messages and possible options in the top view.

Incoming phone calls.
Messages that are shown in the centre display
that need to be saved are added in the top view The head-up display shows warnings and infor-
of the centre display. mation relating to speed, cruise control functions,
navigation, etc. in the driver's field of vision. Road
Reading a saved message
Sign Information and incoming phone calls can
1. Open the top view in the centre display.
also be shown in the head up display.
> A list of saved messages is shown. Mes-
sages with an arrow to the right can be
maximised.
2. Tap on a message to expand/minimise.
> More information on the message is
shown in the list and the image to the left
in the app shows information about the
message graphically.
NOTE NOTE
The driver's ability to see the information in Certain visual defects may cause headaches
the head-up display is impaired by the follow- and a feeling of stress during the use of the
ing: head-up display.
• use of polarising sunglasses
• a driving position which means that the City Safety in the head-up display
driver is not sitting centred in the seat When City Safety is activated, the information in
the head-up display is replaced by a graphic for
• objects on the display unit's cover glass City Safety. This graphic is illuminated even if the
• unfavourable light conditions. head-up display is switched off.
Examples of what can be shown in the display.

IMPORTANT
Speed
The display unit from which the information is
projected is located in the instrument panel. Cruise control
To avoid damage to the display unit's cover
glass - do not store any objects on the cover Navigation
glass and make sure that no objects fall down Road signs
onto it.
A number of symbols can be shown temporarily
in the head-up display, e.g.:
If the warning symbol illuminates - read
the warning message in the driver dis- The graphic for City Safety flashes in order to catch the
play. driver's attention.
If the information symbol illuminates - Related information

read the message in the driver display. • Activating and deactivating the head-up dis-
play* (p. 136)
• Cleaning the head up display* (p. 627)
• Head-up display when replacing the wind-
screen* (p. 599)
Activating and deactivating the Settings for head-up display* Adjusting brightness and vertical
head-up display* Adjust the settings for the head up display's pro- position
The head-up display can be activated and deac- jection onto the windscreen.
tivated when the car has been started. Settings can be defined in the centre display
when the car has started and a projected image
Press the Head-up Display is displayed on the windscreen.
button in the centre display
function view. An indicator in The setting is saved as a personal setting in the
the button illuminates when the driver profile.
function is activated. 1. Press the Head-up Display Adjustments
Selecting display options button in the centre display function view.
Select functions to be shown in the head up dis-
play. 2. Adjust the brightness and vertical position of
Related information the projected image in the driver's field of
• Settings for head-up display* (p. 136) 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top vision using the steering wheel's right-hand
view. keypad.
2. Press My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options.
3. Select one or more functions:
• Show Navigation
• Show Road Sign Information
• Show Driver Support
• Show Phone.
Reducing the brightness
Increasing the brightness
Raising the position
Lowering the position Voice recognition19

Confirm The driver can use voice recognition to control
certain functions in the media player, Bluetooth-
The brightness of the graphics is automatically connected phone, climate system and Volvo's
adapted to their background light conditions. The navigation system*.
brightness is also affected by the adjustment of
the brightness in the car's other displays. Voice commands offer additional convenience
and assist the driver to not be distracted so that
The height position can be stored in the memory he or she can concentrate on driving, the road
function of the power* front seat. and the traffic situation.
Calibrate the horizontal position
The head-up display's horizontal position may WARNING
need to be calibrated if the windscreen or display Rotate anticlockwise The driver always holds overall responsibility
unit is replaced. Calibration means that the pro- for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and
jected image is rotated clockwise or anticlock- Rotate clockwise complying with all applicable rules of the road.
wise. Confirm
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view. Related information
2. Select My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options Head-Up Display • Activating and deactivating the head-up dis-
Calibration. play* (p. 136)
3. Calibrate the image's horizontal position with

the steering wheel's right keypad.
Voice control system microphone
19 Applies to certain markets. }}
|| Voice control is done in dialogue form with the Using voice recognition20 Example of voice recognition control
user saying commands and receiving verbal Depress the steering wheel Press , say "Call [Forename] [Surname]
responses from the system. The voice recognition button for voice recognition [number category]" - dials the selected contact
system uses the same microphone as Bluetooth- from the phone book. If the contact has several
to activate the system and
connected devices, and the voice recognition phone numbers (e.g. home, mobile, work), the
initiate a dialogue using voice
system's responses are given via the car's speak- right category must be referred to.
commands.
ers. In some cases, a text message is also shown
in the driver display. Functions are controlled So press and say "Call Robin Smith
from the right-hand steering wheel keypad. Set- Remember the following: Mobile".
tings are made via the centre display.
• Speak after the tone with a normal voice at a Commands/phrases
System updating normal tempo. The following commands are always available for
The voice recognition system is continuously • Do not speak while the system is replying use:
improved. Download updates for optimal perform- (the system cannot understand commands
ance from support.volvocars.com. during this time).
• "Repeat" - repeats the last voice instruction
in the ongoing dialogue.
Related information • Avoid background noise in the passenger
• "Cancel" - discontinue the dialogue.
• Using voice recognition (p. 138) compartment by having the doors, windows
and panoramic roof* closed. • "Help" - starts a help dialogue. The system
• Controlling a telephone with voice recogni- replies with the commands available in the
tion (p. 139) Voice recognition can be deactivated as follows:
current situation, a prompt or an example.
• Voice control of radio and media (p. 140) • by saying "Cancel". Commands for specific functions such as phone
• Controlling climate control with voice recog- • with a long press on the voice recognition and radio are described in specific sections.
nition (p. 196) button on the steering wheel .
• Settings for voice recognition (p. 140) To speed up communication and skip the
prompts from the system, press the steering
wheel button for voice recognition when the
system voice is speaking and say the next com-
mand.
20 Applies to certain markets.
Digits Controlling a telephone with voice Related information

The number commands are stated differently recognition21 • Voice recognition (p. 137)
depending on the function to be controlled: Call a contact, have messages read aloud or • Using voice recognition (p. 138)
• Phone numbers and postcodes must be dictate brief messages with voice control com- • Voice control of radio and media (p. 140)
spoken individually, number by number, e.g. mands to a Bluetooth connected telephone.
zero three one two two four four three To specify a contact in the phone book, the voice • Controlling climate control with voice recog-
recognition command must include contact infor- nition (p. 196)
(03122443).
• House numbers can be spoken individually
mation that is entered in the phone book. If a • Settings for voice recognition (p. 140)
contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone • Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
or in groups, e.g. two two or twenty-two (22).
numbers then the number category can also be
For English and Dutch, several groups can
be said in sequence, e.g. twenty-two twenty- stated, e.g. Home or Mobile: "Call Robin
two (22 22). For English, double or triple can Smith Mobile".
be used, e.g. double zero (00). Numbers can Press and say one of the following com-
be given within the range 0-2300. mands:
• Frequencies can be spoken as ninety eight
• "Call [contact]" - dials the selected contact
point eight (98.8), a hundred and four point from the phone book.
two or hundred four point two (104.2).
• "Call [phone number]" - dials the phone
Related information number.
• Voice recognition (p. 137) • "Recent calls" - displays the call list.
• Controlling a telephone with voice recogni- • "Read message" - message is read out. If
tion (p. 139) there are several messages - select which
• Voice control of radio and media (p. 140) message should be read out.
• Controlling climate control with voice recog- • "Message to [contact]" users are reques-
nition (p. 196) ted to say a brief message. The message is
• Settings for voice recognition (p. 140) then repeated aloud and the user can
choose to send22 or revise the message. For
this function to work, the car must be con-
nected to the Internet.

22 Only certain phones can broadcast messages from the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
Voice control of radio and media23 • "Radio FM" - starts FM radio. Settings for voice recognition25
Commands for radio and media player device • "Radio AM" - starts AM radio. Settings for the voice control system are
control are shown below. • "DAB " - starts DAB radio*. selected here.
Tap on and say one of the following com- Settings System Voice Control
• "TV" - starts playback from TV*24.
mands:
• "CD" - starts playback from CD*. Settings can be made within the following areas:
• "Media" - starts a dialogue for media and
radio and shows examples of commands. • "USB" - starts playback from USB.
• Repeat Voice Command
• "Play [artist]" - plays back music by the • "iPod" - starts playback from iPod.
• Gender
selected artist. • "Bluetooth" - starts playback from a Blue-
tooth-connected media source. • Speech Rate
• "Play [song title]" - plays back the selected
song. • "Similar music" — plays back music similar Audio settings
• "Play [song title] from [album]" - plays to the music currently playing back from USB Select audio settings under:
back the selected song from the selected devices.
album. Settings Sound System Volumes
Related information Voice Control
• "Play [TV channel name]" - starts the • Voice recognition (p. 137)
selected TV channel*24.
• Using voice recognition (p. 138) Language settings
• "Play [radio station]" - starts playing back
• Controlling a telephone with voice recogni- Voice recognition is not possible for all lan-
the selected radio channel. tion (p. 139) guages. Languages available for voice recogni-
• "Tune to [frequency]" - starts the selected tion are marked with an icon in the language list -
• Controlling climate control with voice recog-
.
radio frequency in the current frequency nition (p. 196)
band. If no radio source is active, the FM Changing the language also affects menu, mes-
band is started by default. • Settings for voice recognition (p. 140)
sage and help texts.
• "Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" -
starts the selected radio frequency in the Settings System System Languages
selected frequency band. and Units System Language
• "Radio" - starts FM radio.

Related information
• Using voice recognition (p. 138)
• Controlling a telephone with voice recogni-
tion (p. 139)
• Controlling climate control with voice recog-
nition (p. 196)
• Voice control of radio and media (p. 140)
• Changing system language (p. 124)
141
LIGHTING
LIGHTING
Lighting control Position Specification Position Specification

The different lighting controls are used to control
both exterior and interior lighting. The left-hand Daytime running lights. Daytime running lights and position
stalk switch activates and adjusts the exterior lamps in daylight.
Main beam flash can be used.
lighting. The interior brightness is adjusted using Dipped beam and position lamps in
a thumbwheel on the instrument panel. Daytime running lights and position weak daylight or darkness, or when
lamps.
Headlamp levelling1 is also adjusted using a the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog
thumbwheel on the instrument panel. Position lamps when the car is lamp are activated.
parked.A The Active main beam function can
Exterior lighting Main beam flash can be used. be activated.
Dipped beam and position lamps. Main beam can be activated when
dipped beam is switched on.
Main beam can be activated.
Active main beam on/off.
A If the car is stationary but running, the rotating ring can be

moved to position from another position to switch on
only the position lamps instead of other lighting.
Volvo recommends that mode is used

when the vehicle is driven.
Rotating ring in the left-hand stalk switch.
When the car's electrical system is in ignition
position II or when the car is running, the follow-
ing functions are available in the rotating ring's
different positions.
1 Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps.
LIGHTING
WARNING Related information Adjusting light functions via the

• Adjusting light functions via the centre dis- centre display
The car's audio system is not able to deter- play (p. 145)
mine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently Several light functions can be adjusted and acti-
strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations. • Interior lighting (p. 156) vated via the centre display, such as active main
beam, home safe lighting and approach lighting.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring • Position lamps (p. 147)
that the car is driven with a beam pattern suit-
able for the traffic situation and in accordance
• Using direction indicators (p. 151)
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting.
with applicable traffic regulations. • Using main beam (p. 149)
• Dipped beam (p. 148) 3. Select Exterior Lights or Interior Lighting.
Thumbwheel in instrument panel • Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 152) Related information
• Rear fog lamp (p. 153) • Lighting control (p. 144)
• Active bending lights* (p. 152) • Active main beam (p. 149)
• Brake lights (p. 154) • Using home safe lighting (p. 155)
• Emergency brake lights (p. 154) • Approach light duration (p. 155)
• Hazard warning flashers (p. 154) • Using direction indicators (p. 151)
(p. 124)
• Function view in centre display (p. 114)
A car with LED2 headlamps* has automatic headlamp

levelling and therefore does not have the thumbwheel
for headlamp levelling.
Thumbwheel for adjusting interior brightness
Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling1
2 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

LIGHTING
Adjusting headlamp level Load case Thumb-

Headlamp levelling3 is adjusted using one of the wheel
thumbwheels in the instrument panel. position
The load in the car changes the vertical align- Driver and passenger in the front 1
ment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle passenger seat.
oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the
Three passengers in the rear
headlamp level. Lower the beam if the car is
seat.
heavily laden.
220 kg load in the cargo area.
1. Keep the engine running or the car's electri-
cal system in ignition position I. Driver and maximum load in the 2
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/lower cargo area.
Examples of thumbwheel position.
headlamp level.
Thumbwheel in position 0 Related information
The position in which the thumbwheel should be • Lighting control (p. 144)
set for a number of load cases is shown below. Thumbwheel in position 1
Load case Thumb-

wheel
position
Only driver. 0
Driver and passenger in the front 0
passenger seat.
Driver and passenger in the front 1
passenger seat.
Three passengers in the rear
seat.
146
LIGHTING
Position lamps position from another position to switch on only Daytime running lights
Position lamps can be used so that other road the position lamps instead of other lighting. The car has sensors that detect the light condi-
users can see the car if it stops or is parked. The When driving for more than 30 seconds at max. tions in the surroundings. The daytime running
position lamp is switched on with the rotating 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed lights are switched on when the rotating ring on
ring on the stalk switch. exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime the stalk switch is in position , or
running lights are switched on. The driver should as well as when the car's electrical system
turn to a position other than . is in ignition position II or when the car is run-
If the tailgate is opened when it is dark outside, ning. In position , the headlamps change
the rear position lamps come on (if not already automatically to dipped beam in weak daylight or
switched on) to warn road users approaching darkness.
from behind. This takes place irrespective of the
position of the rotating ring or the ignition posi-
tion of the car's electrical system.
Related information
• Ignition positions (p. 420)
Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position.
• Replacing daytime running light bulb/posi-
Turn the rotating ring to the position - the tion lamp bulb, front (p. 607)
position lamps are switched on (number plate
lighting is switched on at the same time).
If the car's electrical system is in ignition position Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
II or the car is running then the daytime running
lights are switched on instead of the front posi-
tion lamps. When the rotating ring is in this posi-
tion, the position lamps are switched on regard-
less of the ignition position of the car's electrical
system.
If the car is stationary but running, the rotating
ring can be moved to the position lamp
}}
147
LIGHTING
|| If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the Dipped beam when the car's electrical system is in igni-
position, the daytime running lights (DRL4) are When driving with the stalk switch's rotating ring tion position II or when the car is running.
switched on when the car is driven in daylight. in the position, dipped beam is activated Tunnel detection
The car automatically changes lighting from day- automatically in weak daylight or darkness, when The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel
time running light to dipped beam in weak day- the car's electrical system is in ignition position II and switches from daytime running lights to
light or darkness. Changing to dipped beam also or when the car is running. dipped beam.
takes place if the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog
lamp are activated. Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand stalk
switch must be in mode for tunnel detec-
WARNING tion to work.
This system help to save energy - it cannot Related information
determine in all situations when daylight is too
weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and
rain. • Ignition positions (p. 420)
The driver is always responsible for ensuring • Daytime running lights (p. 147)
that the car is driven with the correct beam • Replacing the dipped beam bulb (p. 605)
pattern for the traffic situation and in accord-
ance with applicable traffic regulations.
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.

Related information
• Lighting control (p. 144) With the stalk switch's rotating ring in
position, dipped beam is also activated automati-
cally if:
• Dipped beam (p. 148)
• the front fog lamps* are activated
tion lamp bulb, front (p. 607) • the rear fog lamp is activated
• the front and rear fog lamps are activated
Dipped beam is always switched on when the
rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position
4 Daytime Running Lights
LIGHTING
Using main beam Deactivate by moving the stalk switch back- Active main beam
Main beam is operated with the left-hand stalk wards. Active main beam is a function which uses a
switch. Main beam is the car's strongest lighting camera sensor at the top edge of the wind-
and should be used when driving in the dark for When main beam has been activated the screen to detect the headlamp beams from
better visibility, as long as it does not dazzle symbol illuminates in the driver display. oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in
other road users. front, and then switches from main beam to
Related information
dipped beam.
• Active main beam (p. 149)
• Replacing the main beam lamp (p. 606)
Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring.
Main beam flash Active main beam is activated with the rotating ring on
Move the stalk switch backwards slightly to the stalk switch in position .
main beam flash position. Main beam comes
The function can also take streetlights into
on until the stalk switch is released.
account. Main beam is reactivated when the cam-
Main beam era sensor no longer sees any oncoming vehicles
Main beam can be activated when the steer- or vehicles ahead.
ing wheel stalk switch's rotating ring is in The function can start while driving in the dark
position 5 or . Activate main when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h (approx.
beam by moving the stalk switch forwards. 12 mph) or higher.
5 When dipped beam is activated. }}
149
LIGHTING
|| If active main beam is deactivated while main light beam that points directly to the vehicle is If this symbol is shown in the driver dis-
beam is on, the lighting is immediately reset to dimmed. play, together with the message Active
dipped beam. High Beam Temporarily
When active main beam is activated, the symbol unavailable, then switching between
main and dipped beam must be performed man-
illuminates with a white glow in the driver ually. The rotating ring on the stalk switch can still
display.
be in the position. The symbol extin-
When main beam is activated, the symbol shines guishes when these message are shown.
blue. This also applies for LED headlamps if the
main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. if the light The same applies if this symbol is
beam shines with slightly more than dipped shown together with the message
beam. Windscreen sensor Sensor
blocked, see Owner's manual.
Car with halogen headlamps
Active main beam may be temporarily unavailable
The lighting returns to main beam about a sec-
e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain.
ond after the camera sensor no longer detects Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly towards
oncoming vehicle, but continued main beam on both When active main beam becomes available again,
the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the
sides of the vehicle. or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked,
rear lights from vehicles in front.
The lighting returns to full main beam about a the message goes out and the symbol illu-
Car with LED6 headlamps* minates.
second after the camera sensor no longer
If the active main beam has the on/off functional-
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
ity7 then the lighting returns to main beam about
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front. WARNING
a second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming Limitations for active main beam Active main beam is an aid for using the opti-
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front. The camera sensor on which the function is mum beam pattern when conditions are
based has limitations. favourable.
If the active main beam has adaptive functional-
The driver always bears responsibility for man-
ity7 then, unlike what happens during conven- ually switching between main and dipped
tional dimming, the light beam continues to illu- beam when traffic situations or weather con-
minate with main beam on both sides of oncom- ditions so require.
ing traffic or vehicles ahead - only the part of the

7 Depending on the car's equipment level.
LIGHTING
Related information Using direction indicators NOTE

• Lighting control (p. 144) The car's direction indicators are operated with
• This automatic flashing sequence can be
• Using main beam (p. 149) the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator
stopped by moving the stalk switch
lamps flash three times or continuously, depend-
• Limitations for camera unit (p. 343)
ing on how far up or down the stalk switch is
immediately in the opposite direction.
moved. • If the symbol for direction indicators in
the driver display flashes more quickly
than normal - see the message in the
driver display.
Continuous flash sequence

Move the stalk switch up or down to its end
position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Related information
Direction indicators.
• Hazard warning flashers (p. 154)
• Adjusting light functions via the centre dis-
Short flash sequence play (p. 145)
Move the stalk switch up or down to the first
position and release. The direction indicator
• Replacing the front direction indicator bulb
(p. 607)
lamps flash three times. The function can be
activated/deactivated via the centre display.
151
LIGHTING
Active bending lights* The function is only active in weak daylight or Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
Active bending lights are designed to provide darkness and only when the car is moving and The front fog lamps emit a stronger beam than
maximum illumination in bends and junctions. dipped beam is switched on. dipped beam and are therefore additionally
Cars with LED8 headlamps* can have active effective in fog.
Deactivating/activating the function
bending lights, depending on the car's equip- The function is activated when the car is supplied
ment level. from the factory and can be deactivated/acti-
vated via the centre display's function view.
Press the Active Bending
Lights button.
Related information
• Adjusting light functions via the centre dis- Button for front fog lamps.
play (p. 145)
The front fog lamps can only be switched on
• Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 152) when ignition position II is active or the car is
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and
activated (right) respectively. running and the rotating ring on the stalk switch
Active bending lights follow steering wheel move- is in position , or .
ments to provide maximum illumination in bends Press the button to activate and deactivate. The
and junctions and can thereby provide the driver symbol in the driver display illuminates
with improved visibility. when the front fog lamps are switched on.
The function is activated automatically when the The front fog lamps switch off automatically when
car is started. In the event of a fault in the func- the start knob it turned clockwise to switch off
tion, the symbol illuminates in the driver the car or the stalk switch rotating ring is set to
display at the same time as the driver display the position.
shows an explanatory text.
LIGHTING
NOTE Rear fog lamp Press the on/off button. The symbol in the
The rear fog lamp is considerably stronger than driver display illuminates when the rear fog lamp
Regulations on the use of fog lamps vary
the normal rear lights and should only be used in is switched on.
from country to country.
reduced visibility due to fog, snow, smoke or The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically
dust so that other road users have an early warn- when:
Cornering lights* ing of a vehicle ahead.
The front fog lamps can include the cornering • the start knob is turned clockwise to switch
lights function, which temporarily illuminates the off the car or the stalk switch rotating ring is
area diagonally in front of the car in the direction set to the position
the steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or
• the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
in the direction shown by the direction indicators.
and the front fog lamps are switched
The function is activated in weak daylight or dark- off.
ness when the stalk switch's rotating ring is in
the or position and the speed of the NOTE
car is lower than approx. 30 km/h (approx.
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary
20 mph).
from country to country.
In addition, both cornering lights are switched on
as a supplement to the reversing lamp during
reversing. Button for rear fog lamp. Related information
The rear fog lamp is a lamp at the rear of the car,
The function is activated when the car is supplied
from the factory and can be activated and deacti- on the driver's side. • Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 152)
vated via the centre display. The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when: • Ignition positions (p. 420)
Related information • ignition position II is active or the car is run-

• Lighting control (p. 144) ning and the stalk switch's rotating ring is in
• Ignition positions (p. 420) position or
• Rear fog lamp (p. 153) • the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
and the front fog lamps are switched
• Active bending lights* (p. 152)
on.
play (p. 145)
LIGHTING
Brake lights Emergency brake lights Hazard warning flashers

The brake light automatically comes on during Emergency brake lights are activated to alert Hazard warning flashers warn other road users
braking. vehicles behind about heavy braking. by means of all of the car's direction indicators
being activated simultaneously. The function can
The brake light is switched on when the brake The function means that the brake light flashes
be used to give a warning in the event of traffic
pedal is depressed. It is also switched on when instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a
hazards.
the car is braked automatically by one of the constant glow.
driver support systems. The emergency brake lights are activated during
heavy braking or if the ABS system is activated at
Related information high speeds.
• Emergency brake lights (p. 154)
After the driver brakes to a low speed and then
• Brake functions (p. 423) releases the brake, the brake light returns to nor-
mal glow.
The car's hazard warning flashers are activated at
the same time. These flash until the driver accel-
erates the car to a higher speed again or
switches off the hazard warning flashers.
Related information
• Brake lights (p. 154) Button for hazard warning flashers.
• Foot brake (p. 423) Press the button to activate the hazard warning
flashers.
The hazard warning flashers are automatically
activated when the car brakes so powerfully that
the emergency brake lights are activated and the
speed is low. The hazard warning flashers start to
flash after the emergency brake lights have stop-
ped flashing and are then deactivated automati-
cally when the car drives away again or are deac-
tivated if the button is depressed.
154
LIGHTING
NOTE Using home safe lighting Approach light duration

Some of the exterior lighting can be kept Approach lighting is switched on when the car is
Regulations for the use of hazard warning
switched on to work as home safe lighting after unlocked and is used to switch on the car's
flashers may vary between countries.
the car has been locked. lighting at a distance.
Related information To activate the function: The function is activated when the remote control
• Emergency brake lights (p. 154) key is used for unlocking. At which point, position
1. Switch off the car.
lamps, exterior handle lighting*, number plate
• Using direction indicators (p. 151) 2. Move the left-hand stalk switch forward lighting, interior roof lamps, floor lamps and cargo
toward the instrument panel and release. area lighting are switched on. If a door is opened
3. Get out of the car and lock the door. within the activation time, the time for the lighting
in the outside handles* and the interior lighting
When the function is activated, a symbol illumi- will be extended.
nates in the driver display and position lamps,
exterior handle lighting* and number plate light- The function can be activated and deactivated via
ing are switched on. the centre display.
The length of time that home safe lighting Related information

remains on can be set via the centre display. • Adjusting light functions via the centre dis-
play (p. 145)
Related information
• Adjusting light functions via the centre dis- • Using home safe lighting (p. 155)
play (p. 145) • Remote control key (p. 235)
• Approach light duration (p. 155)
LIGHTING
Interior lighting Auto function for passenger compartment Rear roof lighting*
The interior is equipped with several different lighting The rear area of the car has reading lighting,
types of lighting to improve the experience. This Reading lamp, right-hand side which is also used as passenger compartment
includes, reading lamps, glovebox lighting and lighting.
ground lighting. Reading lighting
All lighting in the passenger compartment can be The reading lamps on the right and left-hand
switched on and off manually at least 5 minutes sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing
from when: the buttons in the roof console. Brightness is
adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
• the car has been switched off and its electri-
cal system is in ignition position 0 Passenger compartment lighting
The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are
• the car has been unlocked but it has not
switched on or off with a short press on the but-
been started.
ton in the roof console.
Front roof lighting Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
The automatic function is activated by a short
press on the AUTO button in the roof console. Reading lamps above the rear seat.
With the automatic system activated, the light
indicator in the button illuminates and the pas-
senger compartment lighting is switched on and
off according to the following.
Passenger compartment lighting:
• illuminates when the car is unlocked and
when it is switched off
• extinguishes when the car is started and
Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and when it is locked
passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
• comes on and goes off, respectively, when a
side door is opened or closed
In cars with panorama roof* there are two lamp units,
Passenger compartment lighting • remains on for 2 minutes if one of the side one on each side of the roof.
doors is open.
LIGHTING
The reading lamps are switched on or off by ning. The ambience light can be adapted in the Adjusting interior lighting
briefly pressing the button on the lamp. Bright- centre display and also precisely adjusted using The lamps inside the car come on differently
ness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in. the thumbwheel in the instrument panel. depending on the ignition position used. The
interior lighting can be adjusted with a thumb-
Glovebox lighting Lighting in storage compartments in
wheel in the instrument panel, and certain light
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respec- doors functions can also be adjusted via the centre
tively when the lid is opened or closed. The lighting in the storage compartments in the display.
doors is switched on when you open the doors The thumbwheel, on the instru-
Sun visor mirror lighting* and is switched off when the car is locked. The
The lighting for the mirror in the sun visor is ment panel by the steering
brightness can be precisely adjusted using the wheel, is used to adjust the
switched on and off respectively when the cover thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
is opened or closed. brightness of the display light,
Lighting in front cup holders in tunnel control light, ambient light and
Ground lighting* console ambience light*
The ground lighting is switched on and off when The lighting in the front cup holders is switched
the corresponding door is opened or closed. Adjusting ambient decor illumination
on when the car is unlocked and is switched off
Lighting in the cargo area when the car is locked. The brightness can be
display.
precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and
instrument panel. 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting
off respectively when the tailgate is opened or
closed. Interior Lighting.
Related information
Decor lighting • Adjusting interior lighting (p. 157) 3. Choose between the following settings:
The ambient light is switched on when you open • Lighting control (p. 144) • Under Ambient Light Intensity, select
the doors and is switched off when the car is • Ignition positions (p. 420) from Off, Low and High.
locked. The intensity of the decor lighting can be • Under Ambient Light Level, select from
adapted in the centre display and also precisely • Passenger compartment interior (p. 572)
Reduced and Full.
adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument
panel. Adjusting ambience light*
The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that
Ambience lights* make it possible to change the colour of the light.
The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that These lights are switched on when the car is run-
make it possible to change the colour of the light. ning.
These lights are switched on when the car is run-
}}
LIGHTING
|| Changing the brightness of the lights

display.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
3. Under Interior Mood Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High.
Changing the colour of the light
display.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
3. Choose between By Temperature and By
Colour in order to change the colour of the
light.
With the By Temperature option, the light
changes according to the set passenger
compartment temperature.
With the By Colour option, the Theme
Colours subcategory can be used to adjust
further.
Related information
• Interior lighting (p. 156)
play (p. 145)
158
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Windows, glass and mirrors • Activating and deactivating the heated wind- Pinch protection for windows and
The car contains controls for windows, glass screen* (p. 215) sun blinds
and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are • Activating and deactivating the heated rear All windows and sun blinds* controlled electri-
laminated. window and door mirrors (p. 216) cally have pinch protection which is deployed if
they are blocked by any object when opening or
Laminated glass closing.
The windscreen and panorama* roof have lamina- In the event of blocking, the movement stops and
ted glass. The glass is reinforced, which provides then reverses automatically to approx. 50 mm
better protection against break-ins and improved (approx. 2 inches) from the blocked position (or
sound insulation in the passenger compartment. to full ventilation position).
Laminated glass is available as an option for cer-
tain other glass surfaces. If the pinch protection has deployed then it is still
possible to operate once more in the same direc-
tion without pinch protection, if this is done within
10 seconds after pinch protection deployment. In
other words, it is possible to force pinch protec-
The symbol is shown on the windows where the glass is tion when closing has been cancelled, e.g. when
laminated1 ice is formed, by continuing to press the control
until fully closed.
Related information
• Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
WARNING
(p. 160)
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
• Panorama roof* (p. 166)
automatic opening and closing function must
• Power windows (p. 161) be reset to work properly. A reset must take
place for pinch protection to work.
• Rearview and door mirrors (p. 163)
• Using windscreen wipers (p. 171)
• Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 174)
1 Does not apply to the windscreen or panorama roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol.
Related information Reset sequence for pinch Power windows

• Reset sequence for pinch protection protection The power windows are operated using the con-
(p. 161) If any fault arises with the electrical functions of trol panels in each respective door. The driver's
• Operating power windows (p. 162) the power windows, a reset sequence can be door has controls for operating all windows and
tested. also to activate the child safety locks.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function must
be reset to work properly. A reset must take
If the problem persists, or if it concerns the pan-

oramic roof or sunroof, contact a workshop.2
Reset the power window

1. Start with the window in closed position.
2. Then operate it in the manual position 3 Driver's door control panel.
times upwards to closed position.
Electric child safety locks* that deactivate the
> The system is initiated automatically. controls in the rear doors to prevent doors or
windows from being opened from the inside.
Related information
• Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds Controls for rear windows.
(p. 160)
Controls for front windows.
• Operating power windows (p. 162)
The power windows are equipped with pinch pro-
tection. If any fault arises with the pinch protec-
tion, a reset sequence can be tested.
2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. }}
|| WARNING Operating power windows

Using the driver's door control panel, all power
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the moving parts. windows can be operated - using the control
panels in the other doors operates the power
• Always operate the windows with caution. window in the individual door.
• Do not allow children to play with the The power windows are equipped with pinch pro-
controls. tection. If any fault arises with the pinch protec-
tion, a reset sequence can be tested.
• Never leave children alone in the car.
• Remember to always switch off the power
WARNING
supply to the power windows by setting
the car's electrical system in ignition posi- Children, other passengers or objects may be
tion 0, and then take the remote control trapped by the moving parts.
Operating the power windows.
key with you when leaving the car. • Always operate the windows with caution. Operating without auto. Move one of the
• Never put an object or part of the body • Do not allow children to play with the controls gently up or down. The power win-
through the windows, even if the car's controls. dows move up or down as long as the control
electrical system is fully disconnected. is held in position.
• Remember to always switch off the power Operating with auto. Move one of the con-
Related information supply to the power windows by setting trols up or down to the end position and
• Operating power windows (p. 162) the car's electrical system in ignition posi- release it. The window runs automatically to
• Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds tion 0, and then take the remote control its end position.
(p. 160) key with you when leaving the car. In order for the power windows to be used, the
• ignition position must be I or II. The power win-
Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 161) • Never put an object or part of the body
dows can be operated for a few minutes after the
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected. car has been switched off and after the ignition
has been switched off - although not after a door
has been opened. Only one control panel can be
operated at a time.
It can also be operated using the remote control
key, keyless opening* with the door handle or the
central locking button.
WARNING • Locking and unlocking with the remote con- Rearview and door mirrors
trol key (p. 237) The rearview mirrors and door mirrors are used
Check that children or other passengers are
not at risk of crushing when all the windows • Locking and unlocking from inside the car to give the driver better visibility to the rear.
are closed with: (p. 263)
Interior rearview mirror
• keyless closing* The interior rearview mirror is adjusted easily by
• central locking button angling it manually. The interior rearview mirror
can be fitted with HomeLink*, automatic dim-
• remote control key.
ming* and compass*.
NOTE Door mirrors

One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
WARNING
when the rear windows are open is to also
open the front windows slightly. Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal
vision. Objects may appear to be further away
than they actually are.
NOTE
The windows cannot be opened at speeds The door mirror positions are adjusted with the
above approx. 180 km/h (approx. 112 mph), joystick in the driver's door control panel. There
but they can be closed. are also a number of automatic settings that can
be linked to the memory function buttons for the
The driver always bears responsibility for fol- power seat*.
lowing traffic regulations in force.
Related information
Related information • HomeLink®* (p. 484)
• Power windows (p. 161) • Compass (p. 487)
• Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds • Adjusting rearview mirror dimming (p. 164)
(p. 160)
• Angling the door mirrors (p. 165)
• Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 161)
• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 260)
}}
• Storing memory function in power operated Adjusting rearview mirror dimming Automatic dimming*
front seat* (p. 180) Bright light from behind could be reflected in the Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed
• Activating and deactivating the heated rear rearview mirrors and dazzle the driver. Use dim- by the interior rearview and door mirrors. Auto-
window and door mirrors (p. 216) ming when disturbed by light from behind. matic dimming is always active while driving, apart
from when gearbox reverse position is selected.
Manual dimming
The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with a NOTE
control in the mirror's lower edge.
When sensitivity is changed there is no imme-
diately noticeable change in dimming, but the
change will be complete after a while.
Dimming sensitivity will affect both the interior

rearview mirror and the door mirrors.
display.
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Convenience.
3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light.
Control for manual dimming. The interior rearview mirror contains two sensors
1. Use dimming by moving the control in - one forward facing and one rearward facing -
towards the passenger compartment. that work together to identify and eliminate daz-
zling light. The forward facing sensor detects
2. Return to normal mode by moving the control ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor
towards the windscreen. detects the light from vehicle headlights behind.
The control for manual dimming is not available For the door mirrors to be equipped with auto-
on mirrors with automatic dimming. matic dimming, the interior rearview mirror must
also be equipped with automatic dimming.
NOTE Angling the door mirrors Resetting to neutral

To ensure better visibility to the rear, the door Mirrors that have been moved out of position by
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking an external force must be reset electrically to the
mirrors need to be set to the preferences of the
permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in neutral position for electric retracting/extending
driver. There are a number of automatic settings
the seats or in the cargo area in such a way to work correctly.
that can also be linked to the memory function
that light is prevented from reaching the sen-
buttons for the power seat*. 1. Fold in the door mirrors by pressing down
sors, then the dimming function of the interior
rearview and door mirrors is reduced. the L and R buttons simultaneously.
Using controls for door mirrors
2. Fold them out again by pressing the L and R
Related information buttons simultaneously.
• Rearview and door mirrors (p. 163) 3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
• Angling the door mirrors (p. 165) The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Folding in rearview mirrors electrically*

The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces.
1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously
(ignition position must be at least I).
2. Release them after approximately 1 second.
Controls for door mirrors. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully
The door mirror positions are adjusted with the retracted position.
joystick in the driver's door control panel. Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door mir- R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automati-
ror or the R button for the right-hand door cally stop in the fully extended position.
mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
Angling during parking3
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the The door mirror can be angled down for the
centre. driver to view the side of the road when parking
3. Press the L or R button again. The light for example.
should no longer be illuminated.
3 Only in combination with power seat with memory buttons*. }}
|| – Engage reverse gear and press the L or R 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top Panorama roof*
button. view. The panorama roof is divided into two glass sec-
Note that the button may need to be pressed 2. Press My Car Mirrors and Convenience. tions. The front section can be opened vertically
twice, depending on whether it was already pre- at the rear edge (ventilation position) or horizon-
selected. The button flashes when the door mir- 3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to acti- tally (open position). The rear section is fixed
ror is angled down. When reverse gear is disen- vate/deactivate. roof glass.
gaged, the door mirror automatically starts to
Related information The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and a
return after approx. 3 seconds and then reaches
its original position after approx. 8 seconds.
• Rearview and door mirrors (p. 163) sun blind made of perforated fabric and located
under the glass roof to provide extra protection
• Adjusting rearview mirror dimming (p. 164)
from factors such as strong sunlight.
Automatic angling during parking3 • Storing memory function in power operated
With this setting, the door mirror is automatically front seat* (p. 180)
angled down when reverse gear is selected. The
folded position is preset and cannot be adjusted. • Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 216)
You can make the door mirror return to its origi-
nal position by pressing the L or R button twice.
view.
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Convenience.
3. Under Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse,
select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to
activate/deactivate and to select which
review mirror should be angled. The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated
with a control located in the roof.
Automatic retraction when locking*
When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote It can also be operated using the remote control
control key the door mirrors are automatically key, keyless opening* with the door handle or the
retracted/extended. central locking button.
3 Only in combination with power seat with memory buttons*.
In order that the panoramic roof and the sun IMPORTANT • Locking and unlocking with the remote con-
blind can be operated, the car's electrical system trol key (p. 237)
must be in ignition position I or II. • Remove ice and snow before opening the
panoramic roof. • Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 263)
WARNING • Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
has frozen closed.
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the moving parts.
• Always operate the windows with caution. Wind deflector
• Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
• Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the power windows by setting
the car's electrical system in ignition posi-
tion 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
• Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is
raised when the panorama roof is in the open
IMPORTANT position.
• Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted. Related information
• Do not place any heavy objects on the • Operating the panorama roof* (p. 168)
panoramic roof. • Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's*
sun blind (p. 170)
• Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 160)
• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 260)
Operating the panorama roof* IMPORTANT The movement of the roof is stopped if the con-
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated trol is released during manual operation, or when
with a control in the roof panel and both are
• Remove ice and snow before opening the the glass reaches the comfort position4 or the
panoramic roof. maximum opening or closing position. The move-
equipped with pinch protection.
WARNING
• Do not operate the panoramic roof if it ment of both panoramic roof and sun blind are
has frozen closed. also stopped if the roof control is operated again
Children, other passengers or objects may be in the opposite direction to the current direction
trapped by the moving parts. of movement.
In order that the panoramic roof and the sun
• Always operate the windows with caution. blind can be operated, the car's electrical system The panoramic roof and the sun blind are also
• Do not allow children to play with the must be in ignition position I or II. equipped with pinch protection.
controls. It can also be operated using the remote control
• Never leave children alone in the car. key, keyless opening* with the door handle or the NOTE
• Remember to always switch off the power central locking button. For manual opening, the sun blind must be
supply to the power windows by setting fully open before the panoramic roof can be
the car's electrical system in ignition posi- WARNING opened. When the procedure is reversed, the
tion 0, and then take the remote control Check that children or other passengers are panoramic roof must be fully closed before
key with you when leaving the car. not at risk of crushing when all the windows the sun blind can be fully closed.
• Never put an object or part of the body are closed with:
through the windows, even if the car's • keyless closing*
electrical system is fully disconnected.
• central locking button
IMPORTANT
• Do not open the panoramic roof when
IMPORTANT
load carriers are fitted.
Check that the panoramic roof is properly
• Do not place any heavy objects on the
closed when closing.
panoramic roof.
4 Comfort position is a position where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.
Open and close ventilation position Fully open and close the panoramic Automatic operation
roof using the roof control 1. Open the sun blind to maximum position -
press the control backward to the position
for automatic opening and release.
2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position
- press the control backwards a second time
to the position for automatic opening and
release.
3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum posi-
tion - press the control backwards a third
time to the position for automatic opening
and release.
Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge. Close by repeating the preceding procedure in
Open by pressing the control upward once. Operation, manual mode reverse order - press the control forward/down-
ward to the automatic closing position instead.
Close by pressing the control downward Operation, automatic mode Automatic operation - rapid opening or
once.
Manual operation closing
When the ventilation position is selected the front
1. To open the sun blind - press the control The panoramic roof and sun blind can be opened
glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If the sun
backwards to the position for manual open- or closed simultaneously:
blind is fully closed when ventilation position is
selected, then it opens automatically approx. ing. – To open - press the control rearward to the
50 mm (approx. 2 inches). 2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position automatic operation position twice and
- press the control backwards a second time release.
The sun blind follows automatically if the panor-
amic roof is closed from ventilation position. to the position for manual opening. – To close - press the control forward/down-
3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum posi- ward to the automatic operation position
tion - press the control backwards a third twice and release.
time to the position for manual opening.
Related information
Close by repeating the preceding procedure in • Panorama roof* (p. 166)
reverse order - press the control forward/down-
• Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's*
ward to the manual closing position instead. sun blind (p. 170)
}}
• Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds Automatic closing of the panoramic • Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 160) roof's* sun blind (p. 160)
• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 260) With this function, the sun blind is closed auto- • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 260)
matically 15 minutes after the car has been
• Locking and unlocking with the remote con- • Locking and unlocking with the remote con-
trol key (p. 237) locked if it is parked in hot weather. This is in trol key (p. 237)
order to lower the passenger compartment tem-
• Locking and unlocking from inside the car perature and protect the car's upholstery from • Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 263) sun-fading. (p. 263)
The function is deactivated when the car is sup-
plied from the factory and can be activated or
deactivated in the centre display.
display.
2. Press My Car Locking.
Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to
activate/deactivate.
NOTE
The sun blind is also closed when all windows
are closed with:
• keyless closing*
• central locking button
Related information
• Operating the panorama roof* (p. 168)
Using windscreen wipers Intermittent wiping • Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 172)
The windscreen wiper cleans the windscreen. Set the number of sweeps per time unit • Using the rain sensor's memory function
Different settings for the windscreen wiper are with the thumbwheel when intermittent (p. 173)
made with the right-hand steering wheel stalk wiping is selected.
switch.
• Using the rear window wiper and washer
Continuous wiping (p. 175)
Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to • Filling washer fluid (p. 642)
sweep at normal speed.
• Wiper blades in service position (p. 641)
Raise the stalk switch further for the wip- • Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 640)
ers to sweep at high speed.
• Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 639)
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers - ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any
snow or ice on the windscreen and rear win-
dow is scraped away.
Right-hand stalk switch.

IMPORTANT
Thumbwheel, used to set rain sensor sensi-
tivity and wiper swipe frequency. Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen
Single sweep must be wet when the windscreen wipers are
Lower the stalk switch and release to operating.
make one sweep.
Windscreen wipers off Related information

Move the stalk switch to position 0 to • Using the rain sensor (p. 172)
switch off the windscreen wipers. • Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 174)
• Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 176)
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* Using the rain sensor Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sen-
The washer nozzles are heated automatically in The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- sor button .
cold weather to prevent the washer fluid from screen wipers based on how much water it Press the stalk switch down for the wipers to
freezing. detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitiv- make an extra sweep.
ity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel on the
right-hand stalk switch. Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitiv-
Related information ity and downward for lower sensitivity. An extra
• Using the rain sensor (p. 172) sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned
• Using windscreen and headlamp washers upward.
(p. 174)
Deactivating the rain sensor
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
sensor button or moving the stalk switch
• Using the rain sensor's memory function up to another wiper program.
(p. 173)
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in
ignition position 0 or when the engine is
(p. 175)
switched off.
• Filling washer fluid (p. 642)
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically when
Right-hand stalk switch. wiper blades are set in service position. The rain
• Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 640)
Rain sensor button sensor is reactivated when service mode has
• Replacing the wiper blade, rear window been deactivated.
(p. 639) Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
• Using windscreen wipers (p. 171) IMPORTANT
When the rain sensor is activated, the rain sensor
symbol is shown in the driver display. The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Deacti-
Activating the rain sensor vate the rain sensor while the car is running
When activating the rain sensor, the car must be or when the car's electrical system is in igni-
running or the electrical system in ignition position position I or II. The symbol in the driver
tion I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk display extinguishes.
switch must be in position 0 or in the position for
a single sweep.
Related information Using the rain sensor's memory • Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 640)
• Using windscreen and headlamp washers function • Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 174) The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- (p. 639)
• Using automatic rear windscreen wiping screen wipers based on how much water it
when reversing (p. 176) detects on the windscreen.
• Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 172) Activating/deactivating the memory
• Using the rain sensor's memory function function
(p. 173) The memory function for the rain sensor can be
• Using the rear window wiper and washer activated in such a way that the rain sensor but-
(p. 175) ton does not need to be depressed each time the
car is started:
display.
2. Press My Car Wipers.
(p. 639) 3. Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/
• Using windscreen wipers (p. 171) deactivate the memory function.
Related information
• Using the rain sensor (p. 172)
(p. 174)
• Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 172)
(p. 175)
Using windscreen and headlamp IMPORTANT • Filling washer fluid (p. 642)
washers • Wiper blades in service position (p. 641)
Avoid activating the washer system when it is
Windscreen and headlamp washers clean the
frozen or the washer reservoir is empty, other- • Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 640)
windscreen and headlamps. Windscreen and
wise there is a risk of damaging the pump. • Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
headlamp washers are started using the right-
hand stalk switch. (p. 639)
Headlamp washing* • Using windscreen wipers (p. 171)
Starting windscreen and headlamp To save fluid, the headlamps are washed auto-
washers matically at a defined interval when the head-
lamps are switched on.
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid
remains in the reservoir and the message
Washer fluid Level low, refill, together with the
symbol, is shown in the driver display, then
the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is
switched off. This is to prioritise cleaning the
windscreen and the visibility through it. The head-
lamps are only washed if main or dipped beam is
switched on.
Washing function, right-hand stalk switch.
Related information
– Move the right-hand stalk switch toward the • Using the rain sensor (p. 172)
steering wheel to start the windscreen and
headlamp washers.
> The windscreen wipers will make several
more sweeps once the stalk switch has • Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 172)
been released. • Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 173)
(p. 175)
Using the rear window wiper and • Wiper blades in service position (p. 641)
washer • Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 640)
Rear window wiper and washer clean the rear
window. Washing/wiping is started and settings (p. 639)
are changed by means of the right-hand steering
wheel stalk switch. • Using windscreen wipers (p. 171)
Activating the rear window wiper and

washer
NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with over-
heating protection which means that the Select for intermittent wiping with the
motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear rear window wiper.
window wiper works again after a cooling- Select for continuous speed with the
down period. rear window wiper.
– Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk
switch forward to start rear window washing
and wiping.
Related information
(p. 174)
• Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 173)
Using automatic rear windscreen

wiping when reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are on initiates rear window wiping. The
function stops when reverse gear is disengaged.

display.
2. Press My Car Wipers.
3. Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deacti-
vate wiping when reversing.
If the rear window wiper is already on at continu-
ous speed, no change is made.
Related information
(p. 174)
(p. 173)
(p. 175)
(p. 639)
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Manual front seat Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
The car's front seats have different setting the control up/down. er's seat* (p. 185)
options for optimum seating comfort. Change the backrest inclination by turning
the control knob.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat before
setting off, never while driving. Make sure that
the seat is in locked position in order to avoid
personal injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident.
Related information
• Power front seat* (p. 179)
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cush- • Storing memory function in power operated
ion* by pumping up/down.1 front seat* (p. 180)
Change the length* of the seat cushion by • Using stored memory in a powered front seat
pulling the lever up and moving the seat (p. 181)
cushion forward/backward by hand. • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting (p. 182)
the handle and adjusting the distance to the • Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
steering wheel and pedals. Check that the the front seat (p. 183)
seat is locked after the position has been
adjusted.
• Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 181)
Change the lumbar support* by pressing the

• Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 183)
button upward/downward/forward/back.
• Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 184)
1 Only applies to the driver's seat.
Power front seat* • Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in Adjusting the power front seat*
The car's front seats have different setting the front seat (p. 183) Set to desired sitting position using the control
options for optimum seating comfort. The power • Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 181) on the front seat's seating section. To activate
seat can be moved forwards/backwards and the multi-function control and set the various
upwards/downwards. The front edge of the seat (p. 183) comfort functions, turn the control upwards/
cushion can be raised/lowered as well as downwards.
adjusted in length* and the backrest inclination • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
can be changed. The lumbar support can be seat (p. 184)
adjusted upward/downward/forward/backward. • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 185)
The power seats have overload protection which
is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this
happens, remove the object and then operate the
seat again.
The seat can be adjusted for a period of time
after unlocking the door without the engine run-
ning. Seat adjustment can always be performed
when the engine is running. Adjustment can also
be performed for a period of time after the
engine has been switched off. To activate the multi-function control and set
the various comfort functions, turn the con-
Related information trol* upwards/downwards.
Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge by
• Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 179) adjusting the control up/down.
• Storing memory function in power operated Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting
front seat* (p. 180) the control up/down.
• Using stored memory in a powered front seat Move the seat forward/backward by adjust-
(p. 181) ing the control forward/backward.
• Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat Change the backrest inclination by adjusting
(p. 182) the control forward/backward.
}}
|| Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) Storing memory function in power 3. Within three seconds, press and hold the 1
can be made at a time. operated front seat* or 2 button.
The backrests of the front seats cannot be low- The memory function stores settings for the seat, > When the position has been stored in the
ered fully forward. door mirrors, and head-up display*. selected memory button an acoustic sig-
nal sounds and the light indicator in the M
Related information It is possible to store two different settings with button extinguishes.
• Manual front seat (p. 178) the memory function. The memory function key-
pad is located either on one front door or both*. If none of the memory buttons is depressed
• Power front seat* (p. 179) within three seconds then the M button extin-
• Storing memory function in power operated guishes and no storing takes place.
front seat* (p. 180) The seat must be adjusted again before a new
• Using stored memory in a powered front seat memory can be set.
(p. 181)
Related information
• Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 182)
• Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 183) • Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 179)
• Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 181) • Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 181)
(p. 183) • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
Button M for storing settings. (p. 182)
seat (p. 184) Memory button • Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 183)
• Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- Memory button
er's seat* (p. 185) • Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 181)
Store setting • Adjusting the side support* in the front seat

1. Adjust seat, door mirrors and head-up display (p. 183)
to the desired position. • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 184)
2. Press and hold the M button depressed. The
light indicator in the button illuminates. • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 185)
Using stored memory in a powered WARNING Massage settings in the front seat*
front seat Both the multi-function control* on the seat and
The memory function stores settings for the seat,
• Because the driver's seat can be adjusted
the centre display can be used in order to
with the ignition off, children should never
door mirrors, and head-up display*. change the settings. The range of settings is
be left unattended in the vehicle.
shown in the centre display.
Using a stored setting • Movement of the seat can be STOPPED
A stored setting can be used with the front door at any time by pressing any button on the
either open or closed: power seat control panel.
Open front door • Do not adjust the seat while driving.
– Depress one of the memory buttons 1 or 2 • Make sure there is nothing under the
with a short press. Seat, door mirrors and seats when they are being adjusted.
head-up display move and then stop at the
positions stored in the selected memory but-
Related information
ton.
Closed front door
– Hold one of the memory buttons 1 or 2
depressed until seat, door mirrors and head- • Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 179)
Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's
up display stop in the positions that are • Storing memory function in power operated seating section.
stored in the selected memory button. front seat* (p. 180)
Settings for massage
If the memory button is released, the movement • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
The following setting options are available for
of the seat, door mirrors and head-up display will (p. 182)
massage:
be stopped.
the front seat (p. 183) • On/Off: Select On/Off in order to switch
on/off the massage function.
• Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset massage
• Adjusting the side support* in the front seat programs. Select between Swell, Tread,
(p. 183) Advanced, Lumbar and Shoulder.
• Intensity: Select between Low, Normal and
seat (p. 184) High.
• Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
• Speed: Select between Slow, Normal and
er's seat* (p. 185) Fast. }}
|| Restarting massage Adjusting massage settings* in the Related information

The massage function is deactivated automati- front seat • Manual front seat (p. 178)
cally after 20 minutes. Reactivation of the func- Both the multi-function control on the seat and • Power front seat* (p. 179)
tion is performed manually. the centre display can be used in order to
change the settings. The range of settings is
– Tap on Restart, which is shown in the centre
display, to restart the selected massage pro- shown in the centre display*. • Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 180)
gram.
Adjusting massage settings* in the • Using stored memory in a powered front seat
> The massage program restarts. If no
front seat (p. 181)
action is taken, the message remains
The front seat has massage in the backrest. The
shown in the top view.
massage is performed by air cushions that can • Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
Related information massage with different settings.
• Manual front seat (p. 178) • Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 181)
The massage function can only be activated
• Power front seat* (p. 179) when the car's engine is running. • Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 183)
• Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 179) 1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
the control upward/downward. The seat set- • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
• Storing memory function in power operated
tings view will be shown on the centre dis- seat (p. 184)
play. • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
• Using stored memory in a powered front seat er's seat* (p. 185)
(p. 181) 2. Select Massage in the seat settings view.
• Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat 3. To choose between the different massage
(p. 182) functions, select either directly in the touch
screen or by moving the cursor up/down
using the multi-function control's upper/
lower button. Change the setting in the
• Adjusting the side support* in the front seat selected function by selecting directly in the
(p. 183) touch screen or by pressing the arrows, or by
• Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front using the multi-function control's front/rear
seat (p. 184) button.
er's seat* (p. 185)
Adjusting the length of the seat 2. Select Cushion extension in the seat set- Adjusting the side support* in the
cushion in the front seat tings view. front seat
Both the multi-function control* on the seat and • Press the front section of the four-way Both the multi-function control* on the seat and
the centre display can be used in order to button (round) to extend the seat cushion. the centre display can be used in order to
change the settings. The range of settings is change the settings. The range of settings is
• Press the rear section of the four-way
button to retract the seat cushion.
Related information
• Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 181)
(p. 182)
Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's
seating section.
seating section.
To activate the multi-function control, turn the
The sides of the backrest can be adjusted to pro-
(p. 183)
control upwards/downward. vide side support.
Adjusting the seat cushion seat (p. 184) To adjust the side support:
Seat cushion length can be adjusted by using the 1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
multi-function control on the seat.
er's seat* (p. 185) the control upwards/downwards . The
1. Activate the multi-function control by turning seat settings view will be shown in the centre
the control upward/downward. The seat set- display.
tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
play.
}}
|| 2. Select Side bolsters in the seat settings Adjusting the lumbar support* in the 1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
view. front seat the control upward/downward. The seat set-
tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
• Press the front section of the four-way Activate the multi-function control* by turning the
play.
button to increase side support . control upwards/downwards. The seat settings
view will be shown on the centre display. 2. Select Lumbar in the seat settings view.
• Press the rear section of the four-way
button to decrease side support. • Press the four-way button (round)
upwards/downwards to move the lumbar
Related information support upwards/downwards.
• Press the front section of the four-way
• Power front seat* (p. 179) button to increase lumbar support.
• Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 179) • Press the rear section of the four-way
• Storing memory function in power operated button to decrease lumbar support.
Related information
• Using stored memory in a powered front seat • Manual front seat (p. 178)
(p. 181)
(p. 182) Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's • Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 179)

seating section. • Storing memory function in power operated
4-way lumbar support provides options to adjust front seat* (p. 180)
the lumbar support. Use it by pressing the four- • Using stored memory in a powered front seat
• Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 181) way button located on the side of the seat's seat- (p. 181)
• Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front ing section. The lumbar support can be adjusted
seat (p. 184) forwards/backwards and upwards/downwards. • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 182)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the
er's seat* (p. 185) • Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
front seat the front seat (p. 183)
To adjust the lumbar support: • Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 181)
• Adjusting the side support* in the front seat Adjusting the passenger seat from
(p. 183) the driver's seat*
• Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- The front passenger seat can be adjusted from
er's seat* (p. 185) the driver's seat.
Activating the function

The function is activated via the function view in
the centre display:
Press the Adjust Passenger
Seat button to activate.
Move the passenger seat forward/backward

by adjusting the control forward/backward.
Change the passenger seat's backrest incli-
Adjust passenger seat nation by adjusting the control forward/back-
From activation of the function, the driver must ward.
adjust the passenger seat within 10 seconds. If
no adjustment is made within this time the func- Related information
tion is deactivated. • Manual front seat (p. 178)
The driver adjusts the passenger seat using the • Power front seat* (p. 179)
controls on the driver's seat: • Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 179)
• Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 181)
(p. 182)
}}
• Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 181) Lowering the backrests in the rear IMPORTANT
• Adjusting the side support* in the front seat seat
The armrest* for the centre seat must be
(p. 183) The rear seat's backrest is divided into two
raised before lowering the seat.
parts. The two parts can be folded forward indi-
vidually. If the car has private locking, the tailgate must
seat (p. 184)
be closed before lowering the seat.
WARNING
• Adjust the seat and fix it before driving NOTE
away. Take care when adjusting the seat.
Uncontrolled or careless adjustment can The front seats may need to be pushed for-
lead to trapping injuries. wards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests can
• When loading long objects, they must be fully folded forward.
always be strapped in securely to avoid
injury and damage during sudden braking.
• Always switch off the engine and apply
the parking brake when loading and
unloading the car.
• For cars with automatic gearbox, set the
gear selector in P to prevent it from being
moved by mistake.
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down. The
seat belts must not be connected either. Oth-
erwise there is a risk of damaging the rear
seat upholstery.
Lowering the backrest For electronically controlled folding of backrests: 3. The backrest disengages from the lock and
is automatically lowered to the horizontal
Car with electronic folding 1. Ensure that there are no occupants or
position.
objects in the rear seat.
2. Lower the centre seat's head restraint man-
ually.
3. Hold the button for folding depressed. The
buttons are marked L and R for left and
right-hand backrest sections respectively.
4. The backrests are lowered automatically to
horizontal position. The head restraints are
also lowered automatically.
To lower the backrest manually:
If the car is equipped with electronic folding of

the rear seat* there are buttons located in the
cargo area. The backrests can also be lowered
manually.
WARNING
Pay attention that people are not at risk of
being trapped during the automatic folding of
the rear seat. Since this takes place automati-
cally on the press of a button, no one must be
on or too close to the rear seat.
To facilitate folding of the rear seat, the car must 1. Lower the centre head restraint manually .
be stationary and the tailgate open. 2. Pull the handles located in the car's left and
right-hand rear seat backrests forward .
}}
|| Car without electronic folding If the right-hand section is being lowered - WARNING
The rear seat consists of two parts: release and adjust the centre backrest head
restraint. Check that the backrests and head restraints
• The right-hand seat and centre seat are in the rear seat are locked properly after
folded as one unit. Pull up the backrest's locking handle being folded up.
• The left-hand seat is folded separately. while folding the backrest forward at the The head restraints of the outer seats must
same time. The locking handle for the head always be raised when there are passengers
restraints is pulled up automatically when the on any of the rear seats.
backrest is folded. A red indicator on the lock
catch shows that the backrest is no Raising the backrest
longer locked in place. Raising the backrest to upright position is carried
out manually:
NOTE 1. Move the backrest up/down manually.
When the backrests have been lowered, the 2. Press the backrest until the lock engages.
head restraints may need to be moved for-
ward slightly so as not to make contact with 3. The head restraint is raised manually.
the seat cushion. 4. If necessary, raise the centre seat's head
restraint.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
Related information
• Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat
WARNING (p. 189)
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it is
still showing then the backrest is not locked
in place.
188
Adjusting the head restraints in the Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
rear seat outer head restraints*
Adjust the centre seat head restraint according
to the height of the passenger. Fold down the
outer seat head restraints to improve rearward
visibility.
Adjusting the head restraint, centre

seat
To lower the head restraint, the button (see illus-

tration) must be depressed while the restraint is
carefully moved down. The outer head restraints can be retracted via the
centre display's function view. You can lower the
WARNING head restraints in ignition position 0.
The centre seat head restraint must be in its
lowest position when the centre seat is not
used. When the centre seat is used, the head
restraint must be correctly adjusted to the
height of the passenger so that it covers the
The centre seat's head restraint must be
whole of the back of the head if possible.
adjusted according to the passenger's height so
that, if possible, the whole of the back of the
head is covered. Slide it up manually as required.
}}
|| Press the Headrest Fold but- Steering wheel controls and horn
ton to activate/deactivate low- The steering wheel houses the horn and con-
ering. trols for e.g. the driver support systems and
voice recognition.
Move the head restraint back manually until a

click is heard.
WARNING
Do not lower the outer head restraints if there
are passengers in any of the outer rear seats.
WARNING
The head restraint must be in locked position
after being folded up. Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel.
Controls for driver support systems2.
Manual lowering of the outer head
restraints, rear seat Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing in
For cars with electric rear seat folding*, the outer an automatic gearbox.
head restraints are folded manually with the con- Controls for voice recognition, head-up dis-
trol on the upper side of the seat; see figure . play settings, and menu, message and phone
For cars without electric folding, fold down the handling.
outer head restraints with the inner control on the Related information
upper side of the seat; see figure . • Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 186)
2 Speed Limiter*, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist*.
Horn Steering lock Adjusting the steering wheel

The steering lock makes steering difficult if the The steering wheel can be adjusted in different
car is e.g. taken unlawfully. A mechanical noise positions.
can be perceived when the steering lock locks
or unlocks.
Activating the steering lock

The steering lock is activated when the car is
locked from the outside and the engine is
switched off. If the car is left unlocked then the
steering lock will lock automatically after a while.
Deactivating the steering lock

The steering lock is deactivated when the car is
The horn is located in the centre of the steering wheel.
unlocked from outside. If the car is not locked,
Related information the steering lock will deactivate if the remote
• Steering lock (p. 191) control key is inside the passenger compartment The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for
and the car is started by turning the start knob depth.
clockwise to unlock the steering lock.
Steering wheel adjustment can be made in differ-
Related information ent ways depending on whether or not the car is
• Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 190) equipped with knee airbag3.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away. The steering wheel must never
be adjusted while driving.
With speed related power steering the level of

steering force can be adjusted. Steering force is
3 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets. }}
191
|| regulated according to the car's speed in order to Without knee airbag

give the driver enhanced road responsiveness.
With knee airbag
Lever for steering wheel adjustment.

1. Pull the lever backwards to release the steer-
Lever for steering wheel adjustment. ing wheel.
1. Push the lever forwards to release the steer- 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that
ing wheel. suits you.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that 3. Push the lever forwards to secure the steer-
suits you. ing wheel. If the lever is stiff, press the steer-
ing wheel lightly at the same time as you
3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel
move the lever back.
in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering
wheel lightly at the same time as you move Related information
the lever back.
• Steering lock (p. 191)
• Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 190)
192
CLIMATE
CLIMATE
Climate Climate zones 4-zone climate*

The car is equipped with electronic climate con- The number of climate zones that the car is divi-
trol. The climate control system cools or heats as ded into governs the options for setting different
well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger temperatures for different parts of the passenger
compartment. compartment.
All climate control system functions are con-
trolled from the centre display and physical but- 2-zone climate
tons in the centre console.
Some functions for the rear seat can also be
controlled from the climate controls* at the rear
of the tunnel console.
Related information
• Climate zones (p. 194) Climate zones with 4-zone climate.
• Climate control - sensors (p. 195) With 4-zone climate the temperature in the pas-
senger compartment can be set separately for
• Perceived temperature (p. 195)
the left and right-hand sides in both the front and
• Controlling climate control with voice recog- rear seat.
nition (p. 196)
Climate zones with 2-zone climate. Related information
• Parking climate* (p. 222)
With 2-zone climate, the temperature in the pas- • Climate (p. 194)
• Heater* (p. 229)
senger compartment can be set separately for
• Air quality (p. 197) the left and right-hand sides.
• Air distribution (p. 200)
CLIMATE
Climate control - sensors With the Interior Air Quality System* there is also Perceived temperature
The climate control system has a number of sen- an air quality sensor that is fitted into the climate The climate control system regulates the climate
sors to help control the climate in the car. control system air intake. in the passenger compartment based on the
perceived temperature, not on actual tempera-
Sensor location Related information ture.
• Climate (p. 194)
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 198) The temperature you select in the passenger
compartment corresponds to the physically per-
ceived temperature as affected by factors such
as the ambient temperature, air speed, humidity,
solar radiation, etc. in and around the car at the
time.
The system includes a sun sensor which detects
on which side the sun is shining into the passen-
ger compartment. This means that the tempera-
ture can differ between the right and left-hand
side's air vents despite the controls being set for
Moisture sensor - in the casing by the inte- the same temperature on both sides.
rior rearview mirror.
Related information
Outside temperature sensor - in the right- • Climate (p. 194)
hand door mirror.
Sun sensor - on the upper side of the instru-
ment panel.
Temperature sensor for the passenger com-
partment - by the physical buttons in the
centre console.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with cloth-
ing or other objects.
CLIMATE
Controlling climate control with • "Air condition on"/"Air condition off" - • "Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off seat
voice recognition1 activates/deactivates the air conditioning. ventilation" - activates/deactivates the seat
Voice recognition commands for the climate • "Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" - ventilation*.
control system to e.g. change temperature, acti- activates/deactivates the air circulation. • "Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat
vate a heated seat* or change fan level. • "Turn on defroster "/"Turn off defroster" ventilation" - raises/lowers the setting for
Press and say one of the following com- - activates/deactivates defrosting of windows the ventilated seat* one step.
mands: and door mirrors.
Related information
• "Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate • "Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max • Climate (p. 194)
control and shows examples of commands. defroster off" - activates/deactivates the
max defroster. • Voice recognition (p. 137)
• "Set temperature to X degrees" - sets
• Using voice recognition (p. 138)
the desired temperature. • "Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off
electric defroster" - activates/deactivates • Settings for voice recognition (p. 140)
• "Raise temperature"/"Lower
temperature" - raise/lower the temperature the heated windscreen*.
setting one step. • "Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear
• "Sync temperature" - synchronises the defroster" - activates/deactivates the
temperature for all climate zones in the car heated rear window and door mirrors.
with the temperature set for the driver's side. • "Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn
• "Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the steering wheel heat off" - activates/deac-
desired air flow. tivates the heated steering wheel*.
• "Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" - closes • "Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower
the desired air flow. steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the
setting for the heated steering wheel* one
• "Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" - changes
step.
the air flow to Max/Off.
• "Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat"
• "Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" -
- activates/deactivates the heated seat*.
raises/lowers the fan level one step.
• "Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" -
• "Turn on auto" - activates automatic climate
raises/lowers the setting for the heated
regulation.
seat* one step.
CLIMATE
Air quality • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 198) Clean Zone*
The materials selected for the passenger com- • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 198) The Clean Zone function checks and indicates
partment and the air cleaning system ensure that whether or not all conditions have been met for
the air quality in the passenger compartment is
• Passenger compartment filter (p. 199)
good air quality in the passenger compartment.
high.
Materials in the passenger

compartment
The interior of the passenger compartment is
designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even
for people with contact allergies and for asthma
sufferers.
Tested materials have been developed in order to
minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger
compartment and to contribute to making the
passenger compartment easier to keep clean.
The carpets in both the passenger compartment The indicator is visible in the climate view in
and the cargo area are removable and easy to the centre display.
remove and clean. The indicator is visible in the climate row
Use cleaning agents and car care products rec- when the climate view is not open.
ommended by Volvo to clean the interior. If the conditions have not been met then the
Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions
Air cleaning system have been met, this is indicated by the text
In addition to the passenger compartment filter, changing colour to blue.
Clean Zone Interior Package* and the Interior Air
Conditions that are checked:
Quality System* also help to maintain high air
quality in the passenger compartment. • That all doors and the tailgate are closed.
Related information • That all side windows and the panorama

roof* are closed.
• Clean Zone* (p. 197)
• That the air quality system Interior Air Quality
System* is activated.
}}
CLIMATE
|| • That the ventilation fan is activated. Clean Zone Interior Package* Interior Air Quality System*
• That the air recirculation is deactivated. Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully auto-
a series of modifications that keep the passen- matic air quality system that separates gases
NOTE ger compartment even clearer from allergy and and particles to reduce the levels of odours and
asthma-inducing substances. contaminants in the passenger compartment.
Clean Zone does not indicate that the air IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior
quality is good. It only indicates that the con- The following is included: Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passen-
ditions for good air quality have been met.
• An enhanced fan function that means that ger compartment from contaminants such as par-
the fan starts when the car is unlocked with ticles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-
Related information the remote control key. The fan fills the pas- level ozone.
• Air quality (p. 197) senger compartment with fresh air. The func- If the air quality sensor senses that the outside
tion starts when required and is disengaged
• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 198) air is contaminated, the air intake is closed and
automatically after a time or when one of the air recirculation is activated.
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 198) passenger compartment doors is opened.
• Passenger compartment filter (p. 199) The amount of time the fan runs is reduced
NOTE
gradually due to reduced need up until the
car is 4 years old. The air quality sensor must always be enabled
to ensure the best air in the passenger com-
• The fully automatic air quality system Interior
Air Quality System (IAQS). partment.
In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as
Related information to prevent misting.
In the event of misting, the defrost functions
for windscreen, side windows and rear win-
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 198) dow should be used.
• Passenger compartment filter (p. 199)
Related information
• Activating and deactivating the air quality
sensor* (p. 199)
CLIMATE
• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 198) Activating and deactivating the air Passenger compartment filter
• Passenger compartment filter (p. 199) quality sensor* All air entering the car's passenger compartment
The air quality sensor is part of the fully auto- is cleaned with a filter.
matic air quality system Interior Air Quality
System (IAQS). Replacing the passenger compartment
It is possible to set whether the air quality sensor filter
should be activated/deactivated. To maintain high climate system performance,
the filter must be changed at regular intervals.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the rec-
display. ommended replacement intervals. If the car is
2. Press Climate. used in a severely contaminated environment, it
may be necessary to replace the filter more often.
3. Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/deac-
tivate the air quality sensor.
NOTE
Related information There are different types of passenger com-
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 198) partment filter. Make sure that the correct fil-
ter is fitted.
Related information
• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 198)
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 198)
CLIMATE
Air distribution Changing air distribution

The climate control system distributes the The air distribution can be changed manually if
incoming air via a number of different vents in required.
the passenger compartment.
Automatic and manual air distribution

With auto-regulated climate control running the
air distribution takes place automatically. If nec-
essary, the air distribution can be controlled man-
ually.
Adjustable air vents

Some of the air vents in the car are adjustable, Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger com-
which means that you can open/close the vent to partment.
aim the air flow.
With 2-zone climate - four on the instrument
panel and one on each of the door pillars The air distribution buttons in the climate view.
between the front and rear doors. Air distribution - windscreen defroster vents
Addition with 4-zone climate* - two at the
rear of the tunnel console. Air distribution - air vents in instrument panel
and centre console
Related information Air distribution - air vents in the floor
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
• Changing air distribution (p. 200)
• Opening, closing and aiming the air vents 2. Press one or more of the air distribution but-
(p. 201) tons in order to open/close the correspond-
ing air flow.
• Table of air distribution options (p. 203)
> The air distribution is changed and the
buttons illuminate/extinguish.
CLIMATE
Related information Opening, closing and aiming the air Air vents for the rear seat:
• Air distribution (p. 200) vents
• Opening, closing and aiming the air vents Some air vents in the passenger compartment
(p. 201) can be opened, closed and aimed individually.
If the car's outer vents are aimed at the side win-
dows then misting can be eliminated.
If the car's outer vents are aimed inwards then, in
a hot climate, a comfortable environment is
obtained in the passenger compartment.
Opening and closing the air vents

Air vents for the front seat:
The air vent's thumbwheel2.

– Roll the thumbwheel in order to open/close
the air flow from the nozzle.
The longer the white lines on the thumb-
wheel that are visible, the higher the air flow.
Air vent knob2.

– Turn the knob in order to open/close the air
flow from the vent.
The air flow is at maximum when the marking
on the knob is in vertical position.
2 The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location. }}
201
CLIMATE
|| Aiming the air vents
The air vent's lever2.

– Move the lever sideways/vertically in order to
aim the air flow from the nozzle.
Related information
2 The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location.
202
CLIMATE
Table of air distribution options

The air distribution can be changed manually if
required. The following options are available for
setting.
Air distribution Purpose
If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate control.
Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air vents. Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate
(to achieve this, fan level must not be low).
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate.
other air vents.
Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air Provides heat or cooling to the floor.
vents.
}}
203
CLIMATE
|| Air distribution Purpose

Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument panel. Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates.
Some air flows from other air vents.
Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some air Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or
flows from other air vents. humid climate.
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool outdoor
floor. Some air flows from other air vents. temperatures.
Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instrument Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.
panel and air vents at the floor.
204
CLIMATE
Related information
• Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 201)
205
CLIMATE
Climate controls Main climate

The climate control system's functions are con- In addition to the climate row's functions, other
trolled from physical buttons in the centre con- main climate functions can also be controlled in
sole, the centre display and the climate controls the Main climate tab.
at the rear of the tunnel console*.
Physical buttons in centre console
Temperature controls for driver and passen-

ger side.
Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver
and front passenger seat, as well as heated
steering wheel*.
Button for access to the climate view. The
Button for heated windscreen* and max graphic on the button shows activated cli-
defroster. mate settings.
Button for heated rear window and door mir- Climate view in centre display
rors. One tap on the centre button in the climate row
gives access to the climate view. The climate view
Climate row in centre display is divided into the tabs:
The most common climate functions can be Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrosting
regulated from the climate row. • Main climate the windows and door mirrors.
• Rear climate* AC - Controls for air conditioning.
• Parking climate*
Recirc - Controls for air recirculation.
Change between the tabs by swiping left/right or
by pressing the respective heading. Controls for air distribution.
CLIMATE
Fan control for front seat (with 2-zone cli- Climate controls at rear of tunnel
mate, the control is shared with the rear console*
seat).
AUTO - Auto regulating the climate.
Rear climate control*

All climate functions for the rear seat can be
regulated in the Rear climate tab.
Controls for heated rear seat*.
Fan controls for rear seat.
Temperature controls for rear seat.
Locking/unlocking button on the climate

panel.
2nd row climate - Controls for climate func-
tionality in the rear seat. Fan controls for rear If the car is not equipped with a climate panel at
seat. the rear of the tunnel console, but has heated
rear seats*, there are physical buttons at the rear
Temperature controls for rear seat.
of the tunnel console for controlling these.
Controls for heated rear seat*. The climate panel has a screen lock to prevent
unintentional change of fan speed and tempera-
Parking climate* ture. When the screen is locked, only the seat
The car's parking climate control can be regula- controls* and the unlocking button are shown.
ted in the Parking climate tab.
After unlocking, the fan speed and temperature
can be changed via the climate panel and all
}}
CLIMATE
|| selected climate settings are shown. The screen Activating and deactivating heated 2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats
locks automatically after a period of inactivity. front seat* in order to change between the four levels:
The seats can be heated in order to increase Off, High, Medium and Low.
Related information
comfort for driver and passengers when it is > The level changes and the button shows
cold. the set level.
• Activating and deactivating heated front
seat* (p. 208) WARNING
• Activating and deactivating heated rear seat* Heated seats must not be used by people
(p. 209) who find it difficult to perceive an increase in
• Activating and deactivating ventilated front temperature due to a lack of sensation or who
seat* (p. 210) otherwise have problems operating the con-
trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
• Activating and deactivating the heated steer- suffer burn injuries.
ing wheel* (p. 211)
• Activating auto climate control (p. 212) Related information
• Activating and deactivating air recirculation • Climate controls (p. 206)
(p. 212) • Activating and deactivating automatic start of
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
• Activating and deactivating max defroster heated front seat* (p. 209)
(p. 213) 1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering
wheel and seat button in the climate row in
• Activating and deactivating the heated wind-
the centre display in order to open the con-
screen* (p. 215)
trols for seat and steering wheel.
• Activating and deactivating the heated rear
If the car is not equipped with ventilated
window and door mirrors (p. 216)
seats or heated steering wheel, the button
• Regulating fan level for front seat (p. 217) for heated seats is immediately available in
• Regulating fan level for rear seat* (p. 218) the climate row.
• Synchronising temperature (p. 220)
• Activating and deactivating air conditioning
(p. 221)
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating Activating and deactivating heated Activating and deactivating the heated
automatic start of heated front seat* rear seat* rear seat from the rear seat
The seats can be heated in order to increase The seats can be heated in order to increase With 2-zone climate:
comfort for driver and passengers when it is comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold. cold.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated seats should be activated/deactivated Activating and deactivating the heated
when the engine is started. With automatic start rear seat from the front seat*
activated, heating will start in the event of low
ambient temperature.
display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Auto Driver Seat Heating Level
and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level Buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel con-
to activate/deactivate automatic start of sole.
heated driver's and passenger seat. – Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand
4. Select Low, Medium or High to select level side's physical buttons for heated seats at
after the function has been activated. Buttons for heated seats in the group Rear climate in
the rear of the tunnel console to switch
the climate view. between the four levels: Off, High, Medium
Related information and Low.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display
• Climate controls (p. 206) > The level changes and the LEDs in the
and select the tab for Rear climate.
• Activating and deactivating heated front button show the set level.
seat* (p. 208) 2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats
in order to change between the four levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
}}
CLIMATE
|| With 4-zone climate*: Activating and deactivating 2. Repeatedly press the button for ventilated
ventilated front seat* seats in order to change between the four
The seats can be ventilated to provide increased levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.
comfort in a hot climate, for example. > The level changes and the button shows
The ventilation system consists of fans in the the set level.
seats and backrests that draw air through the
seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases the Related information
cooler the passenger compartment air becomes. • Climate controls (p. 206)
The system can be activated when the engine is
running.
Seat heating indication and controls on the climate

panel at the rear of the tunnel console.
– Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand
side's buttons for heated seats on the tunnel
console's climate panel to switch between
the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the screen in the
climate panel shows the set level.
WARNING Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.

Heated seats must not be used by people 1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering
who find it difficult to perceive an increase in wheel and seat button in the climate row in
temperature due to a lack of sensation or who the centre display in order to open the con-
otherwise have problems operating the controls for seat and steering wheel.
trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
suffer burn injuries. If the car is not equipped with heated seats
or heated steering wheel, the button for ven-
Related information tilated seats is immediately available in the
• Climate controls (p. 206) climate row.
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating the Related information Activating and deactivating

heated steering wheel* • Climate controls (p. 206) automatic start of heated steering
The steering wheel can be heated in order to • Activating and deactivating automatic start of wheel*
increase comfort for the driver when it is cold. heated steering wheel* (p. 211) The steering wheel can be heated in order to
increase comfort for the driver when it is cold.
heated steering wheel should be activated/deac-
tivated when the engine is started. With auto-
matic start activated, heating will start in the
event of low ambient temperature.
display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Auto Steering Wheel Heating
Level to activate/deactivate automatic start
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row. of heated steering wheel.
1. Press the driver's side steering wheel and 4. Select Low, Medium or High to select level
seat button in the climate row of the centre after the function has been activated.
display in order to open the controls for seat
and steering wheel. Related information
If the car is not equipped with heated seats • Activating and deactivating the heated steer-
or ventilated seats, the button for heated ing wheel* (p. 211)
steering wheel is immediately available in the
climate row.
2. Repeatedly press the button for heated
steering wheel in order to change between
the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
CLIMATE
Activating auto climate control 2. Give a short or long press on AUTO. Activating and deactivating air
With auto climate control activated, multiple cli- • Short press - air recirculation, air condi- recirculation
mate functions are controlled automatically. tioning and air distribution are controlled Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust
automatically. gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate
control system reusing the air in the passenger
• Long press - air recirculation, air condi-
compartment.
tioning and air distribution are controlled
automatically, temperature and fan speed
are changed to standard settings: 22 °C
(72 °F) and level 3 (level 2 in the rear
seat3).
> Auto-regulation of the climate is activated
and the button illuminates.
NOTE
Auto-regulation button in the climate view. Temperature and fan speed can be changed
1. Open the climate view in the centre display. without deactivating the automatically-regula-
ted climate control system. The automatically-
regulated climate control system is deacti- The air recirculation button in the climate view.
vated when the air distribution is changed 1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
manually or when maximum defroster is acti-
2. Press Recirc.
vated.
> Air recirculation is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Related information
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car is recirculated for too long
then there is a risk of misting on the insides
of the windows.
3 For cars with 4-zone climate*.
CLIMATE
NOTE Activating and deactivating time Activating and deactivating max

setting for air recirculation defroster
It is not possible to activate air recirculation
Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust Max defroster is used to quickly remove mist and
when max defroster is activated.
gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate ice from windows.
control system reusing the air in the passenger
Related information compartment. Activating and deactivating max
• Climate controls (p. 206) It is possible set whether the air recirculation defroster from centre console
timer should be activated/deactivated. When the There is a physical button in the centre console
• Activating and deactivating time setting for
air recirculation (p. 213) timer is activated, air recirculation is automatically for quick access to max defroster.
switched off after 20 minutes. With heated windscreen* the max defroster can
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre only be activated individually from the climate
display. view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Recirculation Timer to activate/
deactivate the air recirculation timer.
Related information
• Activating and deactivating air recirculation
(p. 212)
Physical button in the centre console.

Cars without heated windscreen:
– Press the button.
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
}}
CLIMATE
|| Cars with heated windscreen: Activating and deactivating max Related information
– Press the button repeatedly in order to defroster from centre display • Climate controls (p. 206)
switch between the three levels:
• Activated heated windscreen
• Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
• Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster are
activated/deactivated and the button illu-
minates/extinguishes.
NOTE
Max defroster starts with a certain delay in Max defroster button in the climate view.
order to avoid a short increase in fan level if 1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
the heated windscreen is deactivated by two
quick presses of the button. 2. Press Max.
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation
of the climate and air recirculation, acti-
vates air conditioning and changes the
fan level to 5 and the temperature to HI.
When max defroster is deactivated, the
climate control system returns to the pre-
vious settings.
NOTE
Changing the fan level to 5 increases the
noise level.
214
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating the Activating and deactivating heated NOTE

heated windscreen* windscreen from centre display
The heated windscreen may affect the per-
A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove
formance of transponders and other commu-
mist and ice from the window.
nication equipment.
Activating and deactivating heated
windscreen from centre console NOTE
In the centre console is a physical button for
rapid access to the heated windscreen. If the heated windscreen is activated when
the Start/Stop function has auto-stopped the
engine then the engine will be restarted.
Related information
The button for heated windscreen in the climate view.
• Activating and deactivating automatic start of
1. Open the climate view in the centre display. heated windscreen* (p. 216)
2. Press Electric.
> Heated windscreen is activated/deacti-
vated and the button illuminates/extin-
guishes.
NOTE
– Press the button repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels: A triangular area at the end of each side of
the windscreen is not electrically heated,
• Activated heated windscreen
where de-icing may take longer.
• Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
• Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster are
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating Activating and deactivating the Activating and deactivating heated rear
automatic start of heated heated rear window and door window and door mirrors from centre
windscreen* mirrors display
A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove The heated rear window and door mirrors are
mist and ice from the window. used to quickly remove mist and ice from the
It is possible to set whether automatic start of windows and mirrors.
heated windscreen should be activated/deacti-
vated when the engine is started. With automatic Activating and deactivating heated rear
start activated, heating will start when there is a window and door mirrors from centre
risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window. console
The heating switches off automatically when the In the centre console is a physical button for
windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the rapid access to the heated rear window and door
ice or misting is gone. mirrors.
display.
The button for heated rear window and door mirrors in
2. Press Climate. the climate view.
3. Select Auto Front Defroster to activate/ 1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
deactivate automatic start of heated wind- 2. Press Rear.
screen.
> Heated rear window and door mirrors are
Related information activated/deactivated and the button illu-
• Activating and deactivating the heated wind- minates/extinguishes.
screen* (p. 215)
Related information
• Activating and deactivating automatic star-
– Press the button. ting of the heated rear window and door mir-
> Heated rear window and door mirrors are rors (p. 217)
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating Regulating fan level for front seat4 NOTE
automatic starting of the heated The fan can be set to several different automati-
rear window and door mirrors The climate control system automatically
cally controlled fan speeds for the front seat. adjusts the air flow within the selected fan
The heated rear window and door mirrors are
level based on requirements. This means that
used to quickly remove mist and ice from the
the fan speed may change even though the
windows and mirrors.
fan level is the same.
heated rear window and door mirrors should be
activated/deactivated when the engine is started. Related information
With automatic start activated, heating will start • Climate controls (p. 206)
when there is a risk of ice or misting on the wind-
screen/window. The heating switches off auto-
matically when the windscreen/window is suffi-
ciently warm and the ice or misting is gone.
display. Fan control buttons in the climate view.
2. Press Climate. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
3. Select Auto Rear Defroster to activate/ 2. Tap on the desired fan level, Off, 1-5 or Max.
deactivate automatic start of heated rear > Fan level is changed and the buttons for
window and door mirrors. the selected level illuminate.
Related information IMPORTANT

• Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 216) If the fan is fully switched off then the air con-
ditioning is not engaged, which results in a
risk of misting on the insides of the windows.
4 For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.
217
CLIMATE
Regulating fan level for rear seat* Regulating the fan level for the rear NOTE
The fan can be set to several different automati- seat from the rear seat
1. Press the unlocking button on the tunnel The climate control system automatically
cally controlled fan speeds for the rear seat.
console climate panel to access the controls. adjusts the air flow within the selected fan
Regulating the fan level for the rear level based on requirements. This means that
seat from the front seat the fan speed may change even though the
fan level is the same.
Related information
Fan controls on the climate panel at the rear of the tun-

nel console.
The fan control buttons in the tab Rear climate in the
climate view. 2. Tap on the desired fan level, 1-5.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display > Fan level is changed and the buttons for
and select the tab for Rear climate. the selected level illuminate.
2. Tap on the desired fan level, 1-5.

NOTE
The rear seat's fan level can be switched off
The fan level for the rear seat cannot be set if
by tapping on 2nd row climate.
the fan level for the front seat is in position
> Fan level is changed and the buttons for Off.
the selected level illuminate.
The rear seat fan speed can only be switched
off from the climate view in the centre display.
CLIMATE
Regulating temperature for front Regulating temperature for rear

seat5 seat*
The temperature can be set to the desired num- The temperature can be set to the desired num-
ber of degrees for the front seat's climate zones. ber of degrees for the rear seat's climate zones.
Regulating temperature for rear seat

from front seat
Temperature control.
2. Regulate the temperature by either of the
following:
Temperature buttons in the climate row.

• drag the control to the desired tempera-
ture, or
1. Press the left or right-hand side temperature
• press +/− to raise/lower the temperature
button in the centre display's climate row to gradually. Temperature buttons in the Rear climate tab in the cli-
open the controls. mate view.
> The temperature changes and the button
shows the set temperature. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display
and select the tab for Rear climate.
NOTE 2. Press the left or right-hand side temperature
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by button to open the control.
selecting a higher or lower temperature than
the actual desired temperature.
Related information
5 For 2-zone climate, also rear seat. }}
CLIMATE
|| Synchronising temperature
The temperature in the car's different climate
zones can be synchronised with the temperature
set on the driver's side.
Temperature control. Temperature control on the climate panel at the rear of

the tunnel console.
3. Regulate the temperature by means of the
following: 2. Press the left or right-hand side </> buttons
on the tunnel console's climate panel in
• drag the control to the desired tempera- order to lower/raise the temperature gradu- Synchronisation button on the driver's side temperature
ture ally. controls.
• press +/− to raise/lower the temperature > The temperature changes and the screen 1. Press the driver's side temperature button in
gradually. in the climate panel shows the set tem- the centre display's climate row in order to
> The temperature changes and the button perature. open the controls.
shows the set temperature.
2. Press Synchronise temperature.
Regulating temperature for rear seat NOTE > The temperature for all zones in the car is
from rear seat Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by synchronised with the temperature set for
1. Press the unlocking button on the tunnel selecting a higher or lower temperature than the driver's side and the synchronisation
console climate panel to access the controls. the actual desired temperature. symbol is shown adjacent to the tempera-
ture button.
Related information The synchronisation is stopped by means of a
• Climate controls (p. 206) further press on Synchronise temperature or
by means of changing the temperature settings
for a climate zone other than the driver's.
220
CLIMATE
Related information Activating and deactivating air NOTE

• Climate controls (p. 206) conditioning
Close all side windows and the panoramic
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
roof* for air conditioning to work optimally.
incoming air as required.
NOTE
It is not possible to activate the air condition-
ing when the fan control is in Off position.
Related information
The air conditioning button in the climate view.

2. Press AC.
> The air conditioning is activated/deacti-
vated and the button illuminates/extin-
guishes.
When the air conditioning is activated, the
climate control system automatically con-
trols starting and switching off as
required.
CLIMATE
Parking climate* • Climate comfort when parking* (p. 227) Preconditioning*

The climate of the car's passenger compartment • Symbols and messages for parking climate Preconditioning of the car before driving can
can be preconditioned or maintained while the control* (p. 228) reduce wear and energy needs during a journey.
car is parked. Preconditioning can use direct start or be set via
the timer.
The function utilises several systems in different
cases:
• The parking heater*, in a cold climate, warms
up both the passenger compartment and the
engine.
• When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
passenger compartment by blowing in air
from outside the car.
NOTE
During preconditioning of the passenger
compartment, the car works to reach comfort
temperature and not the temperature set in
the climate control system.
Related information
Preconditioning and climate comfort retention are con- • Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 223)
trolled from the Parking climate tab in the centre dis- • Preconditioning time setting* (p. 224)
play's climate view.
Related information
• Preconditioning* (p. 222)
CLIMATE
Starting/stopping preconditioning* NOTE senger compartment by blowing in air from out-

Preconditioning warms the passenger compart- side.
The car's doors and windows should be
ment and engine or airs the passenger compart- The passenger compartment can also be precon-
closed during the preconditioning of the pas-
ment before driving. The function can use direct ditioned with the car remote start function
senger compartment.
start from the centre display or a mobile phone. (Engine Remote Start - ERS)6 via the Volvo On
Call* app.
Starting/stopping from the centre WARNING
Related information
display Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*: • Parking climate* (p. 222)
• In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust • Preconditioning* (p. 222)

gases are emitted if the heater starts. • Preconditioning time setting* (p. 224)
• In locations with combustible or flamma-
ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
• When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
Preconditioning button in the Parking climate tab in Remember that the preconditioning can be
the climate view. started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
2. Select the Parking climate tab.
Starting from the app*
3. Press Preconditioning. Start of preconditioning and information about
> Preconditioning is started/switched off the selected settings can be managed from a
and the button is illuminated/extin- device that has the Volvo On Call* app. Precondi-
guished. tioning heats the passenger compartment to a
comfortable temperature or ventilates the pas-
6 Certain markets.
CLIMATE
Preconditioning time setting* Adding and editing time setting for 3. Press Add timer.
The timer can be set so that the preconditioning preconditioning* > A pop-up window is shown.
is finished at a predetermined time. The timer for preconditioning can manage up to
The timer can handle up to 8 different settings
8 time settings. NOTE
for: Adding a time setting It is not possible to add a time setting if there
already are 8 settings entered for the timer.
• A time on a single date
Delete a time setting in order to be able to
• A time on one or more days of the week, with add a new one.
or without repetition.
Related information 4. Tap on Date to set the time for a single date.
• Preconditioning* (p. 222) Tap on Days to set the time for one or more
• Adding and editing time setting for precondi- days of the week.
tioning* (p. 224) With Days: Activate/deactivate repetition by
• Activating and deactivating time setting for ticking/unticking the box for Repeat
preconditioning* (p. 225) weekly.
• Removing time setting for preconditioning* 5. With Date: Select the date for precondition-
(p. 226) The button to add a time setting in the Parking climate
tab in the climate view.
ing by scrolling the date list with the arrows.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display. With Days: Select the days of the week for
preconditioning by tapping on the buttons for
2. Select the Parking climate tab. the days of the week.
6. Set the time when the preconditioning
should be finished by scrolling with the
arrows.
7. Tap on Confirm in order to add the time set-
ting.
> The time setting is added to the list and is
activated.
CLIMATE
WARNING • Activating and deactivating time setting for Activating and deactivating time
preconditioning* (p. 225) setting for preconditioning*
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*: • Removing time setting for preconditioning* A time setting in the timer for preconditioning
(p. 226) can be activated or deactivated based on need.
• In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
The timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in the cli-
mate view.
Editing a time setting 1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
3. Activate/deactivate a time setting by tapping
3. Press the time setting that is to be changed. on the timer button to the right of the setting.
> A pop-up window is shown. > The time setting is activated/deactivated
4. Edit the time setting in the same way as and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
described in "Adding a time setting" above.
Related information
• Preconditioning time setting* (p. 224)
}}
CLIMATE
|| WARNING Removing time setting for • Activating and deactivating time setting for
preconditioning* preconditioning* (p. 225)
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*:
• In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
ventilation.
The button for editing the list/deleting the time setting
Remember that the preconditioning can be
in the tab Parking climate in the climate view.
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
Related information
3. Press Edit list.
• Preconditioning time setting* (p. 224) 4. Press the delete icon to the right in the list.
> The icon changes to the text Delete.
• Adding and editing time setting for precondi-
tioning* (p. 224) 5. Press Delete to confirm.
• Removing time setting for preconditioning* > The time setting is removed from the list.
(p. 226)
Related information
• Preconditioning time setting* (p. 224)
• Adding and editing time setting for precondi-
tioning* (p. 224)
CLIMATE
Climate comfort when parking* Starting and switching off climate NOTE
The climate in the car's passenger compartment comfort when parking*
It is not possible to start climate comfort
can be maintained while the car is parked, e.g. if Climate comfort retention maintains the climate
retention if there is not enough residual heat
the engine needs to be switched off but the in the passenger compartment after driving. The
in the engine to maintain the passenger com-
driver or passenger(s) wants to remain in the car function can use direct start from the centre dis-
partment climate, or if the outside tempera-
and maintain the level of climate comfort. play.
ture is above approx. 20°C (68°F).
Starting climate comfort retention is only possible
via direct start.
The function utilises several systems in different NOTE
cases: Climate comfort retention is switched off
• Residual heat from the engine, in a cold cli- when the car is locked from the outside to
mate, heats the passenger compartment to avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use
comfort temperature. of the function is intended to maintain climate
comfort when driver or passengers remain
• When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
inside the car.
passenger compartment by blowing in air
from outside the car.
Related information
NOTE • Climate comfort when parking* (p. 227)
Button for climate comfort retention in the Parking
Climate comfort retention is switched off climate tab in the climate view.
when the car is locked from the outside to 1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use
of the function is intended to maintain climate 2. Select the Parking climate tab.
comfort when driver or passengers remain 3. Press Keep climate comfort.
inside the car.
> Climate comfort retention is started/
switched off and the button illuminates/
Related information extinguishes.
• Starting and switching off climate comfort
when parking* (p. 227)
CLIMATE
Symbols and messages for parking This symbol illuminates in the driver
climate control* display when the parking heater is
A number of symbols and messages regarding active.
parking climate control can be shown in the
driver display.
Symbol Message Specification

Parking climate Parking climate control is disengaged. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible.
Service required
Parking climate Parking climate control is temporarily disengaged. If the problem persists for some time, contact a work-
Temporarily unavailable shopA to check the function.
Parking climate Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking heater*. Fill-
ing the vehicle's normal fuel tank.
Unavailable Fuel level too low
Parking climate Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the starter battery is too low to start the
parking heater*. Charging the battery.
Unavailable Charge level too low
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
CLIMATE
Heater* NOTE NOTE

The heater helps the engine and passenger
Make sure that there is enough charge in the Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
compartment reach the correct temperature
battery if the heater needs to be used. normal fuel tank if the heater needs to be
before and during driving.
used.
The heater has two subfunctions:
Fuel and refuelling
• Parking heater - heats the engine and pas-
senger compartment, if necessary, when the WARNING
parking climate control's preconditioning* is Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch
activated. off the fuel-driven heater before starting to
refuel.
• Additional heater - heats the passenger
compartment and engine, if necessary, dur- Check in the driver display that the
ing driving. heater is switched off. This symbol
is lit when it is working as a parking
The heater is fuel-driven and is fitted in the front heater.
right-hand wheel housing.
Related information
NOTE • Climate (p. 194)
When the heater is running, smoke may be Warning label on fuel filler flap. • Parking heater* (p. 230)
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous-
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel • Additional heater* (p. 231)
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard tank.
from the rear section of the car. This is per- If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the
fectly normal. car should point downhill to ensure that there is a
supply of fuel to the heater.
Battery and charging If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the
The heater is powered by the car's starter battery. heater is switched off automatically and the driver
If the charge level of the starter battery is too low, display shows a message.
then the heater is switched off automatically and
the driver display shows a message.
CLIMATE
Parking heater* NOTE WARNING

The parking heater heats the passenger com-
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
partment as necessary before driving if the car's ped with a heater*:
normal fuel tank if the parking heater needs
preconditioning is activated.
to be used. • In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
The parking heater is one of two subfunctions of Make sure that there is enough charge in the gases are emitted if the heater starts.
the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the front starter battery if the parking heater needs to • In locations with combustible or flamma-
right-hand wheel housing. be used. ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
This symbol illuminates in the driver sawdust, etc. may ignite.
display when the parking heater is • When there is a risk that the heater’s
active.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater combined ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
with short journeys may discharge the battery wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
NOTE and impair starting. ventilation.
When the heater is running, smoke may be If the heater is used on a regular basis, then Remember that the preconditioning can be
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- the car should be driven for the same amount started by a timer that has been set for a long
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking of time that the heater is used in order to time in advance.
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard ensure that the car's battery is recharged with
from the rear section of the car. This is per- the same amount of energy as consumed by
fectly normal. the parking heater. The parking heater is used
WARNING
for a maximum of 40 minutes each time. If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts of
smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds com-
The parking heater starts automatically if the
ing from the parking heater, switch off the
parking climate's preconditioning* is activated heater and, if possible, pull out its fuse. Volvo
and the passenger compartment needs to be recommends that an authorised Volvo work-
heated up. shop should be contacted for repair.
It switches off automatically when a set timer
time or the heater's maximum run time expires, or Related information
if the car is restarted. • Heater* (p. 229)
The heater's maximum running time is • Additional heater* (p. 231)
40 minutes.
CLIMATE
Additional heater* • Activating and deactivating automatic start of Activating and deactivating
The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger auxiliary heater (p. 231) automatic start of auxiliary heater
compartment and engine while driving. The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger
compartment and engine while driving.
The additional heater is one of two subfunctions It is possible to set whether automatic start for
of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the the additional heater should be activated/deacti-
front right-hand wheel housing. vated.
NOTE
display.
When the heater is running, smoke may be
2. Press Climate.
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous-
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking 3. Select Additional Heater to activate/deac-
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard tivate automatic start of the additional heater.
from the rear section of the car. This is per-
fectly normal. NOTE
Volvo recommends that the automatic start
The additional heater starts and is controlled for the additional heater should be switched
automatically when heating is required while the off for short driving distances.
car is being driven.
It switches off automatically when the car is Related information
switched off.
• Additional heater* (p. 231)
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
normal fuel tank if the auxiliary heater needs
to be used.
Related information
• Heater* (p. 229)
• Parking heater* (p. 230)
Lock confirmation Lock and alarm indicator Indication in lock buttons

When the car is locked or unlocked the direction Front door
indicators confirm that locking or unlocking was
correctly performed.
Exterior indication
Locking
• The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
locking by flashing and retracting the door
mirrors1.
Unlocking
• The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
unlocking by two flashes and extending the The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel
door mirrors1. show the status of the alarm system.
Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door.
All doors, tailgate and bonnet must be closed to Long flash indicates locking of the car. When the
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button
indicate the car is locked. If locking is performed car is locked, this will be indicated by short, pul-
of either front door indicates that all doors are
with only the driver's door closed2, the car will be sating flashes.
locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will extin-
locked but lock indication with hazard warning Other indication guish in both doors.
flashers will only occur after all doors, tailgate The home safe lighting and approach light func-
and bonnet have been closed. tions also provide indication of locking and
unlocking.
1 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.

2 Does not apply to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
In rear door* Lock indication setting Remote control key

It is possible to select how the car confirms The remote control key locks and unlocks the
locking and unlocking in the centre display set- doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap. The remote
tings menu. control key needs to be inside the car for it to be
started.
view.
2. Press My Car Locking.
3. Tap on Visible Locking Feedback to select
when the car should give a visible response:
at Lock, Unlock, Both, or to switch off the
function.
Lock button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
Indication with retractable door mirrors*
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button
for one of the doors indicates that the door in
view.
question is locked. If any door is unlocked, its
lamp will extinguish while the others will continue Remote control key, on left, and button-less key (Key
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Convenience. Tag)*, on right.
to illuminate.
3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to acti- The remote control key is not physically used
Related information vate or deactivate the function. when starting since the car is equipped with sup-
• Lock indication setting (p. 235) port for keyless starting (Passive Start) as stand-
Related information
• Approach light duration (p. 155)
• Lock confirmation (p. 234)
ard. The key must be in the front part of the pas-
senger compartment, e.g. in the driver's pocket or
• Using home safe lighting (p. 155)
the runnel console cup holder, for it to be possi-
ble to start the car.
}}
|| Keyless locking and unlocking of doors, tailgate Remote control key buttons The tailgate is also closed with a long press -
(Passive Entry*) is also available as an option. acoustic warning signals sound.
The key then has a range extending in a semicir- Panic function – Used to attract attention
cle with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres (5 feet) in an emergency. Press and hold the button
out from the driver's door and approx. 1 metre for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within
(3 feet) out from the tailgate respectively. 3 seconds to activate the direction indicators
With keyless starting and keyless locking and and the horn. The function can be turned off
unlocking, the remote control key can be located with the same button once it has been active
anywhere in the passenger compartment or the for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the func-
cargo area and maintain the functionality to start tion switches off automatically after
the car. 3 minutes.
Each one of the remote control keys included
with the car can be linked to a driver profile with WARNING
The remote control key has four buttons - one on the
unique settings for the car. When a key with a left-hand side and three on the right-hand side. If anyone is left in the car, make sure the
certain profile is used, the car's settings are power windows and panoramic roof* are de-
adapted according to the profile. Locking - Pressing the button locks the energised by always taking the remote control
doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also key with you when you leave the car.
Button-less key (Key Tag) arms the alarm*.
For cars equipped with keyless locking and Press and hold to close all of the windows
unlocking*, a slightly smaller, lighter and button- NOTE
and the panorama roof* simultaneously.
less key (Key Tag) is supplied. It works the same Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
Unlocking - Pressing the button unlocks
way as the normal remote control key when it control key/Key Tag in the car.
the doors and tailgate and also disarms the
comes to keyless starting and locking and
alarm. A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car
unlocking3. It has no detachable key blade and
A longer press opens all windows simultane- will be deactivated when the car is locked and
the battery cannot be replaced.
ously4. the alarm is armed using another valid key.
The "Double lock" function is also deacti-
Tailgate - Unlocks the tailgate only and vated.
disarms its alarm. On cars with power oper-
ated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened auto- The deactivated key is reactivated when the
matically when the button is held depressed. car is unlocked.
3 The key is waterproof to a depth of approx. 10 metres (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes, which makes it suitable for use in activities in and around water.
4 The total airing function can be used, for example, to quickly air the car in hot weather.
Interference • Replacing the battery in the remote control Locking and unlocking with the
Remote control key functions for keyless starting key (p. 241) remote control key
and keyless locking and unlocking* can be dis- • Detachable key blade (p. 246) The buttons on the remote control key can be
rupted by electromagnetic fields and screening. used to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate
• Red Key - restricted remote control key*
(p. 244) and the fuel filler flap simultaneously.
NOTE
• Immobiliser (p. 248)
Locking with the remote control key
Avoid storing the remote control key close to
metal objects or electronic apparatus, e.g.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers -
preferably no closer than 10-15 cm
(4-6 inches).
If there is still interference - use the remote con-

trol key's detachable key blade to unlock and
then place the key in the backup reader in the
cup holder to disarm the car.
NOTE
When the remote control key is placed in the Remote control key.
cup holder, make sure that no other car keys,
– Press the remote control key button to
metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g.
lock.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers)
are in the cup holder. Several car keys close
to each other in the cup holder can cause
interference with each other.
Related information
• Locking and unlocking with the remote con-
trol key (p. 237)
• Remote control key range (p. 240)
}}
|| The driver's door must be closed in order for the Unlocking with the remote control key • Replacing the battery in the remote control
lock sequence to be activated5. If any of the other – Press the remote control key button to key (p. 241)
doors or the tailgate is open, then these are not unlock. • Locking and unlocking with the detachable
locked and their alarms armed* until they are key blade (p. 247)
closed. The alarm's movement detectors* are Automatic relocking
activated when all the doors and the tailgate are If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
closed and locked. within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked
automatically. This function prevents the car from
NOTE being left unlocked unintentionally.
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key/Key Tag in the car. When the remote control key does not
work
A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car
will be deactivated when the car is locked and
the alarm is armed using another valid key.
NOTE
The "Double lock" function is also deacti- Always try moving closer to the car and mak-
vated. ing another unlock attempt.
The deactivated key is reactivated when the
car is unlocked. If it is not possible to lock or unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be dis-
charged - in which case, lock or unlock the driv-
Locking when the tailgate is open
er's door with the detachable key blade.
NOTE Related information

If the car has been locked while the tailgate is • Settings for remotely controlled and inside
unlocking (p. 239)
open, be careful not to leave the remote con-
trol key in the cargo area when the tailgate is • Unlocking the tailgate with the remote con-
closed and the car is completely locked6. trol key (p. 239)
• Remote control key (p. 235)
5 If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking then all side doors must be closed.
6 If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking and the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.*
Settings for remotely controlled and Unlocking the tailgate with the 1. Press the remote control key's button.
inside unlocking remote control key > The lock and alarm indicator on the instru-
It is possible to select different sequences for It is possible to unlock just the tailgate by press- ment panel extinguishes in order to show
remotely controlled unlocking. ing a button on the remote control key. that the alarm is not armed for the whole
of the car.
view. The alarm's level and movement sensors
and the sensors for opening the tailgate
2. Press My Car Locking Remote and are disconnected.
Interior Unlock.
The tailgate is unlocked, but remains
3. Select option: closed while the doors remain locked and
• All Doors their alarm functions armed.
- unlocks all doors simultaneously. To open the tailgate, grip the rubber pres-
sure plate beneath the tailgate handle
• Single Door and open the tailgate.
- unlocks the driver's door. Unlocking all of
If the tailgate is not opened within
the doors requires two presses on the
Use the remote control key button to unlock the 2 minutes then it is relocked and the
remote control key's unlock button.
tailgate and disable the alarm. alarm is re-armed.
The settings made here also affect central
2. With the power operated tailgate option* -
unlocking via opening handles from the inside.
Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the
Related information
remote control key's button
trol key (p. 237) > The tailgate is unlocked and opened,
while the doors remain locked and their
• Locking and unlocking from inside the car alarm functions armed.
(p. 263)
Related information
trol key (p. 237)
• Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 266)
Remote control key range cular area with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
In order for the remote control key to work prop- (5 feet) on both long sides and approx. 1 metre (p. 259)
erly it needs to be within a certain distance from (3 feet) from the tailgate.
the car.
NOTE
For manual use
The remote control key's functions for e.g. lock- The remote control key functions may be dis-
ing/unlocking that are activated by pressing on rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings,
topographical conditions, etc. The car can
or have a range that extends approx.
always be locked/unlocked with the key
20 metres (65 feet) from the car.
blade.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed -
move closer and try again.
If the remote control key is removed
For keyless use7 from the car
If the remote control key is removed
from the car when the engine is run-
ning, the warning message Car key
not found Removed from car is
shown in the driver display and an acoustic
reminder sounds when the last door is closed.
The message extinguishes when the key is
returned to the car, followed by a press of the
right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last
door is closed.
Related information
The marked area in the illustration shows areas covered • Remote control key (p. 235)
by the system's antennas. • Antenna locations for the start and lock sys-
For keyless use, a remote control key or the but- tems (p. 262)
ton-less key (Key Tag) must be within a semicir-
7 Only applies to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).
Replacing the battery in the remote The battery in the button-less key8 (Key Tag) Opening the key and changing the
control key cannot be replaced - a new key can be ordered battery
The battery in the remote control key needs to from an authorised Volvo workshop.
be replaced when it has become discharged.
NOTE IMPORTANT
All batteries have a limited service life and A discharged Key Tag must be handed over
must eventually be replaced (does not apply to an authorised Volvo workshop. The key
to Key Tag). The service life of the battery var- must be deleted from the car since it is still
ies depending on how often the vehicle/key possible to use it to start the car via back-up
is used. start.
The battery for the remote control key should be Hold the remote control key with the
replaced if: front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
right way - slide the button at bottom edge
the information symbol illuminates and by the key ring to the right. Slide the front
the message Car key battery low side's shell a few millimetres upwards.
See Owner's manual is shown in the
driver display The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key.
and/or
• the locks repeatedly do not react to signals
from the remote control key within 20 metres
(65 feet) of the car.
NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and mak-
ing another unlock attempt.
8 This key is supplied with a car equipped with the keyless locking/entry option (Passive Entry*). }}
||
Turn the key, move the button to the side Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the bat- The battery (+) side is facing upwards. Then
and slide the back shell a few millimetres tery cover anticlockwise until the markings carefully prize loose the battery as illustrated.
upwards. meet at the OPEN text.
Carefully lift away the battery cover by press- IMPORTANT
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key. ing e.g. a fingernail into the recess. Avoid touching new batteries and their con-
Then prize the battery cover upwards. tact surfaces with your fingers as this may
impair their function.
242
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key fulfil UN
Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-
section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or
replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop
fulfil the above criteria.
Install a new battery with the (+) side up. Reposition the rear side's shell and press
Avoid touching the remote control key's bat- it down until a clicking sound can be heard.
tery contacts with your fingers.
Then slide the shell back sedan.
Place the battery in the holder with the
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
edge down. Then slide the battery forwards
properly positioned and securely attached.
so that it fastens under the two plastic
catches.
Press the battery down so that it fastens
under the upper black plastic catch. Refit the battery cover and turn it clockwise
until the marking aligns with the CLOSE text.
NOTE
Use batteries with the designation CR2032,
3 V.
}}
243
|| Ordering more remote control keys Red Key - restricted remote control
The car is supplied with two remote control keys. key*
A button-less key is supplied if the car is equip- A Red Key makes it possible for the car's owner
ped with keyless locking and unlocking*. Addi- to set limitations for certain of the car's proper-
tional keys can be ordered. ties. The limitations are intended to encourage
A total of twelve keys can be programmed and the car to be driven in a safe manner, e.g. when
used for one single car. If additional keys are being loaned out.
ordered, additional driver profiles are added - one
per new remote control key. This also applies for
the key tag.
Turn the remote control key over and refit
the front side's shell by pressing it down until Loss of a remote control key
a clicking sound can be heard. If you lose a remote control key then a new one
can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised
Then slide the shell back sedan. Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining
> A further click will indicate that the shell is remote control keys must be taken to the work-
securely attached. shop. The code of the missing key must be
erased from the system as a theft prevention
IMPORTANT measure.
Make sure that exhausted batteries are dis- The current number of keys registered to the car
posed of in a manner which is kind to the can be checked via driver profiles in the centre For a Red Key, it is possible to define the car's
environment. display's top view, select Settings System maximum speed, set speed reminders and deter-
Driver Profiles. mine the loudspeaker system's maximum volume.
Related information In addition, some of the car's driver support sys-
Related information tems will always be active. Other functions of the
• Remote control key (p. 235) key are the same as those of a normal remote
control key.
One or more Red Keys can be ordered from a
Volvo retailer. A total of eleven keys with restric-
tions can be programmed and used for a single
car - at least one must be a normal remote con-
trol key.
The restrictions are intended to act as measures Red Key settings* Speed reminder (On/Off):
to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby making it The holder of a regular remote control key can • Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph)
feel safer to hand over the car to e.g. young dri-
vers, valet parking or a workshop. The holder of a
define settings for Red Key. Certain driver sup- • Setting during first use is: 50, 70 and
port functions are always active. 90 km/h (30, 45 and 55 mph)
Red Key cannot change settings defined for it – 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
a regular remote control key is required for this. view.
• Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
• Max. number of simultaneous reminders: 6
Related information 2. Press System Driver Profiles Red
• Red Key settings* (p. 245) Key. Driver support functions
• Remote control key (p. 235) > The following settings can be defined: The following driver support functions will always
be active for the user of a Red Key:
• Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise
Control • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
• Reduced Maximum Volume • Lane assistance (LKA)*
• Max Speed Limit • Distance Warning*
• Speed Limit Warning • City Safety

• Driver Alert Control (DAC)*
Adaptive cruise control*:
• Road Sign Information*
• Setting at first use: Longest intervals
Reduced max. volume (On/Off): Related information
• Setting at first use: On • Red Key - restricted remote control key*
(p. 244)
Speed limiter (On/Off):
• Setting interval: 50-250 km/h (30-160 mph)
• Setting during first use is 120 km/h
(75 mph)
• Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
The driver display shows the symbol
and message
Red key Speed limitation cannot
be exceeded.
Detachable key blade Detaching the key blade

The remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which a number of func-
tions can be activated and some operations car-
ried out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by

authorised Volvo workshops, which are recom-
mended when ordering new key blades.
The key blade's application areas Return the key blade to its intended position
Using the remote control key's detachable key Hold the remote control key with the in the remote control key after use.
blade: front visible and the Volvo logo facing the Refit the shell by pressing it downward
• the left-hand9 front door can be opened right way - slide the button at bottom edge until a clicking sound is heard.
manually if central locking cannot be acti- by the key ring to the right. Guide the front
vated with the remote control key. side's shell a few millimetres upwards. Then slide the shell back.
• all doors are emergency-locked. > A further click will indicate that the shell is
The shell will then come free and can be
securely attached.
• the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks lifted off the key.
can be activated and deactivated. Related information
The button-less key10 (Key Tag) does not have a • Locking and unlocking with the detachable
detachable key blade. If necessary, use the key blade (p. 247)
detachable key blade from the normal remote • Remote control key (p. 235)
control key.
Detach the key blade by angling it up.
9 This applies whether the car is left-hand drive or right-hand drive.

10 Supplied with cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).
Locking and unlocking with the 5. Pull out the handle. 2. Then turn the start knob clockwise and
detachable key blade > The door opens. release it.
Amongst other things, the detachable key blade > The control automatically returns to its
Locking will be performed in the same way, but
can be used to unlock the car from the outside - starting position - the alarm signal stops
with an anticlockwise turn 45 degrees instead of
e.g. if the remote control key's battery has and the alarm switches off.
clockwise in step (3).
become discharged.
Switching off the alarm* Locking
Unlocking It is also possible to lock the car with the remote
control key's detachable key blade e.g. in the
NOTE
event of a loss of power or if the key's battery
When the door is unlocked using the key has become discharged.
blade and is then opened, the alarm is trig-
The left-hand front door can be locked with its
gered.
lock cylinder and the detachable key blade.
Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead
have a lock switch on the end of each door which
must be depressed using the key blade - they are
then mechanically locked/blocked to prevent
Pull out the front door handle on the left- them being opened from outside.
hand side11 to its end position so that the The doors can still be opened from the inside.
lock cylinder become visible.
Insert the key in the lock cylinder.
Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
blade is pointing straight back.
Deactivate the alarm as follows:
Turn the key back 45 degrees to its starting
1. Place the remote control key on the key sym-
position. Remove the key from the lock cylin-
bol in the backup reader in the bottom of the
der and release the handle so that the rear
cup holder in the tunnel console.
section of the handle is resting against the
car again.
11 This applies whether the car is right-hand drive or left-hand drive. }}
|| NOTE Immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection
• A door's lock reset only locks that partic-
system that prevents an unauthorised person
ular door - not all doors simultaneously.
from starting the car.
• A manually locked rear door with acti- The car can only be started with the correct
vated manual or electric child safety locks remote control key.
cannot be opened from either the outside
or the inside. A rear door that is locked in The following error message in the driver display
this way can only be unlocked with the is related to the electronic immobiliser:
remote control key or central locking but-
ton. Symbol Message Specification
Car key not Error reading the
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with the Related information remote control key
found
child safety locks.
• Detachable key blade (p. 246)
See
during starting -
– Remove the detachable key blade from the place the key on
remote control key. Insert the key blade in
• Activating and deactivating alarms* (p. 275) Owner's
the key symbol in
the hole for lock reset and press the key in • Replacing the battery in the remote control manual
the cup holder and
until the key bottoms, approx. 12 mm. key (p. 241) try again.
The door can be opened from both the out- • Remote control key (p. 235)
side and the inside. Remote-controlled immobiliser with
The door is blocked against opening from tracking system12
the outside. To return to position A, the inner The car is fitted with a system which makes it
door handle must be opened. possible to track and locate the car and to
remotely activate the immobiliser, which prevents
The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock starting the engine. Contact your nearest Volvo
button on the remote control key or with the cen- dealer for more information and assistance with
tral locking button on the driver's door. activating the system.
12 Only certain markets and together with Volvo On Call*.
The following error message in the driver display

is related to the remote-controlled immobiliser
with tracking system:

Remotely The remote-con-
immobilised trolled immobiliser
with tracking sys-
Car not pos-
tem is activated.
sible to start
The car cannot be
started. Contact
Volvo On Call
Service Centre.
Related information
• Ordering more remote control keys (p. 244)
249
Type approval for the remote Lock system keyless start (Passive
control key system Start) and keyless locking/unlocking
Type approval for the car's remote key system (Passive Entry*)
can be seen in the following tables.
For more information about type approval, see
support.volvocars.com.
CEM marking for the remote control key system. For

supplementary type approval numbers, see following
tables.
Country/Area Type approval

Europe Delphi Deutschland GmbH, 42367 Wuppertal hereby declares that this
VO3-134TRX conforms to the essential property requirements and other
relevant provisions contained in directive 2014/53/EU (RED).
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
Jordan TRC/LPD/2014/250
Serbia P1614120100
Argentina CNC ID: C-14771

Brazil MT-3245/2015
Indonesia Nomor: 38301/SDPPI/2015

Malaysia RAAT/37A/0315/S(15-0663)
Mexico IFETEL: RLVDEVO15-0396
Russia
The United Arab Emirates ER37847/15

DA0062437/11
}}
251
|| Country/Area Type approval

Namibia TA-2016-02
South Africa TA-2014-1868
Remote control key

Europe Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio
equipment HUF8423 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU.
Wavelength: 433.92 MHz
Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW
Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551 Vel-
bert, Germany
252

Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10668 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
Mexico IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8423
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es
posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este
equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda
causar su operación no deseada.
Namibia TA-2015-102
}}
253

Oman
Serbia
254

The United Arab

Emirates
Key Tag
Europe Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio
equipment HUF8432 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU.
Wavelength: 433.92 MHz
Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW
Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551 Vel-
bert, Germany
}}
255

Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10667 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
Mexico IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8432
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es
posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este
equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda
causar su operación no deseada.
Namibia TA-2015-103
256

Oman
Serbia
}}
257

The United Arab

Emirates
Related information
258
Keyless and touch-sensitive NOTE Related information

surfaces* • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 260)
It is important that only one touch-sensitive
If the car is equipped with keyless locking and
surface is activated at a time. Gripping the • Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 261)
unlocking, it is sufficient to have the remote con-
handle while touching the lock surface risks
trol key in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag,
giving double commands. This means that the
making it more convenient to open the car if your
requested activity (locking/unlocking) will not
hands are full.
be executed, or will be executed with a delay.
Touch-sensitive surfaces
Door handle Tailgate
The outside of the door handles contains a The tailgate handle has a rubberised pressure
recess for locking, while the inside contains a plate that is only used for unlocking.
touch-sensitive surface for unlocking.
NOTE
Touch-sensitive recess for locking
Be aware that the system may be activated in
Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking connection with car washing if the remote
control key is in range.
Keyless locking and unlocking* open when locking the car with a side door han-
The car is locked and unlocked from the outside dle.
using the door or tailgate handles if the car is – Touch the marked surface towards the rear
equipped with keyless locking/unlocking on the outside of a door handle after the
(Passive Entry)*. door has been closed, or press the lock13
button on the bottom edge of the tailgate
before closing it.
> The lock indicator in the windscreen starts
to flash to indicate the car is locked.
To close all side windows and the panoramic
roof* simultaneously - place a finger against the
Rubberised pressure plate on the tailgate used for touch-sensitive recess on the outside of the door
unlocking only. handle and hold it there until all of the side win-
dows and the panoramic roof have been closed.
NOTE Locking when the tailgate is open
One of the car's remote control keys must be
Touch-sensitive recess for locking within range for locking and unlocking to NOTE
work.
Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking If the car has been locked while the tailgate is
open, be careful not to leave the remote con-
NOTE trol key in the cargo area when the tailgate is
closed and the car is completely locked14.
Be aware that the system may be activated in
connection with car washing if the remote
control key is in range.
Keyless locking
All side doors must be closed to be able to lock
the car. The tailgate, on the other hand, can be
13 Applies with power operated tailgate*.

14 If the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.
Keyless unlocking Settings for Keyless entry* Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*
– Grasp a door handle or press the rubberised It is possible to select different sequences for For keyless unlocking of the tailgate, all you have
pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to Keyless entry. to do is have the remote control key in a pocket
unlock the car. or bag, for example.
> The lock indicator in the windscreen extin- 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.
guishes to confirm the car is unlocked - view.
open the doors or tailgate as usual. 2. Tap on My Car Locking Keyless
Unlock
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened 3. Select option:
within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked
automatically. This function prevents the car from
• All Doors
being left unlocked unintentionally. - unlocks all doors simultaneously.
Related information • Single Door

• Settings for Keyless entry* (p. 261) - unlocks selected door.
• Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 261) Related information

• Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 260)
(p. 259) • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* To open the tailgate:
(p. 259) 1. Press gently on the rubberised pressure
plate beneath the tailgate handle.
> The lock is released.
NOTE
within range behind the car for unlocking to
work.
}}
|| 2. Lift by the outside handle in order to fully Antenna locations for the start and WARNING
open the tailgate. lock systems
People with pacemaker operations should not
The car is equipped with a keyless start and lock come closer than 22 cm (9 inches) to the
IMPORTANT system15 and therefore has a number of built-in keyless system's antennas with their pace-
• Minimal force is required to release the antennas positioned at different locations in the maker. This is to prevent interference
rear hatch lock - just gently press the rub- car. between the pacemaker and the keyless sys-
tem.
berised panel.
• Do not place the lift force on the rubber
Related information
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift
the handle. Using too much force may • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 259)
damage the electrical contacts on the rub-
ber panel. • Remote control key range (p. 240)
It is also possible to unlock the tailgate hands-

free with a foot movement under the rear
bumper, see separate section.
WARNING
Under the cup holder in the front section of
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic
the tunnel console
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
through the cargo area. In the upper front section of the left-hand
rear door16
Related information In the upper front section of the right-hand
• Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 260) rear door16
• Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* In the cargo area16
(p. 259)
• Opening and closing the tailgate with foot
movement* (p. 270)
Locking and unlocking from inside Alternative unlocking method Locking using a button in the front door
the car – Press the button - both front doors must
The doors and tailgate can be locked and be closed.
unlocked from inside using the central locking > All doors and the tailgate are locked.
controls in the front doors. The lock controls* on
the rear doors each lock their own rear door. A long press on the button closes all side
windows and the panorama roof* simultaneously.
Central locking
Locking using a button in the rear door*
Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the side

door.
– Pull the opening handle on one of the side
doors and release.
> Depending on the settings in the remote
control key, either all doors will be
unlocked or only the selected door will be
Locking and unlocking button with indicator lamp in the
front door.
unlocked and opened.
Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
To change this setting, tap on Settings The rear door lock buttons only lock their respec-
Unlocking using a button in the front
My Car Locking Remote and tive rear door.
door
Interior Unlock in the centre display's top
– Press the button to unlock all side doors view. Unlocking the rear door
and the tailgate. – Pull the opening handle.
A long press on the button opens all the > The rear door is unlocked and opened.
side windows simultaneously17.
15 The keyless lock system only applies to cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*).
16 Only in cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*).
17 The total airing function can be used, for example, to quickly air the car in hot weather. }}
|| Related information Unlocking the tailgate from the Related information

• Settings for remotely controlled and inside inside of the car • Locking and unlocking from inside the car
unlocking (p. 239) The tailgate can be unlocked from the inside by (p. 263)
• Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the pressing a button on the instrument panel. • Opening and closing the power*-operated
car (p. 264) 1. tailgate (p. 266)
• Activating and deactivating child safety locks
(p. 265)
Brief press on the button on the instru-

ment panel.
> The tailgate can be unlocked and opened
from the outside by grasping the rubber-
ised pressure plate.
With the power operated tailgate option* -
2. Long press on the button on the instru-

ment panel.
> The tailgate opens.
Activating and deactivating child 2. Press the button in the driver's door control Symbol Message Specification
safety locks panel.
The child safety locks prevent children from > The driver display shows the message Rear child Child safety
being able to open a rear door from the inside. Rear child lock Activated and the but- lock Acti- locks are acti-
There is an electric* and a manual lock. ton's lamp illuminates - the locks are vated vated.
active.
Activating and deactivating electrically* Rear child Child safety
When the electric child safety lock is active then lock Deacti- locks are deacti-
The electric child safety locks can be activated
the rear: vated vated.
and deactivated in all ignition positions higher
than 0. Activation and deactivation can be per- • windows can only be opened with the driver's
formed up to 2 minutes after switching off the door control panel Activating and deactivating manually
engine, provided that no door is opened. • doors cannot be opened from inside.
To deactivate the locks:
– Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
Rear child lock Deactivated and the
button's lamp goes out - the locks are
deactivated.
The current setting is stored when the engine is
switched off - if the child safety locks are acti-
vated at engine shutdown, the function will
remain activated the next time the engine is Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with man-
Button for electric activation and deactivation. started. ual door locks.
1. Start the engine or choose an ignition posi- – Use the remote control key's detachable key
tion higher than 0. blade to turn the knob.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the out-
side and the inside.
}}
|| NOTE Automatic locking when driving Opening and closing the power*-
The doors and tailgate are locked automatically operated tailgate
• A door's knob control only blocks that
when the car starts to move. The car's tailgate can be opened and closed
particular door - not both rear doors
To change this setting: electrically.
simultaneously.
• Cars with an electric child safety lock do Opening the power operated tailgate
not have a manual child lock. view. Choose one of the following options to open the
2. Press My Car Locking. tailgate:
Related information 3. Select Auto Lock Doors While Driving to – Long press on the remote control key's
• Locking and unlocking from inside the car deactivate or activate this function. button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate
(p. 263) starts to open.
• Detachable key blade (p. 246) Related information
• Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 263)
– Long press on the instrument panel's – Foot movement* under the rear bumper. – Press the button on the underside of
button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate the tailgate to close.
starts to open.
Closing the power operated tailgate > The tailgate closes automatically - the tail-
Choose one of the following methods to close18 gate remains unlocked.
– Light press on the tailgate handle. the tailgate:
NOTE
The button is active 24 hours after the hatch
has been left open. Thereafter, it must be
closed manually.
– Long press on the button on the remote

control key.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
acoustic signals sound - the tailgate
remains unlocked.
18 A car with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking. }}
|| – Long press on the button on the instru- IMPORTANT and the tailgate returns to the programmed
ment panel. max. position.
During manual tailgate operation, open or
> The tailgate closes automatically and close it slowly. Do not use force to open/
acoustic signals sound - the tailgate WARNING
close it if there is resistance. It may be dam-
remains unlocked. aged and stop working correctly. Observe the risk of trapping when opening/
closing. Before starting opening/closing,
– Foot movement* under the rear bumper.
check that there is nobody near to the tailgate
> The tailgate closes automatically and Cancel opening or closing as trapping may have serious consequences.
acoustic signals sound - the tailgate Cancel opening or closing in one of the following Always operate the tailgate with caution.
remains unlocked. ways:
Closing and locking18 the power • Press the button on the instrument panel. Pre-tensioned springs
operated tailgate • Press the remote control key's button.
– Press the button on the underside of • Press the closing button on the underside of
the tailgate to close it and simultaneously the tailgate.
lock the tailgate and doors (all doors must be • Press the rubberised pressure plate beneath
closed for locking). the outside handle.
> The tailgate closes automatically - the tail-
• Using a foot movement*.
gate and doors are locked, and the alarm*
is armed. The tailgate's movement is interrupted and stops.
The boot lid can then be operated manually.
NOTE Pinch protection
• One of the car's remote control keys must If something with sufficient resistance prevents
be within range for locking and unlocking the tailgate from opening or closing then the The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tail-
to work. pinch protection is activated. gate.
• When using keyless* locking or closing, • During opening - movement is interrupted,

three signals will sound if the key is not the tailgate stops and a long acoustic signal
detected sufficiently close to the tailgate. sounds.
• During closing - movement is interrupted, the
tailgate stops, a long acoustic signal sounds
18 A car with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.
WARNING Programming maximum opening for NOTE

power operated tailgate*
Do not open the pre-tensioned springs for the
Adapt the tailgate's opening position to low roof
• If the system has been operating continu-
power operated tailgate. They are pre-ten- ously for a long time, it is switched off to
sioned with high pressure and can cause height.
avoid overload. It can be used again after
injury if opened. about 2 minutes.
To adjust max. opening:
Related information 1. Open the tailgate - stop it in the open posi-

tion. Related information
• Programming maximum opening for power
• Opening and closing the power*-operated
operated tailgate* (p. 269)
tailgate (p. 266)
• Opening and closing the tailgate with foot NOTE
movement* (p. 270) It is not possible to program an opening posi-
tion lower than half-open tailgate.
2. Press the button on the underside of

the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.
> Two short acoustic signals sound to indi-
cate that the set position has been saved.
To reset max. opening:
– Manually move the tailgate to its highest
possible position - press the button on
the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.
> Two acoustic signals sound to indicate
that the set position has been cleared.
The tailgate will then assume its max.
position when opened.
Opening and closing the tailgate Opening and closing with foot
with foot movement* movement
To facilitate the operation of the tailgate when
your hands are occupied, it can be opened and
closed by means of a forward kicking motion
under the rear bumper.
If the car is equipped with keyless locking and
unlocking* then you can unlock the tailgate with
a foot movement.
The function with both opening and closing of
the tailgate is also available when the car is
equipped with power operated tailgate*.
The sensor is located on left of centre in the bumper19.
NOTE Kicking motion within the detector's valid activation area.
within range behind the car (approx. 1 metre (3
The foot-operated tailgate function is availa- feet)) for opening and closing to be possible. This – Make one slow, forward kicking motion
ble in two versions: also applies to an already unlocked car in order under the left part of the rear bumper. Then
• Opening and closing with foot movement to avoid accidental opening e.g. in a car wash. take a step back. The bumper must not be
touched.
• Only unlocking with foot movement (lift
up the tailgate manually to open it) > A short acoustic signal sounds when
opening or closing is activated - the tail-
Note that the function for opening and clos-
gate is opened/closed.
ing with foot movement requires power oper-
ated tailgate*. If the tailgate is in open position then it is
always closed20 on activation via foot
movement.
If several kicking motions take place without an
approved remote control key being located
19 If the car is equipped with skid plate* the sensor is located out on the left-hand corner of the bumper.
20 Applies to cars with power operated tailgate*.
behind the car, opening will not be possible until Related information
after a certain delay. • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
Do not leave your foot positioned under the car (p. 259)
during the kicking motion. This could cause acti- • Opening and closing the power*-operated
vation to fail. tailgate (p. 266)
Cancelling opening or closing with foot • Remote control key range (p. 240)
movement
– Make one slow forward kicking motion when
opening or closing is in progress in order to
stop the movement of the tailgate.
The remote control key does not have to be in
the vicinity of the car to cancel opening or clos- To activate opening or closing with a foot move-
ing. ment on a car equipped with skid plate, the kick-
ing motion is made from the side of the car. One
NOTE of the car's remote control keys must be within
There is a risk of reduced function, or no range (approx. 1 metre (3 feet)) for opening and
function, if the rear bumper is loaded with closing to be possible.
large amounts of ice, snow, dirt or similar. For
this reason, make sure you keep it clean.
NOTE
Pay attention to the possibility that the sys-
tem may be activated in a car wash or similar
if the remote key is within range.
Cars with the skid plate* accessory

If the car is equipped with skid plate the sensor is
located out on the left-hand corner of the
bumper. Kicking motion within the detector's valid activation area.
Private locking Activating and deactivating private 2. Enter the desired security code.
The tailgate can be locked, so-called private locking > The security code is saved. The private
locking which prevents it from being opened, Private locking is activated with a function button locking function is now ready for activa-
e.g. when the car is taken in for service, left at a in the centre display and an optional PIN code. tion.
hotel or similar.
NOTE If the system has been reset then the above pro-
The private locking function The car needs to be in ignition mode I as a cedure needs to be repeated.
button is located in the centre minimum for the private locking function to be Activate private locking
display function view. Depend- activated. 1. Press the button for private locking in the
ing on the current status of the
function view.
lock, Private Locking
Enter the security code before using for
Unlocked or Private Locking
Locked is shown. the first time
A security code needs to be selected during the
Related information first time the function is used. It can then be used
• Activating and deactivating private locking to deactivate private locking if the selected PIN
(p. 272) code has been lost or forgotten. The security
code acts as a PUK code for all subsequent PIN > A pop-up window is shown.
codes set for the private locking function.
2. Enter the code to be used in order to unlock
Save the security code in a safe place. the tailgate after locking and tap on
To create a security code: Confirm.
1. Press the button for private locking in the > The tailgate is locked. Confirmation of
function view. locking takes place by means of a green
indicator being shown by the button in the
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.
272
Deactivate private locking Related information Alarm*

1. Press the button for private locking in the • Private locking (p. 272) The alarm provides audible and visual warnings
function view. if anyone enters the car without a valid remote
control key or manipulates the starter battery or
alarm siren.
When armed, the alarm is triggered if:
• a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened21

• a movement is detected in the passenger
> A pop-up window is shown. compartment (if fitted with a movement
2. Enter the code that was used for locking and detector*)
tap on Confirm. • the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with
> The tailgate is unlocked. Confirmation of a tilt detector*)
unlocking takes place by means of the • the starter battery's cable is disconnected
green indicator by the button in the func-
tion view extinguishing. • the siren is disconnected.
Alarm signals
NOTE When the alarm has been triggered, the following
If the PIN code has been lost/forgotten, or if happens:
the wrong PIN code has been entered more • A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
than three times, the security code can be alarm is switched off.
used to deactivate the private locking.
• The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes
or until the alarm is switched off.
NOTE
If private locking is activated and the car is
unlocked via Volvo On Call* or the Volvo On
Call* app, private locking will be deactivated
automatically.
|| If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified, one tries to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle In the event of an alarm system fault
the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times22. away. If there is a fault in the alarm system,
The movement sensor triggers an alarm in the the driver display shows the symbol
Alarm indicator and the message Alarm system
event of movement in the passenger compart-
ment - air currents are also registered. For this failure Service required. In which
reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo
a window or the panoramic roof* open or if the workshop is recommended.
passenger compartment heater is used.
NOTE
To avoid this:
Do not attempt to repair or alter components
• Close the window and panoramic roof when
in the alarm system yourself. Any such
leaving the car.
attempts may affect the terms of the insur-
• If the passenger compartment or parking ance.
heater is to be used – direct the airflow from
the air vents so that they do not point
upwards in the passenger compartment.
Related information
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the • Activating and deactivating alarms* (p. 275)
Alternatively, use a reduced alarm level to tempo-
alarm system's status: rarily deactivate the movement and tilt sensors. • Reduced alarm level* (p. 276)
• LED not lit – alarm not armed. Also switch off the movement and tilt sensors • Double lock* (p. 276)
• The LED flashes once every other second – when the car is being transported on a ferry or
alarm is armed. train as these movements may affect the car and
• After the alarm has been disarmed, the LED trigger the alarm.
flashes rapidly for a maximum of 30 seconds
or until ignition position I has been selected
by turning the start knob clockwise and
releasing it - the alarm has been triggered.
Movement and tilt sensors*

Movement and tilt sensors react to movements
inside the car, if the window is broken or if any-
Activating and deactivating alarms* Deactivate the alarm 3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release it.
The alarm is armed when the car is locked. Unlock and disarm the car alarm as follows: > The alarm is deactivated.
Arming the alarm • press the remote control key's unlock button
Switching off a triggered alarm
Lock and arm the car alarm as follows: – Press the remote control key's unlock button
• press the remote control key's lock button • grip one of the door handles or press on the or set the car in ignition position I by turning
tailgate's rubberised pressure plate23. the start knob clockwise and then releasing.
Deactivate the alarm without a functioning
• touch the marked surface on the outside of
remote control key NOTE
the door handles or the tailgate's rubberised
pressure plate23.
The car can be unlocked and disarmed even if • Remember that the alarm is activated
the remote control key does not work, e.g. if the when the car is locked.
If the car is equipped with both keyless locking/ remote control key's battery is dead.
unlocking* and a power-operated tailgate*, the • If any of the doors are opened from the
1. Open the driver's door with the detachable inside then the alarm is triggered.
button on the underside of the tailgate can
key blade.
also be used to lock the car and arm the car
alarm. > The alarm is triggered. Automatic arming and rearming of the
alarm
Automatic rearming of the alarm prevents the car
being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control key
(which disarms the alarm) but none of the doors
or the tailgate is opened within two minutes, then
the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is
relocked at the same time.
In certain markets, the alarm is armed automati-
The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
cally after a certain delay after the driver's door
2. Place the remote control key on the key sym- has been opened and closed without being
bol in the backup reader in the tunnel con- locked.
A red LED on the instrument panel flashes once every sole's cup holder.
two seconds when the car is locked and the alarm is
armed.
23 Only applies to a car with keyless locking and unlocking* (Passive Entry). }}
|| To change this setting: Reduced alarm level* Double lock*

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top A reduced alarm level means that the movement Double lock means that all opening handles are
view. and tilt sensors are temporarily switched off. disengaged mechanically, which prevents door
Switch off the movement and tilt detectors in opening from the inside when the car is locked
2. Press My Car Locking. order to avoid accidental triggering of the alarm - from the outside.
3. Select Passive Arming Deactivation to e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during trans- Double locks are activated with the remote con-
deactivate the function temporarily. port on a car train or car ferry. trol key and in keyless locking (Passive Entry)*.
Double locks are activated with a delay of about
Press the Reduced Guard
Related information button in the centre display
10 seconds after the doors have locked.
• Alarm* (p. 273) function view to switch off the If a door is opened within the delay time then the
movement and tilt sensors sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deacti-
when subsequently locking the vated.
car.
At the same time, the double lock function is NOTE
deactivated, i.e. unlocking from inside is possible. • Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the
reduced alarm level must be reactivated. • If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
Related information
• Alarm* (p. 273)
The car can only be unlocked with the remote
• Double lock* (p. 276) control key, keyless unlocking or the Volvo On
Call* app when double locks are activated.
The front left door can also be unlocked with the
detachable key blade. If the car is unlocked with
the detachable key blade, the alarm will be trig-
gered.
WARNING Temporarily deactivating double Detection of unknown car

locks* component*
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with-
out first deactivating the double lock in order If someone is going to stay in the car but the The "Foreign Component Detection" function
to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in. doors must be locked from the outside, then the can detect whether an unknown car component
double lock function should be deactivated, to has been connected to the car.
allow unlocking from the inside.
Related information Each LED headlamp* is designed for the car. If
• Temporarily deactivating double locks* Press the Reduced Guard an unknown headlamp is connected, the driver
(p. 277) button in the centre display's display shows a message Unknown car part.
• Alarm* (p. 273) function view in order to deacti- Service required, unknown car part found.
vate the double lock function Volvo recommends contacting an authorised
temporarily. Volvo workshop.
Related information
This also means that the alarm's movement and • Volvo service programme (p. 590)
tilt detectors* are switched off.
After this, Reduced Guard is shown in the cen-
tre display and double locks are temporarily
deactivated in the subsequent locking of the car.
In conventional locking, the electrical sockets are
deactivated immediately, but when double locks
are temporarily deactivated, they will be active for
a maximum of 10 minutes after locking.
If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the
double lock function must be deactivated again.
The system is reset the next time the engine is
started.
Related information
• Double lock* (p. 276)
• Alarm* (p. 273)
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driving support systems • Road Sign Information* (p. 369) Speed-dependent steering force
The car is equipped with different driver support • Driver Alert Control (p. 375) Speed related power steering causes the steer-
systems which can assist the driver in different ing wheel force to increase with the speed of the
situations, either actively or passively.
• Lane assistance (p. 377)
car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitiv-
• Steering assistance at risk of collision ity.
The systems can, for example, help the driver to (p. 385)
hold a set speed or a certain time interval to the On motorways the steering feels firmer. When
• Park Assist* (p. 394)
vehicle in front, prevent a collision by warning the parking and at low speed steering is light and
driver and brake the car or help the driver to park. • Park assist camera* (p. 399) requires only a slight effort.
Some of the systems are fitted as standard, while • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 408)
others are options. This also varies depending on NOTE
market. In certain situations the power steering may
become too hot and then needs to be tempo-
Related information rarily cooled - during this time the power
• Speed-dependent steering force (p. 280)
steering operates with reduced power and
• Electronic stability control (p. 282) turning the steering wheel may then be per-
• Stability system Roll Stability Control ceived to be slightly heavier.
(p. 281) In parallel with the temporarily reduced steer-
• Rear Collision Warning (p. 359) ing assistance, the driver display shows a
message as well as a STEERING WHEEL
• Speed Limiter (p. 286)
symbol.
• Cruise Control (p. 294)
• Distance Warning* (p. 299)
• Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 302)
• Pilot Assist (p. 318)
• Radar unit (p. 333)
• Camera unit (p. 342)
• City Safety™ (p. 346)
• BLIS* (p. 360)
• Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 365)
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING • Lane assistance (p. 377) Stability system Roll Stability

• Steering assistance at risk of collision Control
While the power steering is working at
reduced power, the driver support functions (p. 385) The stability system RSC1 minimises the risk of
with steering assistance are not available. • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 408) overturning, for example during a sudden evasive
manoeuvre or if the car skids.
In such a situation, the driver display shows
the Power steering failure or Power The RSC system registers if and how much the
Steering Assist Temporarily Reduced
car's lateral inclination changes. This information
message, combined with a STEERING
WHEEL symbol. is used to calculate the risk of the car overturn-
ing. If the car is at risk, its electronic stability con-
trol system engages, the engine torque is
Change the steering force level* reduced and one or more wheels are braked until
To select the steering force level, go to the "Drive the car has regained its stability.
modes" section and see the description at the
alternative INDIVIDUAL under the heading WARNING
"Selectable drive modes". Under normal driving conditions, the RSC sys-
For the car models without a drive mode control tem improves the car's road safety, but this
must not be taken as a reason to increase
with its INDIVIDUAL option, the selection of speed. Always follow the normal precautions
steering force is instead made via the centre dis- for safe driving.
play's top view and the following search path:
Settings My Car Drive Modes
Steering force
Steering force selection cannot be accessed dur-
ing a turn if the speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph).
Related information
• Drive modes* (p. 439)
• City Safety steering assistance for evasive
manoeuvre (p. 353)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Electronic stability control WARNING The function also prevents the driving wheels
Electronic Stability Control (ESC2) helps the from spinning against the road surface during
driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's
• The stability system ESC is supplemen- acceleration.
tary driver support intended to facilitate
traction. Engine Drag Control
driving and make it safer – it cannot han-
The driver display shows this dle all situations in all traffic, weather and Engine Drag Control (EDC4) prevents involuntary
symbol when the ESC system road conditions. wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine
is engaged. • ESC is not a substitute for the driver's braking when driving in low gear on slippery road
attention and judgement. The driver is surfaces.
Braking from the ESC system
may be heard as a pulsing always responsible for ensuring the car is Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
sound, and the car may accel- driven in a safe manner, at the appropri- amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to
erate more slowly than expected when applying ate speed, with an appropriate distance to steer the car.
the throttle. other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations. Trailer stability assist*5
The ESC system consists of the following sub- Trailer stability assist (TSA6) stabilises a car tow-
functions: ing a trailer in situations where they begin snak-
Stability function3
• Stability function3 The function checks the driving and brake force ing. Also see section "Trailer stability assist" for
more information.
• Spin control and traction control system of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the
car.
• Engine Drag Control
NOTE
• Trailer stability assist Spin control and traction control system
The TSA function is deactivated if ESC Sport
The function is active at low speed and brakes
the drive wheels that spin so that additional trac- Mode is activated.
tion shall be transferred from the drive wheels
that are not spinning.
1 Roll Stability Control

2 Electronic Stability Control
3 Also known as Active Yaw Control.
4 Engine Drag Control
5 Trailer stability assist is included when the Volvo genuine towbar is installed.
6 Trailer Stability Assist
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information Sport mode for electronic stability Activating/deactivating Sport mode
• Sport mode for electronic stability control control in Electronic Stability Control
(p. 283) The ESC7 system is always activated — it can- The ESC9 system is always activated — it can-
• Activating/deactivating Sport mode in Elec- not be switched off. However, the driver can not be switched off. However, the driver can
tronic Stability Control (p. 283) select ESC Sport Mode, which allows for a select sport mode, which allows for a more
more active driving experience. active driving experience.
• Limitation for sport mode in Electronic Stabil-
ity Control (p. 284) The Sport mode is activated/
With the ESC Sport Mode subfunction deactivated in the centre dis-
• Symbols and messages for electronic stabil- selected, intervention from ESC is reduced and play's function view.
ity control (p. 285) the car is allowed to skid more and greater con-
trol than normal is thus transferred to the driver.
When ESC Sport Mode is selected, ESC can be
considered as deactivated, despite helping the
– Tap on the ESC Sport Mode button in the
driver in many cases.
function view.
> Sport mode is activated/deactivated - a
NOTE green/grey indicator is displayed in the
With the ESC Sport Mode function button.
selected, Trailer Stability Assist (TSA8) is The driver display indicates activated
deactivated. ESC Sport Mode by displaying this
symbol with a constant glow until the
ESC Sport Mode also provides maximum trac- function is deactivated or the engine is
tion if the car has become bogged down or is switched off. The next time the engine is started,
driving on a loose surface, such as in sand or the ESC system is back in its normal mode again.
deep snow. Related information
Related information • Electronic stability control (p. 282)
• Electronic stability control (p. 282)
• Towbar* (p. 471)

DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitation for sport mode in

Electronic Stability Control
There are certain limitations associated with the
ESC10 system's subfunction ESC Sport Mode
being activated.
The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be
selected when one of the following functions is
activated:
• Speed limiter
• Cruise control
• Adaptive cruise control
• Pilot Assist.
Related information
284
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for Control -ESC) can be shown on the driver dis- The following table shows some examples.
electronic stability control play.
A number of symbols and messages regarding
electronic stability control (Electronic Stability

Constant glow for System check when the engine is started.
approx. 2 seconds.
Flashing light. ESC system is being activated.
Constant glow. Sport mode is selected.

NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode — it is partly reduced.
ESC ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature - the function is reactiva-
ted automatically when the brakes have cooled.
Temporarily off
See the message in the driver display.
ESC ESC system disengaged.
Service required • Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press- If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
ing the button, located in the centre of the authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Related information
285
DRIVER SUPPORT
Speed Limiter : Reduces stored maximum speed Related information

A speed limiter (SL11) can be likened to a • Limitations for Speed Limiter (p. 290)
Marker for stored max speed
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the • Activating and starting the Speed Limiter
speed using the accelerator pedal but is preven- The car's current speed (p. 287)
ted from accidentally exceeding a pre-
Stored maximum speed • Managing speed for the Speed Limiter
selected/set maximum speed by the speed lim- (p. 287)
iter.
• Deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it in
WARNING standby mode (p. 288)
• The Speed Limiter function is supple- • Reactivating the Speed Limiter from standby
mentary driver support intended to facili- mode (p. 289)
tate driving – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
• Deactivating the Speed Limiter (p. 289)
tions. • Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 290)
• The driver must always pay attention to • Limitations for Automatic Speed Limiter
traffic conditions and take action if the (p. 293)
Speed Limiter is not maintaining a suita- • Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed Limiter
ble speed. (p. 292)
• The Speed Limiter is not a substitute for • Changing the tolerance for the Automatic
Buttons and symbols for functions12. the driver's attention and judgement. The Speed Limiter (p. 293)
: Activates the speed limiter from driver is always responsible for ensuring
standby mode and resumes stored maximum the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
speed appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
: Increases the stored maximum speed ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
: From standby mode - activates the
speed limiter and stores current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes the speed limiter to standby mode
11 Speed Limiter
12 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
286
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating and starting the Speed mum speed that can be stored is 30 km/h Managing speed for the Speed
Limiter (20 mph). Limiter
The speed limiter function (SL13) must first be – When the speed limiter is in standby mode The speed limiter (SL14) can be set to different
selected and activated in order to be able to reg- speeds.
ulate the speed. and the symbol is shown - press the
steering wheel button (2). Setting/changing the stored speed
Set the speed limiter in standby mode > The Speed Limiter starts and the current
speed is stored as the maximum speed.
Related information
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
depending on car model.
– Change the set speed with short or long
– Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to browse to the sym- presses on steering wheel button (1) or
bol/function for speed limiter (4). (3):
> Symbol (4) is shown and the speed limiter • Short press: Each press changes the
is set in standby mode. speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
Start the Speed Limiter
The speed limiter cannot be activated until after • Press and hold: Release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the engine has been started. The lowest maxi-
the desired speed.
13 Speed Limiter
14 Speed Limiter }}
287
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| • The speed set after the last button press is Deactivate the Speed Limiter and Temporary deactivation with the
stored in the memory. set it in standby mode accelerator pedal
The speed limiter (SL15) can be temporarily The speed limiter can also be temporarily deacti-
Related information vated and overridden with the accelerator pedal
deactivated and set in standby mode.
• Speed Limiter (p. 286) without the speed limiter first having to be set in
standby mode - e.g. to be able to quickly acceler-
ate the car out of a situation.
In which case, proceed as follows:
1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
release it to interrupt acceleration when the
desired speed has been reached.
> In this mode, the speed limiter is still acti-
vated and the driver display's symbol is
therefore WHITE.
2. Fully release the accelerator pedal when the
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary temporary acceleration is finished.
> The car is then braked automatically
To deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it in below the last stored maximum speed.
standby mode:
Related information
– Press the steering wheel button (2). • Speed Limiter (p. 286)
> The speed limit markings and symbols in
the driver display change colour from
WHITE to GREY - the speed limiter is now
temporarily deactivated and the driver can
exceed the maximum speed setting.
15 Speed Limiter
288
DRIVER SUPPORT
Reactivating the Speed Limiter from – Press the steering wheel button (2). Deactivating the Speed Limiter
standby mode > The Speed Limiter indicators and symbols The speed limiter (SL17) can be deactivated.
The speed limiter (SL16) can be reactivated after in the driver display change colour from
having been temporarily deactivated and placed GREY to WHITE — the car will now apply
in standby mode. its current speed as the maximum speed.
Related information

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary 1. Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The speed limiter is set in standby mode.
To reactivate the Speed Limiter from standby
2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
mode:
(3) to change to another function.
– Press the steering wheel button (1). > The driver display's symbol and indicator
> The driver display's speed limit markings for speed limiter (4) are switched off -
change colour from GREY to WHITE - the which deletes the set/stored maximum
car's speed is then limited again by the speed.
last stored maximum speed.
3. Press the steering wheel button (2)
or again.
> Another function is activated.
16 Speed Limiter
17 Speed Limiter }}
289
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Related information Limitations for Speed Limiter Automatic Speed Limiter

• Speed Limiter (p. 286) On steep downhill gradients the speed limiter’s The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL18) function
braking effect may be inadequate and hence the helps the driver to adapt the car's maximum
stored maximum speed may be exceeded. In this speed to the speed shown on the road signs.
case, the driver is alerted by the message Speed
limit exceeded in the driver display. The Speed Limiter function (SL19) can be
changed to Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL).
NOTE The automatic speed limiter uses speed informa-
A text message that the maximum speed is tion from the Road Sign Information20 function to
exceeded will be activated if the speed has automatically adapt the car's maximum speed.
been exceeded by at least 3 km/h
(approx. 2 mph).
Related information
18 Automatic Speed Limiter

19 Speed Limiter
20 Road Sign Information – RSI
290
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING Is SL or ASL active? Colour of sign Meaning

Symbols in the driver display show which speed symbol
• The ASL function is supplementary driver limiter function is active:
support intended to facilitate driving and Greenish yellow ASL is active
make it safer – it cannot handle all situa- Symbol SL ASL
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi- Grey ASL has been set in
tions. standby mode
✓ ✓
• Even if the driver clearly sees the speed- A
Amber/Orange ASL is in temporary standby
related road sign, the speed information mode - e.g. due to a traffic
from the Road Sign Information (RSI) ✓
sign not being read.
function to ASL may be incorrect – in
such cases the driver must intervene Related information
him/herself and accelerate or brake to a Sign symbolB after "70" = ASL is acti- • Speed Limiter (p. 286)
suitable speed. vated.
• ASL is not a substitute for the driver's A WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode.
attention and judgement. The driver is B See the following heading "ASL symbol" regarding the mean-
ing of the symbol's colour.
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropri- The ASL symbol
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to The sign symbol (displayed alongside
other vehicles, and in accordance with the stored speed, "70", in the centre of
current traffic rules and regulations. the speedometer) can be shown in
• See also the heading "Limitations for three colours with the following mean-
Road Sign Information". ings:
291
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activate/deactivate Automatic NOTE Deactivate ASL

Speed Limiter To deactivate the automatic speed limiter:
The automatic speed limiter function (ASL21)
• If the Automatic Speed Limiter function is
activated, road sign information is shown – Tap on the Speed Sign Assist button in
can be activated and deactivated as a supple- in the driver display even if RSI is not the function view.
ment to the speed limiter (SL22). activated. > ASL is deactivated and the button's indi-
• To remove road sign information from the cation becomes GREY - SL is activated
Activate ASL
driver display, you must deactivate both instead.
The Speed Sign Assist but-
ton is located in the function Automatic Speed Limiter and RSI.
view of the centre display. • When the Automatic Speed Limiter func- WARNING
tion is activated but RSI is deactivated, no After switching from ASL to SL the car will no
warnings are given from RSI. In this situa- longer follow the signed speed limit but only
tion, settings for RSI cannot be adjusted the maximum speed stored in memory.
either - to be able to adjust settings as
To activate the automatic speed limiter:
well as receive warnings, RSI must be
1. Press the Speed Sign Assist button. activated. Related information
> ASL is set in standby mode, a green indi- • Speed Limiter (p. 286)
cator appears on the button, and the
driver display shows a sign symbol in the
centre of the speedometer.
2. Press the steering wheel button .

> ASL is activated with the car’s current
speed.

22 Speed Limiter
292
DRIVER SUPPORT
Changing the tolerance for the – Press the steering wheel button (1) Limitations for Automatic Speed
Automatic Speed Limiter until 70 km/h (43 mph) in the centre of the Limiter
The Automatic Speed Limiter function (ASL23) speedometer (4) changes to 75 km/h Automatic speed limitation takes place using
can be set for different tolerance levels. (47 mph). speed information from the RSI25 function - not
> After which, the car uses the selected tol- from the speed limit road signs that the car
It is possible to increase/decrease the signed erance 5 km/h (4 mph) as long as signs passes.
speed limit. If, for example, the car follows a passed are showing 70 km/h (43 mph). If RSI25 cannot interpret and provide speed infor-
signed speed limit of 70km/h (43 mph) the mation to the ASL, then the ASL is set in standby
driver can instead choose to allow the car to The tolerance is followed until a road sign
with a lower or higher speed is passed - mode and changes over to SL. In such cases the
maintain 75 km/h (47 mph). driver must intervene and brake to a suitable
then the car follows the new signed
speed limit instead and the tolerance is speed.
deleted from the memory. The ASL will be reactivated when the RSI25 func-
If the Road Sign Information* function is tion can once again interpret and provide speed
activated, the signed speed limit will then information to the ASL.
be shown with a RED indicator on the See also the section "Limitations for Road Sign
speedometer. Information".
The tolerance is adjusted in the same way as the Related information
speed setting is in the speed limiter.
NOTE
Buttons and symbols for functions24. The maximum selectable tolerance is
+/- 10 km/h (5 mph).
Related information

25 Road Sign Information - RSI
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cruise Control : Reduces stored speed WARNING

The cruise control (CC26) helps the driver main-
tain an even speed, resulting in more relaxed
Marker for stored speed • The cruise control function is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to facilitate
driving on motorways and long, straight roads in The car's current speed driving – it cannot handle all situations in
regular traffic flows.
Stored speed all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Overview • The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to this
NOTE function to learn about factors such as its
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Con- limitations and what the driver should be
trol*, it is possible to switch between cruise aware of before using the system (see
control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the the list of links at the end of this article).
heading "Switch between CC and ACC". • Cruise control is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
Buttons and symbols for functions27. tions.
: Activates cruise control from standby
mode and resumes stored speed Related information
• Activating and starting Cruise Control
: Increases the stored speed (p. 295)
: From standby mode - activates cruise • Managing speed for the Cruise Control
control and stores current speed (p. 296)
: From active mode - deactivates/ • Deactivate Cruise Control and set it in
changes cruise control to standby mode standby mode (p. 297)
26 Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Reactivating Cruise Control from standby Activating and starting Cruise Activating/starting cruise control
mode (p. 297) Control In order to start the Cruise control from the
• Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 298) The cruise control function (CC28) must first be standby mode, the car's current speed must be
selected and activated in order to be able to reg- 30 km/h (20 mph) or higher. The lowest speed
ulate the speed. that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph).
To start the cruise control:
–
With the symbol/function displayed,
press the steering wheel button (2).
> Cruise Control starts and the current
speed becomes the stored speed.
NOTE
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds
below 30 km/h (20 mph).
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary Related information

depending on car model. • Cruise Control (p. 294)
Set cruise control in standby mode
To set cruise control in standby mode:
– Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to browse to the sym-
bol/function (4).
> The symbol is shown and the cruise con-
trol can then be activated.
28 Cruise Control
295
DRIVER SUPPORT
Managing speed for the Cruise • The speed set after the last button press is Cruise control dependence on drive
Control stored in the memory. mode
Cruise control (CC29) can be set to different If the driver increases the car's speed using the The cruise control's way of maintaining a speed
speeds. accelerator pedal before pressing the steering may vary depending on the selected drive
wheel button (1), the speed stored will be mode30.
Setting/changing the stored speed the car's speed when the button is depressed, Cruise control Eco Cruise
provided the driver's foot is on the accelerator In ECO drive mode the cruise control's accelera-
pedal at the moment when the button is tions and decelerations become smoother com-
depressed. pared to other drive modes to optimise fuel and
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- environmental economy. This can cause the car's
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect speed to be temporarily above or below the set
the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed.
speed when the accelerator pedal is released. See supplementary information in "ECO drive
mode" under "Cruise control Eco Cruise".
Using engine braking instead of the
foot brake Cruise control Dynamic Cruise
With Cruise Control, speed is regulated with less In Dynamic drive mode, the cruise control's accel-
frequent application of the foot brake. On a erations and decelerations are felt more strongly
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary and seem more direct compared to other modes.
depending on car model. downhill gradient it may sometimes be desirable
to start moving a little faster and limit the acceler-
– Change the set speed with short or long ation by engine braking. In this case the driver
Related information
presses on steering wheel button (1) or can temporarily disable foot brake application by • Cruise Control (p. 294)
(3): Cruise Control.
• Short press: Each press changes the To do so, proceed as follows:

speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h – Depress the accelerator pedal about halfway
(+/- 5 mph). down and release.
• Press and hold: Release the button when > Cruise Control will disengage its auto-
the speed indicator (4) has moved to the matic foot braking and then uses engine
desired speed braking only.
29 Cruise Control
30 See supplementary information in the section "Drive modes".
296
DRIVER SUPPORT
Deactivate Cruise Control and set it Standby mode on driver intervention Reactivating Cruise Control from
in standby mode The cruise control is temporarily deactivated and standby mode
Cruise control (CC31) can be temporarily deacti- set in standby mode if: Cruise control (CC32) can be temporarily deacti-
vated so that it is set in the standby mode and • the foot brake is used vated so that it is set in the standby mode and
can be reactivated later. can be reactivated later.
• the gear selector is moved to N position
Deactivate Cruise Control and set in • the clutch pedal is held depressed for longer Reactivating cruise control from
standby mode than 1 minute standby mode
• the driver maintains a speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then control the speed himself/
herself.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set
in standby mode if:
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model. • wheels lose traction depending on car model.
To set cruise control in standby mode: • engine speed is too low/high To start cruise control from standby mode:
–
• brake temperature is too high
–
Press the steering wheel button (2). Press the steering wheel button (1).
> The cruise control markings and symbols
• speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).
in the driver display change colour from The driver must then control the speed himself/ in the driver display change colour from
WHITE to GREY - cruise control is now herself. GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow
temporarily deactivated and the driver the most recently stored speed again.
must then manually control the speed.
Related information
31 Cruise Control
32 Cruise Control }}
297
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| or Deactivating Cruise Control NOTE

To start cruise control from standby mode: Cruise Control — CC can be deactivated.
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Con-
– Press the steering wheel button (2). trol*, it is possible to switch between cruise
control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the
heading "Switch between CC and ACC".
in the driver display change colour from
GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow
the current speed. Related information
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information Buttons and symbols for functions33.

• Cruise Control (p. 294) To deactivate cruise control:
1. Press the steering wheel button (2).

> Cruise control is set in standby mode.
2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol for cruise con-
trol (4) is extinguished - which
deletes the set/stored speed.
3. Press the steering wheel button (2)

again.
> Another function is activated.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Distance Warning* WARNING Head-up display for Distance

The Distance Warning34
function can assist the Distance warning only reacts if the time win-
Warning35
driver to notice that the time interval to the vehi- dow to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the In cars equipped with head up display*, a sym-
cle ahead may be too short. preset value – the speed of the driver's vehi- bol is shown on the windscreen for as long as
cle is not affected. the time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter
However, the requirement is that the car is
equipped with a Head-up display to be able to than the preset value.
show Distance Warning, which is then displayed NOTE
with a symbol on the windscreen as long as the
time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter than This function can come as either Standard or
the preselected value. an Option depending on the market.
Distance warning is active at speeds Related information

above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to the
• Head-up display for Distance Warning
vehicle ahead travelling in the same direction. No (p. 299)
distance information is provided for oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles. • Activating/deactivating Distance Warning
(p. 300)
NOTE • Setting the time interval for Distance Warn-
ing (p. 300) Symbol for Distance Warning on the windscreen36.
• Distance Alert is only available on cars
that can display information on the wind- • Limitations of Distance Warning (p. 301) However, this presupposes that the Show Driver
screen with a Head-up Display. Support function is activated via settings in the
car's menu system; see the section "Head up
• Distance warning is deactivated during
the time the adaptive cruise control is display" for how this works.
active.
34 Distance Alert
35 The Distance Warning function is only available in cars that can show information on the windscreen with a so-called Head-up display.
36 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| NOTE Activating/deactivating Distance Setting the time interval for

Warning37 Distance Warning38
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is The Distance Warning function can be set with The Distance Warning function can be set with
not looking straight ahead may make the vis- different time intervals or switched off. different time intervals.
ual warning signal in the windscreen difficult Different time intervals to the
On/Off vehicle in front can be selected
to recognise.
Press the Distance Alert but- and shown in the driver display
ton in the centre display func- as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
Related information tion view. more lines the longer the time
• Distance Warning* (p. 299) interval. One line represents
• Head-up display* (p. 134) about 1 second to the vehicle
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.
• GREEN button indication - Distance Warning The same symbol is also shown when the adap-
is activated. tive cruise control function is activated.
• GREY button indication - Distance Warning
is deactivated.
Distance Warning is activated automatically each
time the engine is started.
Related information
37 The Distance Warning function is only available in cars that can display information on the windscreen with a so-called Head-up display.
38 The Distance Warning function is only available in cars that can display information on the windscreen with a so-called Head-up display.
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE Limitations of Distance Warning39

The Distance Warning function may have limita-
• The higher the speed the longer the cal-
tions in certain situations.
culated distance in metres for a given
time interval.
WARNING
• Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations. • The Distance Warning function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to facili-
• The set time window is also used by the
tate driving and make it safer – it cannot
adaptive cruise control and Pilot Assist
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
functions.
and road conditions.
• The vehicle's size may affect the ability to
Control for time interval. WARNING detect, e.g. motorcycles, which could
mean that the warning lamp illuminates at
Decrease time interval • Only use a time window that suits the
a shorter time window than set or that the
current traffic conditions.
Increase time interval warning is temporarily absent.
• The driver should be aware that short
Distance indicator time windows limit the amount of time • Extremely high speeds can cause the
available to react and take action if an lamp to illuminate at a shorter time win-
– Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to unexpected traffic situation arises. dow than that set due to limitations in
increase or decrease the time interval. radar unit range.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur-
Related information • Distance Warning is not a substitute for
rent time interval. the driver's attention and judgement. The
tions.
39 The Distance Warning function is only available in cars that can display information on the windscreen with a so-called Head-up display. }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| NOTE Adaptive Cruise Control* is clear again the car returns to the selected
The adaptive cruise control (ACC40) helps the speed.
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section driver to maintain an even speed combined with
a pre-selected time interval to the vehicle ahead. WARNING
"Limitations for radar unit".
An adaptive cruise control provides a more relax- • The adaptive cruise control function is
ing driving experience on long journeys on motor- supplementary driver support intended to
Related information facilitate driving and make it safer – it
• Distance Warning* (p. 299) ways and long straight main roads in smooth traf-
fic flows. cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
• The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to this
function to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links at the end of this article).
• The adaptive cruise control is not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always responsi-
ble for ensuring the car is driven in a safe
manner, at the appropriate speed, with an
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
vehicle ahead41. and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
The driver selects the desired speed and a time
interval to the vehicle ahead. If the camera and
radar unit detects a slower vehicle in front of the NOTE
car, the speed is adapted automatically via the This function can come as either Standard or
preset time interval to the vehicle. When the road an Option depending on the market.
40 Adaptive Cruise Control

DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive cruise control regulates the speed with WARNING Overview

acceleration and braking. It is normal for the
Controls
brakes to emit a low sound when they are being • Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
used to adjust the speed. avoidance system. The driver is always
responsible and must intervene if the sys-
The adaptive cruise control aims to control the tem does not detect a vehicle ahead.
speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand
sudden braking the driver must brake himself/ • The adaptive cruise control does not
herself. This applies in cases of large speed dif- brake for humans or animals, and not for
ferences or if the vehicle in front brakes sud- small vehicles such as bicycles and
denly. Due to the limitations of the radar unit, motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncom-
braking may come unexpectedly or not at all. ing, slow or stationary vehicles and
objects.
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval • Do not use the adaptive cruise control in
demanding situations, such as in city traf-
set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any
fic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with Buttons and symbols for functions41.
vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain
a lot of water or slush on the road, in
the speed set and stored by the driver. This also
heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on : Activates the adaptive cruise control
takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead
winding roads or on slip roads. from standby mode and resumes stored
increases and exceeds the stored speed.
speed
The following applies for cars with automatic
IMPORTANT : Increases the stored speed
gearbox:
• Adaptive cruise control can follow another Maintenance of adaptive cruise control com- : From standby mode - activates the
vehicle at speed from 0 km/h up to ponents must only be performed at a work- adaptive cruise control and stores current
200 km/h (125 mph). shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- speed
ommended.
The following applies for cars with manual gear- : From active mode - deactivates/
box: changes the adaptive cruise control to
standby mode
• The Adaptive cruise control can follow
another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h : Reduces stored speed
(20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph).
Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead
303
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead Driver display • Activating and starting Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (p. 306)
Target vehicle indicator: ACC has detected
and is following a target vehicle at the preset • Managing speed with Adaptive Cruise Con-
time interval trol (p. 307)
Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead • Setting time interval for Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (p. 308)
• Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive Cruise
NOTE Control (p. 309)
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Con- • Overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise
trol*, it is possible to switch between cruise Control (p. 311)
control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the
heading "Switch between CC and ACC".
• Starting overtaking assistance with Adaptive
Cruise Control (p. 311)
Indication of speeds41.
• Limitations for overtaking assistance with
Stored speed Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 311)
Speed of vehicle ahead. • Changing target with Adaptive Cruise Control
(p. 312)
Current speed of your car.
• Automatic braking with Adaptive Cruise Con-
To see different combinations of symbols trol (p. 312)
depending on traffic situation - see the heading • Limitations for Adaptive Cruise Control
"Symbols and messages for the adaptive cruise (p. 313)
control".
• Change between Cruise Control and Adap-
Related information tive Cruise Control (p. 314)
• Adaptive Cruise Control and Collision risk • Symbols and messages for Adaptive Cruise
warning (p. 305) Control (p. 316)
• Head-up display for Adaptive Cruise Control
if there is a risk of collision (p. 305)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive Cruise Control and WARNING Head-up display for Adaptive Cruise
Collision risk warning Control if there is a risk of collision
The adaptive cruise control only warns of
vehicles which its radar unit has detected - In cars equipped with a head up display*, the
hence a warning may not be given, or it may warning is shown on the windscreen by a flash-
be given with a certain delay. ing symbol.
• Never wait for a warning. Apply the
brakes when the situation requires.
Related information
Audio and symbol for collision warning42.

Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen43.
Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli-
sion
NOTE
Distance measurement with the camera and
radar unit Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
Adaptive Cruise Control uses approx. 40% of the
not looking straight ahead may make the vis-
capacity of the foot brake. If the car needs to be
ual warning signal in the windscreen difficult
braked more heavily than the adaptive cruise
to recognise.
control is capable of and the driver does not
brake, the warning lamp and acoustic warning are
activated to alert the driver that immediate inter- Related information
vention is required. • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 302)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating and starting Adaptive Starting/activating the adaptive cruise – With the symbol/function (4) displayed,
Cruise Control control press the steering wheel button (1).
Adaptive cruise control (ACC44) must first be In order to start the ACC the following require-
> Adaptive cruise control starts and the cur-
activated and then started if it is to control the ments apply:
rent speed is stored, which is shown in
speed and distance. • The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and figures in the centre of the speedometer.
the driver's door must be closed.
Setting the adaptive cruise control in The time interval is only
standby mode • There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") adjusted to the vehicle ahead
within reasonable distance in front of the car, by the ACC when the distance
or the current speed must be at least symbol shows two vehicles.
15 km/h (9 mph).
• For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must
be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
At the same time a speed
range is marked.
The higher speed is the
stored/selected speed and the
lower speed is that of the vehi-
cle ahead (target vehicle).
Related information
depending on car model. • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 302)
Immediately after the engine is started the Adap-
tive Cruise Control is in the standby mode. To set
it in standby mode from active mode, proceed as
follows: NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
– Press steering wheel button ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) to
scroll to the symbol/function (4).
> The symbol is displayed and Adaptive
Cruise Control is set in standby mode.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Managing speed with Adaptive – Change the set speed with short or long even though it is capable of following another
Cruise Control presses on steering wheel button (1) or vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than
The adaptive cruise control (ACC45) can be set (2): 30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored.
to different speeds. The maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h
• Short press: Each press changes the
(125 mph).
Setting/changing the stored speed speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph). Manual gearbox
The Adaptive cruise control can follow another
• Press and hold: Release the button when
the speed indicator (3) has moved to the vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to
desired speed. 200 km/h (125 mph).
The lowest programmable speed for the adaptive
• The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory. cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maxi-
mum speed is 200 km/h (125 mph).
If the driver increases the car’s speed using the
accelerator pedal before pressing the steering Related information
wheel button , the speed stored will be the • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 302)
car’s speed when the button is depressed, provi-
ded the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary the moment when the button is depressed.
depending on car model and market.
: Increases the stored speed. tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
: Reduces stored speed. speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Stored speed. Automatic gearbox
Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle
at speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Note that the lowest programmable speed for the
adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) -
DRIVER SUPPORT
Setting time interval for Adaptive NOTE

Cruise Control
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC46) can be
set to different time intervals. time interval.
Different time intervals to the • Only use the time intervals permitted by
vehicle in front can be selected local traffic regulations.
and shown in the driver display
• If the adaptive cruise control does not
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the seem to respond with a speed increase
more lines the longer the time when activated, it may be because the
interval. One line represents time window to the vehicle ahead is
about 1 second to the vehicle shorter than the set time window.
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds. Control for time interval47.
The same symbol is also shown when the Dis- Decrease time interval
tance Warning function is activated. WARNING
Increase time interval • Only use a time window that suits the
NOTE current traffic conditions.
Distance indicator
When the symbol in the driver display shows • The driver should be aware that short
– Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to time windows limit the amount of time
two cars, ACC is following the vehicle in front
increase or decrease the time interval. available to react and take action if an
at a pre-set time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur- unexpected traffic situation arises.
When only one car is shown, there is no vehi- rent time interval.
cle within a reasonable distance ahead.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time inter- Select how ACC shall maintain the
val to vary significantly in certain situations in distance* to the vehicle ahead
order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front The driver can select different driving styles for
smoothly and comfortably. At low speed, when how the Adaptive cruise control should maintain
the distances are short, the adaptive cruise con- the preset time interval to the vehicle ahead.
trol increases the time interval slightly. Selection is made via the drive mode control
DRIVE MODE.

DRIVER SUPPORT
Select one of the following options: Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive To temporarily switch off Adaptive Cruise Control
• Eco - ACC focuses on optimal fuel economy, Cruise Control and set it in standby mode:
which means longer time interval to the vehi- The Adaptive cruise control (ACC48) can be – Press the steering wheel button (2).
cle ahead. temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the
> The
standby mode and can later be reactivated. symbol on the driver display
• Comfort - ACC focuses on following the set changes colour from WHITE to GREY and
time interval to the vehicle ahead as Deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control and the stored speed in the centre of the
smoothly as possible. speedometer changes from BEIGE to
set it in standby mode
• Dynamic - ACC focuses on following the set GREY.
time interval to the vehicle ahead more
closely, which in certain cases may mean WARNING
heavier acceleration and braking.
• With the adaptive cruise control is in
See further information in the "Drive modes" sec- standby mode, the driver must intervene
tions. and regulate both speed and distance to
Supplementary information can also be found in the vehicle ahead.
the sections "Managing speed for the cruise con- • When the adaptive cruise control is in
trol" and "Drive mode ECO". standby mode and the car comes too close
to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned of
Related information the short distance by the Distance Warn-
• Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 302) ing function instead.
48 Adaptive Cruise Control }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Standby mode on driver intervention Automatic standby mode may occur if: Reactivating adaptive cruise control
The Adaptive cruise control is temporarily deacti-
• the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and ACC from standby mode
vated and set in standby mode if: is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a
• the foot brake is used. stationary vehicle or an object, such as a
speed bump.
• the gear selector is moved to N position.
• the driver maintains a speed higher than the • the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute. vehicle ahead turns off so that ACC no
longer has a vehicle to follow.
• the clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1
minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox. • speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- gearbox.
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored • the driver opens the door.
speed when the accelerator pedal is released. • the driver takes off the seatbelt.
Automatic standby mode • engine speed is too low/high. depending on car model.
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on • one or more wheels lose traction. To reactivate ACC from standby mode:
other systems, e.g. Electronic Stability Control
• brake temperature is high.
–
ESC49. If any of the other systems stops working, Press the steering wheel button (1).
the adaptive cruise control is deactivated auto- • the parking brake is applied.
> The speed is then set to the most recently
matically. • the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g. stored speed.
snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio
WARNING waves are blocked).
WARNING
With automatic standby mode, the driver is A significant increase in speed may follow
warned via an acoustic signal and a message when the speed is resumed with the
on the driver display. steering wheel button.
• The driver must then regulate the car's
speed, apply the brakes as needed and Related information
maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Overtaking assistance with Adaptive Starting overtaking assistance with Limitations for overtaking
Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise Control assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Adaptive cruise control (ACC50) can assist the Control
driver when overtaking other vehicles. Continuation for Overtaking Assistance The overtaking assistance function may have lim-
The following conditions must exist for Overtak- ited functionality in certain situations.
How overtaking assistance works ing Assistance to be activated:
When ACC is following another vehicle and the
WARNING
• there must be a vehicle in front (the “target
When using the Overtaking Assistance Sys-
driver indicates the intention to overtake by acti- vehicle”)
vating the direction indicator51, adaptive cruise tem, the driver should be aware that there
control helps by accelerating the vehicle towards • your car's current speed is at least 70 km/h may be undesired acceleration if the condi-
(43 mph) tions suddenly change.
the vehicle in front before the driver’s vehicle
reaches the overtaking lane. • the stored ACC speed must be high enough Some situations should therefore be avoided,
for overtaking to take place safely. such as if:
The function then delays reducing speed in order
to avoid premature braking when the driver’s car Starting Overtaking Assistance
• the car is approaching an exit for turn-of
is approaching a slower vehicle. that is in the same direction as overtaking
To start the Overtaking Assistance: would normally occur.
The function remains active until the driver’s vehi- – Activate the direction indicator.
cle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.
• the vehicle ahead slows down before the
Use the left direction indicator in a car with driver's car has crossed over into the
the steering wheel on the left, or the right overtaking lane
WARNING direction indicator in a car with the steering • the traffic in the overtaking lane slows
Be aware that this function can be activated wheel on the right. down
in more situations than during overtaking, e.g. > Overtaking Assistance is started.
when a direction indicator is used to indicate • a right-hand drive car is driven in a county
a change of lane or exit to another road – the with left-hand traffic (or vice versa).
Related information
car will then accelerate briefly.
Situations of this kind can be avoided by tempo-
Related information rarily setting ACC52 in the standby mode.
Related information
51 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Changing target with Adaptive WARNING Automatic braking with Adaptive

Cruise Control Cruise Control
When the adaptive cruise control is following
In combination with automatic gearbox, the another vehicle at speeds in excess of The Adaptive cruise control (ACC54) has a spe-
adaptive cruise control (ACC53) has functionality approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is cial brake function in slow traffic and while sta-
for change of target at certain speeds. changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary tionary.
vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will ignore
Change of target the stationary vehicle and instead accelerate Brake function in slow queues and
to the stored speed. while stationary
• The driver must then intervene him/ For shorter stops in connection with inching in
herself and brake. slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automati-
cally resumed if the stops do not exceed about
3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in
Automatic standby mode with change of
front starts moving again then the adaptive cruise
target control is set in standby mode with automatic
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set braking.
in standby mode:
– The Adaptive Cruise Control is reactivated in
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there • when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) one of the following ways:
may be stationary traffic in front. and the adaptive cruise control is uncertain
When adaptive cruise control is following another whether the target object is a stationary vehi- • Press the steering wheel button .
vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and cle or some other object, such as a speed • Depress the accelerator pedal.
changes target from a moving to a stationary bump.
> The Adaptive Cruise Control resumes fol-
vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will slow down • when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) lowing the vehicle ahead if it starts mov-
for the stationary vehicle. and the vehicle ahead turns off so the adap- ing forward within 6 seconds.
tive cruise control no longer has a vehicle to
follow.
Related information

DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE This takes place if the adaptive cruise control is Limitations for Adaptive Cruise
holding the car stationary with the foot brake and: Control
ACC can keep the car stationary for a maxi-
mum of 5 minutes. After this the parking • the driver opens the door or takes off his/her Adaptive cruise control (ACC55) may have limita-
brake is applied and adaptive cruise control is seatbelt tions in certain situations.
disengaged. • ACC has kept the car stationary for more Steep roads and/or heavy load
than approx. 5 minutes Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is
The parking brake must be released before
the adaptive cruise control can be reactivated. • the brakes have overheated primarily intended for use when driving on level
• the driver switches the engine off manually. road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in
keeping the correct distance from the vehicle
Cessation of automatic braking
Related information ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes - in
In some situations, automatic braking ceases on
reaching 0 km/h and Adaptive Cruise Control is
• Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 302) which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake.
set in standby mode. This means that the brakes • Do not use adaptive cruise control if the car
are released and the car may start to roll - the has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to
driver must therefore intervene and brake the car the car.
himself/herself to keep it stationary.
Miscellaneous
This may take place in the following situations: • Drive mode Off Road cannot be selected
• the driver puts his/her foot on the brake when the adaptive cruise control is activated.
pedal
• the parking brake is applied NOTE
• the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R posi- The function uses the car's camera unit,
tion which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
• the driver sets the adaptive cruise control in
the standby mode.
Automatic activation of parking brake NOTE

In certain situations the parking brake is applied The function uses the car's radar unit, which
to keep the car stationary. has some general limitations, see the section
55 Adaptive Cruise Control }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Related information Change between Cruise Control 3. Press the steering wheel button .
• Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 302) and Adaptive Cruise Control > Cruise control starts and stores the cur-
In a car with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC56) rent speed.
the driver can change between Cruise Control
(CC57) and ACC. WARNING
A symbol in the driver display shows which cruise Switching from ACC to CC means that the
control is active: car:
CC ACC • no longer maintains a preset time interval

to the vehicle ahead.
A A • only follows the stored speed, and the
driver must therefore apply the brakes
Cruise control Adaptive cruise control when necessary.
A WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode
If CC is active when the engine is switched off,
Changing from ACC to CC ACC will be activated automatically the next time
Proceed as follows: the engine is started.
1. Set adaptive cruise control to standby mode Changing from CC to ACC
using steering wheel button . Proceed as follows:
2. Press the Cruise Control button in the cen- 1. Set cruise control to standby mode using the
tre display's function view - the button's indi- steering wheel button.
cator changes colour from GREY to GREEN.
> The symbol in the driver display changes
from ACC to CC. Adap-
tive Cruise Control is now switched off
and Cruise Control is set to standby
mode.

57 Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
2. Tap on the Cruise Control button in the

function view - the button's indicator
changes colour from GREEN to GREY.
> The symbol in the driver display changes
from CC to ACC. Adap-
tive Cruise Control is now activated and
set to standby mode.
3. Press the steering wheel button .

> Adaptive cruise control starts and stores
the current speed, together with the pre-
set time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Related information
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for The previous illustration60 shows that the adap-
Adaptive Cruise Control tive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h
A number of symbols and messages regarding (68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to
the adaptive cruise control (ACC58) can be follow.
shown via the driver display and/or the head-up
display*.
Here are some examples59.
The previous illustration60 shows that the adap-

tive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h
(68 mph) and at the same time is following a
vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed.

59 In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).
DRIVER SUPPORT

The symbol is WHITE. The car is maintaining the stored/selected speed.
Adaptive cruise Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.

Unavailable
The symbol is GREY.
Adaptive cruise The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Service required
The symbol is GREY.
Windscreen sensor Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-

ing the button, located in the centre of the
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
DRIVER SUPPORT
Pilot Assist The driver selects the desired speed and a time The current status of steering
Pilot Assist helps the driver to drive the car interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist scans assistance is indicated by the
between the lane's side markings using steering the distance to the vehicle ahead and the lane's colour of the steering wheel's
assistance as well as to maintain an even speed, side markings on the road surface using the symbol:
combined with a preselected time interval to the camera and radar unit. The preset time interval is
• GREEN steering wheel indi-
vehicle ahead. maintained with automatic speed adjustment
cates active steering assis-
whilst the steering assistance helps to position
tance
How Pilot Assist works the car in the lane.
The Pilot Assist function is primarily intended for • GREY steering wheel (as in illustration) indi-
Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into
use on motorways and similar major roads where cates deactivated steering assistance.
account the speed of the preceding car and the
it can contribute to more comfortable driving and
lane markings. The driver can at any time ignore
a more relaxed driving experience.
the Pilot Assist steering recommendation and
steer in another direction, e.g. to change lane or
avoid an obstruction on the road.
If Pilot Assist cannot interpret the lane unambig-
uously, e.g. if the camera and radar unit does not
see the lane's side markings, Pilot Assist tempo-
rarily deactivates steering assistance, but
resumes it if the lane can be interpreted again -
although the speed and distance control func-
tions remain active.
WARNING
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the Pilot Assist steering assistance is automati-
vehicle ahead and detects side markings61. cally deactivated and is resumed without prior
warning.
Camera and radar unit
Distance readers
Readers, side markings
318
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING Pilot Assist regulates the speed with acceleration The following applies for cars with manual gear-
and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a box:
• The Pilot Assist function is supplementary low sound when they are being used to adjust
driver support intended to facilitate driv- the speed.
• Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at
ing and make it safer – it cannot handle speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to
all situations in all traffic, weather and Pilot Assist attempts to regulate the speed 200 km/h (125 mph).
road conditions. smoothly. In situations that demand sudden brak- • Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from
ing the driver must brake himself/herself. This 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 140 km/h
• The driver is advised to read all sections applies in cases of large speed differences or if
in the Owner's Manual that relate to this (87 mph).
the car in front brakes suddenly. Due to the limi-
function to learn about factors such as its tations of the camera and radar unit, braking may
limitations and what the driver should be come unexpectedly or not at all.
WARNING
aware of before using the system (see
Pilot Assist aims to follow the vehicle ahead in • Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance
the list of links at the end of this article). system. The driver must intervene if the
the same lane at a time interval set by the driver.
• Pilot Assist must only be used if there are
If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front
system does not detect a vehicle in front.
clear lane lines painted on each side of
then the car will instead maintain the speed set • Pilot Assist does not brake for people,
the lane. All other use involves increased animals, objects, small vehicles (e.g.
and stored by the driver. This also takes place if
risk of contact with surrounding obstacles cycles and motorcycles), low trailers as
the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and
that cannot be detected by the function. well as oncoming, slow or stationary vehi-
exceeds the stored speed.
• Pilot Assist is not a substitute for the driv- cles.
er's attention and judgement. The driver The following applies for cars with automatic
gearbox: • Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding sit-
is always responsible for ensuring the car uations, such as in city traffic, at junctions,
is driven in a safe manner, positioned cor- • Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or
rectly in the lane, at the appropriate speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in
speed, with an appropriate distance to (125 mph). poor visibility, on winding roads, on slip
other vehicles, and in accordance with
• Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from roads, or with a trailer connected to the
current traffic rules and regulations. almost stationary up to 140 km/h (87 mph). car.
NOTE
This function can come as either Standard or
an Option depending on the market.
}}
319
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| IMPORTANT turn Pilot Assist off or switch to Adaptive cruise : Reduces stored speed
control.
Maintenance of Pilot Assist internal compo- Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead
nents must only be performed at a workshop Overview
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- ▶: Switches from adaptive cruise control to
Controls Pilot Assist
mended.
Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead
Round bends and when the road splits Function symbol
Pilot Assist interacts with the driver, who should
therefore not await the steering assistance from Symbols for target vehicle and time interval
Pilot Assist but should always be prepared to to vehicles ahead
increase his/her own steering input, especially on Symbol for activated/deactivated steering
bends. assistance
When the car approaches an exit or if the lane
splits, the driver should steer towards the desired
lane so that Pilot Assist can specify the desired
direction.
Buttons and symbols for functions61.
Pilot Assist strives to keep the car in
: Activates Pilot Assist from standby
the middle of the lane
mode and resumes the stored speed and
When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it strives to posi-
time interval
tion the car in between the lane markings and
therefore it is recommended to let the car find : Increases the stored speed
the optimal placement to achieve as smooth a
driving experience as possible. The driver checks : From standby mode - activates Pilot
that the car is positioned safely in the lane, and Assist and stores the current speed
always has the ability to adjust the position by : From active mode - deactivates/
making his/her own steering corrections. changes Pilot Assist to standby mode
If Pilot Assist does not position the car in an ◀: Switches from Pilot Assist to adaptive
appropriate way in the lane, it is recommended to cruise control
320
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver display • Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist Pilot Assist and Collision risk
(p. 325) warning
• Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist (p. 326)
• Overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist
(p. 328)
• Start overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist
(p. 328)
• Limitations for overtaking assistance with
Pilot Assist (p. 329)
• Change the target with Pilot Assist (p. 329)
• Automatic braking with Pilot Assist (p. 330)
Indication of speeds61. • Limitations of Pilot Assist (p. 330)
Stored speed • Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 332)
Speed of vehicle ahead
Current speed of your car

To see different combinations of symbols
depending on traffic situation - see the heading
"Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist".
Related information
• Pilot Assist and Collision risk warning
(p. 321)
• Head-up display for Pilot Assist if there is a
risk of collision (p. 322)
• Activating and starting Pilot Assist (p. 323)
• Managing speed for Pilot Assist (p. 324)
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Collision risk warning WARNING Head-up display for Pilot Assist if

there is a risk of collision
Pilot Assist only gives warning about vehicles
detected by its camera and radar unit – there- In cars equipped with a head up display*, the
fore a warning may not occur or be delayed. warning is shown on the windscreen by a flash-
ing symbol.
• Never wait for a warning. Apply the
brakes when the situation requires!
Related information
Audio and symbol for collision warning62.

Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli-
sion Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen63.
Distance measurement with the camera and

radar unit
NOTE
Pilot Assist uses approx. 40% of the foot brake's Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
capacity. If the car needs to be braked more trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
heavily than Pilot Assist is capable of and the not looking straight ahead may make the vis-
driver does not brake, the warning lamp and ual warning signal in the windscreen difficult
acoustic warning are activated to alert the driver to recognise.
that immediate intervention is required.
Related information

DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating and starting Pilot Assist With the Adaptive cruise control in standby Hands on the steering wheel
Pilot Assist must first be activated and then mode: In order for Pilot Assist to function, the driver’s
started to be able to control speed and distance Press the steering wheel button ▶ (6). hands must be on the steering wheel. If Pilot
1. Assist detects that the driver is not holding the
and to give steering assistance.
> The symbol changes to Pilot Assist steering wheel, the driver is prompted to actively
in standby mode (8). steer the car via a text message and an acoustic
signal.
2. Press the steering wheel button (2).
> Pilot Assist is started and current speed is If Pilot Assist still cannot detect that the driver is
stored, which is shown with figures in the holding the steering wheel, the function shifts to
centre of the speedometer. standby mode. Pilot Assist must then be restar-
ted with the steering wheel button .
...or...
With the Adaptive cruise control started: NOTE
– Press the steering wheel button ▶ (6). Note that Pilot Assist only works when the
> Pilot Assist is started. driver has hands on the steering wheel.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary Pilot Assist steering assistance
depending on car model. is only active when the steering Related information
In order to start the Pilot Assist it is required that:
wheel symbol (2) has changed • Pilot Assist (p. 318)
from GREY to GREEN.
• The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
Pilot Assist only regulates the
the driver's door must be closed.
time interval to the vehicle
• There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") ahead when the distance symbol shows a vehicle
within reasonable distance in front of the car, (1) above the steering wheel symbol.
or the current speed must be at least
At the same time a speed
15 km/h (9 mph).
range is marked.
• For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must
be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph). The higher speed is the
stored/selected speed and the
lower speed is that of the vehi-
cle ahead (target vehicle).
323
DRIVER SUPPORT
Managing speed for Pilot Assist – Change the set speed with short or long The maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h
Pilot Assist can be set to different speeds. presses on steering wheel button (1) or (125 mph).
(2): Manual gearbox
Setting/changing the stored speed Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds
• Short press: Each press changes the
from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(125 mph).
(+/- 5 mph).
The lowest programmable speed for Pilot Assist
• Press and hold: Release the button when
the speed indicator (3) has moved to the is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maximum speed is
desired speed. 200 km/h (125 mph).
• The speed set after the last button press is Related information
stored in the memory. • Pilot Assist (p. 318)
If the driver increases the car’s speed using the
accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
wheel button , the speed stored will be the
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary car’s speed when the button is depressed, provi-
depending on car model and market. ded the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at
the moment when the button is depressed.
: Increases the stored speed
: Reduces stored speed tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
Stored speed the setting - the car returns to the last stored
Automatic gearbox
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds
from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph).
Note that the lowest programmable speed for
Pilot Assist is 30 km/h (20 mph) - even though it
is capable of following another vehicle down to 0
km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph)
cannot be selected/stored.
324
DRIVER SUPPORT
Setting the time interval for Pilot NOTE

Assist
Pilot Assist can be set with different time inter-
vals.
time interval.
Different time intervals to the • Only use the time intervals permitted by
vehicle in front can be selected local traffic regulations.
and shown in the driver display
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
• If Pilot Assist does not seem to respond
with a speed increase when activated, it
more lines the longer the time
may be because the time window to the
interval. One line represents
vehicle ahead is shorter than the set time
about 1 second to the vehicle
window.
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds. Control for time interval64.
Decrease time interval
NOTE WARNING
When the symbol in the driver display shows Increase time interval • Only use a time window that suits the
a car and a steering wheel, Pilot Assist fol- current traffic conditions.
Distance indicator
lows a vehicle in front at a preset time gap. • The driver should be aware that short
– Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to time windows limit the amount of time
When only one steering wheel is shown, there
increase or decrease the time interval. available to react and take action if an
is no vehicle within a reasonable distance
ahead. > The distance indicator (3) shows the cur- unexpected traffic situation arises.
rent time interval.
In order to follow the vehicle ahead in a smooth Select how Pilot Assist shall maintain
and comfortable way, Pilot Assist allows the time the distance* to the vehicle ahead
interval to vary noticeably in certain conditions. The driver can select different driving styles for
For example, at low speed, when the distances how Pilot Assist should maintain the preset time
become short, Pilot Assist increases the time interval to the vehicle ahead. Selection is made
interval slightly. via the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Select one of the following options: Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist – Press the steering wheel button ◀ (3).
• Eco - Pilot Assist focuses on optimal fuel Pilot Assist can be temporarily deactivated so > Pilot Assist is switched off and changes
economy, which means longer time interval that it is set in the standby mode and can be to the Adaptive cruise control in active
to the vehicle ahead. reactivated later. mode.
• Comfort - Pilot Assist focuses on following Deactivating and setting Pilot Assist in
the set time interval to the vehicle ahead as WARNING
standby mode
smoothly as possible. • With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the
• Dynamic - Pilot Assist focuses on following driver must intervene and steer, regulat-
the set time interval to the vehicle ahead ing both speed and distance to the vehi-
more closely, which in certain cases may cle ahead.
mean heavier acceleration and braking. • When Pilot Assist is in standby mode and
See further information in the "Drive modes" sec- the car comes too close to a vehicle
tions. ahead, the driver is warned of the short
distance by the Distance Warning func-
Supplementary information can also be found in tion instead.
the sections "Managing speed for the cruise con-
trol" and "Drive mode ECO".
Related information
To temporarily switch off Pilot Assist and set it in
standby mode:
– Press the steering wheel button (2).
> Pilot Assist is set in standby mode - the
symbol (8) in the driver display changes
colour from WHITE to GREY and the
stored speed in the centre of the speed-
ometer changes from BEIGE to GREY.
...or...
326
DRIVER SUPPORT
Standby mode on driver intervention WARNING • the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
Pilot Assist is temporarily deactivated and set in vehicle ahead turns off so that Pilot Assist no
standby mode if: With automatic standby mode, the driver is longer has a vehicle to follow.
warned via an acoustic signal and a message
• the foot brake is used. on the driver display. • speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual
• the gear selector is moved to N position. • The driver must then regulate the car's
gearbox.
• the direction indicators are used for longer speed, apply the brakes as needed and
than 1 minute. maintain a safe distance to other vehicles. Reactivating Pilot Assist from the
• the driver maintains a speed higher than the standby mode
stored speed for longer than 1 minute. Automatic standby mode may occur if, for exam-
ple:
• the clutch pedal is depressed for
approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with man- • the driver opens the door.
ual gearbox. • brake temperature is high.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- • the driver's hands are not on the steering
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect wheel.
• the parking brake is applied.
• engine speed is too low/high.
When the direction indicators are used, Pilot
Assist steering assistance is temporarily disen- • the driver takes off the seatbelt.
gaged. When this is no longer the case, steering • one or more wheels lose traction.
assistance is automatically reactivated if the NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
• the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g. depending on car model.
lane's side markings can still be detected. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio
Automatic standby mode waves are blocked). To reactivate Pilot Assist:
Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems, e.g. • the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and Pilot – Press the steering wheel button (1).
stability control/anti-skid ESC65. If any of these Assist is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead > The speed is then set to the most recently
other systems stops working, Pilot Assist is is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a stored speed.
switched off automatically. speed bump.
65 Electronic Stability Control }}
327
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| WARNING Overtaking assistance with Pilot Start overtaking assistance with

Assist Pilot Assist
A significant increase in speed may follow
Pilot Assist can help the driver when overtaking
when the speed is resumed with the Continuation for Overtaking Assistance
steering wheel button. other vehicles.
The following conditions must exist for Overtak-
How overtaking assistance works ing Assistance to be activated:
Related information When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle
• there must be a vehicle in front (the “target
• Pilot Assist (p. 318) and the driver indicates the intention to overtake
vehicle”)
by activating the direction indicator66, Pilot Assist
helps by accelerating the vehicle towards the • your car's current speed is at least 70 km/h
vehicle in front before the driver’s vehicle rea- (43 mph)
ches the overtaking lane. • the stored Pilot Assist speed must be high
enough for overtaking to take place safely.
The function then delays reducing speed in order
to avoid premature braking when the driver’s car Starting Overtaking Assistance
is approaching a slower vehicle. To start the Overtaking Assistance:
The function remains active until the driver’s vehi- – Activate the direction indicator.
cle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.
Use the left direction indicator in a car with
the steering wheel on the left, or the right
WARNING
direction indicator in a car with the steering
Be aware that this function can be activated wheel on the right.
in more situations than during overtaking, e.g.
when a direction indicator is used to indicate > Overtaking Assistance is started.
a change of lane or exit to another road – the
car will then accelerate briefly. Related information
Related information
66 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
328
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for overtaking Change the target with Pilot Assist Automatic standby mode with change of
assistance with Pilot Assist In combination with automatic gearbox, Pilot target
The overtaking assistance function may have lim- Assist has functionality for change of target at Pilot Assist is disengaged and set in standby
ited functionality in certain situations. certain speeds. mode:
WARNING Change of target • when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
When using the Overtaking Assistance Sys- and Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the tar-
tem, the driver should be aware that there get object is a stationary vehicle or some
may be undesired acceleration if the condi- other object, e.g. a speed bump.
tions suddenly change. • when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
Some situations should therefore be avoided, and the vehicle in front turns off so the Pilot
such as if: Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow.
• the car is approaching an exit for turn-of
Related information
that is in the same direction as overtaking
would normally occur.
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there
• the vehicle ahead slows down before the
may be stationary traffic in front.
driver's car has crossed over into the
overtaking lane When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle at
speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and changes
• the traffic in the overtaking lane slows
target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, Pilot
down
Assist will slow down for the stationary vehicle.
• a right-hand drive car is driven in a county
with left-hand traffic (or vice versa).
WARNING
When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle
Situations of this kind can be avoided by tempo-
at speeds in excess of approx. 30 km/h
rarily setting Pilot Assist in the standby mode. (20 mph) and the target is changed from a
moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, Pilot
Related information Assist will ignore the stationary vehicle and
• Pilot Assist (p. 318) instead accelerate to the stored speed.
• The driver must then intervene him/
herself and brake.
329
DRIVER SUPPORT
Automatic braking with Pilot Assist Cessation of automatic braking Limitations of Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist has a special brake function in slow In some situations, automatic braking ceases on The Pilot Assist function may have limitations in
traffic and while stationary. coming to a standstill and Pilot Assist is set in certain situations.
standby mode. This means that the brakes are
Brake function in slow queues and released and the car may start to roll - the driver The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can help
while stationary must therefore intervene and brake the car him- the driver in many situations. But the driver is at
For shorter stops in connection with inching in self/herself to keep it stationary. all times responsible for maintaining a safe dis-
slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is automati- tance to surrounding objects and a correct posi-
This may take place in the following situations: tion in the lane.
cally resumed if the stops do not exceed
approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the • the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
vehicle in front starts moving again then Pilot pedal
Assist is set in standby mode with automatic • the parking brake is applied
braking.
• the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R posi-
– Pilot Assist is reactivated in the following tion
way:
• the driver sets Pilot Assist in the standby
mode.
• Press the steering wheel button .
• Depress the accelerator pedal. Automatic activation of parking brake
> Pilot Assist resumes following the vehicle In certain situations, the parking brake is applied
ahead if it starts moving forward within in order to keep the car stationary.
6 seconds. This takes place if Pilot Assist is holding the car
stationary with the foot brake and:
NOTE
• the driver opens the door or takes off his/her
Pilot Assist can hold the car stationary for a seatbelt
maximum of 5 minutes - then the parking
brake is applied and the function is disen-
• Pilot Assist has kept the car stationary for
more than approx. 5 minutes
gaged.
• the brakes have overheated
Before Pilot Assist can be reactivated, the
parking brake must be released. • the driver switches the engine off manually.
Related information
330
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING between the car and such obstacles. The the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when
driver must ensure him/herself that the driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case,
In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering car is at a suitable distance from such be extra attentive and ready to brake.
assistance may have difficulty helping the obstacles.
driver in the right way or it may be automati- • Do not use Pilot Assist if the car has a heavy
cally deactivated - in which case, the use of • The camera and radar sensor does not load or a trailer is connected to the car.
Pilot Assist is not recommended. Examples of have the capacity to detect all oncoming
such situations may be that: objects and obstacles in traffic environ- NOTE
• the lane markings are worn, missing or ments, e.g. potholes, stationary obstacles
or objects which completely or partially Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer,
cross each other.
block the route. bicycle rack or similar is connected to the
• lane division is unclear, for example, when car's electrical system.
the lanes divide or merge or at exits or in • Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
the event of multiple sets of markings. animals, etc.
Miscellaneous
• edges or other lines than lane markings • The recommended steering input is force
are present on or near the road, e.g. limited, which means that it cannot always • Off Road drive mode cannot be selected
help the driver to steer and keep the car when Pilot Assist is activated.
kerbs, joints or repairs to the road sur-
face, edges of barriers, roadside edges or within the lane.
NOTE
strong shadows. • Pilot Assist is switched off if the power
• the lane is narrow or winding. steering is working with reduced power - The function uses the car's camera unit,
e.g. during cooling due to overheating which has some general limitations, see the
• the lane contains ridges or holes.
(see section "Speed-dependent steering "Limitations for camera unit" section.
• weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain, force").
snow or fog or slush or impaired view with
poor light conditions, back-lighting, wet NOTE
road surface etc. The driver always has the possibility of correcting The function uses the car's radar unit, which
The driver should also note that Pilot Assist or adjusting a steering intervention imposed by has some general limitations, see the section
has the following limitations: Pilot Assist and can turn the steering wheel to "Limitations for radar unit".
the desired position.
• High kerbs, roadside barriers, temporary
obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers, Steep roads and/or heavy load Related information
etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily • Pilot Assist (p. 318)
may be detected incorrectly as lane mark- intended for use when driving on level road surfa-
ings, with a subsequent risk of contact • Speed-dependent steering force (p. 280)
ces. The function may have difficulty in keeping
331
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for

Pilot Assist*
Pilot Assist can be shown via the driver display
and/or the head-up display*.
Here are some examples67.
The previous illustration68 shows that Pilot Assist The previous illustration68 shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the
same time is following a vehicle ahead which is same time is following a vehicle ahead which is
keeping the same speed. keeping the same speed.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since Here, Pilot Assist also provides steering assis-
the lane's side markings cannot be detected. tance since the lane's side markings can be
detected.
The previous illustration68 shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that
there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since
the lane's side markings cannot be detected.
67 In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).
DRIVER SUPPORT
Radar unit Related information

The radar unit is used by several driver support • Limitations for radar device (p. 334)
systems and has the task of sensing other vehi- • Recommended radar device maintenance
cles. (p. 337)
• Type approval for radar device (p. 338)
The previous illustration68 shows that Pilot Assist

is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that
there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Here too, Pilot Assist provides steering assis-
tance since the lane's side markings can be NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
detected. depending on car model.
The radar unit is used by the following functions:
Related information
• Pilot Assist (p. 318) • Distance Warning*
• Adaptive cruise control*
• Lane assistance
• Pilot Assist*
• City Safety
Modification of the radar unit could result in its
use being illegal.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for radar device The radar unit is placed inside the upper section If the driver display shows this symbol
The radar unit has certain limitations - which in of the windscreen together with the car's camera and the message "Windscreen
turn also limits those functions that use the unit. unit. sensor Sensor blocked, see
Owner's manual", this means that the
Blocked unit IMPORTANT camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehi-
cles, cyclists, pedestrians and larger animals in
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the front of the car and that the car's camera-based
outside or inside of the windscreen in front of and radar-based functions may be disrupted,
or around the camera and radar unit — this reduced, completely deactivated or give an incor-
can interfere with camera and radar-depend- rect function response.
ent functions.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
The marked area must be kept free from stickers,

objects, shade film, etc.69.
The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown, along with the appropriate action:
Cause Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or cov- Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera
ered with ice or snow. and radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
view.
334
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cause Action
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered
or camera view. road surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
and radar unit. authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE that drives in between your car and the vehi-

cle ahead.
Keep the windscreen clean in front of the
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehi-
camera and radar unit.
cles not driving in the centre of the lane can
remain undetected.
Vehicle speed In bends, the radar unit may detect the
The capacity of the radar unit to detect vehicles wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from
ahead is reduced significantly if: view.
• the speed of the vehicle ahead is signifi- Low trailers
cantly different from that of your own car
Limited field of vision

The radar unit has a limited field of vision. In
some situations another vehicle is not detected,
or the detection is made later than expected.
Low trailer in radar shadow.

Low trailers can also be difficult for the radar unit
The radar unit's field of vision.
to detect, or are not detected at all - the driver
Sometimes the radar unit is late at detecting should therefore be particularly careful when driv-
vehicles at close distances - e.g. a vehicle ing behind low trailers when the adaptive cruise
control or Pilot Assist is activated.
}}
335
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| High temperature Damaged windscreen • The same type or Volvo-approved wind-

At very high temperatures the camera and radar screen wipers must be fitted during
unit can temporarily be switched off for IMPORTANT replacement.
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so
as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the wind-
and radar unit restarts automatically when the screen in front of one of the camera and IMPORTANT
temperature has fallen sufficiently. radar unit “windows” covers an area of When the windscreen is replaced, the camera
approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or and radar unit must be recalibrated at the
larger, a workshop must be contacted to have workshop to ensure the functionality of all the
the windscreen replaced – an authorised car’s camera and radar-based systems. An
Volvo workshop is recommended. authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If not rectified it can lead to reduced perform-
ance for the driver support systems that use Related information
the camera and radar unit.
tion response.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation of driver support systems
that use the radar unit, the following also
applies:
• Volvo recommends against repairing
cracks, scratches or stone chips in the
area in front of the camera and radar unit.
Instead, the whole windscreen should be
replaced.
• Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
that the correct windscreen is ordered
and fitted.
336
DRIVER SUPPORT
Recommended radar device

maintenance
In order that the camera and radar unit shall
function correctly, the windscreen in front of the
unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and
be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and
radar unit will reduce its function and may
prevent measurement.
tion response.
Related information
337
DRIVER SUPPORT
Type approval for radar device

The type approval for the car's radar units in the
ACC70, PA71 and BLIS72 functions can be read
out here.
ACCA &
Market BLISC Symbol Type approval
PAB
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar
interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
✓ Modelo: L2C0054TR
4122-14-8645
Brazil
EAN: (01)07897843840855
Modelo: L2C0055TR
✓ 1500-15-8065
EAN: 07897843840978
Hereby, Delphi Electronics and Safety declares that L2C0054TR / L2C0055TR are in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
2014/53/EU (RED). The original declaration of conformity can be accessed at the
following link www.delphi.com/automotive-homologation.
Europe ✓ ✓ Frequency Band: 76GHz – 77GHz
Maximum Output Power: 55dBm EIRP
The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151
E. Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA
70 ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control

71 PA = Pilot Assist
72 BLIS = Blind Spot Information
338
DRIVER SUPPORT
ACCA &
PAB
REGISTERED No: ER37536/15
✓
DEALER No: DA37380/15
The United Arab Emi-
rates (UAE) REGISTERED No: ER37357/15
✓
DEALER No: DA37380/15
37295/POSTEL/2014
✓
4927
Indonesia
38806/SDPPI/2015
✓
4927
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2014/255
✓
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Jordan
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3
✓
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Certification No.
✓
MSIP-CMI- DPH-L2C0054TR
Korea
Certification No.
✓
MSIP-CMI-DPH-L2C0055TR
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
Morocco ✓ ✓ NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014
DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014
}}
339
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| ACCA &
PAB
✓ IFETEL: RLVDEL215-0299
Mexico
✓ IFETEL: RLVDEL215-0314
Moldova ✓ ✓
✓ И011 14
Serbia
✓ И011 15
Singapore ✓ ✓
TA-2014/1824
✓
APPROVED
South Africa
TA-2014/2390
✓
APPROVED
340
DRIVER SUPPORT
ACCA &
PAB
✓ CCAB15LP0560T3
Taiwan
✓ CCAB15LP0680T0
Delphi і є, щ RACAM/SRR2 і і є П
і і і і і
Ukraine ✓ ✓ і ( і ь ) (П КМ № 679 і 24
2009 .) Д і і і і ь і Delphi :
Delphi.
A ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control

B PA = Pilot Assist
C BLIS = Blind Spot Information
Related information
341
DRIVER SUPPORT
Camera unit Related information

The camera unit is used by several driver sup- • Limitations for camera unit (p. 343)
port systems and has the task of for example • Recommended camera device maintenance
detecting lane lines or traffic signs. (p. 346)

The camera unit is used by the following func-
tions:
• Adaptive cruise control*
• Pilot Assist*
• Lane assistance*
• Steering assistance at risk of collision
• City Safety
• Driver Alert Control*
• Road Sign Information*
• Active main beam*
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for camera unit Blocked unit

The camera unit has certain limitations - which in If the driver display shows this symbol
turn also limits those functions that use the unit. and the message "Windscreen
sensor Sensor blocked, see
Impaired vision Owner's manual", this means that the
The camera has limitations similar to the human camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehi-
eye, i.e. it can "see" worse in for example intense cles, cyclists, pedestrians and larger animals in
snowfall or rain, dense fog, heavy dust storms front of the car and that the car's camera-based
and snow flurries. Under such conditions, the and radar-based functions may be disrupted,
functions of camera-dependent systems could be reduced, completely deactivated or give an incor-
significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged. rect function response.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriage- The following table presents examples of possi-
way, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road ble causes for a message being shown, along
surfaces or unclear lane markings can also sig- The marked area must be kept free from stickers, with the appropriate action:
nificantly reduce camera function when it is used objects, shade film, etc.73.
to scan the carriageway to detect pedestrians, The camera unit is placed inside the upper sec-
cyclists, large animals and other vehicles. tion of the windscreen together with the car's
radar unit.
IMPORTANT
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
outside or inside of the windscreen in front of
or around the camera and radar unit — this
can interfere with camera and radar-depend-
ent functions.
tion response.
343
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Cause Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera and
covered with ice or snow. radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
view.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered road
signals or camera view. surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the cam- Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
era and radar unit. authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Strong oncoming light No action. The camera unit is reset automatically in more favourable light condi-
tions.
NOTE Damaged windscreen This may mean that functions are reduced,
Keep the windscreen clean in front of the tion response.
camera and radar unit. IMPORTANT
If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the wind- To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
screen in front of one of the camera and reduced operation of driver support systems
High temperature that use the radar unit, the following also
radar unit “windows” covers an area of
At very high temperatures the camera and radar applies:
approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or
unit can temporarily be switched off for
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so
larger, a workshop must be contacted to have • Volvo recommends against repairing
the windscreen replaced – an authorised cracks, scratches or stone chips in the
as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera
Volvo workshop is recommended. area in front of the camera and radar unit.
and radar unit restarts automatically when the
temperature has fallen sufficiently. If not rectified it can lead to reduced perform- Instead, the whole windscreen should be
ance for the driver support systems that use replaced.
the camera and radar unit. • Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
344
DRIVER SUPPORT
that the correct windscreen is ordered

and fitted.
• The same type or Volvo-approved wind-
screen wipers must be fitted during
replacement.
IMPORTANT
When the windscreen is replaced, the camera
and radar unit must be recalibrated at the
workshop to ensure the functionality of all the
car’s camera and radar-based systems. An
Related information
345
DRIVER SUPPORT
Recommended camera device City Safety™ The function helps the driver by automatically
maintenance City Safety can alert the driver using a visual, braking the car in the event of an imminent risk
In order that the camera and radar unit shall acoustic and brake pulse warning to help of collision if the driver does not react in time by
function correctly, the windscreen in front of the him/her detect pedestrians, cyclists, larger ani- braking and/or swerving.
unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and mals and vehicles that suddenly appear - the car City Safety activates a short, sharp braking proce-
be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo. then attempts to brake automatically unless the dure, normally stopping the car just behind the
driver acts within a reasonable time him/herself. vehicle in front.
NOTE City Safety is activated in situations where the
Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and driver should have started braking earlier, which
radar unit will reduce its function and may is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.
prevent measurement. City Safety is designed to be activated as late as
This may mean that functions are reduced, possible in order to avoid unnecessary interven-
deactivated completely or give incorrect function.
tion response. The driver or passengers are not normally aware
of City Safety - it only intervenes in a situation
Related information where a collision is immediately imminent.
Location of the radar unit74.

City Safety can prevent a collision or reduce colli-
sion speed.
City Safety is an aid to assist a driver who is at
risk of colliding with a pedestrian, large animal,
cyclist or a vehicle.
The City Safety function can help the driver to
avoid a collision when driving in queues, e.g.
when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with
a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.
346
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING • The driver is advised to read all sections Parameters and subfunctions for
in the Owner's Manual that relate to City City Safety
• The City Safety is supplementary driver Safety to learn about factors such as its City Safety can avoid a collision with a vehicle, a
support intended to improve driving safety limitations and what the driver should be cyclist, a pedestrian or a larger animal in front by
– it cannot handle all situations in all traf- aware of before using the system (see reducing the car's speed with the auto-brake
fic, weather and road conditions. the list of links for all subsections). function.
• The City Safety auto-brake function can
prevent a collision or reduce collision If the speed difference is greater than the follow-
Related information ing specified speeds, the City Safety auto-brake
speed, but to ensure full brake perform-
• Parameters and subfunctions for City Safety function cannot prevent a collision but mitigates
ance the driver should always depress the (p. 347)
brake pedal – even when the car auto- the consequences of it.
brakes. • Setting the warning distance for City Safety
Vehicles
(p. 349)
• The warning and steering assistance are For a vehicle in front, City Safety can reduce the
only activated if there is a high risk of col- • Detection of obstacles with City Safety speed by up to 60 km/h (37 mph).
lision – you must therefore never wait for (p. 350)
cyclists
a collision warning or for City Safety to • City Safety in cross traffic (p. 352) For a cyclist, City Safety can reduce the speed by
intervene. • Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic up to 50 km/h (30 mph).
• The warning and brake intervention for (p. 353) Pedestrians
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated • City Safety steering assistance for evasive For a pedestrian, City Safety can reduce speed by
at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h manoeuvre (p. 353) up to 45 km/h (28 mph).
(50 mph).
• Limitations of City Safety steering assistance Large animals
• City Safety does not activates any auto- when taking evasive action (p. 354) In the event of a risk of a collision with a large
brake functions in the event of heavy
acceleration. • City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are animal, City Safety can reduce the car's speed by
prevented (p. 354) up to 15 km/h (9 mph).
• City Safety is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgement. The driver • Limitations of City Safety (p. 355) The brake function for large animals is primarily
intended to reduce the force of the impact at
is always responsible for ensuring the car • Messages for City Safety (p. 358)
higher speeds and is most effective at speeds
is driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
above 70 km/h (43 mph) but less effective at
priate speed, with an appropriate distance
lower speed.
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
}}
347
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Subfunctions for City Safety 1 - Collision warning imminent then the automatic braking function is
The driver is first warned of a potentially immi- deployed - this takes place irrespective of
nent collision. whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then
takes place with full brake force in order to
City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or
reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force
vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same
if it is sufficient to avoid a collision.
direction as the car and are ahead. City Safety
can also detect pedestrians, cyclists or large ani- In connection with automatic braking the seatbelt
mals that are crossing the road in front of the car. tensioner may also be activated. For more infor-
mation see the "Seatbelt tensioner" section.
In the event of a risk of collision with a pedes-
trian, larger animal, cyclist or vehicle (including In some situations, the action of Auto-brake may
vehicles described in the "City Safety in cross begin with light braking and then progress to full
traffic" section), the driver's attention is alerted by brake action.
Function overview75.
means of a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warn- When City Safety has prevented a collision with a
ing. There is no brake pulse warning at lower stationary object, the car remains stationary in
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk speeds, sudden driver braking or acceleration.
of collision anticipation of positive action by the driver. If the
The brake pulse frequency varies according to car has been braked to avoid collision with a
Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli- the car's speed. slower vehicle in front, its speed is reduced to
sion 2 - Brake support match that of the vehicle in front.
Distance measurement with the camera and If the risk of collision has increased further after
radar unit the collision warning then the brake support is NOTE
City Safety carries out three steps in the follow- activated.
On cars with manual gearbox, the engine
ing order: Brake support reinforces the driver’s braking stops when the Auto-brake function has stop-
1. Collision warning action if the system considers that the braking is ped the car, unless the driver has managed to
2. Brake support not sufficient to avoid a collision. depress the clutch pedal beforehand.
3. Auto Brake 3 - Auto Brake
The automatic brake function is activated last. The driver can always interrupt a braking inter-
The following text explains what happens during
If in this situation the driver has not yet started to vention by firmly depressing the accelerator
the three steps:
take evasive action and the risk of collision is pedal.
348
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE Setting the warning distance for City warnings and instead leads to City Safety giving a
Safety warning at a later stage.
When City Safety brakes, the brake lights
City Safety is always activated but the driver can The Late warning distance should therefore only
come on.
select the warning distance for the function. be used in exceptional cases, as in dynamic driv-
ing.
When City Safety is activated and brakes the NOTE
vehicle, the driver display shows a text message
to the effect that the function is/has been active. The City Safety function cannot be deacti- WARNING
vated. It is activated automatically when the
• No automatic system can guarantee
engine/electric operation is started and 100 % correct function in all situations.
WARNING remains switched on until the engine/electric Therefore, never test City Safety by driv-
City Safety must not be used by the driver to operation is switched off. ing at people, animals or vehicles - this
change his/her driving style - the driver must
not rely on City Safety alone and allow it to do may cause severe damage and injury and
the braking. The warning distance determines the sensitivity risk lives.
of the system and regulates the distance at
• City Safety warns the driver when there is
which a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning a risk of a collision, but it cannot shorten
Related information should be deployed.
• City Safety™ (p. 346) the driver’s reaction time.
To select warning distance: • Even if the warning distance has been set
to Early warnings could be perceived as
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
being late in certain situations, e.g. when
the centre display's top view.
there are large differences in speed or if
2. Under City Safety Warning, select Late, vehicles ahead suddenly brake heavily.
Normal or Early to set the desired warning
distance.
• With the warning distance set at Early,
the warnings will come more in advance.
If the Early setting produces too many warnings, This may mean that the warnings come
which could be perceived as irritating in certain more frequently than at the warning dis-
situations, the Normal or Late warning distance tance Normal, but it is recommended
can be selected. since it can make City Safety more effec-
tive.
When warnings are perceived as being too fre-
quent or disturbing, the warning distance can be
reduced, which reduces the total number of
}}
349
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| NOTE Detection of obstacles with City bicycle outline, requiring the ability to identify the
Safety bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and
The warning with direction indicators for Rear lower body plus a normal human pattern of move-
The obstructions that City Safety can detect are
Collision Warning is deactivated if the warn- ment.
vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedestrians.
ing distance for collision warning in the City
Safety function is set at the lowest level If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are
Vehicles not visible to the function's camera then the sys-
"Late". City Safety detects most vehicles that are either tem cannot detect a cyclist.
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking stationary or moving in the same direction as your
functions are, however, still active. car, as well as vehicles described in the "City For the function to be able to detect a cyclist,
Safety in cross traffic" section. he/she must be an adult and riding a bicycle
designed for adults.
Related information In order that City Safety shall be able to detect a
• City Safety™ (p. 346) vehicle in the dark, the vehicle's front and rear
lights must be working and clearly illuminated. WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support,
Cyclists but it cannot detect all cyclists in all situations
and, for example, cannot see:
• partially obscured cyclists.
• cyclists if the background contrast of the
cyclist is poor – warning and brake inter-
ventions may then be late or not occur at
all.
• cyclists wearing clothing that obscures
the body outline.
• bicycles loaded with large objects.
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis-
Optimal examples of what City Safety interprets as a tance adapted to the speed.
cyclist — with clear body outline and bicycle outline.
Optimal performance requires that the system
function that detects a cyclist must receive the
clearest possible information about the body and
350
DRIVER SUPPORT
Pedestrians City Safety can also detect pedestrians in the Large animals
dark if they are illuminated by the car's head-
lamps.
WARNING
but it cannot detect all pedestrians in all sit-
uations and, for example, cannot see:
• partially obscured pedestrians, people in
clothing that hides their body contour or
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm (32 in.).
• pedestrians if the background contrast of
Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedes- the pedestrians is poor - warning and Optimum examples of what City Safety interprets as
trians with clear body outlines. brake interventions may then be late or large animals - standing still or walking slowly and with
not occur at all. clear body outline.
For optimal performance, the system function
that detects pedestrians must receive the clear- • pedestrians who are carrying larger Optimal performance requires that the system
est possible information about the body outline, objects. function that detects a large animal (e.g. elk and
requiring the ability to identify the head, arms, The driver is always responsible that the vehi- horse) must receive the clearest possible infor-
shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a nor- cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis- mation about the body outline, requiring the abil-
mal human pattern of movement. tance adapted to the speed. ity to identify the animal directly from the side in
combination with what is a normal pattern of
In order that it shall be possible to detect a movement for the animal.
pedestrian there must be a contrast with the
background and this will be affected by such If parts of the animal's body are not visible to the
things as clothes, the background and the function's camera then the system cannot detect
weather. With poor contrast the pedestrian may the animal.
either be detected late or not at all, which may City Safety can also detect large animals in the
mean that warnings and braking are late or omit- dark if they are illuminated by the car's head-
ted. lamps.
}}
351
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| WARNING City Safety in cross traffic • the oncoming vehicle must have its head-
City Safety can help the driver when turning and lamps switched on.
but it cannot detect all large animals in all sit- crossing the path of another oncoming vehicle at
uations and, for example, cannot see: an intersection. WARNING
• partially obscured large animals. • The "City Safety in crossing traffic" func-
tion is supplementary driver support
• larger animals seen from the front or from
intended to improve driving safety – it
behind.
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
• large animals that run or move quickly. weather and road conditions.
• large animals if the background contrast • Warnings and brake interventions due to
of the animals is poor - warning and a collision risk with an oncoming vehicle
brake interventions may then be late or often come very late.
not occur at all.
• Never wait for a collision warning or for
• small animals such as dogs and cats, for City Safety to intervene.
example.
The driver is always responsible that the vehi- er's attention and judgement. The driver
cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis- Sector in which City Safety can detect oncoming is always responsible for ensuring the car
tance adapted to the speed. crossing vehicles. is driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
For City Safety to detect an oncoming vehicle on priate speed, with an appropriate distance
Related information a collision course, the oncoming vehicle must first to other vehicles, and in accordance with
• City Safety™ (p. 346) enter the sector in which City Safety can analyse current traffic rules and regulations.
the situation.
The following further criteria must also be fulfil- Related information
led: • City Safety™ (p. 346)
• your car must be travelling at no less than
4 km/h (3 mph)
• your car must turn to the left in markets with
right-hand traffic (or to the right in left-hand
traffic)
352
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for City Safety in cross NOTE City Safety steering assistance for
traffic evasive manoeuvre
The function uses the car's camera unit,
In some cases City Safety may have difficulty City Safety steering assistance can assist the
which has some general limitations, see the
helping the driver deal with collision risks due to driver to steer away from a vehicle/obstacle
oncoming cross traffic. when it is not possible to avoid a collision by
braking alone.
NOTE
has some general limitations, see the section
Related information
Examples are:
• stability control ESC intervenes in the event Your car steers away
of slippery driving conditions
Slow moving/stationary vehicles or obstacles.
• if the oncoming vehicle is detected too late
• if the oncoming vehicle is obscured by some- City Safety engages by amplifying the driver's
thing steering input, which only occurs after the driver
has begun an evasive manoeuvre - and then only
• if the oncoming vehicle has headlamps if the driver is not steering enough to avoid a col-
switched off lision.
• if the oncoming vehicle drives in an unpre-
In parallel with the amplified steering input, the
dictable manner, for example, abruptly
brake system is also used to further amplify the
changes lanes at a late stage.
steering input. The function also helps to
}}
353
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| straighten the car again after passing the obsta- Limitations of City Safety steering City Safety when evasive
cle. assistance when taking evasive manoeuvres are prevented
City Safety steering assistance can detect: action City Safety has the facility to assist the driver by
City Safety may have limited functionality in cer- automatically braking the car earlier when it is
• Vehicles
tain situations and fail to intervene e.g.: not possible to avoid a collision by only steering
• cyclists away.
• outside the speed range 50-100 km/h
• Pedestrians (30-62 mph) City Safety assists the driver by continuously
• larger animals. • if the driver initiates an evasive manoeuvre attempting to anticipate whether there are
"escape routes" to the side in case a slow or sta-
• if the power steering works at reduced power
tionary vehicle ahead is discovered at a late
WARNING - e.g. during cooling due to overheating (see
stage.
• The ability of City Safety to be able to section "Speed-dependent steering force").
predict a specific situation is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to improve
NOTE
driving safety – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi- The function uses the car's camera unit,
tions. which has some general limitations, see the
er's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car NOTE
is driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate distance The function uses the car's radar unit, which
to other vehicles, and in accordance with has some general limitations, see the section
current traffic rules and regulations. "Limitations for radar unit".
Your car (1) "sees" no options for evading the vehicle
ahead (2) and can therefore auto-brake earlier.
Activate/deactivate Related information
City Safety steering assistance cannot be deacti- • City Safety™ (p. 346) Your car
vated but is always activated. • Speed-dependent steering force (p. 280) Slow/stationary vehicle
Related information City Safety does not intervene with the auto-
• City Safety™ (p. 346) brake function as long as the driver him/herself
354
DRIVER SUPPORT
has the opportunity to avoid a collision via a Limitations for City Safety when evasive Limitations of City Safety
steering manoeuvre. manoeuvres are prevented The City Safety function may have limitations in
However, if City Safety anticipates that an evasive certain situations.
manoeuvre is not possible due to traffic in an NOTE
adjacent lane, the function can assist the driver
Surroundings
by automatically starting to brake at an earlier Low objects
stage. Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for pro-
jecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary
WARNING lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bon-
NOTE net limit the function.
• The ability of City Safety to be able to
predict a specific situation is supplemen- The function uses the car's radar unit, which Skidding
tary driver support intended to improve has some general limitations, see the section On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is
driving safety – it cannot handle all situa- "Limitations for radar unit". extended, which may reduce the capacity of City
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi- Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations, the
tions. anti-lock brakes and the stability control ESC76
Related information
will give the best possible braking force with
• City Safety is not a substitute for the driv- • City Safety™ (p. 346)
maintained stability.
er's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car Oncoming light
is driven in a safe manner, at the appro- The visual warning signal in the windscreen may
priate speed, with an appropriate distance be difficult to notice in the event of strong sun-
to other vehicles, and in accordance with light, reflections, when sunglasses are being
current traffic rules and regulations. worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead.
Heat
In the event of high passenger compartment
temperature caused by e.g. strong sunlight, the
visual warning signal in the windscreen may be
temporarily disengaged.
76 Electronic Stability Control }}
355
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| The camera and radar unit's field of view Low speed Miscellaneous
The camera's field of vision is limited, which is City Safety is not activated at very low speeds -
why pedestrians, large animals, cyclists and vehi- below 4 km/h (3 mph) - and the system there- WARNING
cles in some situations cannot be detected, or fore does not intervene in situations where your
they are detected later than anticipated. car is approaching a vehicle ahead very slowly, • Warnings and brake interventions could
e.g. when parking. be implemented late or not at all if a traf-
Dirty vehicles may be detected later than others fic situation or external influences mean
and if it is dark, motorcycles may be detected late Active driver that the camera and radar unit cannot
or not at all. Driver commands are always prioritised, which is detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals
why City Safety does not intervene or postpone or vehicles correctly.
If a text message in the driver display indicates
warning/intervention in situations where the
that the camera and radar unit is obstructed, City
driver is steering and accelerating in a decisive • For vehicles to be detected at night, their
Safety may be unable to detect pedestrians, large headlamps and rear lamp cluster must be
manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
animals, cyclists, vehicles or road lines ahead of switched on and shining clearly.
the car. This means that the functionality of City Active and aware driving behaviour can therefore
Safety may be reduced. delay a collision warning and intervention in order
• The camera and radar unit has a limited
range for pedestrians and cyclists. The
to minimise unnecessary warnings.
However, an error message is not shown in all system can provide effective warnings
situations where the windscreen sensors are and brake interventions as long as the
obstructed. The driver must therefore take care to relative speed is below 50 km/h
keep the area of windscreen in front of the cam- (30 mph). For stationary or slow-moving
era and radar unit clear. vehicles, warnings and brake interven-
tions are effective at vehicle speeds up to
IMPORTANT 70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for
large animals is less than 15 km/h
Maintenance and replacement of City Safety (9 mph) and can be achieved at vehicle
components must only be performed by a speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph). The
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is warning and brake intervention for large
recommended. animals is less effective at lower speeds.
• Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
Driver intervention vehicles and large animals could be dis-
Reversing engaged due to darkness or poor visibil-
When your own car is reversing, City Safety is ity.
temporarily deactivated.
356
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Warnings and brake interventions for Search path in the top view of the centre display:
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated
at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h
• Settings My Car IntelliSafe
(50 mph). Related information
• Do not place, stick or mount anything on • City Safety™ (p. 346)
the outside or inside of the windscreen in
front of or around the camera and radar
unit — this can interfere with camera-
dependent functions.
• Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of
the camera sensor may reduce its func-
tionality, fully deactivate it or give incor-
rect function response.
NOTE
NOTE
Market limitation
City Safety is not available in all countries. If City
Safety does not appear in the centre display's
Settings menu, the car is not equipped with this
function.
357
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for City Safety

A number of messages regarding City Safety
can be shown in the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
City Safety When City Safety brakes or has done an automatic braking, several of the driver display symbols may be illuminated
in connection with a text message being shown.
Automatic intervention
City Safety The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
Reduced functionality Service
required

Related information
358
DRIVER SUPPORT
Rear Collision Warning Limitations of Rear Collision Related information

The Rear Collision Warning (RCW) function can Warning • Rear Collision Warning (p. 359)
help the driver to avoid being hit by a vehicle In certain cases the RCW may have difficulty
approaching from behind. helping the driver in the event of a collision risk.
This can be, for example, if:
RCW is activated automatically each time the
engine is started. • the vehicle approaching from behind is
detected too late
The RCW can warn the driver in a vehicle
approaching from behind that a collision is immi- • the vehicle approaching from behind
nent by rapidly flashing the direction indicators. changes lane at the last moment
If, at a speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the RCW • the vehicle approaching from behind has a
speed exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph)
function detects that the car is in danger of being
hit from behind, the seatbelt tensioners may ten- • a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected
sion the front seatbelts and activate the Whiplash to the car's electrical system - the RCW
Protection System safety system. function is then deactivated automatically.
Immediately before a collision from behind, RCW
may also activate the foot brake in order to NOTE
reduce the forward acceleration of the car during In certain markets, RCW does not give a
the collision. However, the foot brake is only acti- warning with the direction indicators due to
vated if the car is stationary. The foot brake relea- local traffic regulations - in such cases, this
ses immediately if the accelerator pedal is part of the function is deactivated.
depressed.
Related information NOTE

• Limitations of Rear Collision Warning
The warning with direction indicators for Rear
(p. 359)
Collision Warning is deactivated if the warn-
• Whiplash Protection System (p. 43) ing distance for collision warning in the City
Safety function is set at the lowest level
"Late".
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
functions are, however, still active.
359
DRIVER SUPPORT
BLIS* from a constant glow to flashing with a more

The BLIS77 function is intended to help the intense light.
driver detect vehicles diagonally behind and to
the side of the car so as to provide assistance in NOTE
heavy traffic on roads with several lanes in the The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
same direction. where the system has detected the vehicle. If
BLIS is a driver aid intended to give a warning of: the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
• vehicles in the car's blind spot
• quickly approaching vehicles in the left and
WARNING
right lanes closest to the car.
Principle of BLIS • The BLIS function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
Zone in blind spot make it safer – it cannot handle all situa-
Zone for quickly approaching vehicle. tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
The BLIS function is active at speeds • The responsibility for changing lanes
above 10 km/h (6 mph). safely and using good judgement always
The system is designed to react when: rests with the driver.
• your car is overtaken by other vehicles • BLIS is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
• another vehicle is quickly approaching your
car.
driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
Location of BLIS lamp78. When BLIS detects a vehicle in Zone 1 or a ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
Indicator lamp quickly approaching vehicle in Zone 2, the indica- other vehicles, and in accordance with
tor lamp on the door mirror on the affected side current traffic rules and regulations.
The function is activated/deactivated using illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver acti-
the BLIS button in the centre display's func- vates the direction indicator on the same side as
tion view. the warning, the indicator lamp will change over
77 Blind Spot Information Systems

DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information Activate/deactivate BLIS If BLIS was deactivated when the engine was
• Activate/deactivate BLIS (p. 361) The BLIS79 function can be activated/deacti- switched off, it will continue to be deactivated
when the engine is next started and no indicator
• Limitations of BLIS (p. 362) vated.
lights will then be illuminated.
• Recommended maintenance for BLIS
(p. 362) Related information
• Messages for BLIS (p. 364) • BLIS* (p. 360)
Location of BLIS lamp80.

Indicator lamp
The function is activated/deactivated using

the BLIS button in the centre display's func-
tion view.
– Tap on the BLIS button in the function view.
> BLIS is activated/deactivated - a green/
grey indicator is shown in the button.
If BLIS is activated when starting the engine, the
function is confirmed by the door mirror indicator
lamps blinking once.
79 Blind Spot Information

DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of BLIS WARNING Recommended maintenance for

The BLIS81 function may have limitations in cer- BLIS
tain situations.
• BLIS does not work on sharp bends.
• To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces
• BLIS does not work when the car is in front of the sensors must be kept clean.
reversing.
• Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the
area of the sensors.
Related information
• BLIS* (p. 360)
Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand

sides of the car82.
Examples of limitations:
• Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may sides of the car83.
reduce the functions and deactivate alerts.
The sensors for BLIS are located inside each
• The BLIS function is automatically deacti- corner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are
vated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is con- also used by the Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) and
nected to the car's electrical system. Rear Collision Warning functions.
• For optimal performance of BLIS, no bicycle
rack, luggage carrier or similar should be
mounted on the car's towbar.

DRIVER SUPPORT
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com-
ponents or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
• BLIS* (p. 360)
• Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert
(p. 366)
• Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 366)
• Recommended maintenance for Cross
Traffic Alert (p. 367)
• Messages for Cross Traffic Alert (p. 368)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for BLIS

A number of messages regarding BLIS84 can be
shown in the driver display.
Blind spot sensor The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Service required
Blind spot system off BLIS and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
Trailer attached

Related information
• BLIS* (p. 360)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cross Traffic Alert* CTA is only active if the car rolls backwards or if WARNING
CTA85 is a driver support that supplements reverse gear has been selected.
• The Cross Traffic Alert function is supple-
BLIS86 and is designed to help the driver detect If CTA senses that something is approaching mentary driver support intended to facili-
traffic crossing behind the car when it is revers- from the side, this is also indicated with: tate driving and make it safer – it cannot
ing.
• an acoustic signal - the sound is heard in the handle all situations in all traffic, weather
left-hand or right-hand speaker according to and road conditions.
the direction from which the object • The responsibility for reversing the car
approaches. safely and using good judgement always
• an illuminated icon in the PAS87 graphic on rests with the driver.
the screen. • Cross Traffic Alert is not a substitute for
• an icon on the Park assist camera top view. the driver's attention and judgement. The
tions.
Principle of CTA.
CTA supplements BLIS by detecting the Related information
approach of crossing traffic during reversing, • Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert
such as when reversing out of a parking space. (p. 366)
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In • Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 366)
favourable conditions it may also be able to • Recommended maintenance for Cross
detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and Illuminated icon for CTA in the PAS87 graphic on the Traffic Alert (p. 367)
pedestrians. screen88.
• Messages for Cross Traffic Alert (p. 368)
85 Cross Traffic Alert

87 Park Assist System: Parking assistance system with reversing sensors
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert

Alert The CTA90 function may have limitations in cer-
The driver can choose to switch off the CTA89 tain situations.
function as follows:
Press the Cross Traffic Alert CTA does not perform optimally in all situations
button in the centre display but has some limitations. For example, the CTA
function view. sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehi-
cles or obstructing obstacles.
Here are some examples of situations where
CTA’s "field of vision" may be already limited and
approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
• GREY button indication - CTA is deactivated. detected until they are very close:
• GREEN button indication - CTA is activated. In an angled parking slot CTA may be completely “blind”
on one side.
CTA is activated automatically each time the
engine is started. Blind CTA sector.
Sector in which CTA can detect/“see”.

Related information
• Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 365) However, as your car slowly reverses, the angle it
makes with the obstructing vehicle/object
changes and the blind sector rapidly decreases.
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.

DRIVER SUPPORT
Examples of further limitations Recommended maintenance for IMPORTANT

• Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may Cross Traffic Alert
reduce the functions and deactivate alerts. Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com-
• To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces ponents or repainting the bumpers must only
See the supplementary information in the in front of the sensors must be kept clean.
section "Recommended maintenance for be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Cross Traffic Alert". • Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the Volvo workshop is recommended.
area of the sensors.
• CTA is automatically deactivated if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is connected to the Related information
car's electrical system. • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 365)
• For optimal performance of CTA, no bicycle • BLIS* (p. 360)
rack, luggage carrier or similar should be • Rear Collision Warning (p. 359)
mounted on the car's towbar.
Related information

sides of the car91.
The sensors for CTA are located inside each cor-
ner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are
also used by the BLIS92 and Rear Collision
Warning functions.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert

A number of messages regarding CTA93 can be
shown in the driver display.
Blind spot sensor The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Service required
Blind spot system off BLIS and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
Trailer attached

Related information
DRIVER SUPPORT
Road Sign Information* NOTE • Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
The Road Sign Information function (RSI94) and Settings (p. 372)
In certain markets, the Road Sign Information
helps the driver to observe speed-related road function (RSI) is only available in combination • Activating/deactivating Speed warning in
signs and certain prohibition signs as the car Road Sign Information (p. 373)
with Sensus Navigation.
passes them. • Road Sign Information with Speed Camera
Information (p. 374)
WARNING
• Limitations of Road Sign Information
• The Road Sign Information function is (p. 374)
supplementary driver support intended to
facilitate driving and make it safer – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
• Road Sign Information is not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the car is driven in a safe man-
ner, at the appropriate speed, with an
Examples of readable signs95. appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
RSI provides information about such things as
current speed, when a motorway or road is star-
ting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited or
when the direction of travel is one-way. Related information
If both a sign for motorway/dual carriageway and
• Activating/deactivating Road Sign Informa-
tion (p. 370)
a sign for the speed limit are passed at the same
time, RSI selects to show a sign symbol for • Road Sign Information and sign display
motorway/dual carriageway. The new speed limit (p. 370)
is shown directly with a line in the driver display's • Road Sign Information and Sensus
speed scale. Navigation (p. 372)
94 Road Sign Information

95 Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating/deactivating Road Sign Related information Road Sign Information and sign
Information • Road Sign Information* (p. 369) display
The Road Sign Information function is selectable The Road Sign Information function (RSI96) reg-
- the driver can select On or Off. isters and shows road signs in different ways
Press the Road Sign depending on the sign and the situation.
Information button in the cen-
tre display function view.
• GREEN button indication - RSI is activated.

• GREY button indication - RSI is deactivated.
NOTE
• If the Automatic Speed Limiter function is
activated, road sign information is shown
in the driver display even if RSI is not Example97 of detected speed information.
activated. When RSI detects a road sign with an imposed
• To remove road sign information from the speed limit, the driver display shows the sign as a
driver display, you must deactivate both symbol in combination with a RED indication on
Automatic Speed Limiter and RSI. the speedometer.
• When the Automatic Speed Limiter func-
An additional97 sign, such as
tion is activated but RSI is deactivated, no
"no overtaking", may be shown
warnings are given from RSI. In this situa-
together with the speed limit
tion, settings for RSI cannot be adjusted
symbol.
either - to be able to adjust settings as
well as receive warnings, RSI must be
activated.
DRIVER SUPPORT
If the driver enters a road End of all restrictions. The driver display symbol extinguishes after
marked with a no-entry sign at about 5 minutes and remains so until the next
the roadside, the symbol for speed related sign is passed.
this sign97 flashes on and off
on the driver display as a warn- Additional signs
ing.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation End of motorway.
then information from the map is also used to
determine whether the car is being driven in the
wrong direction.
The driver can also get an acoustic warning when
driving towards a no-entry entrance if the Road
Sign Audio Warning function is activated - see The driver display symbol extinguishes after
the heading "Activating/deactivating the acoustic 10-30 seconds and remains so until the next
warning" in the section "Activating/deactivating speed related sign is passed.
Road Sign Information".
Changed speed limit Examples of additional signs97.
Speed limit or end of motorway When passing a direct speed limit sign when a Sometimes different speed limits are signed for
When RSI detects an "indirect speed limit sign" speed limit changes, a symbol with the corres- the same road - an additional sign then indicates
stating the end of the current speed limit - e.g. at ponding road sign appears in the driver's display. the circumstances under which the different
the end of a motorway - a symbol appears with
Example of direct speed limit speeds apply. The road section may be particu-
the corresponding road sign in the driver's dis-
sign97. larly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog,
play.
for example.
Example of indirect speed limit sign97: An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
If a trailer is connected to the car's electrical sys-
tem and you pass a speed sign with the addi-

97 Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples. }}
371
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| tional sign “trailer”, the indicated speed will Road Sign Information and Sensus Road Sign Information with Speed
appear on the driver display. Navigation Warning and Settings
Some speed limits only apply If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation, The subfunction Speed Limit Warning for
after a certain distance or at a speed information is read from the navigation RSI99 is selectable - the driver can select On or
certain time of day. The driver's unit in the following cases: Off.
attention is drawn to this fact • On detection of signs that indirectly indicate Speed Limit Warning alerts the driver when the
by means of a symbol for an a speed limit, such as motorway, dual car- speed limit in force or the set "speed limit" is
additional sign below the speed riageway and city limit signs. exceeded - after the warning has been repeated
symbol. The additional symbol one extra time if the driver does not reduce
in the driver display will show either “DIST” or • If a previously detected speed sign is speed.
“TIME”. assumed not to apply any longer, but no new
sign has been detected.
A symbol for additional sign in
the form of an empty frame
NOTE
under the driver display's speed
symbol97 means that the RSI In certain markets, the Road Sign Information
has detected an additional sign function (RSI) is only available in combination
with supplementary information with Sensus Navigation.
for the current speed limit.
NOTE
Sign for "School" and "Children at play"
If a downloaded third-party app is used for
If the warning sign97 for
navigation then there is no support for speed-
"School" or "Children at play"
related information.
is included in the satellite navi-
gator's map data98, the driver
display shows a sign of this Related information
type. • Road Sign Information* (p. 369)
Related information
• Road Sign Information* (p. 369)
97 Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
98 Only in cars with Sensus Navigation.
DRIVER SUPPORT
The speed warning is given by Note that the function does not Activating/deactivating Speed
the driver display symbol100 give any consideration to warning in Road Sign Information
showing the applicable maxi- selected limit adjustment when The subfunction Speed Limit Warning is acti-
mum permitted speed tempo- the driver display shows the vated as follows:
rarily flashing when this speed speed camera symbol.
is exceeded. 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
A speed warning is always Acoustic warning On/Off
display's top view.
given if the speed limit is It is also possible to receive an acoustic warning
exceeded in connection with in connection with Speed Warning. 2. Select Speed Limit Warning.
speed camera information. Change setting for acoustic warning as follows: > The function is activated and a speed limit
selector appears.
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
(see description for "selecting speed
Road Sign Information in the centre limit" in section "Road Sign Information
Settings display's top view. with Speed warning and Settings")
Adjust the limit for Speed Warning 2. Select/deselect Road Sign Audio Warning
The driver can select to receive a warning at a to activate/switch off the acoustic warning. Related information
higher speed than the signed speed. • Road Sign Information* (p. 369)
With the Road Sign Audio Warning function
Select limit for speed warning as follows: activated, the driver is also warned when driving • Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 372)
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe towards one-way traffic/no-entry entrance.
Road Sign Information in the centre Related information
display's top view. • Road Sign Information* (p. 369)
2. Select Speed Limit Warning.
> The function is activated and a speed limit
selector appears.
3. Adjust the limit for Speed Warning by press-
ing the up/down arrows on the screen.
100Road signs are market-dependent - the illustration in these instructions only show one example.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Road Sign Information with Speed "Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and Limitations of Road Sign
Camera Information Settings" and "Road Sign Information limita- Information
A car equipped with RSI101 and Sensus tions". The Road Sign Information (RSI103) function
Navigation* can provide information on an may have limitations in certain situations.
upcoming speed camera in the driver display. NOTE
Examples of what can reduce the RSI are as fol-
• To get an acoustic warning if you exceed lows:
the required speed, the Speed Limit
Warning function must be activated and • Faded signs
the Road Sign Audio Warning sub- • Signs positioned on bends
function must be set to On. An acoustic
warning is then given if the car's speed
• Rotated or damaged signs
exceeds the speed indicated by the RSI • Signs positioned high above the roadway
function in the driver display. • Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned
• Information about speed cameras on the signs
navigation map is not available for all • signs completely or partly covered with frost,
markets/areas. snow and/or dirt
• digital road maps104 are out-of-date, inaccu-
Speed camera information in the driver display102. rate or have no speed information105.
Related information
If the car exceeds a detected
• Road Sign Information* (p. 369)
speed limit with the Speed NOTE
warning function activated, a • Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 372) The RSI function may interpret some types of
speed warning is given when
bicycle rack, connected to the electrical
the car approaches a speed • Limitations of Road Sign Information socket for trailers, as a connected trailer. In
camera, provided that the navi- (p. 374) such cases, the driver display may show incor-
gation map for the area in
rect speed information.
question contains information on speed cameras.
For more information about Speed warnings in
connection with speed cameras - see section
101Road Sign Information

102NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model and market/area.
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE Driver Alert Control the road with the driver’s steering wheel move-
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is ments.
intended to help make the driver aware that he
or she is starting to drive less consistently, e.g. if
the driver becomes distracted or starts to fall
asleep.
Related information
• Road Sign Information* (p. 369) The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deterio-
rating driving ability and it is primarily intended for
major roads. The function is not intended for city
traffic.
The function is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as
the speed is over 60 km/h (37 mph).
When driving behaviour starts

to become inconsistent, the
driver is alerted by this symbol
in the driver display, together
with the text message Time
for a break soon?.
If driving behaviour does not improve but
becomes noticeably inconsistent, the driver is
alerted by the same symbol in the driver display,
combined with an acoustic signal and the text
message Time to take a break.
A camera detects the edge markings painted on If the Rest Stop Guidance function is activated
the carriageway and compares the alignment of in Sensus Navigation*, suggestions for a suitable
103Road Sign Information

104In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation.
105Map data with speed information does not exist for all areas. }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| location for a break are also shown with the WARNING Activate/deactivate Driver Alert
Time to take a break warning. Control
An alarm from Driver Alert Control should be
The warnings are repeated after a time if driving taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can be
behaviour has not improved. not aware of his/her own condition. activated/deactivated.
If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued: On/Off
WARNING
• Stop the car safely as soon as possible To change settings in DAC:
• The Driver Alert Control function is sup- and rest. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
plementary driver support intended to Studies have shown that it is just as danger- view.
facilitate driving and make it safer – it ous to drive while tired as it is to drive under
cannot handle all situations in all traffic, the influence of alcohol or other stimulants. 2. Select My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert
weather and road conditions. Control.
• Driver Alert Control should not be used to Related information 3. Select/deselect Alertness Warning to acti-
extend a period of driving. The driver • Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control vate/deactivate DAC.
should instead plan for breaks at regular (p. 376)
intervals and make sure they are well Related information
rested.
• Select rest stop guidance in the event of a
• Driver Alert Control (p. 375)
warning with Driver Alert Control (p. 377)
• Driver Alert Control is not a substitute for
• Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 377)
the driver's attention and judgement. The
tions.
376
DRIVER SUPPORT
Select rest stop guidance in the Limitations of Driver Alert Control Lane assistance
event of a warning with Driver Alert The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function may The function of the Lane Keeping Aid (LKA106) is
Control have limitations in certain situations. to help the driver to reduce the risk of the car
It is possible to set whether the Rest Stop accidentally leaving its own lane on motorways
In some cases the system may issue a warning
Guidance function should be activated/deacti- and similar major routes.
despite driving ability not deteriorating, for exam-
vated.
ple: Lane Keeping Aid steers the car back into its
With the guide activated, an automatic sugges-
lane and/or alerts the driver with vibrations in the
tion for an appropriate rest area is displayed • in strong side winds
while DAC issues a warning. steering wheel.
• on rutted road surfaces.
To select Rest Stop Guidance: Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed
range 65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top WARNING
clearly visible side lines.
view. In some cases, driving behaviour is not affec-
ted despite driver fatigue – e.g. when using On narrow roads the function may be unavailable,
2. Select My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert the Pilot Assist function – resulting in the in which case it goes into standby mode. The
Control. driver not getting a warning from DAC. function becomes available again when the road
It is therefore important to always stop and is wide enough.
3. Select/deselect Rest Stop Guidance to
activate/deactivate the function. take a break at the slightest feeling of fatigue,
whether the DAC function ha given a warning
Related information or not.
NOTE
Related information
A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.
106Lane Keeping Aid }}
377
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Depending on settings, lane assistance acts in WARNING

accordance with the following:
• The Lane Keeping Aid function is supple-
• Assist108 activated: When the car is mentary driver support intended to
approaching a lane line, LKA will actively improve driving safety – it cannot handle
steer the car back into its lane by applying a all situations in all traffic, weather and
slight torque to the steering wheel. road conditions.
• Warning108 activated: If the car is about to • The function is not a substitute for the
cross a lane line, the driver is warned by driver's attention and judgement. The
means of vibrations in the steering wheel. driver is always responsible for ensuring
NOTE appropriate speed, with an appropriate
Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane. distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
When a direction indicator is switched on,
there are no steering corrections or alerts
tions.
from Lane assistance.
Lane assistance warns with steering wheel vibrations107.
107The steering wheel vibration varies - the longer the car remains outside the lane lines, the longer the vibration.
108See the heading "Assistance alternatives for LKA" in the section "Activating/Deactivating Lane Keeping Aid".
378
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane assistance does not intervene • Lane assistance symbols in the driver display Steering assistance with lane
(p. 384) assistance
For steering assistance LKA109 to function, the
driver’s hands must be on the steering wheel.
The system monitors this continuously.
If the driver does not keep
his/her hands on the steering
wheel, the driver display shows
this symbol combined with a
message, which prompts the
driver to actively steer the car:
• Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering

Lane assistance does not engage on sharp inside If the driver does not then start to steer, the sym-
curves. bol is shown again, combined with a warning
In some situations, lane assistance allows lane sound and this message:
lines to be crossed without intervening with either
• Lane Keeping Aid Standby until steering
steering assistance or a warning - e.g. when applied
using the direction indicators or cutting bends.
If the driver then still does not follow the prompt
Related information to start steering, LKA109 is set in standby mode -
• Steering assistance with lane assistance the function will then be unavailable until the
(p. 379) driver starts to steer the car again.
• Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 380)
Related information
• Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid • Lane assistance (p. 377)
(p. 380)
• Select assistance option for lane assistance
(p. 380)
• Symbols and messages for lane assistance
(p. 382)
109Lane Keeping Aid
379
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Select assistance option for lane Limitations of Lane assistance
Aid assistance In certain demanding conditions Lane assis-
The lane assistance LKA110 function is selecta- The driver can select how LKA111 should react if tance may have difficulty helping the driver cor-
ble - the driver can select On or Off. the car leaves its lane. rectly. In such cases it is recommended to
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in switch off this function.
On/Off the centre display's top view. Examples of such conditions are:
Press the Lane Keeping Aid
button in the centre display 2. In the event of Lane Keeping Aid Mode, • road works
function view. select how LKA should react: • winter road conditions
• Assist - the driver is given steering assis- • poor road surface
tance without a warning. • a very “sporty” driving style
• Both - the driver is given both a warning • poor weather with reduced visibility
• GREEN button indication - LKA is activated. and steering assistance.
• roads with unclear or non-existent side mark-
• GREY button indication - LKA is deactivated. • Warning — warning to driver only. ings
Related information Related information • sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
side markings
• Lane assistance (p. 377) • Lane assistance (p. 377)
• when the power steering works at reduced
power - e.g. during cooling due to overheat-
ing (see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
NOTE
110Lane Keeping Aid

111Lane Keeping Aid
380
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
381
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for lane

assistance
Lane assistance LKA112 can be shown on the
driver display.
Driver support system The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Reduced functionality Service required
Windscreen sensor The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
Lane Keeping Aid The LKA steering assistance does not function if the driver does not have his/her hands on
the steering wheel. Follow the instruction and steer the car.
Apply steering
Lane Keeping Aid LKA is set in standby mode until the driver starts to steer the car again.
Standby until steering applied
112Lane Keeping Aid
382
DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information
383
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane assistance symbols in the Unavailable Related information

driver display • Lane assistance (p. 377)
Lane assistance LKA113 is visualised by symbols
in the driver display depending on the situation.
Here are some examples of
symbols and the situations in
which they are shown:
Unavailable — the lane lines in the symbol are GREY.

Available
The Lane assistance cannot detect the lane lines,
the speed is too low or the road is too narrow.
Indication of steering assistance/warning
Available — the lane lines in the symbol are WHITE.

Lane assistance is scanning one or both lane
lines.
Steering assistance/warning - the lane lines in the sym-
bol are COLOURED.
Lane assistance indicates that the system is giv-
ing a warning and/or attempting to steer the car
back into the lane.
113Lane Keeping Aid
384
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering assistance at risk of Related information Activating/deactivating Steering

collision • Activating/deactivating Steering assistance assistance in the event of a collision
The Collision avoidance assistance function in the event of a collision risk (p. 385) risk
is designed to help the driver reduce the risk of • Symbols and messages for steering assis- The function can be selected - the driver can
the car leaving its lane unintentionally and/or col- tance upon risk of collision (p. 393) choose to have it On or Off.
liding with another vehicle or obstacle by actively Proceed as follows to deactivate the function:
steering the car back into its lane and/or swerv-
• Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
(p. 386) 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
ing.
• Steering assistance level in the event of a the centre display's top view.
The Collision avoidance assistance function run-off risk (p. 386) 2. Deselect Collision avoidance assistance.
consists of three subfunctions:
• Activating/deactivating Steering assistance > The function is then disengaged.
• Steering assistance upon risk of run-off in the event of run-off risk (p. 387)
• Steering assistance upon risk of head-on • Limitations for steering assistance upon risk NOTE
collision of running off the road (p. 387)
When the Collision avoidance assistance
• Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end • Steering assistance upon risk of head-on function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
collision* collision (p. 388) switched off:
After automatic engagement, the driver display • Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
in the event of a risk of a head-on collision • Steering assistance at risk of road depar-
indicates that this has occurred via a text mes- ture
sage: (p. 389)
• Limitations for steering assistance upon risk • Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
• Collision avoidance assistance collision
Automatic intervention of head-on collision (p. 389)
• Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end • Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
collision*
NOTE collision* (p. 390)
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
It is always the driver who decides how much • Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
the car should steer – the car can never take on risk of rear-end collision* (p. 391)
have it activated since it improves driving
command. • Limitations for steering assistance upon risk safety in most cases.
of rear-end collision (p. 391)
Related information
(p. 385)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering assistance upon risk of WARNING Steering assistance level in the

run-off event of a run-off risk
The subfunction's task is to help the driver
• The "Steering assistance at risk of lane
The function has two activation levels on inter-
departure" subfunction is supplementary
reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving the vention:
driver support intended to improve driving
road by actively steering the car back onto the
safety – it cannot handle all situations in • Steering assistance only
road. • Steering assistance with brake intervention
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
The function is active within the speed range • The function cannot detect barriers, rails Steering assistance only
65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with clearly or similar obstacles at the side of the
visible lane markings/lines. road.
A camera scans the edges of the road and the • "Steering assistance at risk of lane
painted side markings. If the car is about to leave departure" is not a substitute for the driv-
the side of the road, the car is steered back onto er's attention and judgement. The driver
the road and if the steering intervention is not is always responsible for ensuring the car
enough to avoid run-off, the brakes are also acti- is driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
vated. priate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
However, the function does not intervene with
either steering assistance or brake intervention if
the direction indicators are used. And if the func-
tion detects that the driver is actively driving the Related information Intervention with steering assistance.
car, activation of the function will be delayed. • Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 385)
After automatic engagement, the driver display
indicates that this has occurred via a text mes-
sage:
• Collision avoidance assistance
386
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering assistance with brake intervention Activating/deactivating Steering Limitations for steering assistance
assistance in the event of run-off upon risk of running off the road
risk In certain demanding conditions the function
The function can be selected - the driver can may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In
choose to have it On or Off. such cases it is recommended to switch off this
Proceed as follows to deactivate the function: function.
Examples of such conditions are:
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the centre display's top view. • road works
2. Deselect Collision avoidance assistance. • winter road conditions

> The function is then disengaged. • narrow roads
• poor road surface
Intervention with steering assistance and braking. NOTE • a very “sporty” driving style
Brake intervention helps in situations where When the Collision avoidance assistance • poor weather with reduced visibility
steering assistance alone is not sufficient. The function is deactivated, all subfunctions are • roads with unclear or non-existent side mark-
brake force is adapted automatically depending switched off: ings
on the situation at the time of road run-off. • sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
• Steering assistance at risk of road depar-
ture side markings
Related information
• Steering assistance at risk of collision • Steering assistance at risk of oncoming • when the power steering works at reduced
(p. 385) collision power - e.g. during cooling due to overheat-
ing (see section "Speed-dependent steering
• Steering assistance at risk of rear-end force").
collision*
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to always NOTE
have it activated since it improves driving The function uses the car's camera unit,
safety in most cases. which has some general limitations, see the
Related information
(p. 385) }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| NOTE Steering assistance upon risk of However, the function does not intervene with
head-on collision steering assistance if the direction indicator is
The function uses the car's radar unit, which used. And if the function detects that the driver is
The subfunction can help a distracted driver who
has some general limitations, see the section actively driving the car, activation of the function
does not notice that the car is drifting into the
"Limitations for radar unit". will be delayed.
oncoming lane.
Related information indicates that this has occurred via a text mes-
• Steering assistance at risk of collision sage:
(p. 385)
• Speed-dependent steering force (p. 280) Automatic intervention
WARNING
• The "Steering assistance at risk of
oncoming collision" subfunction is sup-
plementary driver support intended to
improve driving safety – it cannot handle
all situations in all traffic, weather and
The function can assist by guiding the car back to its
own lane.
road conditions.
Oncoming vehicles • Steering assistance is only activated if
there is a high risk of collision – you must
Your car therefore never wait for the function to
intervene.
The function is active within the speed range
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly • The function is not a substitute for the
visible lane markings/lines. driver's attention and judgement. The
If the car is about to leave its own lane while an the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
oncoming vehicle is approaching at the same appropriate speed, with an appropriate
time, the function can help the driver to steer the distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
car back into its own lane. ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
388
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information Activating/deactivating Steering Limitations for steering assistance

• Steering assistance at risk of collision assistance in the event of a risk of a upon risk of head-on collision
(p. 385) head-on collision In certain situations the function may have lim-
The function can be selected - the driver can ited functionality and fail to intervene in the fol-
choose to have it On or Off. lowing cases, for example:
Proceed as follows to deactivate the function: • for small vehicles, such as motorcycles
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in • on roads where the lane does not have clear
the centre display's top view. lane markings
2. Deselect Collision avoidance assistance.

• if the majority of the car has steered into the
adjacent lane
> The function is then disengaged.
(37-87 mph)
NOTE • when the power steering works at reduced
When the Collision avoidance assistance power - e.g. during cooling due to overheat-
function is deactivated, all subfunctions are ing (see section "Speed-dependent steering
switched off: force").
• Steering assistance at risk of road depar- Other demanding situations can include:
ture
• road works
• Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
• winter road conditions
collision
• Steering assistance at risk of rear-end • narrow roads
collision* • poor road surface
Even though it is possible to deactivate the • a very “sporty” driving style
function, it is advisable for the driver to always • poor weather with reduced visibility.
have it activated since it improves driving In these demanding situations, the function may
safety in most cases. have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such
cases it is recommended to switch off this func-
Related information tion.
(p. 385) }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| NOTE Steering assistance upon risk of without noticing that another vehicle is approach-
rear-end collision* ing.
The subfunction can help a distracted driver who The function is active within the speed range
does not notice that the car is about to leave its 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly
own lane while an oncoming vehicle is visible lane markings/lines.
approaching at the same time, either from
NOTE behind or in the blind spot.
indicates that this has occurred via a text mes-
The function uses the car's radar unit, which sage:
Related information WARNING

(p. 385) • The "Steering assistance at risk of rear-
end collision" subfunction is supplemen-
• Speed-dependent steering force (p. 280) tary driver support intended to improve
driving safety – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
The function can assist by steering the car back to its • Steering assistance is only activated if
own lane. there is a high risk of collision – you must
Other vehicle in the blind spot therefore never wait for the function to
intervene.
Your car
• The function is not a substitute for the
If the car is about to leave its own lane while driver's attention and judgement. The
another vehicle is in the blind spot, or another driver is always responsible for ensuring
vehicle is approaching rapidly in an adjacent lane the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
at the same time, the function can help the driver appropriate speed, with an appropriate
to steer the car back into its own lane. distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
The function can even assist if the driver inten- ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tionally changes lanes using direction indicators tions.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information Activating/deactivating Steering Limitations for steering assistance

• Steering assistance at risk of collision assistance on risk of rear-end upon risk of rear-end collision
(p. 385) collision* In certain situations the function may have lim-
The function can be selected - the driver can ited functionality and fail to intervene in the fol-
choose to have it On or Off. lowing cases, for example:
Proceed as follows to switch it off: • for small vehicles, such as motorcycles
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in • if the majority of the car has steered into the
the centre display's top view. adjacent lane
2. Deselect Collision avoidance assistance.

• on roads/in lanes with unclear or non-exis-
tent lane markings
> The function is then disengaged.
(37-87 mph)
NOTE
• when the power steering works at reduced
When the Collision avoidance assistance power - e.g. during cooling due to overheat-
function is deactivated, all subfunctions are ing (see section "Speed-dependent steering
switched off: force").
• Steering assistance at risk of road depar-
Other demanding situations can include:
ture
• Steering assistance at risk of oncoming • road works
collision • winter road conditions
• Steering assistance at risk of rear-end • narrow roads
collision* • poor road surface
Even though it is possible to deactivate the • a very “sporty” driving style
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
have it activated since it improves driving • poor weather with reduced visibility.
safety in most cases. In these demanding situations, the function may
have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such
cases it is recommended to switch off this func-
Related information tion.
(p. 385)
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| NOTE
NOTE
In addition to the camera and radar unit, the func-

tion uses the car's rear-facing radar, which has
certain general imitations that a driver should be
aware of - see supplementary information in the
section "Limitations for BLIS".
Related information
(p. 385)
392
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for steering

assistance upon risk of collision
the function can be shown on the driver display.
Collision avoidance assistance When the function is activated, a message is shown to the driver indicating that the system
has been activated.
Windscreen sensor The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.

Related information
(p. 385)
393
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist* stops after the car has been stationary for WARNING
The Park Assist Pilot function can assist the approx. 2 seconds. The acoustic signal for obsta-
driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indi- cles behind is also active when the car is station- • The Park Assist function is supplemen-
ary. tary driver support intended to facilitate
cating the distance to obstacles through acous-
driving and make it safer – it cannot han-
tic signals combined with a graphic in the centre At a distance within 30 cm (1 ft) from an obsta- dle all situations in all traffic, weather and
display. cle behind or in front of the car, the tone is con- road conditions.
stant and the active sensor's field closest to the
car symbol is filled. • The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
The volume of the parking assistance signal can
be adjusted while the signal is sounding by • Be particularly aware of people and ani-
mals near the car.
means of the [>II] knob on the centre console.
Adjustment can also be performed in the top • The Park Assist system is not a substitute
view's Settings menu option. for the driver's attention and judgement.
NOTE
• Acoustic warnings are only given for appropriate distance to other vehicles,
objects directly on the vehicle's route. and in accordance with current traffic
Screen view showing obstacle zones and sensor sectors.
The centre display shows an overview of the rela-
tionship between the car and detected obstacles.
Related information
• Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the
The highlighted sector indicates the location of sides (p. 395)
the obstacle. The closer the car symbol is to a
highlighted sector box, the shorter the distance
• Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot
(p. 396)
between the car and detected obstacle.
• Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 396)
The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the
faster the signal sounds. Other sound from the • Recommended Park Assist Pilot mainte-
audio system is muted automatically. nance (p. 397)
The acoustic signal for obstacles ahead and to • Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot
(p. 398)
the sides is active when the car is moving but
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and NOTE Forwards

along the sides
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike car-
Park Assist Pilot has different parameters
rier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine
depending on which part of the car is approach-
trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to
ing an obstacle.
be switched off manually in order that the
Backwards sensors do not react to them.
Along the sides

The front parking assistance sensors are acti-
vated automatically when the engine is started.
The front sensors are active at speeds
below 10 km/h (6 mph).
depending on car model. The measuring range starts approx. 80 cm
(2.5 ft) in front of the car.
The sensors for reverse are activated if the car
Parking assistance side sensors are activated
rolls backward without a gear engaged or when
automatically when the engine is started. They NOTE
the gear lever is moved to reverse position.
are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The measuring range starts approx. 1.5 metres Parking assistance is deactivated when the
The measuring range starts approx. 30 cm (1 ft) parking brake is applied or P mode is
( 5 ft) behind the car.
from the sides. The acoustic signal for obstacles selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
When reversing with a hitched trailer, parking on the sides comes from the side loudspeakers.
assistance backward is deactivated automatically.
}}
395
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| IMPORTANT Activating/deactivating Park Assist Limitations of Parking assistance

Pilot The Parking Assistance System cannot detect
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
The Park Assist Pilot function can be activated/ everything in all situations and may therefore
that these must not obscure the sensors - the
deactivated. have limited functionality in some cases.
auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an
obstacle. On/Off A driver should be aware about the following
The front and side parking assistance sensors examples of Park Assist Pilot's limitations:
Related information are activated automatically when the engine is
• Park Assist* (p. 394) started. The rear sensors activate if the car rolls WARNING
backwards or if reverse gear in engaged.
Pay additional attention
The function is activated/deac- while reversing when this
tivated in function view in the symbol is shown if a trailer,
centre display. bicycle rack or similar is
mounted and electrically
connected to the car.
The symbol indicates that
the parking assistance sensors rearward are
– Tap on the Park Assist button in the func- switched off and will not warn of any obsta-
tion view. cles.
> Park Assist Pilot is activated/deactivated,
a GREEN/GREY indicator is displayed in
the button.
In cars equipped with a park assist camera, Park
Assist Pilot can also be activated/deactivated
from the relevant camera view.
Related information
DRIVER SUPPORT
IMPORTANT NOTE Recommended Park Assist Pilot

maintenance
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low Since a towbar is configured with the car's
For the Park Assist Pilot function to work opti-
barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and electrical system, towbar protrusion is
mally, its sensors must be cleaned regularly with
are then temporarily not detected by the sen- included when the function measures the dis-
water and car shampoo.
sors - the pulsating tone may then unexpect- tance to an object behind the car.
edly stop instead of changing over to the
expected constant tone.
Related information
The sensors cannot detect high objects, such • Park Assist* (p. 394)
as projecting loading docks.
• In such situations, pay extra attention and
manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly
slowly or stop the current parking
manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of
damage to vehicles or other objects since
information from the sensors is not
always reliable in such situations.
Location of the parking sensors114.
IMPORTANT NOTE
In certain conditions the parking assistance Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
system may produce incorrect warning sig- cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or
nals that are caused by external sound no function.
sources with the same ultrasonic frequencies
that the system works with.
Related information
Examples of such sources include horns, wet
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust
noises from motorcycles, etc.
114NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for Park

Assist Pilot
Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot can
be shown in the driver display and/or the centre
display.
The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings for
obstacles/objects.
Park Assist System One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Sensors blocked, cleaning nee-
ded
Park Assist System The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
Unavailable Service required

Related information
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist camera* Lines - activates/deactivates park assist WARNING

The park assist camera can assist the driver lines
when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating Towbar* - activates/deactivates the towbar
• The parking camera function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to facili-
obstacles with a camera image and graphics in park assist line*117 tate driving and make it safer – it cannot
the centre display.
CTA* - activates/deactivates Cross Traffic handle all situations in all traffic, weather
The parking assistance camera is a support func-
Alert and road conditions.
tion which is activated automatically when reverse
gear is selected or manually via the centre dis- • The parking cameras have blind spots
play. where obstacles cannot be detected.
• Be particularly aware of people and ani-
mals near the car.
• Objects/obstacles on the display screen
may be closer to the car than they appear
to be on the screen.
• The parking cameras are not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
Example of camera view115. rules and regulations.
Zoom116 - zoom in/out
Related information
360° view* - activates/deactivates all cam-
eras
• Parking cameras' camera views (p. 400)
PAS* - activates/deactivates the Parking

• Park assist lines for parking camera (p. 402)
Assistance System • Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot for park-
ing camera (p. 404)
115The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.

116The park assist lines are switched off when zooming in.
117Not available on all markets.
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Starting the park assist camera (p. 404) Parking cameras' camera views A camera symbol on the centre
• Limitations for park assist camera (p. 405) The function can display a composite 360° view display's car symbol indicates
and separate views for each of the four cameras: which of the cameras is active.
• Recommended parking camera maintenance
(p. 406) rear, front, left or right camera view. If the car is also equipped with
360° view* Park Assist System* then
• Recommended parking camera maintenance
distance to detected obstacles
(p. 406)
is illustrated with fields in different colours.
• Symbols and messages for Park assist cam-
era (p. 407) The cameras can be activated automatically or
manually, see the section "Starting the Park
assist camera".
The "field of vision" of the parking cameras with approxi-

mate coverage area.
The 360° view function activates all parking
cameras, whereupon the four sides of the car are
shown simultaneously in the centre display, which
helps the driver to observe what is around the car
when manoeuvring at slow speeds.
From the 360° view, each camera view can be
activated separately:
• Press the screen for the desired “field of
vision” of the camera, e.g. on the surface in
front of/above the front camera.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Backwards Forwards The sides
The backwards-facing camera118 is fitted above the reg- The forwards parking camera119 is located in the grille. The side cameras119 are positioned in each door mirror.
istration plate.
The front camera can be helpful on an exit road The side cameras can show what is along each
The backward-facing camera shows a wide area with limited visibility to the sides, e.g. when there side of the car.
behind the car. For certain models, part of the are high hedges. It is active at speeds up to
bumper can be seen as well as the towbar in 25 km/h (16 mph) - following which, the front Related information
some cases. camera is switched off. • Park assist camera* (p. 399)
Objects shown in the centre display may appear If the car does not reach 50 km/h (30 mph) and
slightly tilted — this is normal. the speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph) within
1 minute after the forward-facing camera has
been extinguished, the camera is reactivated.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist lines for parking camera reversing into tight spaces and when connecting IMPORTANT
The Park assist cameras indicate the position of a trailer.
the car in relation to its surroundings by display- • Remember, that with the rear camera
The lines on the screen are projected as if they view selected, the monitor only displays
ing lines on the screen. were at ground level behind the car and respond the area behind the car. Be aware of the
directly to steering wheel movements, showing sides and front of the car when manoeu-
the driver the path the car will take - also when vring in reverse.
the car is turning.
• The same applies vice versa - note what
These park assist lines include the car's most happens to the rear parts of the car when
protruding parts, e.g. towbar, door mirrors and the front camera view is selected.
corners.
• Note that the park assist lines show the
shortest route. Therefore, pay extra
NOTE attention to the car's sides so that they
do not go against/over something when
• When reversing with a trailer which is not the steering wheel is turned when driving
connected electrically to the car, the park forward or that the front sweeps against/
assist lines on the display show the route over something when the steering wheel
the car will take – not the trailer. is turned when reversing.
• The screen shows no park assist lines
when a trailer is connected electrically to
the car's electrical system.
• Park assist lines are not shown when
zooming in.
Example120 of park assist lines.

Park assist lines show the intended route for the
car's external dimensions with the current steer-
ing wheel angle - this facilitates parallel parking,
402
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist lines in 360° view* Towbar assist line* The camera can facilitate connecting up to a
trailer by showing an assist line representing the
towbar's intended "path" to the trailer.
1. Press Towbar (1).
> The park assist lines for the towbar's
intended "path" appear - the car's park
assist lines disappear simultaneously.
Park assist lines for both car and towbar
cannot be shown at the same time.
2. Press Zoom (2) when a more precise
manoeuvring is required.
> The camera view zooms in.
360° view with park assist lines120.
With the 360° view, park assist lines are shown Related information
behind, in front of and at the side of the car • Park assist camera* (p. 399)
(depending on the direction of travel):
• When driving forwards: Front lines
• When reversing: Side lines and reversing
lines.
With front or rear camera selected, the park Towbar with park assist line120.
assist lines appear regardless of the car's direc-
tion of travel. Towbar - activates the towbar assist line.
With one side camera selected, the park assist Zoom - zoom in/out.
lines only appear when reversing.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot The fields for the front and reversing sensors Starting the park assist camera
for parking camera change colour as the distance to the obstacle The park assist camera starts automatically
If the car is equipped with Parking assistance decreases — from yellow through orange to red. when reverse gear is engaged or manually with
then the distance is shown in the 360° view with Colours of front and Distance in metres one of the centre display's function buttons.
coloured fields for each sensor that registers an reversing fields (feet)
obstacle. Camera view when reversing
Yellow 0,6-1,5 (2,0-4,9) When reverse gear is engaged, the screen shows
Sensor fields backwards and forwards the 360° view if it or any of the side views was
Orange 0,4-0,6 (1,3-2,0) the last used camera view, otherwise the rear
view is shown.
Red 0-0,4 (0-1,3)
Sensor field to the sides Camera view for manual camera start
The side fields are only shown in orange. Start the parking camera with
this button in the centre dis-
Colour of side fields Distance in metres play's function view.
(feet)
The screen then initially shows
Orange 0-0,3 (0-1,0) the last used camera view.
However, after each engine
Related information start, the previously shown side view is replaced
• Park assist camera* (p. 399) by the 360° view and the previously shown
zoomed rear view is replaced by the rear view.
Automatic deactivation of camera

The front view extinguishes at 25 km/h (16 mph)
to avoid distracting the driver - it reactivates auto-
matically if the speed drops to 22 km/h (14 mph)
within 1 minute, on the condition that the speed
has not exceeded 50 km/h (31 mph).
The screen can show coloured sensor fields on the car Other camera views are extinguished at 15 km/h
symbol121. (9 mph) and not reactivated.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information Limitations for park assist camera Blind sectors

• Park assist camera* (p. 399) The park assist camera cannot detect everything
in all situations and may therefore have limited
functionality.
A driver should be aware about the following

examples of the park assist camera's limitations:
WARNING
Pay additional attention
while reversing when this
symbol is shown if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is
mounted and electrically There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of
connected to the car. vision.
The symbol indicates that In 360° view obstacles/objects can “vanish” in
the parking assistance sensors rearward are the gaps between the individual cameras.
switched off and will not warn of any obsta-
cles.
WARNING
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it
NOTE only looks like a relatively small part of the
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on image is obscured, a relatively large sector
the rear of the car could obscure the cam- could be hidden from view. An obstacle could
era's view. thereby go undetected until the car is very
close to it.
}}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Defective camera of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness Recommended parking camera
If a camera sector is black and and quality. Poor light conditions can result in maintenance
contains this symbol then it reduced image quality. The parking cameras positioned beside the rear
means that the camera is out number plate holder, in the grille and in both
of order. Related information
door mirrors need a certain amount of mainte-
• Park assist camera* (p. 399)
nance.
The following illustration shows
an example. Clean camera lenses regularly with lukewarm
water and car shampoo - be careful not to
scratch the lenses.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and
ice to ensure optimum function. This is partic-
ularly important in poor light.
Related information
• Park assist camera* (p. 399)
The car's left-hand camera is out of order.

Black camera sector
A black camera sector is also shown in the fol-
lowing instances, but then without the symbol for
defective camera:
• open door
• open tailgate
• folded-in door mirror.
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions. Because
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for Park

assist camera
Symbols and messages for Park assist camera
can be shown in the driver display and/or the
centre display.
The following table shows examples.
The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings and
field marks for obstacles/objects.
The camera is disengaged.
Sensors blocked, cleaning
needed
Park Assist System The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
A text message can be cleared by briefly press- If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an Related information
ing the button, located in the centre of the authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. • Park assist camera* (p. 399)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist Pilot* NOTE Parking variants with Park Assist

Park Assist Pilot (PAP122)
helps the driver to Pilot
The PAP function measures the space and
park in or leave a parking space. steers the car - the driver's task is to: Park Assist Pilot PAP123 can be used for the fol-
lowing different parking situations.
PAP first checks if a space is large enough and if • keep a close watch around the car
so steers the car into the space.
• follow the instructions in the centre dis-
The centre display indicates with symbols, graph- play
ics and text the various operations to be carried
• select gear (reverse/forward) - a "ping"
out and when to do so. sound indicates when the driver should
change gear
WARNING
• control and maintain a safe speed
• The PAP function is supplementary driver • brake and stop.
support intended to facilitate driving and
make it safer – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi- Related information
tions. • Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot
(p. 408)
mals near the car. • Parking with Park Assist Pilot (p. 409)
• PAP is not a substitute for the driver's • Leaving a car park with Park Assist Pilot
attention and judgement. The driver is (p. 412)
always responsible for ensuring the car is • Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 413)
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
• Recommended Park Assist Pilot mainte-
nance (p. 414)
current traffic rules and regulations. • Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 415)
122Park Assist Pilot

DRIVER SUPPORT
Parallel parking Perpendicular parking Parking with Park Assist Pilot

Park Assist Pilot (PAP124) helps the driver park
via three steps. The function can also help the
driver to leave a parking space.
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and
steers the car - the driver's task is to:
• keep a close watch around the car
• follow the instructions in the centre dis-
play
The principal of parallel parking. Principle for perpendicular parking. • select gear (reverse/forward) - a "ping"
sound indicates when the driver should
The PAP function parks the car using the follow- The PAP function parks the car using the follow- change gear
ing steps: ing steps:
• control and maintain a safe speed
1. A parking space is identified and measured. 1. A parking space is identified and measured.
• brake and stop.
2. The car is reversed into the space. 2. The car is reversed into the space and then
3. The car is positioned in the space by means positioned in the space by means of driving Symbols, graphics and/or text appear on the cen-
of driving forward/backward. forward/backward. tre display's screen when the different steps are
Using the Park Out function, a parallel-parked to be performed.
car can also be assisted by PAP to leave the NOTE
PAP can be activated if the following criteria are
parking space - see the heading "Leaving a park- A perpendicular-parked car cannot be assis- met once the engine has been started:
ing space" in the section "Parking with Park ted by the PAP Park Out function to leave a
Assist Pilot". parking space - the function must only be • No trailer is attached to the car
used for a parallel-parked car. • Speed must be lower than 30 km/h
(20 mph).
Related information
• Park Assist Pilot* (p. 408)
124Park Assist Pilot }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| NOTE 2. Tap on the Park In button in the function

view or in the camera view.
The distance between the car and parking
> PAP searches for a parking space and
spaces should be 0.5-1.5 metres (1.6-5.0 ft)
checks whether it is big enough.
while PAP is searching for a parking space.
3. Be prepared to stop the car when the
graphic and message on the centre display
Parking
state that a suitable parking space has been
PAP parks the car using the following steps:
found.
1. A parking space is identified and measured. > A pop-up window is shown.
2. The car is reversed into the space. 4. Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular
3. The car is positioned into the space - the parking and select reverse gear.
system may then request that the driver Principle for parallel parking.
changes gear. NOTE
Finding and measuring parking spaces PAP searches the area for parking, displays
The function can be activated instructions and guides the car in on its pas-
in the centre display's function senger side. But if required the car can also
view. be parked on the driver's side of the street:
It can also be accessed from
• Activate the direction indicator to the
the camera views. driver's side - then the system searches
for a parking space on that side of the
car instead.
Principle for perpendicular parking.

Proceed as follows:
1. Drive no faster than 30 km/h (20 mph) for
parallel parking or 20 km/h (12 mph) for
perpendicular parking.
410
DRIVER SUPPORT
Reversing in to the parking space Perform the following to reverse the car into the Positioning the car in the parking space
parking space:
1. Check that the area behind the car is clear,
then engage reverse gear.
2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching
the steering wheel - and no faster than
7 km/h (4 mph).
3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display.
NOTE
Parallel. Parallel.
• Keep your hands away from the steering
wheel when the PAP function is acti-
vated.
• Make sure that the steering wheel is not
hindered in any way and can rotate freely.
• To achieve optimum results - wait until
the steering wheel is fully turned before
starting to drive backward/forward.
Perpendicular. Perpendicular.
Proceed as follows:
1. Move the gear selector into the D position,
wait until the steering wheel has been turned
and drive slowly forward.
}}
411
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| 2. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed Leaving a car park with Park Assist mum steering angle in order to leave the parking
by the graphic and message on the centre Pilot space.
display. The function Park Out can also help the driver If PAP considers that the driver can leave the
3. Select reverse gear and drive slowly back- to leave a parking space. parking space without any extra manoeuvring
wards. NOTE then the function will be stopped, even if the
driver may consider that the car is still in the
4. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed When leaving a parking space, the Park Out parking space.
by the graphic and message on the centre function must only be used for a parallel-
display. parked car - it does not work for a perpendic- Related information
The function is deactivated automatically and the ular-parked car. • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 408)
graphics and message show that parking is com-
plete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct The Park Out function is acti-
the car’s position. Only the driver can determine vated in the centre display's
whether the car is properly parked. function view or in the camera
view.
IMPORTANT
The warning distance is shorter when the
sensors are used by PAP compared with Proceed as follows:
when Park Assist uses the sensors.
1. Tap on the Park Out button in the function
view or in the camera view.
Related information
2. Use the direction indicator to select the
direction in which the car should leave the
parking space.
3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display - follow the instructions in the same
way as for the parking procedure.
Note the steering wheel can "spring" back when
the function is completed - the driver may then
need to turn the steering wheel back to the maxi-
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* A driver should be aware about the following IMPORTANT
The Park Assist Pilot PAP125 function cannot examples of Park Assist Pilot limitations:
Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable
detect everything in all situations and may there- Parking is discontinued to find parking spaces - one reason for this
fore have limited functionality. A parking sequence will be discontinued: may be the fact that there is interference with
WARNING the sensors from external sound sources
• if the driver moves the steering wheel
which emit the same ultrasound frequencies
• The PAP function is supplementary driver
• if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h
support intended to facilitate driving – it as those with which the system works.
(4 mph)
cannot handle all situations in all traffic, Examples of such sources include horns, wet
weather and road conditions. • if the driver presses Cancel in the centre tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
display exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
mals near the car. • when the anti-lock brakes or the Electronic
stability control are engaged - e.g. when a
• Bear in mind that the front of the car may wheel loses grip on a slippery road NOTE
swing out towards oncoming traffic dur-
ing the parking manoeuvre. • when the power steering works at reduced Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will
power - e.g. during cooling due to overheat- reduce their function and may prevent meas-
• Objects situated higher than the sensor ing (see section "Speed-dependent steering urement.
detection area are not included when cal- force").
culating the parking manoeuvre, which
could cause PAP to swing into the park- Where applicable, a message in the centre dis-
Driver responsibility
ing space too early – such parking The driver should bear in mind that the PAP is an
play states the reason for a parking sequence
spaces should be avoided for this reason. aid – not an infallible, fully-automatic function.
being discontinued.
The driver must therefore be prepared to inter-
• PAP is not a substitute for the driver's rupt a parking step.
attention and judgement. The driver is
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
125Park Assist Pilot }}
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| There are also a few details to bear in mind while • PAP is designed for parking on straight Recommended Park Assist Pilot
parking, e.g.: streets - not sharp curves or bends. For this maintenance
reason, make sure the car is parallel to the
• The driver is always responsible for determin-
potential parking spaces when PAP meas-
For the Park Assist Pilot PAP127 function to work
ing whether the space selected by PAP is optimally, the parking assistance sensors must
ures the space.
suitable for parking. be cleaned regularly with water and car sham-
poo.
• Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare
IMPORTANT
wheel are fitted.
Changing to another approved wheel rim
• Do not use PAP if cargo items are protruding
and/or tyre dimension may involve a changed
from the car.
tyre circumference, which means that the
• Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to PAP system's parameters may then need to
measure the parking space incorrectly. be updated. Consult a workshop - an author-
• During the search and check-measurement ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
of the parking space, PAP may miss objects
positioned deep in the parking space. Related information
• Parking spaces on narrow streets are not • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 408)
always feasible, since the space required for
manoeuvring may not be sufficient.
Location of the parking sensors128.
• Use approved tyres126 with the correct tyre
pressure - this affects the ability of PAP to
NOTE
park the car.
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
• PAP bases itself on the locations of vehicles
cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or
already parked nearby - if they are inap-
no function.
propriately parked, your own car's tyres and
wheel rims may be damaged by contact with
the kerb. Related information
• Perpendicular parking spaces may be missed • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 408)
or offered unnecessarily if one parked car is
protruding more than other parked cars.
126"Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*

Messages for Park Assist Pilot PAP129 can be
shown in the driver display and/or the centre dis-
play.
The following table shows examples.
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
Park Assist System The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.

Related information

Starting the car The remote control key is not physically used
The car is started using the start knob in the tun- when starting the car since it is equipped with
nel console when the remote control key is in support for keyless starting (Passive start).
the passenger compartment. To start the car:
1. The remote control key must be inside the
car. For cars with Passive Start, the key
needs to be located in the front part of the
passenger compartment. With the option for
keyless locking/unlocking* of the car, the key Backup reader's location in the tunnel console.
can be anywhere in the car.
If the Car key not found message is shown in
2. Hold the brake pedal depressed1 fully. For the driver display when starting, place the remote
cars with automatic gear changing, make control key by the backup reader. Then try to start
sure that gear position P or N is selected. the car again.
For cars with a manual gearbox, make sure
that the gear lever is in neutral position or NOTE
that the clutch pedal is depressed. When the remote control key is positioned by
Start knob in the tunnel console.
3. Turn the start knob clockwise and then the backup reader, make sure that there are
release it. The control automatically returns no car keys, metal objects or electronic appa-
WARNING
to its starting position. ratus by the backup reader, (e.g. mobile
Before starting: phones, tablets, laptops or chargers). Several
• Fasten the seatbelt. NOTE car keys close to one another by the backup
reader may cause interference with each
• Adjust the seat, steering wheel and mir- For diesel-engined cars, there may be a slight other.
rors. delay before starting is initiated.
• Make sure that the brake pedal can be
fully depressed. When the engine is started the starter motor
works until the engine is started or until its over-
heating protection triggers.
1 If the car is moving, the engine can be started by turning the start knob clockwise.
IMPORTANT • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 191) Switching off the car
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts - • Using jump starting with another battery The car is switched off using the start knob in
(p. 470) the tunnel console.
wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the bat- • Selecting ignition mode (p. 421)
tery is allowed to recover.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the car while driving or during towing.
WARNING
Always take the remote control key out from
the car when leaving the car and make sure
the car's electrical system is in ignition posi-
tion 0 - especially if there are children in the Start knob in the tunnel console.
car. To switch off the car:
– Turn the start knob clockwise and release it -
NOTE the car is switched off. The control automati-
The idling speed can be noticeably higher cally returns to its starting position.
than normal for certain engine types during If the gear selector for cars with an automatic
cold starting. This is done in order that the gearbox is not in position P or if the car rolls:
emissions system can reach normal operating
– Turn the knob clockwise and hold it until the
temperature as quickly as possible, which
car is switched off.
minimises exhaust emissions and protects the
environment. Related information
Related information • Ignition positions (p. 420)
• Switching off the car (p. 419)
}}
419
• Using jump starting with another battery Ignition positions Level Functions
(p. 470) The car's electrical system can be set in different
• Selecting ignition mode (p. 421) levels/positions and in this way make the differ- 0 • Odometer, clock and temperature
ent functions available. gauge are illuminatedA.
In order to facilitate the use of a limited number

• The power seats* can be adjusted.
of functions with the engine switched off, the • The power windows can be used.
car's electrical system can be set in 3 different • The centre display is started and
levels - 0, I and II. These levels are described can be usedA.
with the denomination "ignition position"
throughout the owner's manual. • The infotainment system can be
usedA.
The following table shows the functions available
The functions are time-controlled in
in each ignition position/level:
this ignition position and are switched
off automatically after a period of time.
I • Panorama roof, power windows,
12V socket in the passenger com-
partment, Bluetooth, navigation,
phone, ventilation fan and wind-
screen wipers can be used.
• Power seats can be adjusted.
• 12 V sockets in the cargo area
can be used.
Power is taken from the battery in
this ignition position.
Level Functions Selecting ignition mode • Ignition position I - Turn the start knob
The car's electrical system can be set in different clockwise and release it. The control auto-
II • The headlamps come on. levels/positions and in this way make the differ- matically returns to its starting position.
• Warning/indicator lamps illuminate ent functions available. • Ignition position II - Turn the start knob
for 5 seconds. clockwise and hold it in position for
Selecting ignition position approx. 5 seconds. Then release the knob,
• Several other systems are acti-
vated. However, heating in seat which automatically returns to its starting
cushions and the rear window can position.
only be activated after the car has • Back to ignition position 0 - To return to
been started. ignition position 0 from position I and II -
This ignition position consumes a Turn the start knob clockwise and release.
lot of current from the battery and The control automatically returns to its star-
should therefore be avoided! ting position.
A Also activated when the door is opened. Related information

Related information
• Starting the car (p. 418) • Switching off the car (p. 419)
• Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 191) Start knob in the tunnel console. • Ignition positions (p. 420)
• Using jump starting with another battery • Ignition position 0 - Unlock the car and • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 191)
(p. 470) store the remote control key inside the car. • Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 470)
• Selecting ignition mode (p. 421)
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake pedal, or
the clutch pedal for cars with manual gear
changing, when these ignition positions are to
be selected.
421
Alcohol lock* Bypass of the alcohol lock* Related information

The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent the In the event of an emergency situation or the • Alcohol lock* (p. 422)
car from being driven by individuals under the alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible to • Before starting the engine with the alcohol
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive the car. lock (p. 423)
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence of For deactivation via the alcohol lock, see the sep- • Starting the car (p. 418)
alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration takes place in arate instructions for that specific lock. • Ignition positions (p. 420)
accordance with each market's limit value in Activating the bypass function (Bypass)
force for driving legally.
The car has an interface for the electrical con- NOTE

nection of the different makes and models of All bypass activation is logged and saved in
alcohol lock recommended by Volvo. The inter- the memory in the alcohol lock's control unit.
face facilitates alcohol lock connection, and gives It is not possible to undo a bypass.
the option of an integrated function including
messages related to the alcohol lock in the car's
The message, Blow into alcolock Bypass
main display. For information about a specific
instead?, is shown in the screen:
alcohol lock, please refer to the owner's manual
from the respective alcohol lock manufacturer. • If "Cancel/Yes" is shown - select bypass by
pressing the right arrow button on the steer-
WARNING ing wheel's right-hand keypad and then on
the O button.
The alcohol lock is an aid and does not
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is • If "Yes" is shown - select bypass by pressing
always the responsibility of the driver to be the O button.
sober and to drive the car safely. The alcohol lock is now bypassed and the car can
be started.
Related information The number of bypasses possible before service
• Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 422) is required is selected during alcohol lock instal-
• Before starting the engine with the alcohol lation.
lock (p. 423)
Before starting the engine with the Brake functions Foot brake
alcohol lock The car's brakes are used to reduce the speed The foot brake is part of the brake system.
The alcohol lock is activated automatically and is or prevent the car from rolling. The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If a
then ready for use when the car is opened. brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal will
Besides the foot brake and parking brake, the car engage deeper. Higher pressure on the pedal will
To bear in mind is equipped with several automatic brake assist therefore be needed to produce the normal brak-
In order to obtain correct function and as accu- functions. These can assist the driver by not ing effect.
rate a measurement result as possible: needing to keep his/her foot on the brake pedal
when stationary at a traffic light, when starting on The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a
• Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes
an uphill gradient or when driving on a downhill brake servo.
before the breath test.
gradient.
• Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alco-
Depending on the car's equipment, the following WARNING
hol in the washer fluid may result in an incor-
auto braking functions are available: The brake servo only works when the engine
rect measurement result.
is running.
• Automatic braking when stationary (Auto
NOTE Hold)
If the foot brake is used when the engine is
After a completed period of driving, the • Hill start assist (Hill Start Assist)
switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes • Auto braking after a collision higher pedal pressure must be used to brake the
without a new breath test.
• City Safety car.
• Hill descent control (Hill Descent Control)* In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy
Related information
load the brakes should be relieved by using
• Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 422) Related information
engine braking in manual gearshift mode. Engine
• Alcohol lock* (p. 422) • Foot brake (p. 423)
braking is most efficiently used if the same gear
• Starting the car (p. 418) • Parking brake (p. 426) is used downhill as up. Use drive mode Off Road*
• Ignition positions (p. 420) • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 429) for increased engine braking while driving on
steep downhill gradients at low speeds.
• Auto braking after a collision (p. 431)
• Help when starting on a hill (p. 430) Anti-lock braking system
• City Safety™ (p. 346) The car has anti-lock brakes, Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS), which can prevent the wheels
• Hill descent control* (p. 454) from locking while braking and allows maintained
steering control. Vibration may be felt in the
}}
|| brake pedal when this is engaged and this is nor- WARNING Brake assistance
mal. The brake assist system, BAS (Brake Assist
If both the warning lamps for brake fault and
A short test of the ABS system is made automat- ABS fault illuminate at the same time, a fault System), helps to increase brake force during
ically after the car has been started when the has occurred in the brake system. braking, thereby shortening the braking distance.
driver releases the brake pedal. A further auto- The system detects the way in which the driver
matic test of the system may be made at low
• If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is brakes and increases brake force where neces-
normal at this stage, drive carefully to the sary. The brake force can be boosted up to the
speed. The test may be felt as pulses in the
nearest workshop and have the brake level when the ABS system is engaged. The
brake pedal.
system checked - an authorised Volvo function is suspended when the pressure on the
Symbols in the driver display workshop is recommended. brake pedal decreases.
Symbol Specification • If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- NOTE
Check the brake fluid level. If the ther before topping up the brake fluid.
level is low, fill with brake fluid and The reason for the loss of brake fluid When BAS is activated the brake pedal low-
check for the cause of the brake must be investigated. ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
fluid loss. the brake pedal as long as necessary.
Related information When the brake pedal is released, all braking

Constant glow for 2 seconds when
• Brake assistance (p. 424) ceases.
the engine is started: Automatic
function check. • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 429)
Related information
Constant glow for more than 2 • Help when starting on a hill (p. 430)
seconds: Fault in the ABS system. • Foot brake (p. 423)
• Braking on wet roads (p. 425)
The car's normal brake system is
still working, but without the ABS • Braking on gritted roads (p. 425)
function. • Brake system maintenance (p. 425)
• Brake lights (p. 154)
424
Braking on wet roads Braking on gritted roads Brake system maintenance

When driving for a prolonged period of time in When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt may Check brake system components regularly for
heavy rain without braking, the braking effect form on the brake discs and brake linings. wear.
may be delayed slightly when next using the To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
brakes. This may extend braking distance. You should follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in
therefore maintain a greater safety distance to the Service and Warranty Booklet. New and
This may also be the case after a car wash. It is vehicles in front. In addition, make sure you do replaced brake linings and brake discs do not
then necessary to depress the brake pedal more the following: provide optimal braking effect until they have
forcefully. You should therefore maintain a
greater distance to the vehicles in front.
• Brake now and again to remove any layer of been "worn in" for a few hundred kilometres
salt. Make sure that other road users are not (miles). Compensate for the reduced braking
Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads or put at risk by the braking. effect by depressing the brake pedal harder.
using a car wash. This warms up the brake discs, Volvo recommends only fitting brake linings that
• Gently depress the brake pedal after finish-
are approved for your Volvo.
enabling them to dry faster and protecting them ing driving and before starting your next trip.
against corrosion. Bear in mind the current traffic
situation when braking. Related information IMPORTANT
• Foot brake (p. 423)
The wear on the brake system's components
Related information
• Foot brake (p. 423) • Braking on wet roads (p. 425) must be checked regularly.
• Braking on gritted roads (p. 425) Contact a workshop for information about the
procedure or engage a workshop to carry out
the inspection - an authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended.
Related information
• Foot brake (p. 423)
425
Parking brake Related information Activating and deactivating the

The parking brake prevents the car from rolling • Activating and deactivating the parking brake parking brake
away from stationary by means of mechanically (p. 426) Use the parking brake to prevent the car from
locking/blocking two wheels. • Parking on a hill (p. 428) rolling from stationary.
• In the event of a fault in the parking brake Activating the parking brake
(p. 428)
• Automatic braking when stationary (p. 429)
The control for the parking brake is located in the tunnel

console between the seats.
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when 1. Pull the control upward.
the electrically-operated parking brake is being > The symbol in the driver display illumi-
applied. The noise can also be heard during the nates when the parking brake is activated.
automatic function checking of the parking brake.
2. Check that the car is stationary.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake is
applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is Symbol in the driver display
applied when the car is moving then the normal Symbol Specification
foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four
wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear The symbol is illuminated when the
wheels when the car is almost stationary. parking brake is activated.
If the symbol flashes, it indicates a
fault has occurred. Read the mes-
sage in the driver display.
426
Automatic activation Deactivating the parking brake 4. With automatic gearbox:

The parking brake is activated automatically: Select gear position D or R and depress the
• if the Auto hold function (automatic braking accelerator pedal.
when stationary) is activated and the car has With manual gearbox:
been stationary for a longer time (5-10
minutes). Engage a suitable gear, release the clutch
and depress the accelerator pedal.
• when gear position P is selected on a steep
hill2. > The parking brake releases and the sym-
bol in the driver display extinguishes.
• when the car is switched off and the setting
for automatic activation of the parking brake
is activated in the centre display.
NOTE
Emergency brake When the car is first started, the parking
brake can be released automatically without
In an emergency, the parking brake can be acti- Deactivate manually the seatbelt fastened.
vated when the car is in motion by pulling and 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
holding up the control. Braking stops when the
control is released, or if the accelerator pedal is 2. Press the control down. Related information
depressed. > The parking brake releases and the sym- • Automatic parking brake activation setting
bol in the driver display extinguishes. (p. 428)
NOTE Deactivate automatically • In the event of a fault in the parking brake
An acoustic signal sounds while emergency 1. Put the seatbelt on. (p. 428)
braking is active at high speeds. 2. Depress the brake pedal firmly. • Parking brake (p. 426)
3. Start the car. • Parking on a hill (p. 428)
2 Applies to automatic gearbox.
427
Automatic parking brake activation Parking on a hill In the event of a fault in the parking
setting Always use the parking brake when parking on a brake
Choose whether the parking brake is to be acti- hill. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if it is not
vated automatically when the car is switched off. WARNING possible to deactivate or activate the parking
brake after several attempts.
This choice is made in the settings menu in the Always use the parking brake when parking An acoustic warning signal sounds when driving
centre display. on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the
with the parking brake applied.
automatic transmission's P position is not suf-
1. Press Settings in the top view. ficient to hold the car stationary in all situa- If the car has to be parked before a possible fault
tions. is rectified then the wheels must be turned as if
2. Press My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension to select or deselect the func- parking on a hill and the gear selector must be in
tion Auto Activate Parking Brake. If the car is parked facing uphill: position P, or engage first gear if the car has a
manual gearbox.
• Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
Related information
If the car is parked facing downhill: Low battery voltage
• Activating and deactivating the parking brake
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking
(p. 426) • Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
brake can neither be released nor applied. Con-
• Parking brake (p. 426) Heavy load uphill nect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car low.
to roll backward when the parking brake is
released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid Replacing the brake linings
this by pulling the control upwards while driving The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
the car away. Release the control when the workshop due to the design of the electrically-
engine achieves traction. operated parking brake - an authorised Volvo
Related information
• Activating and deactivating the parking brake
(p. 426)
428
Symbols in the driver display Automatic braking when stationary Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification Automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold) Symbol Specification
means that the driver can release the brake
If the symbol flashes, it indicates a pedal while maintaining braking effect when the The symbol is illuminated when the
fault has occurred. See the mes- car has stopped at traffic lights or a junction. function uses the foot brake to
sage in the driver display. When the car has stopped, the brakes are acti- keep the car stationary.
vated automatically. The function can use either
Fault in brake system. See the foot brake or parking brake to hold the car sta- The symbol is illuminated when the
message in the driver display. tionary and it works on all gradients. When driving function uses the parking brake to
away, the brakes disengage automatically if the keep the car stationary.
driver is wearing the seatbelt.
Information message in driver dis-
Related information
play.
NOTE • Activating and deactivating the automatic
brake at a standstill (p. 430)
When braking to a standstill on an uphill or
downhill slope, the brake pedal should be • Foot brake (p. 423)
Related information
• Activating and deactivating the parking brake depressed a little harder before being • Parking brake (p. 426)
(p. 426) released to ensure the car does not roll. • Help when starting on a hill (p. 430)
• Starter battery (p. 609)
The parking brake is activated if:
• Volvo service programme (p. 590)
• the car is switched off
• the driver's door is opened
• the driver's seatbelt is unbuckled
• the car has been stationary for a longer time
(5-10 minutes).
429
Activating and deactivating the • The function remains deactivated until it is Help when starting on a hill
automatic brake at a standstill reactivated. Hill start assist, Hill Start Assist (HSA), prevents
The automatic brake function at a standstill is • When the function is deactivated, hill start the car from rolling backwards when starting on
activated using the button in the tunnel console. assist (HSA) remains active to prevent the an uphill gradient. When reversing uphill, it pre-
car from rolling backwards when starting on vents the car from rolling forwards.
an uphill gradient. The function means that the pedal pressure in
the brake system remains for several seconds
Related information while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal
• Automatic braking when stationary (p. 429) to accelerator pedal.
The temporary braking effect releases after sev-
eral seconds or when the driver starts to drive
away.
Hill start assist is available even if the function for
automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold) is
deactivated.
– Press the button in the tunnel console to Related information

activate or deactivate the function. • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 429)
> The indicator in the button illuminates • Foot brake (p. 423)
when the function is activated. Activated
function remains even when the car is
started next time.
Applicable when switching off

If the function is active and holds the
car with the foot brake (A-symbol illu-
minated) then the brake pedal must be
depressed at the same time as the
button is depressed in order to deactivate.
430
Auto braking after a collision • Brake functions (p. 423) Gearbox

In the event of a collision in which the activation The gearbox is part of the car's powertrain
level is reached for the pyrotechnic seatbelt ten- (power transmission) between engine and drive
sioners or airbags, or if a collision with a large wheels. The function of the gearbox is to change
animal is detected, the car's brakes are automat- the gear ratio depending on speed and power
ically applied. This function is to prevent or requirements.
reduce the effects of any subsequent collision. There are two main types of gearbox, manual and
automatic.
After a serious collision there is a risk that it is no
longer possible to control and steer the car. In The manual gearbox has six gears and the auto-
order to avoid or mitigate a possible further colli- matic gearbox has eight. The number of gear
sion with a vehicle or an object in the vehicle's changes means that the engine's torque and
path, the auto braking system is activated auto- power range can be used effectively. In the auto-
matically and brakes the car in a safe manner. matic gearbox, two of the gears are overdrive
gears that save fuel when driving at constant
Brake lights and hazard warning lights are acti- engine speed.
vated during braking. When the car has stopped,
the hazard warning lights continue to flash and It is also possible to select gears manually with
the parking brake is applied. the automatic gearbox. The driver display respec-
tively shows which gear or gear position is cur-
If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a risk rently in use.
of being hit by following traffic, the system can be
overridden by the driver depressing the accelera- IMPORTANT
tor pedal.
To prevent damage to any drive system com-
The function assumes that the brake system is ponents, the working temperature of the
intact after the collision. gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of over-
Brake assist is included in the Rear Collision heating, a warning symbol illuminates in the
Warning and Blind Spot Information safety sys- driver display and a text message is shown -
tems. follow the recommendation given.
Related information
• BLIS* (p. 360)
}}
|| Symbols in the driver display Manual gearbox • Follow the gearing pattern on the gear lever
If a fault should occur in the gearbox, the driver With a manual gearbox, the driver selects a suit- and start from neutral position, N, before
display shows a symbol and a message. able gear manually, according to speed and moving it to the R position.
power requirements at the time. • Engage reverse gear only when the car is
Symbol Specification stationary.
Changing gear
Information or error message for During parking
gearbox. Follow the recommenda-
tion given.
WARNING
Hot or overheated gearbox. Follow Always apply the parking brake when parking
on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not suf-
the recommendation given.
ficient to hold the car in all situations.
Reduced performance/Acceler- Related information

ation performance reduced • Gearbox (p. 431)
In the event of a temporary power- • Gear shift indicator* (p. 437)

train fault, the car can go into a
Limp home mode with reduced Neutral position (N)
engine power to prevent damage
to the powertrain. The manual gearbox has six gears; the shifting
pattern is shown on the gear lever.
Related information • Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
• Gear positions for automatic gearbox gear change.
(p. 433) • Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
• Manual gearbox (p. 432) gear changes.
• Gear shift indicator* (p. 437) Reverse gear inhibitor
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility
of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear
during normal forward travel.
Gear positions for automatic To be able to move the gear selector from the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be
gearbox park position, the brake pedal must be depressed stationary when changing gear from R position to
With an automatic gearbox, the system chooses and the ignition position must be II. D position.
the gear so that driving is optimal. The gearbox To park - first apply the parking bake and then
also has a manual gearshift mode. select park position.
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when parking
on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the
automatic transmission's P position is not suf-
ficient to hold the car stationary in all situa-
tions.
NOTE
The gear selector must be in P position to
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
The driver display shows the gear position
selected: Reverse position - R
P, R, N, D or M. Select position R to reverse. The car must be sta-
tionary when reverse position is selected.
In manual gearshift mode, the gear being used is
Neutral position - N
also shown.
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
Gear positions started. Apply the parking brake if the car is sta-
tionary with the gear selector in N position.
Park position - P
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P To be able to change from the neutral position to
position is engaged. another gear position, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the ignition position must be II.
Select the P position when the car is parked or
when starting the engine. The car must be sta- Drive position - D
tionary when the park position is selected. D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and
down takes place automatically based on the
}}
433
|| Manual gearshift mode - M ate for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking Changing gear with steering wheel
The manual gearshift mode can be selected at and stalling. paddles*
any time while driving. The car engine-brakes To return to automatic gear changing, press the The steering wheel paddles are a complement
when the accelerator pedal is released. gear selector sideways to the end position at D. to the gear selector and make it possible to
Select manual gearshift mode by moving the change gear manually without releasing hands
gear selector sideways from position D to the Related information from the steering wheel.
end position at "±". The driver display shows • Gear selector inhibitor (p. 436)
Activating the steering wheel paddles
which gear is engaged at the time. • Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*
To be able to change gear with the steering
(p. 434)
• Press the gear selector forwards to "+" wheel paddles they must first be activated:
(plus) to change up one step and release it. • Kick-down function (p. 437)
– Pull one of the paddles toward the steering
• Press the gear selector backwards to "–" • Gear shift indicator* (p. 437) wheel.
(minus) to change down one step and
> A figure in the driver display indicates cur-
release it.
rent gear.
manual gearshift mode in the driver display3.

Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel
The gearbox automatically shifts down if the paddles.
speed decreases to a level lower than appropri-
In gear position M the steering wheel paddles are This is indicated by means of the figure for the
automatically activated. current gear extinguishing. The exception is dur-
ing engine braking - then the paddles are acti-
vated for as long as engine braking is in pro-
gress.
In gear position M there is no automatic deactiva-
tion.
Related information
• Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 433)
• Gear shift indicator* (p. 437)
"-": Selects the next lower gear.
Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel

"+": Selects the next higher gear.
paddles in manual gearshift mode.
A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle
Switch provided that the engine speed does not leave
To change gear one step: the permitted range.
– Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards After each gear change the figure in the driver
the steering wheel - and release. display changes to show the current gear.
Deactivating the function

Manual deactivation in gear position D.
– Deactivate the steering wheel paddles by
pulling the right-hand paddle (+) toward the
steering wheel and holding in place until the
figure in the driver display for the current
gear extinguishes.
Automatic deactivation
In gear position D the steering wheel paddles are
deactivated after a short time if they are not used.
Gear selector inhibitor From park position - P Deactivate automatic gear selector
The gear selector inhibitor prevents accidental To be able to move the gear selector from the P inhibitor
changing between different gear positions in an position, the brake pedal must be depressed and If there is no power to the car, the automatic
automatic gearbox. the ignition position must be II. gear selector inhibitor can nevertheless be dis-
From neutral position - N engaged.
There are two different types of gear selector
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
inhibitor - mechanical and automatic. Deactivate automatic gear selector
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running) inhibitor
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
then the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from the N
position to another gear position, the brake pedal
must be depressed and the ignition position must
be II.
Related information
(p. 433)
• Deactivate automatic gear selector inhibitor
(p. 436)
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a dis-

The gear selector can be moved forward and
charged battery, the gear selector must be
back freely between N and D. Other positions are
moved to the N position so that the car can be
locked with a latch that is released with the inhib-
moved.
itor button on the gear selector.
Lift the rubber mat in the compartment in
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can
front of the gear selector. Locate the hole
be moved forwards or backwards between P, R,
with a spring-loaded button in the bottom of
N and D.
the compartment.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor Press a small screwdriver into the hole and
The automatic gear selector inhibitor has special hold.
safety systems.
436
Move the gear selector to position N and Kick-down function Gear shift indicator*
release the button. Kick-down4 is used when maximum acceleration The gear shift indicator in the driver display
4. Put the rubber mat back in place. is needed, such as for overtaking. shows the current gear during manual gearshift-
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the ing and when it is appropriate to engage the
Related information way to the floor (beyond the position normally next gear for optimum fuel economy.
• Gear selector inhibitor (p. 436) regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is For eco-driving during manual gear changing, it is
• Gear positions for automatic gearbox immediately engaged. This is known as kick- important to drive in the right gear and to change
(p. 433) down. gear in good time.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-down
position, the gearbox automatically changes up.
Safety function
To prevent over-revving of the engine, the gear-
box control program has a protective downshift
inhibitor.
The gearbox does not permit downshifting/kick-
down which would result in an engine speed high
enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens
if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at
high engine speed – the original gear remains
engaged.
On kick-down the car can shift down one or more
steps at a time, depending in engine speed. The
car shifts up when the engine has reached is
maximum engine speed in order to prevent
engine damage.
Related information
(p. 433)
4 Only possible with automatic gearbox. }}
|| With automatic gearbox With manual gearbox Related information

The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in An up-arrow indicates a recommended change to • Gear positions for automatic gearbox
the driver display and uses an up arrow to indi- a higher gear, and a down-arrow a recommended (p. 433)
cate when shifting to a higher gear is recom- change to a lower gear. • Manual gearbox (p. 432)
mended.
Gear shift indicator in the 12-inch driver display*.

Gear shift indicator in the 12-inch driver display*.
Gear shift indicator in the 8-inch driver display.

Gear shift indicator in the 8-inch driver display.
All-wheel drive* Drive modes* tings mean that the car feels comfortable, the
All-wheel drive, AWD (All Wheel Drive), means Selection of drive mode affects the car's driving steering is light, the shock absorption is soft and
that the car is driving all four wheels at the same characteristics in order to enhance the driving body's movement is smooth.
time, which improves traction. experience and facilitate driving in special situa- This drive mode is the certification mode for car-
tions. bon dioxide emissions.
To achieve the best possible traction, the motive Using the drive modes it is possible to quickly
force is distributed automatically to the wheels ECO
have access to the car's numerous functions and
with the best grip. The system continuously cal- settings for different driving needs. The following • Adapt the car for more energy-efficient and
culates the need for torque to the rear wheels, environmentally-conscious driving with the
systems are adapted to obtain the best possible
and can immediately redistribute up to half of the Eco mode.
driving characteristics in each respective drive
motor's torque to the rear wheels. mode: The drive mode means e.g. that the Start/Stop
All-wheel drive also has a stabilising effect at function is activated, the ground clearance is
• Steering
lower to reduce wind resistance and the output
higher speeds. Under normal driving conditions,
the majority of power is transmitted to the front • Engine/gearbox5/all-wheel drive* of certain climate settings is reduced.
wheels. When stationary, the all-wheel drive is • Brakes The driver display has an ECO gauge that facili-
always engaged in preparation for maximum trac- tates fuel-efficient driving.
• Air suspension* and shock absorption
tion during acceleration.
• Driver display
All-wheel drive characteristics vary depending on
the selected drive mode*. • Start/Stop function
• Climate settings
Related information
• Drive modes* (p. 439) Select the drive mode that best suits the current
driving conditions. Remember that not all drive
• Low speed control* (p. 452) modes are available in all situations.
Selectable drive modes
COMFORT
• This is the car's normal mode.
When the car starts, it is in Comfort mode and
the Start/Stop function is activated. These set-
5 Applies to automatic gearbox. }}
|| OFF ROAD IMPORTANT

• Maximise the car's traction when driving in
difficult terrain and on poor roads. The OFF ROAD drive mode must not be used
while driving with a trailer without trailer con-
The drive mode provides high ground clearance, nector. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to
steering is light, all-wheel drive and the function the air bellows.
for low speed control with hill descent control
(Hill Descent Control) are activated. Start/Stop
function is deactivated. DYNAMIC
• Dynamic mode means that the car has sport-
The drive mode can only be activated at low ier characteristics and faster response to
speeds and the speedometer shows the range accelerating.
for speed limitation. If this speed is exceeded, Off
road mode is suspended and another drive mode The gear changes become faster and more dis-
is activated. tinct, and the gearbox prioritises a gear with
greater traction.
In the Off road mode the driver display has a
compass between the speedometer and tachom- Steering response is faster, shock absorption is
eter. harder and a low ground clearance means that
the body follows the roadway in order to reduce
roll during cornering.
NOTE
Start/Stop function is deactivated.
The driving mode is not designed to be used
on public roads. INDIVIDUAL Settings view6 for individual drive mode.
• Adapting a drive mode according to individ-
ual preferences. 1. Press Settings in the top view.
NOTE Select a drive mode to start from, and then adjust 2. Press My Car Individual Drive Mode and
If the car is switched off in OFF ROAD mode, the settings according to the desired driving cha- select Individual Drive Mode.
and therefore has high ground clearance, the racteristics. These settings are saved in an indi-
car is lowered next time it is started. vidual driver profile.
An individual drive mode is only available if it is
first activated in the centre display.
6 The figure is schematic - details may vary depending on car model or updated software.
440
3. In Presets, select a drive mode to start from: Changing drive mode* If a drive mode is greyed-out in the pop-up menu
Eco, Comfort or Dynamic. Change the drive mode using the control in the then it cannot be selected.
Possible adjustments apply to settings for: centre console.
Related information
Select the drive mode that best suits the current
• Driver Display driving conditions. Remember that not all drive • Drive modes* (p. 439)
• Steering force modes are available in all situations. • Activating and deactivating drive mode ECO
with the function button (p. 444)
• Powertrain Characteristics To change drive mode:
• Brake Characteristics • Activating and deactivating low-speed driv-
ing* using a function button (p. 453)
• Suspension Control
• Activating and deactivating hill descent con-
• ECO Climate trol* with the function button (p. 455)
• Start/Stop.
Related information
• Changing drive mode* (p. 441)
• Drive mode ECO (p. 442)
• Start/Stop function (p. 444)
• Low speed control* (p. 452)
• Hill descent control* (p. 454) 1. Press the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.
• All-wheel drive* (p. 439) > A pop-up menu is opened in the centre
display.
2. Roll the wheel upward or downward until the
desired drive mode is highlighted.
3. Press the drive mode control or tap directly
on the touch screen to confirm the selection.
> The selected drive mode is indicated in
the driver display.
Drive mode ECO Free-wheel function Eco Coast7 • Engine and/or gearbox are not at normal
Drive mode Eco optimises the car's driving cha- The freewheel function Eco Coast means in prac- operating temperature.
racteristics for more fuel efficient and environ- tice that engine braking ceases, meaning in turn • The gear selector is moved from the D posi-
mentally-conscious driving. that the car's kinetic energy is used to freewheel tion and the manual position.
Use this drive mode to save fuel and the environ- for longer distances. When the driver releases
the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically
• The speed is outside the range of
ment. approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
disengaged from the engine whose speed is
The following properties are adapted for Eco driv- • The road's downhill gradient is steeper than
reduced to idling speed with reduced consump-
ing: approx. 6%.
tion.
• Gearbox gearshift points7. The function is best used where it is possible to • Manual gear changing is performed with the
• Engine management and response from the freewheel a long way, e.g. roads with a slight steering wheel paddles*.
accelerator pedal. downhill gradient or when there is a predictable Deactivating and switching off the freewheel
The Eco Coast7 freewheel function is acti- speed reduction to freewheel into a zone with a function
• lower speed limit.
vated and engine braking is deactivated In certain situations it may be desirable to deacti-
when the accelerator pedal is released at Activating the freewheel function vate or switch off the function in order to use
speeds between 65 and 140 km/h The function is activated when the accelerator engine braking. Examples of such situations may
(40 and 87 mph). pedal is fully released, in combination with the be on steep downhill gradients or before an
imminent overtaking manoeuvre - in order to be
• Some of the climate control system's set- following parameters:
able to do it in the safest way possible.
tings work at reduced power or are deacti-
• Drive mode Eco is activated.
Deactivate the freewheel function as follows:
vated.
• The gear selector is in D position.
• The level control function* provides a low • Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal.
ground clearance in order to reduce wind • Speed within the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph). • Move the gear selector to manual position.
resistance.
• The road's downhill gradient is not steeper • Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*.
• The driver display shows information in an
ECO gauge which facilitates environmentally- than approx. 6%. Switch off the freewheel function as follows:
conscious and fuel-efficient driving. The driver display shows COASTING when the • Change drive mode*, or switch off the Eco
freewheel function is being used. drive mode in the function view.
Limitations
The freewheel function is not available if:
7 Only cars with automatic gearbox.
Even without the freewheel function, it is possible Eco gauge in the driver display
to freewheel for short distances. This, in turn, The ECO gauge indicates how fuel-efficient the
reduces consumption. However, for the best fuel driving is:
economy it is better to have the freewheel func-
tion activated and be able to freewheel for longer • With fuel-efficient driving, the gauge shows a
low value with the pointer in the green zone.
distances.
• With non-fuel-efficient driving, e.g. during
Cruise control Eco Cruise heavy braking or heavy acceleration, the
When using the cruise control in the Eco drive gauge shows a high value.
mode, the car's acceleration and deceleration will The ECO gauge also has an indicator to show
be lower compared to other drive modes, which how a reference driver would drive the car under
enables further fuel savings. This means that the the same driving conditions. This is indicated with
car's speed can be slightly above or below the the short pointer on the gauge. Eco gauge in the 8-inch driver display.
set speed.
• On a smooth road, the car's speed can devi- ECO climate control
ate from the set speed when the cruise con- In the Eco drive mode, Eco climate control is acti-
trol is active and the car free-rolls. vated automatically in the passenger compart-
ment in order to reduce energy consumption.
• On a steep uphill slope, the car's speed
drops until a downshift is made7, then
reduced acceleration starts in order to
NOTE
achieve the set speed. When the ECO function is activated, several
parameters in the climate control system's
• On a downhill slope where the car free-rolls,
the car's speed can be slightly above or settings are changed, and several electricity
below the set speed. The function uses nor- consumer functions are reduced. Certain set-
mal engine braking to maintain the set tings can be reset manually, but full function-
speed. The foot brake is also used if neces- Eco gauge in the 12-inch driver display*. ality is only regained by switching off the ECO
sary. function or adapting Individual* drive mode
with full climate functionality.
7 Only cars with automatic gearbox. }}
|| In the event of difficulties due to misting, press Activating and deactivating drive Start/Stop function
the button for max. defroster which has normal mode ECO with the function button With the Start/Stop function, the engine
functionality. Any car that is not equipped with a drive mode switches off temporarily when the car has stop-
control in the tunnel console has a function but- ped e.g. at traffic lights or in a traffic queue, and
Related information
ton for Eco drive mode in the centre display then starts again automatically when the journey
function view. is resumed.
• Activating and deactivating drive mode ECO
with the function button (p. 444) The Eco mode is deactivated when the engine is The start/stop function reduces fuel consump-
switched off, and it must therefore be activated tion, which in turn contributes to reduced exhaust
after each time the engine is started. The driver emissions.
• Economical driving (p. 455) display shows ECO when the function is acti- The system makes it possible to adopt an envi-
• Start/Stop function (p. 444) vated. ronmentally-conscious driving style by allowing
Selecting Eco drive mode in the centre the car to engine auto-stop when possible.
display function view Related information
– Press the Driving Mode ECO button to • Driving with start/stop function (p. 445)
activate or deactivate the function.
• Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 447)
> An indicator in the button illuminates

when the function is activated.
Related information
• Drive mode ECO (p. 442)
Driving with start/stop function With adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist acti- With manual gearbox
vated, the engine will auto-stop after approxi-
The Start/Stop function temporarily switches off
mately three seconds.
• With the gear lever in neutral position:
the engine when stationary and then restarts it Depress the clutch pedal or depress the
automatically when the journey is resumed. accelerator pedal - the engine starts.
Autostart
The Start/Stop function is available when the
engine is started and can be activated if certain
The following is required for the engine to auto- • On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on
start: the brake pedal slightly so that the car
conditions have been met. The driver display indi-
begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after
cates whether the function is available, active or With automatic gearbox
a slight speed increase.
not available.
• Release the brake pedal - the engine will
All of the car's normal systems such as lighting, autostart and you can continue driving. On an
radio, etc. work normally, even when the engine is uphill gradient hill start assist (HSA)
auto-stopped. However, some equipment may engages, which prevents the car from rolling
have its output temporarily reduced, e.g. the cli- backwards.
mate control system's fan speed or extremely • When the Auto Hold function is activated,
high volume on the audio system. auto-start is delayed until the accelerator
pedal is depressed.
Auto-stop
The following is required for the engine to auto- • When adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist
stop: is activated, the engine will auto-start when
the accelerator pedal is depressed, or by
With automatic gearbox
pressing the button on the left keypad
• Stop the car with the foot brake and then of the steering wheel.
keep your foot on the brake pedal - the
engine stops automatically.
• Maintain foot pressure on the brake pedal
and depress the accelerator pedal - the
With manual gearbox engine auto-starts.
• Declutch, set the gear lever in neutral posi- • On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on
tion and release the clutch pedal - the the brake pedal slightly so that the car
engine stops automatically. begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after
In drive mode Eco or Comfort8, the engine may a slight speed increase.
auto-stop before the car is completely stationary.
8 Normal start mode. }}
445
|| Symbols in the driver display Symbol Specification Deactivating the Start/Stop function
With 12-inch driver display* temporarily
White symbol: The function is avail-
• The text READY is shown in the tachometer able.
In certain situations it may be desirable to tem-
when the function is available. porarily deactivate the start/stop function.
Deactivate using the Start/
• A pointer in the tachometer points to READY
Stop function button in the
when the function is active and the engine is Beige symbol: The function is centre display's function view.
auto-stopped. active and the engine is auto-stop- The indication in the button is
• The text READY is greyed out when the ped. switched off when the function
function is not available. is deactivated.
The function is not available, the
• No text is shown when the function is deacti-
The function is deactivated until
vated. conditions are not fulfilled.
• it is reactivated
No symbol is shown when the • the drive mode is changed to Eco or Comfort
function is deactivated. • the next time the car is started.
Related information Related information

• Deactivating the Start/Stop function tempo- • Driving with start/stop function (p. 445)
rarily (p. 446) • Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 447)
• Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 447)
• Help when starting on a hill (p. 430)
The function is active and the engine is auto-stopped.
• Automatic braking when stationary (p. 429)
With 8-inch driver display
The symbol is shown in the lower edge of the
speedometer.
Conditions for the Start/Stop • The starter battery's temperature is below or With automatic gearbox:
function above the permitted limit values.
• The driver is unbelted, the gear selector is in
For the Start/Stop function to work requires that • The driver makes sweeping steering wheel P position and the driver's door is open - a
a number of conditions are met. movements. normal start must take place.
If any condition is not met, this will be indicated in • The road is very steep. With manual gearbox:
the driver display. • The bonnet is opened. • The driver is unrestrained.
The engine does not auto-stop • When driving at high altitudes when the • A gear is engaged without declutching.
engine has not reached operating tempera-
The engine does not auto-stop in the following
ture. Involuntary stop with manual gearbox
cases:
• The ABS system has been activated. If a start-up fails and the engine stops, proceed
• The car has not reached approx. 10 km/h as follows:
(6 mph) after starting. • In the event of heavy braking (even without
the ABS system having been activated). 1. Check that the driver side's seatbelt is locked
• After a number of repeated auto stops, in the seatbelt buckle.
speed must again exceed approx. 10 km/h • Many starts during a short period of time
have activated the starter motor's thermal 2. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine
(6 mph) before the next auto stop.
protection. starts automatically.
• The driver has unfastened the seatbelt.
3. In certain cases the gear lever must be set in
• The exhaust system's particulate filter is full9.
• The capacity of the starter battery is below neutral position. A message is shown in the
the minimum permissible level. • A trailer is connected electrically to the car’s
driver display - follow the recommendation
electrical system.
• The engine is not at normal operating tem- given.
perature. The following applies to automatic gearbox:
The engine auto-starts without the
• The ambient temperature is under -5 °C (23 • The gearbox is not at normal operating tem-
brake pedal having been released
°F) or above approx. 30 °C (86 °F). perature.
In the following cases, the engine auto-starts
• the windscreen's electric heating is activated. • The gear selector is in M (±) position. even if the driver does not take his/her foot off
• The environment in the passenger compart- The engine does not auto-start
the brake pedal:
ment deviates from the set values. In the following cases the engine does not auto-
• the car is reversed. start after having auto-stopped:
9 Applies to cars with diesel engines. }}
447
|| • High humidity in the passenger compartment • Deactivating the Start/Stop function tempo-
forms misting on the windows. rarily (p. 446)
• The environment in the passenger compart-
ment deviates from the set values.
• There is a temporarily high current take-off
or starter battery capacity drops below the
lowest permissible level.
• Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.
• The bonnet is opened.
• The car starts to roll or increase speed
slightly if the car auto-stopped without being
completely stationary.
The following applies to automatic gearbox:
• The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with
the gear selector in D or N position.
• The gear selector is moved from D to R or M
(±) position.
• The driver's door is opened with the gear
selector in D position - a "ping" sound and
text message indicate that the ignition is on.
WARNING
Do not open the bonnet when the engine has
auto-stopped. Switch off the engine normally
before lifting up the bonnet.
Related information
• Driving with start/stop function (p. 445)
448
Level control* and shock absorption continuously depending on the road surface, the outside temperature, how the car is loaded, the
Level control regulates the car's suspension and car's acceleration, braking and cornering. use of loading mode or the drive mode that is
shock absorption characteristics automatically to selected after starting.
The driver display indicates
ensure the best comfort and functionality while when level control is in pro- The level may also be adjusted some time after
driving. It is also possible to adjust the level gress. the car has been parked. This is to compensate
manually in order to facilitate loading or entry for any changes in height that may occur due to
and exit. temperature changes in the air springs when the
car cools down.
Air suspension and shock absorption
The system is adapted according to the selected The level cannot be regulated when the tailgate During transport
drive mode and according to the speed of the or any side door is open. During transport of the car on a ferry, train or
car. Using the air suspension, the car's ground truck, the car must be lashed around the tyres
clearance is adjusted to a lower level at higher During parking and not around other parts of the chassis.
speeds, which reduces wind resistance and During parking, make sure you allow adequate Changes in the air suspension may occur during
increases stability. Shock absorption is normally space above and below the car since the car's transport, which could affect the lashing nega-
set for the best possible comfort and is regulated ground clearance may vary e.g. depending on the tively.
}}
|| Symbols and messages in driver display

Suspension Level control has been switched off manually by the user.
Deactivated by user
Suspension Level control performance has been temporarily reduced due to extensive system use. If this
Temporarily reduced performence message appears frequently (e.g. several times in one week) contact a workshopA.
Suspension A fault has occurred. Visit a workshopA as soon as possible.

Service required
Suspension failure A critical fault has occurred. Stop safely, have the car towed to a workshopA.
Stop safely
450

Suspension A fault has occurred. If the message appears whilst driving, contact a workshopA.
Slow down Car too high
Suspension Level control to target height in progress.

Auto adjusting car level
Related information
• Settings for level control* (p. 452)
Settings for level control* 2. Press My Car Mirrors and Convenience. Low speed control*
Regulate the level to facilitate loading, or on 3. Select Easy Entry and Exit Suspension The low speed control function Low Speed
entry and exit. Control. Control (LSC) facilitates and improves traction
for driving off-road and on slippery surfaces,
Switch off level control when the car is to be > When the car is parked and switched off, such as with a caravan on grass or a boat trailer
jacked up in order to prevent problems with the car is lowered (level control stops if a on a launch ramp.
automatic regulation. door is opened and there may be a cer-
tain delay before level control resumes In a car with drive mode control*, the function is
Adjusting loading mode after the door has been closed). When the included in the Off Road drive mode.
car is started and begins to move, the car The function is adapted for off-road driving and
will rise to the height setting for the drive driving with a trailer at low speed, up to approx.
mode selected. 40 km/h (25 mph).
Disable Leveling Control With low-speed control, low gears and all-wheel
In certain cases, the function must be deacti- drive are prioritised, which help to avoid wheel-
vated, e.g. before the car is raised with a jack*. spin and provides better traction on all wheels.
The difference in level created when lifting with a The accelerator pedal is less responsive in order
jack would otherwise mean the air suspension to facilitate traction and speed control at low
starting to adjust the height, creating an unde- speed.
sired effect. The function is activated together with Hill
Deactivating the function via the centre display: Descent Control (HDC) which means that speed
down steep hills can be controlled with the accel-
Use the buttons in the cargo area to regulate the 1. Press Settings in the top view. erator pedal, reducing the need to use the brake
height of the car's rear section and facilitate pedal. The system facilitates a low and even
loading and unloading or when connecting or dis- 2. Press My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension. speed while driving on steep downhill gradients.
connecting a trailer.
3. Select Disable Leveling Control.
Settings in the centre display
Entry assistance Related information
The car can be lowered to facilitate entry and exit. • Level control* and shock absorption (p. 449)
Activating entry assistance via the centre display: • Recommendations for loading (p. 579)
NOTE Activating and deactivating low- Related information

speed driving* using a function • Low speed control* (p. 452)
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of
button • Changing drive mode* (p. 441)
the accelerator pedal and engine response
are changed. Any car that is not equipped with a drive mode
control in the tunnel console has a function but-
ton for low-speed driving with Hill Descent
NOTE Control in the centre display function view.
The driving mode is not designed to be used Select low-speed driving in the centre
on public roads. display function view
– Press the Hill Descent Control button to
NOTE activate or deactivate the function.
The function is deactivated when driving at

higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
Related information
• Activating and deactivating low-speed driv- > An indicator in the button illuminates
ing* using a function button (p. 453) when the function is activated.
This function is disabled automatically when the
• Hill descent control* (p. 454) engine is switched off.
• All-wheel drive* (p. 439)
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
Hill descent control* the foot brake to be used. The brake lights are NOTE
Hill descent control, Hill Descent Control switched on when the function is operating.
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of
(HDC), is a low speed function with enhanced The driver can brake and reduce crawling speed, the accelerator pedal and engine response
engine braking. The function makes it possible or stop the car at any time by using the foot are changed.
to increase or reduce vehicle speed on steep brake.
downhill gradients using only the accelerator
pedal, without using the foot brake. The function is activated together with Low
Speed Control (LSC) which facilitates driving and NOTE
In a car with drive mode control*, the function is improves traction for driving off-road and on slip- The driving mode is not designed to be used
included in the Off Road drive mode. pery surfaces. The systems are designed for use on public roads.
at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).
Hill descent control is adapted for off-road driv-
ing at low speeds and facilitates driving on steep Points to remember when driving with NOTE
downhill gradients with difficult surfaces. The HDC
driver does not need to use the brake pedal, but The function is deactivated when driving at
• If the function is disabled while driving on a higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
can instead focus on steering. steep downhill gradient, the braking effect lower speed, if required.
will gradually decrease.
WARNING With automatic gearbox Related information
HDC does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid. • HDC can be used in gear position D, R, and • Activating and deactivating hill descent con-
with 1st or 2nd gear with manual gear trol* with the function button (p. 455)
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility changing.
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely. • Changing drive mode* (p. 441)
• It is not possible to change to 3rd gear or
• Low speed control* (p. 452)
higher with manual gear changing.
Function • All-wheel drive* (p. 439)
Hill descent control allows the car to roll at With manual gearbox
inching speed both forward and backward, assis- • HDC only brakes in 1st gear or with reverse
ted by the brake system. The speed can be gear (R). There is no active braking in higher
increased by using the accelerator pedal. When gears even though the function is not deacti-
the accelerator pedal is then released the car vated until approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).
slows back down to crawling speed, regardless of
the gradient of the hill and without the need for
Activating and deactivating hill Related information Economical driving

descent control* with the function • Hill descent control* (p. 454) Drive economically and eco-consciously by driv-
button • Changing drive mode* (p. 441) ing smoothly, thinking ahead, and adjusting your
Any car that is not equipped with a drive mode driving style and speed to the prevailing condi-
control in the tunnel console has a function but- tions.
ton for hill descent control with Hill Descent • For lower fuel consumption, activate Eco
Control in the centre display function view. drive mode.
Selecting hill descent control in the

• Use the Eco Coast freewheel function in Eco
drive mode - engine braking ceases, mean-
centre display function view ing that the car's kinetic energy is used to
Hill descent control only works at low speeds. freewheel for longer distances.
– Press the Hill Descent Control button to
• Drive in the highest gear10 possible, adapted
activate or deactivate the function. to the current traffic situation and road -
lower engine speeds result in lower fuel con-
sumption. Use the gear shift indicator.
• Drive at a steady speed and keep a good dis-
tance to other vehicles and objects to mini-
mise braking.
• High speed results in increased fuel con-
> An indicator in the button illuminates sumption - the wind resistance increases
when the function is activated. with speed.
This function is disabled automatically when the • Drive with the correct air pressure in the
engine is switched off. tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results.
NOTE • Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption -
The function is deactivated when driving at seek advice on suitable tyres from a retailer.
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a • Remove unnecessary items from the car -
lower speed, if required. the greater the load the higher the consump-
tion.
10 Applies to driving with manual gear changing. }}
|| • Use engine braking to slow down, when it Preparations for a long trip • Recommendations for loading (p. 579)
can take place without risk to other road Before a driving holiday or some other type of • Driving with a trailer (p. 476)
users. long journey, it is important to check the car's
• A roof load and space box increase wind functions and equipment particularly carefully.
resistance, leading to higher consumption - Check that: • Speed Limiter (p. 286)
remove the load carriers when not in use.
• the engine is working normally and that fuel • Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 565)
• Avoid driving with open windows. consumption is normal
• there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid)
WARNING
• brake force during braking is optimal
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important • all lamps are working - adjust headlamp level
systems such as the power steering and if the car is heavily laden
brake servo. • the tyres have sufficient tread depth and
pressure. Change to winter tyres when driv-
Related information ing to areas where there is a risk of snowy or
• Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 28) icy road surfaces.
• Drive mode ECO (p. 442) • starter battery charging is good
• Checking tyre pressure (p. 550) • the wiper blades are in good condition
• a warning triangle and high-visibility vest are
located in the car - legally required in certain
countries.
Related information
• Checking tyre pressure (p. 550)
(p. 661)
• Winter driving (p. 457)
• Settings for car modem (p. 529)
456
Winter driving Slippery driving conditions Driving in water

For winter driving it is important to perform cer- To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recom- Driving in water means that the car is driven in a
tain checks of the car in order to ensure that it mends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is deeper amount of water on a road that is under
can be driven safely. a risk of snow or ice. water. Driving in water must be performed with
great caution.
Check the following in particular before the cold The car can be driven through water to a maxi-
NOTE
season: mum depth of 40 cm (15.7 inches) at no more
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement
• The engine coolant must contain 50% glycol. in certain countries. Studded tyres are not
than walking speed. Extra caution should be
This mixture protects the engine against exercised when passing through flowing water.
permitted in all countries.
frost down to approx. -35°C (-31°F). To avoid During driving in water, maintain a low speed and
health risks, different types of glycol must not do not stop the car. When the water has been
be mixed. Practise driving on slippery surfaces under con-
trolled conditions to learn how the car reacts. passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and
• The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent check that full brake function is achieved. Water
condensation. Related information and mud for example can make the brake linings
• Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with • Winter wheels (p. 563) wet resulting in delayed brake function.
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting • Snow chains (p. 564) • If necessary, clean the contacts for the elec-
in cold weather and also reduce fuel con- tric heater and trailer coupling after driving in
sumption while the engine is cold. • Braking on gritted roads (p. 425)
water and mud.
• Braking on wet roads (p. 425)
• Do not let the car stand with water over the
IMPORTANT • Filling washer fluid (p. 642) sills for any long period of time - this could
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard • Starter battery (p. 609) cause electrical malfunctions.
driving or in hot weather. • Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 640)
• The condition of the starter battery and (p. 639)
charge level must be inspected. Cold
• Topping up coolant (p. 602)
weather places great demands on the starter
battery and its capacity is reduced by the • Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
cold. (p. 657)
• Use washer fluid with antifreeze to avoid ice

forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
}}
457
|| IMPORTANT Opening and closing the fuel filler Filling fuel

flap The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler
• Engine damage can occur if water enters
The car must be unlocked for the fuel filler flap system.
the air filter.
to be opened11.
• If water enters the transmission, it In the driver display, the arrow Refuelling the car at a petrol station
reduces the lubricating ability of the oil, next to the tank symbol indi-
which shortens the service life of related cates which side of the car the
systems. fuel filler flap is located.
• Damage to any component, engine,
transmission, turbocharger, differential or
its internal components caused by flood-
ing, hydrostatic locking or oil shortage, is 1. Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press
not covered by the warranty. on the rear of the flap.
• In the event of the engine stalling in 2. After refuelling is finished - close the flap
water, do not try restart - tow the car from with a gentle press.
the water to a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of
Related information
engine breakdown. • Filling fuel (p. 458)
Fuel filling is performed in the following way.
• Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 465)
1. Switch off the car and open the fuel filler
Related information flap.
2. Choose fuel that is approved for use in the
• Low speed control* (p. 452) car. See information on approved fuels in the
sections on "Petrol" and "Diesel" respec-
tively.
3. Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler open-
ing. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The
pump nozzle must be pushed past both caps
before refuelling is started.
11 Only locking and unlocking with the remote control key, keyless or via Volvo On Call affects the status of the fuel filler flap.
4. Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump Handling of fuel
nozzle cuts out the first time. Do not use fuel with a lower quality than that rec-
> The tank is full. ommended by Volvo, as this will negatively affect
engine power and fuel consumption.
NOTE
WARNING
Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather. Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting
fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of
Topping up fuel from a fuel can water for at least 15 minutes and seek medi-
When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel cal attention.
located in the foam block under the floor hatch in Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
the cargo area. Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioe-
Related information thanol and mixtures of them and diesel are
1. Open the fuel filler flap. • Opening and closing the fuel filler flap highly toxic and could cause permanent injury
(p. 458) or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical atten-
2. Insert the funnel in the fuel filler opening. tion immediately if fuel has been swallowed.
The filler pipe has two opening caps. The • Petrol (p. 460)
funnel's pipe must be pushed past both caps
before filling can be started.
• Diesel (p. 461)
WARNING
• Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 462)
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be igni-
Applies to cars with fuel-driven heater* ted.
Never use the fuel-driven heater when the car is
in a filling station area. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-
ting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone when
refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark
build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to
fire and injury.
}}
|| IMPORTANT Petrol IMPORTANT

Petrol is a type of engine fuel that is intended for
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels
cars with a petrol engine. • Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damag-
which are not recommended will invalidate ing the catalytic converter.
Only use petrol from well-known producers.
Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary • Fuel containing metallic additives must
Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must
service agreements; this is applicable to all not be used.
fulfil the EN 228 standard.
engines.
• Do not use any additives which have not
IMPORTANT been recommended by Volvo.
Related information
• Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by
• Petrol (p. 460)
volume ethanol is permitted. Related information
• Diesel (p. 461)
• EN 228 E10 petrol (max 10 percent by • Handling of fuel (p. 459)
• Handling AdBlue® (p. 464) volume ethanol) is approved for use. • Filling fuel (p. 458)
• Ethanol higher than E10 • Petrol particle filter (p. 461)
(max. 10 percent by volume ethanol) is
not permitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted.
(p. 661)
Octane rating
• 95 RON can be used for normal driving.
• 98 RON is recommended for optimum per-
formance and minimum fuel consumption.
• An octane rating lower than RON 95 must
not be used.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C (100
°F), fuel with the highest octane rating is recom-
mended for optimum performance and fuel econ-
omy.
460
Petrol particle filter larly drive at higher speeds to allow the petrol Diesel
Petrol cars are fitted with particle filters for more emission control system to regenerate. Diesel is a type of engine fuel that is intended for
efficient emission control. • The car should be driven on A-roads at cars with a diesel engine.
speeds in excess of 60 km/h (38 mph) for at Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers.
Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel fuel
least 20 minutes between each refuelling.
the petrol particle filter during normal driving. In must fulfil the EN 590 or SS 155435 standard.
normal driving conditions, passive regeneration Related information Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in
takes place, which leads to the particles being • Petrol (p. 460) the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sul-
oxidised and burned away. The filter is emptied in phur and metals.
this way.
At low temperatures (lower than 0 °C (32 °F)) a
If the car is driven at low speed or with repeated
paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel,
cold starts in low outside temperature, active
which may lead to starting problems. The fuel
regeneration may be necessary. Regeneration of
qualities that are sold must be adapted for sea-
the particulate filter is automatic and normally
son and climate zone, but for extreme weather
takes 10-20 minutes. There may be a smell of
conditions, old fuel or moving between climate
burning during regeneration.
zones, paraffin precipitate may occur.
Use the parking heater in cold weather - the
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
engine then reaches normal operating tempera-
reduced if the tank is kept well filled.
ture more quickly.
When refuelling, check that the area around the
When driving short distances at low fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
speeds in a petrol car paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent
The capacity of the petrol emission control sys- and water.
tem is affected by how the car is driven. It is
important to drive varying distances at different
speeds to achieve optimal performance.
Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold
climates) frequently, where the engine does not
reach normal operating temperature, can lead to
problems that can eventually cause a malfunction
and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is
mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regu-
}}
461
|| IMPORTANT • Diesel particulate filter (p. 463) Empty tank and diesel engine
Diesel fuel must: • Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 464) Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starva-
tion, the fuel system needs a few moments to
• fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435
(p. 661) carry out a check.
standards
Before starting the car after the fuel tank has
• have a sulphur content not exceeding been filled with diesel - proceed as follows:
10 mg/kg
1. The remote control key must be inside the
• have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME12
car.
(B7).
2. Put the car in the ignition position II - turn
the start knob clockwise without pressing the
IMPORTANT brake pedal or clutch pedal for cars with
Diesel type fuels that must not be used: manual gearbox, and hold the start knob for
approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob,
• Special additives which automatically returns to its starting
• Marine diesel fuel position.
• Heating oil 3. Wait approx. one minute.
• FAME13 and vegetable oil. 4. Start the engine.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations and NOTE
generate increased wear and engine damage
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
shortage:
Related information • Stop the car on as flat/level ground as

possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk
• Handling of fuel (p. 459)
of air pockets in the fuel supply.
• Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 462)
12 Fatty Acid Methyl Ester

13 Diesel fuel with maximum 7 vol % FAME (B7) is permitted.
462
Points to remember when filling with a Diesel particulate filter When driving short distances at low
fuel can Diesel cars are fitted with particle filters for more speeds in a diesel car
When filling diesel with a fuel can, use the funnel efficient emission control. The capacity of the diesel emission control sys-
located under the floor hatch in the cargo area. Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in tem is affected by how the car is driven. It is
Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly into the diesel particle filter during normal driving. important to drive varying distances at different
the filler pipe. The filler pipe has two opening When these conditions have been met, regenera- speeds to achieve optimal performance.
caps. The funnel's pipe must be pushed past tion starts to burn off the particles and empty the Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold
both caps before filling can be started. filter. To start regeneration, the engine must have climates) frequently, where the engine does not
reached normal operating temperature. Regener- reach normal operating temperature, can lead to
Related information ation of the particulate filter is automatic and nor- problems that can eventually cause a malfunction
• Filling fuel (p. 458) mally takes 10-20 minutes. and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is
• Diesel (p. 461) mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regu-
• Tool kit (p. 557) NOTE larly drive at higher speeds to allow the diesel
The following may arise during regeneration: emission control system to regenerate.
• a smaller reduction of engine power may • The car should be driven on A-roads at
be noticed temporarily speeds in excess of 60 km/h (38 mph) for at
least 20 minutes between each refuelling.
• fuel consumption may increase temporar-
ily Related information
• a smell of burning may arise. • Diesel (p. 461)
• Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 464)
Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the • Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
engine then reaches normal operating tempera- (p. 661)
ture more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles, it
may be difficult to start the engine and the fil-
ter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that
the filter will need to be replaced.
Emission control with AdBlue®14 If something is wrong, a message is shown in the Handling AdBlue®
driver display. AdBlue consists primarily of water (approx.
AdBlue is an additive used in the SCR15
system
to reduce emissions of noxious substances from 67.5% water and 32.5% urea). The fluid is not
a diesel engine. IMPORTANT flammable but should be handled with care
In the SCR system, the AdBlue and the nitrous AdBlue is required for the function of the since it can irritate the eyes and skin.
oxide exhaust gas substance are converted to SCR system and legal emissions compliance.
nitrogen and water vapour, which significantly
Points to remember when handling
It is illegal to modify or manipulate the AdBlue Avoid inhaling vapour as well as contact with skin
reduces the emissions of harmful nitrous oxides. supply system in any way so that no AdBlue and eyes. Preferably use gloves that prevent irri-
reagent is consumed when it is required for tation to sensitive skin when handling the fluid.
AdBlue legal exhaust emissions compliance. Any
AdBlue is a colourless fluid that consists of
such tampering may be a criminal offence WARNING
32.5% urea16 in deionised water and is produced which may lead to legal prosecution actions.
in accordance with the ISO 22241 standard. It is Action for first aid:
specially developed for SCR cleaning technology It is not permitted to operate the car with an
empty AdBlue tank, since it will no longer be
• For inhalation - get fresh air.
for diesel engines.
compliant with the legal requirements for • For skin contact - wash the skin with
AdBlue has its own tank in the car and is topped exhaust emissions. Therefore, the car is soap and water.
up via a separate filler pipe behind the fuel filler
flap. Consumption depends on driving style, out-
equipped with a warning system to inform • For contact with the eyes - rinse immedi-
when AdBlue refilling is required. When the ately with a lot of water.
side temperature and the operating temperature fill level in the AdBlue tank is getting low,
of the system. warnings are displayed to inform that AdBlue
• For ingestion - rinse the mouth thor-
oughly. Do not induce vomiting.
Conditions for driving with AdBlue refilling is needed.
Seek medical attention if the discomfort
There must always be AdBlue of the correct remains or if a large quantity has been inges-
quality in the tank before the car can be started. Related information ted.
The SCR system is very sensitive to contami- • Handling AdBlue® (p. 464)
nants.
• Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 465) Action in the event of a spill
The emission control system continuously moni- AdBlue spilled on the ground, the car or painted
• Symbols and messages for AdBlue®
tors the tank level, quality and dosage of AdBlue. (p. 467) surfaces must be rinsed thoroughly with water.
Avoid releasing into the drainage system.
14 Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA)

15 Selective Catalytic Reduction
16 CO(NH2)2
464
Storage Checking and filling with AdBlue® Checking AdBlue level

AdBlue must be stored in tightly sealed original Check the AdBlue level regularly and top up if 1.
packaging at a temperature above -11 °C (12 °F) the message for low AdBlue level is shown in
and below 30 °C (86 °F). The fluid must not be the driver display.
stored in direct sunlight. The Volvo workshop tops up AdBlue when the
AdBlue freezes at -11 °C (12 °F) but can be car is serviced, however, it must also be topped
used again when the solution has thawed. up several times between services depending on
driving style. If the AdBlue tank is allowed to
Related information drain completely then it will no longer be possible
• Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 465) to start the car. Open the Car status app in the app view.
• Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 464)
NOTE
Never run the AdBlue tank dry. Fill the tank in
good time before it is empty.
If the tank is run dry, it will not be possible to
start the engine after it is switched off – not
the regular way or using aids.
The only way to restart the car after the tank
has been run dry is to refill with AdBlue of the
specified quality, minimum 3 litres.
}}
465
|| 2. Filling 3. Fill with AdBlue of the correct quality17.

When the AdBlue level starts to
Do not overfill the tank.
become low, a symbol illuminates in
the driver display and the AdBlue
level low message is shown. WARNING
When filling from the AdBlue pump at a filling
1. Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press
station, it is advisable to use the pump adap-
on the rear of the flap. ted for passenger cars. The AdBlue pump for
Press Status to show the AdBlue level. 2. heavy vehicles can also be used.
IMPORTANT
Exercise caution to prevent AdBlue from
coming into contact with the car's paintwork.
If it does, rinse with plenty of water since the
fluid can affect the paintwork.
Related information
Open the blue cover for the smaller filler pipe • Handling AdBlue® (p. 464)
intended for AdBlue. • Symbols and messages for AdBlue®
Graphic for AdBlue level in the centre display. (p. 467)
• Tank capacity for AdBlue® (p. 659)
Each cursor represents approx. 25% of a full
tank.
When less than 25 % of the tank remains
available, the colour of the remaining cursor
changes to amber, and at less than 10 % it
turns red.
17 ISO 22241
466
Symbols and messages for

AdBlue®
The emission control system continuously moni-
tors the level, quality and dosage of AdBlue. If
something is wrong, a message is shown in the
driver display.

AdBlue level low The AdBlue level is low and the tank needs to be topped up.
AdBlue dosing The system does not function as it should. Contact a workshopA to check the function.
and
AdBlue quality
}}
467
|| Symbol Message Specification

Refill AdBlue The AdBlue level is critically low and the tank needs to be topped up immediately.
Engine start prohibit. The car cannot be started before AdBlue has been filled. Fill with AdBlue to the amount specified in
and e.g.: Fill a minimum of 4 the driver display, or contact a workshopA.
litres of AdBlue Note that:
• The car must be level for the level gauge to be able to correctly register the amount of AdBlue
filled.
• It can take up to 20 seconds after filling before the system has been updated with the correct
level indication.
Engine start prohibited The system does not function as it should. Contact a workshopA to check the function.
Service of AdBlue system
needed to allow restart
Related information
• Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 465)
• Handling AdBlue® (p. 464)
• Book service and repair (p. 592)
468
Overheating in the engine and drive Transmission warm Reduce speed to Symbols in the driver display
system lower temperature or Transmission hot Symbol Specification
Under special conditions, for example hard driv- Stop safely, wait for cooling. Follow the
ing in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk recommendation given, reduce speed or stop High engine temperature. Follow
that the engine and drive system may overheat - the car in a safe way and allow the engine to the recommendation given.
in particular with a heavy load. run at idling speed for several minutes to
enable the gearbox to cool down.
• In the event of overheating, the engine's
• If the car overheats, the air conditioning may Low level, coolant. Follow the rec-
power may be limited temporarily. be switched off temporarily. ommendation given.
• Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of
• Do not turn the engine off immediately you
the grille when driving in hot climates. stop after a hard drive.
Gearbox hot/overheated/cooled.
• If the temperature in the engine's cooling
Follow the recommendation given.
system becomes too high then a warning NOTE
symbol is illuminated and the driver display
shows the message Engine temperature It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
High temperature Stop safely. Stop the operate for a time after the engine has been Related information
switched off.
car in a safe way and allow the engine to run • Topping up coolant (p. 602)
at idling speed for several minutes and cool
• Driving with a trailer (p. 476)
down.
• Preparations for a long trip (p. 456)
• If the message Engine temperature High
temperature Turn off engine or Engine • Gear shift indicator* (p. 437)
coolant Level low, turn off engine is
shown, stop the car and switch off the
engine.
• In the event of overheating in the gearbox, an
alternative gear shift program will be
selected18. In addition, a built-in protection
function is activated that, amongst other
things, illuminates a warning symbol and the
driver display shows the message
18 Applies to automatic gearbox.
Overloading the starter battery Using jump starting with another 4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps
The electrical functions in the car load the starter battery to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the igni- If the starter battery is discharged then the car
tion position II when the car is switched off. can be started with current from another battery. IMPORTANT
Instead, use ignition position I - which uses less Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
power. short circuits with other components in the
Also, be aware of different accessories that load engine compartment.
the electrical system. Do not use functions which
use a lot of power when the car is switched off. 5. Open the positive jump-starting point's cover
Examples of such functions are: (2).
• ventilation fan 6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
• headlamps onto the car's positive jump-starting point
(2).
• windscreen wiper
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps
• audio system (high volume).
to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
If the starter battery voltage is low, a message is
Attachment points for the jump leads. 8. Connect the black jump lead's other clamp
shown in the driver display. The energy-saving
function then shuts down certain functions or When jump starting the car, the following steps onto the car's negative jump-starting point
reduces certain functions such as the ventilation are recommended to avoid short circuits or other (4).
fan and/or audio system. damage: 9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed
– In which case, charge the starter battery by 1. Set the car's electrical system in ignition securely so that there are no sparks during
starting the car and then running it for at position 0. the starting attempt.
least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is 2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow
more effective during driving than running 12 V. it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly
the engine at idling speed while stationary. higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another car
Related information - switch off the donor car's engine and make
• Starter battery (p. 609) sure that the two cars do not touch each
• Ignition positions (p. 420) other.
470
11. Start the engine in the car with the dis- WARNING Towbar*
charged battery. The car can be equipped with a towbar that
• The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
makes it possible to tow e.g. a trailer behind the
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
IMPORTANT car.
be formed if a jump lead is connected
Do not touch the connections between cable incorrectly, and this can be enough for There may be different towbar variants available
and car during the starting attempt. There is a the battery to explode. for the car. Contact a Volvo dealer for more infor-
risk of sparks forming.
• Do not connect the jump leads to any mation.
fuel system component or any moving
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order - part. Be careful of hot engine parts. IMPORTANT
first the black and then the red.
• The battery contains sulphuric acid, which When the engine is switched off, the constant
Make sure that none of the black jump lead's can cause serious burns. battery voltage to the trailer connector can be
clamps comes into contact with the car's • If sulphuric acid comes into contact with switched off automatically so as not to drain
positive jump-starting point/donor battery's eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large the starter battery.
positive terminal or the clamp connected to quantities of water. If acid splashes into
the red jump lead. the eyes - seek medical attention imme-
diately. IMPORTANT
• Never smoke near the battery. The towball needs regular cleaning and lubri-
cation with grease in order to prevent wear.
Related information
• Starting the car (p. 418) NOTE
• Ignition positions (p. 420) When a hitch with a vibration damper is used,
• Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 191) the towball must not be lubricated.
• Selecting ignition mode (p. 421) This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack
that is clamped in around the towball.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a towbar, there is
no rear mounting for a towing eye.
}}
|| Related information Specifications for towbar* Dimensions, mounting points in mm (inches)

• Extendable and retractable towbar* (p. 473) Dimensions and mounting points for towbar.
A 1041,3 (41)
• Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* (p. 479) B 90 (3,5)
• Specifications for towbar* (p. 472) C 875 (34,4)
D 437,5 (17,2)
E See the image above
F 283,5 (11,1)
G Ball centre
Related information
• Towbar* (p. 471)
• Towing capacity and towball load (p. 652)
Extendable and retractable towbar* 1. 2.

The extendable/retractable towbar is always
easily accessible and simple to extend or retract
as needed. In the retracted position, the towbar
is completely concealed.
WARNING
Follow the instructions for retracting and
extending the towbar carefully.
Extending the towbar Open the tailgate. A button for extending/ Press and release the button - extension
retracting the towbar is located on the right- might not start if the button is pressed for too
WARNING hand side at the rear of the cargo area. An long.
Avoid standing close to the bumper in the indicator lamp in the button must illuminate > The towbar extends out and down in an
centre behind the car when extending the with a constant orange glow for the exten- unlocked position - the indicator lamp
towing hitch. sion function to be active. flashes orange.
WARNING
Do not press the extend/retract button if a
trailer is attached to the towbar.
NOTE
The towbar must finish the extension proce-
dure before it can then be moved to locked
position. This procedure may take several
seconds. If the towbar is not fixed in locked
position, wait a few seconds and try again.
}}
|| 3. Retracting the towbar 2.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that there is no plug or adapter in
the electrical socket when retracting the tow-
bar.
1.
Move the towbar to its end position, where it Lock the towbar by moving it back to its
is secured and locked in place - the indicator retracted position, where it is locked.
lamp illuminates with a constant orange glow. > The indicator lamp will now illuminate with
> The towbar is ready for use. a constant glow if the towbar is correctly
retracted.
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable
in the intended bracket. Open the tailgate. Press and release the but-
ton on the right-hand side at the rear of the
NOTE cargo area - retraction might not start if the
button is pressed for too long.
Power save mode activates after a while and
> The towbar automatically lowers in an
the indicator lamp goes out. The system is
unlocked position - the indicator lamp in
reactivated by closing and opening the tail-
the button flashes orange.
gate. This applies when retracting or extend-
ing the towbar. Related information
If the car detects a connected trailer electri- • Driving with a trailer (p. 476)
cally, the indicator lamp stops illuminating • Towbar* (p. 471)
with a constant glow.
Removable towbar* Install the ball holder Store the ball holder
Volvo recommends use of Volvo's towbars, 1. If necessary, remove the split pin from the
which are specifically designed for the car. locking bolt and slide the lock bolt out of the WARNING
towbar unit.
When not in use, the detachable ball holder
NOTE 2. Slide the ball holder into the towbar unit. must always be stored in the designated area
The detachable towbar may not be available under the cargo area floor.
3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the hole
in all markets or for all car models. Contact in the towbar unit.
your Volvo dealer. Related information
4. Slide in the locking bolt through the towbar
unit and the ball holder.
5. Insert the split pin in the hole in the end of
the locking bolt.
WARNING
• Check that the towbar is firmly locked in
position before you connect anything to it.
• Always attach the trailer's safety cable in
the bracket for the safety cable on the
towbar.
Ball holder Remove the ball holder

1. Remove the split pin from the locking bolt
Split pin and slide the lock bolt out of the ball holder/
towbar unit.
Towbar unit
2. Pull out the ball holder from the towbar unit.
Locking bolt
Bracket for safety cable
Driving with a trailer • Follow the regulations in force for the permit- IMPORTANT
When driving with a trailer, there are a number of ted speeds and weights.
When the engine is switched off, the constant
points that are important to think about regar- • Maintain a low speed when driving with a
battery voltage to the trailer connector can be
ding the towbar, the trailer and how the load is trailer up long, steep ascents.
switched off automatically so as not to drain
positioned in the trailer.
• The maximum indicated trailer weight only the starter battery.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The applies to heights up to 1000 metres above
total of the weight of the passengers and all sea level (3280 ft). At higher elevations, the
engine output and the vehicle's climbing abil- Trailer weights
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's pay-
load by a corresponding weight. ity are reduced due to the reduced air den-
sity, and the maximum trailer load must WARNING
The car is supplied with the necessary equipment therefore be reduced. The weight of the car Follow the stated recommendations for trailer
for towing a trailer. and trailer must be decreased by 10% for weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be
• The car's towbar must be of an approved each additional 1000 m (3280 ft) (or part difficult to control in the event of sudden
type. thereof). movement and braking.
• Distribute the load on the trailer so that the • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more
weight on the towbar complies with the than 12%. NOTE
specified maximum towball load. Towball load The stated maximum permitted trailer weights
NOTE
is calculated as part of the car's payload. are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
• Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina-
regulations can further limit trailer weights
mended pressure for a full load. and speeds. Towbars can be certified for
tion with fuel quality are factors that consider-
• The engine is loaded more heavily than usual higher towing weights than the car can
ably increase the car's fuel consumption.
when driving with a trailer. actually tow.
• Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is Trailer connector
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at Level control*
An adapter is required if the car's towbar has a
least 1000 km (620 miles). The car's system for level control endeavours to
13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin con-
maintain a constant height regardless of load (up
• The brakes are loaded much more than usual nector. Use an adapter approved by Volvo. Make
on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to the maximum permissible weight). When the
sure the cable does not drag on the ground.
to a lower gear when shifting manually and car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
adjust your speed. which is normal.
When driving in hilly terrain and hot Related information Trailer stability assist*
climates • Trailer stability assist* (p. 477) The function of trailer stability assist (TSA19) is
Under certain circumstances, there may be a risk • Checking trailer lamps (p. 478) to stabilise cars towing trailers in situations
of overheating when towing a trailer. If the engine where they begin snaking. The function is
and drive system overheats, a warning symbol • Towing capacity and towball load (p. 652)
included in the stability system ESC20.
comes on in the driver display together with a • Overheating in the engine and drive system
message. (p. 469) Reasons for snaking
The following only applies to cars with automatic • Adverse driving conditions for engine oil The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
gearbox. (p. 657) car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs
at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring
The automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the
related to load and engine speed. load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
Steep inclines In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
Do not lock the automatic gearbox in a higher triggering factor, e.g.:
gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not
always a good idea to drive at a high gear with • Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
low engine speed.
Parking on a hill
• Car with trailer drives on an uneven road sur-
face or in a pothole.
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
• Sweeping steering wheel movements.
2. Activate the parking brake.
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even
3. Select gear position P. impossible to suppress. This makes the car/
4. Release the brake pedal. trailer combination difficult to control and there is
a risk that you could, for example, end up in the
Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill Trailer stability assist function
1. Depress the brake pedal fully. The trailer stability assist function continually
monitors the car's movements, particularly lateral
2. Select gear position D. movements. If snaking is detected, the front
3. Releasing the parking brake. wheels are individually braked. This serves to sta-
bilise the car/trailer combination. This is often
4. Release the brake pedal and start driving off.
}}
|| enough to help the driver regain control of the Related information Checking trailer lamps
car. • Driving with a trailer (p. 476) When connecting a trailer - check that all the
If snaking is not eliminated the first time that • Electronic stability control (p. 282) trailer lamps work before departure.
trailer stability assist intervenes, the car/trailer
combination is braked with all wheels and engine
Direction indicators and brake lights on
power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradu- the trailer
ally suppressed and the car/trailer combination is If one or more of the trailer's direction indicators
stable once again, the system stops regulating or brake light bulbs is broken, the driver display
and the driver once again has full control of the shows a symbol and a message. Other lights on
car. the trailer must be checked manually by the
driver before setting off.
NOTE
Symbol Message
The stability function is deactivated if the
driver selects Sport mode by deactivating • Trailer turn indicator Right
ESC via the menu system in the centre dis- turn indicator malfunction
play.
• Trailer turn indicator Left
turn indicator malfunction
Trailer stability assist may fail to intervene if the
driver uses severe steering wheel movements to • Trailer brake light Malfunc-
try to rectify the snaking because in such a situation
tion the system cannot determine whether it is
the trailer or the driver causing the snaking.
When trailer stability assist is If any lamp for the trailer's direction indicators is
operating, the ESC symbol broken, the driver display symbol for direction
flashes in the driver display. indicators will also flash more quickly than nor-
mal.

478
Rear fog lamp on trailer 5. After a moment, all lamps on the trailer flash Towbar-mounted bicycle rack*
When connecting the trailer, the rear fog lamp again. When using a bicycle rack, the bicycle racks that
may not light up on the car. In such cases, the > The check is complete. Volvo has developed are recommended.
rear fog lamp function switches to the trailer.
Switching off automatic checking This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in
Upon activation of the rear fog lamp, check
The automatic checking function can be switched order to achieve the maximum possible safety
therefore that the trailer is equipped with a rear
off in the centre display. during a journey. Volvo's bicycle racks are availa-
fog lamp to travel safely.
1. Press Settings in the top view. ble for purchase at authorised Volvo dealers.
Checking trailer lamps*
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting. Carefully follow the instructions enclosed with the
Automatic checking bicycle rack.
After a trailer is connected electrically, it is possi- 3. Deselect Automatic Trailer Lamp Check.
ble to check that the trailer lamps are working via • Bicycle rack including load must weigh a
Manual checking maximum of 75 kg (165 pounds).
an automatic lamp activation. The function helps If the automatic checking is switched off then it is
the driver check that the trailer lamps are working possible to start the check manually. • The bicycle rack may be designed for a maxi-
before starting off. mum of three bicycles.
The engine must be switched off to perform the
check. 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting. WARNING
3. Select Manual Trailer Lamp Check. Incorrect use of the bicycle rack may cause
1. When a trailer is connected to the towbar,
damage to the towbar and car.
the Automatic Trailer Lamp Check mes- > The lamp check starts. Exit the car to
sage is shown in the driver display. check lamp functionality. The bicycle rack can loosen from the towbar if
it:
2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-
Related information • is incorrectly fitted on the towball
hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
• is overloaded, see the bicycle rack's
> The lamp check starts.
instructions for maximum load weight
3. Exit the car to check lamp functionality.
• is used for carrying something other than
> All trailer lamps start to flash - then the bicycles.
lamps are switched on one at a time.
4. Visually check that all lamps available on the
trailer are operational.
}}
|| The car's driving characteristics are affected ity and increase fuel consumption. It may also Towing
when a bicycle rack is fitted on the towbar. For lead to an increased load on the towbar. During towing, the car is towed by another vehi-
example, due to: cle by means of a towline.
Related information
• increased weight
• Towbar* (p. 471) Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for
• reduced acceleration capacity towing before the towing begins.
• reduced ground clearance
Preparations and towing
• changed braking capacity.
Recommendations for loading bicycles IMPORTANT

on the bicycle rack Note that the car must always be towed with
The larger the distance between the load's cen- the wheels rolling forward.
tre of gravity and the towball, the greater the load
on the towbar. • Do not tow cars with automatic transmis-
sion at speeds higher than 80 km/h
Load according to the following recommenda- (50 mph) or for distances in excess of 80
tions: km (50 miles).
• Fit the heaviest bicycle furthest in, closest to
the car.
WARNING
• Keep the load symmetrical and as close to
• Check that the steering lock is unlocked
the centre of the car as possible, e.g. by
before towing.
loading the bicycles facing alternately if sev-
eral bicycles are loaded. • Ignition position II must be active - in
ignition position I all airbags are deacti-
• Remove loose objects from the bicycle for
vated.
transportation, e.g. bicycle basket, battery,
child seat. Partly to reduce the load on the • Always keep the remote control key in the
towbar and bicycle rack, and partly to reduce car when it is being towed.
the wind resistance, which affects fuel con-
sumption.
• Do not use protective covers on the bicycles.
This may affect manoeuvrability, impair visibil-
WARNING Jump starting Fitting and removing the towing eye

Do not tow the car to jump start the engine. Use Use the towing eye for towing. The towing eye is
The brake servo and power steering do not a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged
work when the engine is switched off - the screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover
brake pedal needs to be depressed and the engine does not start. on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or
about 5 times more heavily and the steering is rear.
considerably heavier than normal. IMPORTANT
The catalytic converter may be damaged dur-
NOTE
1. Activate the car's hazard warning flashers. ing attempts to tow-start the engine. If the car is equipped with a towbar, there is
2. Secure the towline in the towing eye. no rear mounting for a towing eye.
3. Deactivate the steering lock by unlocking the Related information

car. • Fitting and removing the towing eye (p. 481) Fitting the towing eye
4. Put the car in the ignition position II - turn • Hazard warning flashers (p. 154)
the start knob clockwise without pressing the • Recovery (p. 483)
brake pedal or clutch pedal for cars with • Using jump starting with another battery
manual gearbox, and hold the start knob for (p. 470)
approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob,
which automatically returns to its starting • Selecting ignition mode (p. 421)
position.
5. Move the gear selector to neutral position N
and release the parking brake.
Take out the towing eye from the foam block
If the battery voltage is too low, the parking under the floor in the cargo area.
brake cannot be disengaged. Connect a
donor battery if the battery voltage is too low.
> The towing vehicle can now start towing.
6. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehi-
cle reduces speed by holding your foot gen-
tly pressed on the brake pedal - thereby
avoiding unnecessary jerking.
7. Be prepared to brake to stop.
}}
481
|| 4. Screw the towing eye right in until it stops.

Screw the eye in firmly. For example, thread
through the wheel bolt wrench* and use it as
a lever.
Front: Remove the cover - press on the Rear: Remove the cover - press on the mark-
marking with a finger. ing with a finger and, at the same time, fold
> The cover pivots around its centre line and out the opposite side/corner using a coin or IMPORTANT
can then be removed. similar.
It is important that the towing eye is firmly
> The cover pivots around its centre line and
screwed into place - right in until it stops.
can then be removed.
Removing the towing eye:

– After use, unscrew the towing eye and return
it to its place.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.
The towing eye may be used to pull the car up Recovery IMPORTANT
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. For recovery, the car is taken away with the help
The car's position and ground clearance deter- The towing eye is only designed for towing on
of another vehicle.
mine whether it is possible. roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery
If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too The towing eye can be used to pull the car up assistance.
steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you
try to pull it up using the towing eye. Applies to cars with level control*: If the car is IMPORTANT
equipped with air suspension, this must be disa-
If necessary, raise the car by using the recovery bled before the car is raised. Deactivating the Note that the car must always be transported
vehicle's lifting device. Do not use the towing eye. function via the centre display. with the wheels rolling forward.

WARNING Related information
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind 2. Press My Car Parking Brake and • Fitting and removing the towing eye (p. 481)
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up Suspension.
onto the flatbed platform.
3. Select Disable Leveling Control.
The car's position and ground clearance deter-
IMPORTANT mine whether it is possible to pull it up onto a
The towing eye is only designed for towing on flatbed platform. If the slope of the recovery vehi-
roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out cle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance
of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery under the car is inadequate, then the car may be
assistance. damaged if you try to pull it up. The car should
then be lifted using the recovery vehicle's lifting
device.
Related information
• Towing (p. 480)
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind
• Tool kit (p. 557) the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up
onto the flatbed platform.
HomeLink®*21 HomeLink® is supplied built-in to the interior Programming HomeLink®*24

HomeLink®22 is a programmable remote control, rearview mirror. The HomeLink® panel consists of Follow these instructions to program
integrated in the car's electrical system, which three programmable buttons and one indicator HomeLink®, reset all programming or reprogram
can remotely control up to three different devi- lamp in the mirror glass. individual buttons.
ces (e.g. garage door opener, alarm system, out- For more information about HomeLink®, visit NOTE
door and indoor lighting, etc.) and thereby www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/
replace the remote controls for them. In certain vehicles the ignition must be
HomeLinkGentex or call the toll-free number
switched on or in "accessory position" before
00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number
General HomeLink® can be programmed or used. If
+49 6838 907 277)23.
possible, fit new batteries in the remote con-
Save the original remote controls for future pro- trol that shall be replaced by HomeLink® for
gramming (e.g. when changing to another car or faster programming and improved transmis-
for use in another vehicle). It is also recom- sion of the radio signal. The HomeLink® but-
mended that the programming for the buttons is tons should be reset before programming.
deleted when the car is sold.

• Using HomeLink (p. 486)
While programming HomeLink®, the garage
• Programming HomeLink®* (p. 484) door or gate being programmed may activate.
• Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 487) For this reason, make sure that nobody is in
the vicinity of the door or gate while program-
The figure is schematic - the version may vary. ming is in progress. The car should be outside
the garage while a garage door opener is
Button 1 being programmed.
Button 2
Button 3
Indicator lamp

22 HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.
23 Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator.
1. Aim the remote control towards the 3. Do not release the buttons until the indicator
HomeLink® button to be programmed and lamp has switched from flashing slowly
hold it approx. 2-8 cm (approx. 1-3 inches) (approx. once per second) to either flashing
from the button. Do not obstruct the indicator quickly (approx. 10 times per second) or illu-
lamp on HomeLink®. minating with a constant glow.
> If it illuminates with a constant glow:
Note: The ability of some remote controls to
Indication that the programming has fin-
program HomeLink® is improved at a dis-
ished. Press the programmed button
tance of approx. 15-20 cm (approx. 6-12
twice to activate.
inches). Bear this in mind if you encounter
problems during programming. If it flashes quickly: The device to be 4. Locate programming button25 on the
programmed to HomeLink® may have a receiver for the garage door or similar. It is
2. Press and hold depressed both the button
security function that requires extra steps. normally located close to the antenna's
on the remote control and the button to be
Test by pressing the programmed button bracket on the receiver.
reprogrammed on HomeLink®.
twice to see whether the programming is
5. Depress and release the receiver's program-
working. Otherwise, continue with the fol-
ming button once. The programming must be
lowing steps.
completed within 30 seconds of the button
being depressed.
6. Press and release the button on HomeLink®
that you want to program. Repeat the
sequence of pressing/holding/releasing a
second time and, depending on the receiver
model, even a third time.
> Programming is now be complete and the
garage door, gate or similar should now
be activated when the programmed but-
ton is depressed.
In the event of programming problems, contact
HomeLink® at www.HomeLink.com,
25 Button designation and colour varies between manufacturers. }}
485
|| www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or call the Related information Using HomeLink

toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the • Using HomeLink (p. 486) When HomeLink® is fully programmed it can be
toll number +49 6838 907 277)26. • HomeLink®* (p. 484) used in place of the separate original remote
controls.
Reprogramming individual buttons • Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 487)
Depress the programmed button. The garage
To reprogram an individual HomeLink® button, door, gate, alarm system or similar is activated
proceed as follows: (may take a few seconds). If the button is
1. Press the desired button and hold it depressed for more than 20 seconds then the
depressed for approx. 20 seconds. reprogramming is started. The indicator lamp illu-
minates or flashes when the button has been
2. Once the indicator lamp on HomeLink® depressed. Naturally the original remote controls
starts to flash slowly, programming can con-
can still be used in parallel with HomeLink® if
tinue as normal.
required.
Note: If the button to be reprogrammed is
not programmed with a new unit, it will NOTE
resume the previously saved programming.
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink® will
Resetting the HomeLink® buttons work for 30 minutes after the driver's door
It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink® has been opened.
buttons at the same time, not each button indi-
vidually. Individual buttons can only be reprogram-
med.
WARNING
– Press and hold depressed the outer buttons • If HomeLink® is used to control a garage
door or gate, ensure that nobody is near
(1 and 3) on HomeLink® for approx. 10 sec-
the door or gate while it is in motion.
onds.
> When the indicator lamp changes over • Do not use HomeLink® for any garage
from a constant glow to starting to flash, door that does not have safety stop and
the buttons are reset and ready to be safety reverse.
reprogrammed.
26 Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator.
Related information Type approval for HomeLink®*27 Compass

• HomeLink®* (p. 484) The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mir-
Type approval for EU
• Programming HomeLink®* (p. 484) ror has an integrated display that shows the
Gentex Corporation hereby declares that compass direction in which the front of the car is
• Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 487) HomeLink® Model UAHL5 complies with the pointing.
Radio equipment directive 2014/53/EU.
Wavelength within which the radio equipment
functions:
• 433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.
• 868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.
• 868.70MHz-868.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.
• 869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.
• 869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.
Certificate holder address: Gentex Corporation,
600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI 49464,
USA
Rearview mirror with compass.
For more information, see support.volvocars.com. Eight different compass directions are shown by
Related information their English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north
east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
• HomeLink®* (p. 484)
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
Related information
• Activating and deactivating the compass
(p. 488)
• Calibrating the compass (p. 488)
Activating and deactivating the Calibrating the compass

compass The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mir- compass should be calibrated if the car is
ror has an integrated display that shows the moved between several magnetic zones.
compass direction in which the front of the car is
pointing. Proceed as follows to perform calibration:
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from
Activating and deactivating the steel structures and high-voltage power lines.
compass
The compass is activated automatically when the 2. Start the car and switch off all electrical
car is started. equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and
ensure that all doors are closed.
To deactivate/activate the compass manually:
Magnetic zones.
– Depress the button on the underside of the NOTE
4. Press the button repeatedly until the
rearview mirror using e.g. a paper clip.
Calibration may fail or not start at all if electri- required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
Related information cal equipment is not switched off. See the map of magnetic zones for the com-
• Compass (p. 487) pass.
• Calibrating the compass (p. 488) 3. Hold the button on the underside of the rear- 5. Wait until the display returns to showing the
view mirror depressed for approx. 3 seconds character C, or hold the button on the under-
(use a paper clip, for example). The number side of the rearview mirror depressed for
for the current magnetic zone is shown. approx. 6 seconds until the character C is
shown.
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more
than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direc-
tion is shown in the display, indicating that
calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2
circles to fine-tune calibration.
488
7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the char-

acter C is shown in the display when the
heated windscreen is activated, perform the
calibration in accordance with point 6 above
with the heated windscreen activated.
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
Related information
• Compass (p. 487)
• Activating and deactivating the compass
(p. 488)
Sound, media and Internet Related information Audio settings

The audio and media system consists of media • Media player (p. 502) The audio system is preset for optimal sound
player and radio. You can also connect a phone • Radio (p. 496) reproduction but can be adapted according to
via Bluetooth to use handsfree functions or play needs.
music wirelessly in the car. When the car is con-
• Phone (p. 517)
The volume is normally adjusted with the volume
nected to the Internet you can also use apps for • Internet-connected car* (p. 526) control below the centre display or with the right-
media playback. • Apps (p. 493) hand steering wheel keypad. This applies, for
example, during playback of music, radio, ongoing
phone calls and active traffic messages.
• Driver distraction (p. 39) Optimum sound reproduction
The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimum
• Managing system updates via the Download sound reproduction by means of digital signal
Centre (p. 591) processing. This calibration takes into account
• License agreement for audio and media loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
(p. 535) acoustics, listener position, etc., for each combi-
nation of car model and audio system. There is
also a dynamic calibration that takes into account
the setting of the volume control and vehicle
Overview of audio and media
speed.
Control the functions with your voice, steering Audio settings as required
wheel keypad or the centre display. The number The following settings can be selected in the top
of speakers and amplifiers depends on which view under Settings Sound:
audio system the car is equipped with.
• Tone — personal preference for bass, treble,
System updating equaliser for example.
The audio and media system is continuously
improved. When the car is connected to the Inter-
• Balance - balance between right/left loud-
speakers and balance between front/rear
net, it is possible to download system updates for
loudspeakers.
optimal functionality, see support.volvocars.com.
• System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone.
Sound experience* tive noise and the audio system outputs anti- Apps
noise in order to dampen the noise. The app view contains applications (apps) that
give access to certain of the car's services.
Recreating the acoustics from Gothenburg Concert Hall.

Sound Experience is opened from the centre Microphones in the car's roof.
display's app view and gives access to further
audio settings. The following settings can be NOTE
made:
Do not cover the car's microphones.
• Studio - the sound can be optimised for
Driver, All and Rear.
Related information
• Individual stage - surround sound mode • Media player (p. 502)
with settings for intensity and enclosure.
• Settings for voice recognition (p. 140)
• Concert hall - reproduces the acoustics • Settings for phone (p. 525)
from Gothenburg's Concert Hall.
• Sound, media and Internet (p. 492)
Active noise reduction* • Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
Certain cars are equipped with an active noise
reduction function that suppresses engine noise
in the passenger compartment via the audio sys-
tem. Microphones in the car's roof detect disrup-
}}
|| Swipe from right to left1 across the centre dis- downloaded when the car is connected to the Downloading apps
play's screen in order to access the app view Internet. New apps can be downloaded when the car is
from the home view. Apps that have been down- Certain apps are only available for use if the car connected to the Internet.
loaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded is connected to the Internet. NOTE
functions, such as FM radio, are found here.
Start an app by pressing the app in the centre Data download may affect other services that
display's app view. transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
on other services is experienced as disruptive
Related information then the download can be interrupted. Alter-
• Downloading apps (p. 494) natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or
• Updating apps (p. 495) interrupt other services.
• Deleting apps (p. 496)
• Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 511) NOTE
• Android Auto* (p. 515) When downloading using a phone, pay extra
• Internet-connected car* (p. 526) attention to the data traffic costs.
• Storage space on hard disk (p. 534)
• User terms and conditions and data sharing 1. Open the Download Centre app in the app
(p. 532) view.
App view (generic image, basic apps vary by market and 2. Select New apps in order to open a list of
model)
apps that are available but not installed in
Some basic apps are always available. More apps the car.
such as web radio and music services can be
3. Tap on the row for an app in order to expand Updating apps Update some
in the list and get more information about the The apps can be updated when the car is con- 1. Open the Download Centre app in the app
app. nected to the Internet. view.
4. Select Install in order to start the download NOTE 2. Select Application updates in order to
and installation of the desired app. open a list of all available updates.
Data download may affect other services that
> The status of the download and installa- transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect 3. Locate the desired app and select Install.
tion is shown while it is in progress. on other services is experienced as disruptive > Updating is started.
A message is shown if a download cannot then the download can be interrupted. Alter-
be started for the moment. The app will natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or Related information
remain in the list and it is possible to try to interrupt other services. • Apps (p. 493)
start a download again. • Downloading apps (p. 494)
Cancelling the download NOTE • Deleting apps (p. 496)
– Tap on Abort to cancel a download in pro- • Managing system updates via the Download
When downloading using a phone, pay extra
gress. Centre (p. 591)
attention to the data traffic costs.
Note that only the download can be cancelled, • Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
when the installation phase has started, this can- If an app is being used during an ongoing update,
not be cancelled. it will be restarted in order for the installation to
Related information be completed.
• Apps (p. 493) Update all
• Updating apps (p. 495) 1. Open the Download Centre app in the app
view.
Centre (p. 591)
• Storage space on hard disk (p. 534)
2. Select Install all.

> Updating is started.
Deleting apps Radio • RDS radio (p. 501)

Apps can be uninstalled when the car is con- It is possible to listen to the AM and FM bands • Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
nected to the Internet. and to digital radio (DAB)*. When the car is
An app that is being used must be closed in
online, it is also possible to listen to Internet
order for the uninstallation to be completed. radio. • Media player (p. 502)
1. Open the Download Centre app in the app

view.
2. Select Application updates in order to

open a list of all installed apps.
3. Locate the desired app and select Uninstall
in order to start the uninstallation of the app. The radio can be operated
> When the app has been uninstalled, it dis- using voice recognition, the
appears from the list. steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
Related information
• Apps (p. 493)
Related information
• Updating apps (p. 495) • Start radio (p. 497)
• Managing system updates via the Download • Changing radio band and radio station
Centre (p. 591) (p. 497)
• Internet-connected car* (p. 526) • Setting radio favourites (p. 499)
• Settings for radio (p. 499)
• Digital radio* (p. 501)
Start radio • Changing radio band and radio station Changing radio band and radio
The radio is started from the centre display app (p. 497) station
view. • Setting radio favourites (p. 499) There are instructions here for changing the
1. Open the required frequency band (e.g. FM) radio band, the list in the radio band and the
from the app view. radio station in the selected list.
Changing radio band
Swipe to show the app view in the centre display
and select the preferred radio band (e.g. FM), or
open the driver display's app menu using the
right-hand keypad on the steering wheel and
make your selection from there.
Changing lists within the frequency

band
2. Select a radio station. 1. Press Library.

Related information
• Radio (p. 496)
• Searching for radio stations (p. 498)
}}
497
|| 2. Select playback from Stations, Favourites, Searching for radio stations Manual tuning
Genres or Ensembles2. The radio automatically compiles a station list of
3. Tap on the desired station from the list. the radio stations within the area that are trans-
mitting the strongest signals.
Favourites - only plays back selected favourite
channels.
Genres — only plays back channels broadcast-
ing the selected genre/programme type, e.g. pop
or classical.
Changing stations within the selected

list
– Press on or under the centre dis-
play or the steering wheel's right-hand key- On changing over to manual tuning, the radio no
pad. longer changes frequency automatically when
> The highlight moves up or down one reception is poor.
place in the selected playlist. The parameters you can search on depend on
– Press Manual tuning, pull the control or
You can also change radio station in the selected the frequency band selected:
press or . With a long press, the
list via the centre display. • AM — station and frequency. search jumps to the next available station in
• FM — station, genre and frequency. the frequency band. It is also possible to use
Related information
the right keypad on the steering wheel.
• Radio (p. 496) • DAB* - ensembles and stations.
• Searching for radio stations (p. 498) 1. Press Library. Related information
• Voice control of radio and media (p. 140) • Radio (p. 496)
2. Press .
• Setting radio favourites (p. 499) • Start radio (p. 497)
> Search view with keyboard is opened.
• Settings for radio (p. 499) • Changing radio band and radio station
3. Enter the search terms. (p. 497)
• Application menu in driver display (p. 95) > Searching takes place with each input of • Voice control of radio and media (p. 140)
a character and the search results are
shown by category. • Settings for radio (p. 499)
2 Only applies to digital radio (DAB*).
Setting radio favourites Related information Settings for radio

It is possible to add a radio channel to the • Radio (p. 496) There are various radio functions to activate and
Radio favourites app and the favourites list for • Start radio (p. 497) deactivate.
the radio band (e.g. FM). Instructions on how to
add and remove favourites can be found below.
• Searching for radio stations (p. 498) Cancelling traffic messages
• Changing radio band and radio station The broadcast of traffic messages etc. can be
Radio Favourites (p. 497) temporarily interrupted by tapping on in the
Radio Favourites shows saved • Voice control of radio and media (p. 140) right-hand steering wheel keypad or by tapping
favourites from all frequency on Cancel in the centre display.
bands. • Settings for radio (p. 499)
• Application menu in driver display (p. 95) Activating and deactivating radio
functions
Drag down the top view and select Settings
1. Media and the desired radio band to view availa-
Open the app Radio favourites from the
ble functions.
app view.
2. Tap on the desired station in the list to start
listening.
Adding and removing radio favourites

– Tap on to add or remove a channel to or
from frequency band favourites and Radio
Favourites.
When a favourite is saved from a station list, the
radio will automatically search for the best fre-
quency. But if a favourite is saved from a manual
station search, the radio does not automatically
change to a stronger frequency.
When you remove a favourite, it will also be
removed from frequency band favourites.
}}
499
|| AM/FM Radio previous media source is resumed when the source is resumed when the message is fin-
• Show Broadcast Information: shows message is finished. ished.
information on programme content, artists, - Traffic Flash: receives information about
DAB* (digital radio)
etc. traffic disruptions.
• Sort Services: option for how channels will
• Freeze Program Name: select to stop the be sorted. Either alphabetically or by service - News Flash: receives news.
programme service name from scrolling con- number. - Transport Flash: receives information
tinuously. Instead it freezes after 20 seconds.
• DAB To DAB Handover: starts the function about public transport, e.g. ferry and train
• Select Announcements: for linking within DAB. If reception of a radio timetables.
- Local Interruptions: interrupts the current channel is lost, another channel is found - Warning/Services: receives information
media playback and broadcasts information automatically in another channel group about incidents of lower significance than
about traffic disruptions in the neighbour- (ensemble). the Alarm function, e.g. power failures.
hood. Playback of previous media source is • DAB To FM Handover: starts the function
resumed when the message is finished. The for linking between DAB and FM. If reception
Local Interruptions function is a geograph-
Related information
of a radio channel is lost, an alternative FM • Radio (p. 496)
ically restricted version of the Traffic frequency is searched for automatically.
Announcements function. The Traffic • Digital radio* (p. 501)
Announcements function must be acti- • Show Broadcast Information: select to
show radio text or selected types of radio • Symbols in the centre display's status bar
vated at the same time. (p. 116)
text, e.g. artist.
- News : interrupts the current media play-
back and broadcasts news. Playback of pre- • Show Program Related Images: select
whether or not to show images for pro-
vious media source is resumed when the
grammes on the screen.
news broadcast is finished.
- Alarm: interrupts the current media play- • Select Announcements: select the types
of messages to be received while DAB is
back and sends alerts about major accidents
playing. Selected messages will interrupt the
and disasters. Playback of previous media
current media playback to play back the
source is resumed when the message is fin-
message. Playback of previous media source
ished.
is resumed when the message is finished.
- Traffic Announcements: interrupts the
current media playback and broadcasts infor- - Alarm: interrupts the current media play-
mation about traffic disruptions. Playback of back and sends alerts about major accidents
and disasters. Playback of previous media
RDS radio Related information Digital radio*

RDS (Radio Data System) means that the radio • Radio (p. 496) Digital radio (DAB3) is a digital broadcasting
automatically changes to the strongest transmit- • Settings for radio (p. 499) system for radio. The radio supports DAB, DAB
ter. RDS provides the ability to receive e.g. traffic + and DMB4.
information and to search for certain programme
types. The radio can be operated
using voice recognition, the
RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An FM steering wheel keypad or the
transmitter in such a network sends information centre display.
that gives an RDS radio the following functions:
• Switch automatically to a stronger transmitter
if reception in the area is poor.
The digital radio app is
• Search for programme category, e.g. pro- launched from app view in the
gramme types or traffic information. centre display.
• Receive text information on current radio
programme.
NOTE Digital radio is played back in the same way as

Some radio stations do not use RDS or only other radio bands, such as FM. Besides the
selected parts of its functionality. option to select playback from Stations,
Favourites and Genres, there is also the option
to select playback from subchannels and
When broadcasting news or traffic messages, the
Ensembles. An ensemble is a set of radio chan-
radio can switch stations, interrupting the audio
nels (a channel group) broadcasting on the same
source currently in use. For example, if the CD
frequency.
player* is in use, it is paused. The radio returns to
the previous audio source and volume when the In the cases where the radio channel transmits
set programme type is no longer broadcast. To its logotype, it is downloaded and shown beside
go back earlier, press on the right-hand the station name (download time varies).
steering wheel keypad or tap Cancel in the cen-
tre display.
}}
|| DAB subchannel Link between FM and digital radio* Media player

Secondary components are usually named sub- The function enables the digital radio (DAB) to The media player can play back audio from the
channels. These are temporary and can contain switch from a channel with poor or no reception CD player* and from external audio sources con-
e.g. translations of the main programme into to the same channel in another channel group nected via the USB port or Bluetooth. It can also
other languages. Subchannels are indicated with (ensemble) with better reception, within DAB play back video format via the USB port.
an arrow symbol in the channel list. and/or between DAB and FM. When the car is connected to the internet, it is
also possible to listen to web radio, audio books
Related information DAB to DAB and DAB to FM linking and music services via apps.
• Link between FM and digital radio* (p. 502) 1. Press Settings in the top view.
• Changing radio band and radio station
2. Press Media DAB.
(p. 497)
3. Tick/untick DAB To DAB Handover and/or
• Searching for radio stations (p. 498)
DAB To FM Handover in order to activate/
• Setting radio favourites (p. 499) deactivate the respective functions.
Related information
• Digital radio* (p. 501)
• Radio (p. 496)
The media player is operated

from the centre display, but
several functions can be oper-
ated using the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad or voice con-
trol.
The radio is operated in the media player and is

described in a separate section.
3 Digital Audio Broadcasting

4 Digital Multimedia Broadcasting
Related information Media playback CD*

• Media playback (p. 503) The media player is controlled from the centre 1. Insert a CD.
• Controlling and changing media (p. 504) display. Several functions can also be operated 2. Open the app CD from the app view.
using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or
• Searching media (p. 505)
voice control. 3. Select what to play back.
• Apps (p. 493) > Playback begins.
The media player also operates the radio, which
• Radio (p. 496) is described in a separate section. USB memory
• CD player* (p. 507) 1. Insert the USB memory.
Starting the media source
• Video (p. 507) 2. Open the app USB from the app view.
• Media via Bluetooth® (p. 508) 3. Select what to play back.
• Media via USB port (p. 509) > Playback begins.
• Internet-connected car* (p. 526) Mp3 player and iPod®
NOTE
To start playback from iPod, use the iPod app
(not USB).
When an iPod is used as audio source, the
car's audio and media system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPod player's
own menu structure.
1. Connect media source.

2. Start playback from the connected media
source.
3. Open the app (iPod, USB) from the app
view.
App view. (Generic image, basic apps vary by market and > Playback begins.
model.)
}}
|| Bluetooth connected device Related information Controlling and changing media

1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source. • Handling the application menu in the driver The playback of media can be controlled with
display (p. 96) voice control, steering wheel keypad or the cen-
3. Start playback from the connected media
• Radio (p. 496) tre display.
The media player can be oper-
source. • Controlling and changing media (p. 504)
ated by voice recognition, from
4. Open the app Bluetooth from the app view. • Connecting a device via USB port (p. 509) the steering wheel keypad or
> Playback begins. • Connecting a device via Bluetooth® the centre display.
(p. 509)
Media with Internet connection
Play back media from Internet-connected apps: • Downloading apps (p. 494)
1. Connect the car to the Internet. • Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
2. Open the current app from the app view.

• Video (p. 507)
> Playback begins. • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 511)
Read the separate section on how apps are • Android Auto* (p. 515)
downloaded. • Voice control of radio and media (p. 140)
Video • Compatible media formats (p. 533)
2. Open the app USB from the app view.
3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play
back.
Volume - turn the control knob under the centre
> Playback begins.
display or press on the steering wheel's
Apple CarPlay right-hand keypad in order to increase or
CarPlay is described in a separate section. decrease the volume.
Android Auto
Play/pause - tap on the image belonging to the
Android Auto is described in a separate section.
song being played back, the physical button
under the centre display or on the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad.
Change track/song - tap on the desired track in Similar - tap on the button in Searching media
the centre display, press on or under order to use Gracenote to It is possible to search by artist, composer, song
the centre display or on the steering wheel's search for similar music on the titles, album, video, audio book, playlist and,
right-hand keypad. USB device and to create a when the car is connected to the Internet, pod-
playlist from it. The playlist can casts (digital media via Internet).
Fast forward/move in time - tap on the time axis contain a maximum of 50
in the centre display and drag sideways, or press songs.
and hold or under the centre display or
on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Change device - tap on the
button in order to switch
Changing media - select from previous sources between USB devices when
in the app, in the app view, press on the desired several are connected.
app or select with the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad via the app menu .
Library - tap on the button to
Related information
play back from the library.
• Searching media (p. 505)
1. Press .
• Apps (p. 493)
> Search view with keyboard is opened.
Shuffle - tap on the button to • Gracenote® (p. 506)
shuffle the playback order. 2. Enter the search terms.
3. Press Search.
> Connected devices are searched and the
search results are listed by category.
Swipe sideways across the screen to show each
category separately.
Related information
}}
• Media playback (p. 503) Gracenote® Related information

• Enter the characters, letters and words man- Gracenote identifies artist, album, song titles • Media playback (p. 503)
ually in the centre display (p. 121) and associated images, which are shown during • License agreement for audio and media
playback. (p. 535)
Gracenote MusicID® is a standard for music rec-

ognition.

2. Press Media Gracenote®.
3. Select settings for Gracenote data:
• Gracenote® Online Search - searches in
Gracenote's online database for playing
media.
• Gracenote® Multiple Results - selects
how to display Gracenote data if there are
more than one search results.
1 - the file's original data are used.
2 - Gracenote data are used.
3 - Gracenote or original data can be
selected.
• None - no results are shown.
Updating Gracenote
The content of the Gracenote database is upda-
ted continuously. Download the latest update for
optimal functionality. For information and down-
load, see support.volvocars.com.
506
CD player* Video Playing a video

The media player can play back CD discs with Videos on USB-connected devices can be Videos are played using the USB app in the app
compatible audio files. played back using the media player. view.
1. Connecting a media source (USB device).
No picture is shown when the car starts to move,
but only the audio is played back. The picture is 2. Open the app USB from the app view.
shown again when the car is stationary. 3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play
Information on compatible formats for media can back.
be found in a separate section. > Playback begins.

• Playing a video (p. 507) • Video (p. 507)
• Playing back DivX® (p. 508) • Playing back DivX® (p. 508)
• Settings for video (p. 508) • Settings for video (p. 508)
Disc insert and eject slot.

• Compatible media formats (p. 533) • Compatible media formats (p. 533)
Disc eject button.
Related information
• Media playback (p. 503)
• Compatible media formats (p. 533)
Playing back DivX® Settings for video Media via Bluetooth®

This DivX Certified®
device must be registered in It is possible to change certain video playback The car's media player is equipped with
order to play back purchased DivX Video-on- settings, e.g. language. Bluetooth and can wirelessly play audio files
Demand (VOD) films. With the video player in full screen mode, or by from external Bluetooth devices, such as mobile
opening the top view and pressing Settings phones and tablets.
Video, the following can be adjusted: Audio For the media player to be able to play back
2. Tap Video DivX® VOD and retrieve the Language, Off and Subtitle Language. audio files wirelessly from an external device, the
registration code. device must first be connected to the car via
Related information Bluetooth.
3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information and • Video (p. 507)
to complete the registration. Related information
• Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
• Video (p. 507)
• Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
• Playing a video (p. 507)
for the first time (p. 518)
• Settings for video (p. 508)
508
Connecting a device via Bluetooth® Media via USB port Connecting a device via USB port
Connect a Bluetooth® device to the car for wire- An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3 An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3
less playback of media and to provide the car player, can be connected to the audio system via player, can be connected to the audio system via
with an Internet connection where possible. the car's USB port. one of the car's USB ports.
Many phones on the market now have wireless Devices with rechargeable batteries are The phone must be connected to the USB port
Bluetooth® technology, but not all of them are recharged when connected via USB and the igni- with white frame (when there are two USB ports)
fully compatible with the car. For compatibility, tion is in position I, II or the engine is running. when using Apple CarPlay* and Android Auto*.
see support.volvocars.com. The content of the external source can be loaded
The procedure for connecting a media device is more quickly if it only consists of compatible for-
the same as for connecting a phone to the car mats. Video files can also be played back via the
via Bluetooth®. USB port.
Certain MP3 players have their own file system
Related information that the car does not support.
• Media via Bluetooth® (p. 508)
Related information
for the first time (p. 518) • Connecting a device via USB port (p. 509)
• Media playback (p. 503) • Media playback (p. 503)

• Video (p. 507)
• Ignition positions (p. 420) USB inputs (type A) in the tunnel console. Allow the
cable to lie forwards so that it is not trapped when the
• Technical specifications for USB devices
lid is closed.
(p. 534)
• Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 511) Related information
• Android Auto* (p. 515)
• Media via USB port (p. 509)
(p. 534)
(p. 534)
}}
• Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 511) TV*5 Using the TV*6

• Android Auto* (p. 515) No images are shown once the car reaches a The TV is started from the app view. Tap on the
certain speed but the sound will be heard the TV app and select a channel.
whole time. The picture returns once more when The TV automatically searches for the channels
the car is almost or completely stationary. with best reception.
The TV is controlled from the centre display. Sev-
Change the list of visible channels
eral functions can also be controlled from the
1. Press Library
right keypad on the steering wheel or with voice
recognition. 2. Select playback from TV-channels or
Favourites.
3. Select the desired channel.
Change channel from selected list
– Press on or under the centre dis-
play or on the steering wheel keypad.
> The highlight moves up or down one
place in the selected playlist
You can also change stations from the centre
display.
Favourites
A TV channel can be saved as a favourite:
Related information – Tap on in order to add/remove a chan-
• Using the TV* (p. 510) nel to/from the favourites list.
• Settings for TV* (p. 511)

TV guide Settings for TV*7 Apple® CarPlay®*

A programme guide is available with information The option to make certain settings is available, CarPlay gives you the option to listen to music,
about TV programmes for up to 48 hours. both in the top view or when the TV is in full make phone calls, get directions, send/receive
– Tap on Guide to show information about TV screen mode. messages and use Siri, all while you stay
programmes. With the TV in full screen mode, or by opening focused on your driving.
the top view and pressing Settings Media
CarPlay works with selected
NOTE TV, the following can be adjusted:
Apple devices. If the car does
If the car is moved within the country, e.g. • Subtitle Language not already support CarPlay
from city to city, it is not certain that • Audio Language there is the option to install it
Favourites are available since the frequency retroactively. Contact a Volvo
may have changed. Pict. format retailer to install CarPlay.
Tapping on Picture format enables you to
Information about which apps are supported and
Related information choose which format the TV picture should be
which phones are compatible is available on
• TV* (p. 510) shown in.
Apple's website: www.apple.com/ios/carplay/.
• Settings for TV* (p. 511) 1. Auto - The TV picture is shown in the image Using apps that are not compatible with CarPlay
format being transmitted. may sometimes mean that the connection
between an iPhone and the car is broken. Please
2. Auto fill - The TV picture is maximised with-
• License agreement for audio and media
out cropping. note that Volvo is not responsible for the content
(p. 535) in CarPlay.
Related information When using map navigation via CarPlay, there is
• TV* (p. 510) no guidance in the driver display or head-up dis-
• Using the TV* (p. 510) play, but only in the centre display.
• Compatible media formats (p. 533) The CarPlay apps can be controlled via the cen-
• Resetting settings in the centre display tre display, phone or using the steering wheel's
(p. 127) right-hand keypad (applies to certain functions).
The apps can also be voice-controlled using Siri.
A long press on the steering wheel button
|| starts voice control using Siri and a short press Using Apple® CarPlay®* 5. Tap on the desired app.
activates the car's own voice control. If Siri breaks To use CarPlay, Siri voice control must be acti- > The app starts.
off too early, hold the steering wheel button 8
vated in your phone. The phone must also have Starting CarPlay
depressed. an Internet connection via Wi-Fi or the mobile CarPlay is started according to the following after
By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge network. an iPhone has been connected.
the following: Apple CarPlay is a service
Connect an iPhone and start CarPlay 1. Connect an iPhone to the USB port. In the
provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and
cases where there are two USB ports, the
conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not
NOTE one with the white frame around the port
responsible for Apple CarPlay or its
must be used.
features/applications. When using Apple CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is
CarPlay, certain information from your car deactivated. A phone or media player con- > If the setting for automatic start is
(including its position) is transferred to your nected to the car via Bluetooth will therefore selected - the name of the phone is
iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you are not be available when CarPlay is active. An shown.
fully responsible for your and any others alternative Internet source must be used to 2. Tap on the phone name - the tile with
person’s use of Apple CarPlay. connect to the Internet for the car's apps. Use CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are
Wi-Fi or the car's built-in modem*. shown.
Related information
3. If the tile with CarPlay is not opened, tap on
• Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 512)
1. Connect an iPhone to the USB port. In the Apple CarPlay in the app view.
• Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 513) cases where there are two USB ports, the > The tile with CarPlay is opened and com-
• Voice recognition (p. 137) one with the white frame around the port patible apps are shown.
must be used.
• Resetting settings in the centre display 4. Tap on the desired app.
(p. 127) 2. Read the information in the pop-up window
> The app starts.
and then tap on OK.
CarPlay runs in the background if another app is
3. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.
started in the same tile. To show CarPlay in the
4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap tile again - tap on the CarPlay icon in the app
on Accept to connect. view.
> The tile with CarPlay is opened and com-
patible apps are shown.
8 Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
Switch the connection between CarPlay • Connecting the car to the Internet via a Settings for Apple® CarPlay®*
and iPod mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 528) Settings for Apple device connected with
CarPlay to iPod • Connect the car to the Internet via car CarPlay10.
1. Press Settings in the top view. modem (SIM card) (p. 528)
Automatic start
1.
2. Continue to Communication Apple Press Settings in the top view.
CarPlay.
2. Continue to Communication Apple
3. Untick the box for the Apple device that shall CarPlay and select setting:
no longer start CarPlay automatically when
the USB cable is connected. • Tick the box - CarPlay starts automatically
when the USB cable is connected.
4. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to
the USB port. • Untick the box - CarPlay does not start
automatically when the USB cable is con-
5. Open the app iPod from the app view. nected.
iPod to CarPlay A maximum of 20 Apple devices can be stored in
1. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view. the list. When the list is full and a new device is
2. Read the information in the pop-up window connected the oldest one is deleted.
and then tap on OK. To delete the list, the settings must be reset in
3. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to the centre display (factory reset).
the USB port. System volumes
> The tile with Apple CarPlay is opened and 1. Press Settings in the top view.
compatible apps are shown9.
2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and
Related information make the settings for the following:
• Connecting a device via USB port (p. 509)
• Voice Control
• Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 511)
• Navi Voice Guidance
• Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 513) • Phone Ringtone
9 Apple, CarPlay, iPhone and iPod are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
10 Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
}}
|| Related information Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®* Related information

• Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 511) Here are some useful tips for using CarPlay®. • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 511)
• Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 512) • Update your iPhone with the latest version of
iOS operating system and ensure that the
apps have been updated.
(p. 127)
• In the event of a problem with CarPlay, dis-
connect the telephone from the USB port
and reconnect. Otherwise, try to close the
app on the telephone that is not working and
then restart the app, or try closing all apps
and restart your phone.
• If the apps do not appear when CarPlay
starts (black screen), try minimising and
expanding the tile for CarPlay.
• Using apps that are not compatible with
CarPlay may sometimes mean that the con-
nection between the phone and the car is
broken. Information about supported apps
and compatible telephone models can be
found on Apple's website. You can also
search for CarPlay in the App Store to find
information about apps that are compatible
with CarPlay on your market.
• CarPlay only works with iPhone11.
NOTE
Availability and functionality may vary depend-
ing on market.
11 Apple, CarPlay and iPhone are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
Android Auto* NOTE Using Android Auto*

Android Auto gives you the option to listen to To use the app Android Auto, the telephone
When a phone is connected to Android Auto
music, make phone calls, get directions and use must be connected to the car's USB port.
it is possible to stream via Bluetooth to
car-adapted apps from an Android device. The first time an Android is connected
another media player. Bluetooth is active
Android Auto works with selected Android devi- 1. Connect the Android phone to the USB port.
while Android Auto is being used.
ces. In the cases where there are two USB ports,
the one with the white frame around the port
When using map navigation via Android Auto
must be used.
there is no guidance in the driver display or head-
up display, but only in the centre display. 2. Read the information in the pop-up window
Android Auto can be controlled via the centre and then tap on OK.
display using the steering wheel's right-hand key- 3. Tap on Android Auto in the app view.
pad or voice control. A long press on the steering
4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap
wheel button starts voice recognition control on Accept to connect.
and a short press deactivates.
> The tile with Android Auto is opened and
By using Android Auto, you acknowledge compatible apps are shown.
the following: Android Auto is a service
5. Tap on the desired app.
provided by Google Inc. under its terms and
Information about which apps are supported and conditions. Volvo Cars is not responsible for > The app starts.
which phones are compatible is available on the Android Auto or its features or applications.
website: www.android.com/auto/. For third-party When you use Android Auto, your car
apps, see Google Play. Please note that Volvo is transfers certain information (including its
not responsible for the content in Android Auto. location) to your connected Android phone.
Android Auto is started from the app view. After You are fully responsible for your and any
Android Auto has been started once, the app will other person’s use of Android Auto.
be started automatically the next time the device
is connected. Automatic start can be deactivated Related information
under settings. • Using Android Auto* (p. 515)
• Settings for Android Auto* (p. 516)
}}
|| Previously connected Android Settings for Android Auto* Related information

1. Connect the phone to the USB port. Settings for a phone that has been connected • Android Auto* (p. 515)
> If the setting for automatic start is the first time with Android Auto. • Using Android Auto* (p. 515)
selected - the name of the phone is
shown. Automatic start • Resetting settings in the centre display
1. Press Settings in the top view. (p. 127)
2. Tap on the phone name - the tile with
Android Auto is opened and compatible apps 2. Press Communication Android Auto
are shown. and select setting:
3. If the setting for automatic start is not • Tick the box - Android Auto starts auto-
selected - open the Android Auto app from matically when the USB cable is con-
the app view. nected.
> The tile with Android Auto is opened and • Untick the box - Android Auto does not
compatible apps are shown. start automatically when the USB cable is
4. Tap on the desired app. connected.
> The app starts. A maximum of 20 Android devices can be stored
in the list. When the list is full and a new device is
Android Auto runs in the background if another connected the oldest one is deleted.
app is started in the same tile. To show
Android Auto in the tile again - tap on the A factory reset has to be executed in order to
Android Auto icon in the app view. clear the list.
Related information System volumes

• Android Auto* (p. 515) 1. Press Settings in the top view.
• Settings for Android Auto* (p. 516) 2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and
• Connecting a device via USB port (p. 509) make the settings for the following:
• Voice recognition (p. 137) • Voice Control
• Navi Voice Guidance
• Phone Ringtone
Tips for using Android Auto* Phone Overview

Here are some useful tips for using Android A phone with Bluetooth can be connected wire-
Auto. lessly to the car's built-in hands-free system.
• Ensure that your apps are updated.
The audio and media system acts as hands-free,
• When starting the car, wait until the centre with the facility to remotely control a selection of
display has started, connect the telephone the phone's functions. The phone can still be
and then open Android Auto from the app operated with its own keys even if it is connected
view. to the car.
• In the event of problems with Android Auto,
When a phone has been connected online and
disconnect your Android phone from the
connected with the car, it can be used make
USB port and then reconnect via USB. Oth-
calls, send/receive messages, play back media
erwise, try closing the app on the phone and
wirelessly and be used as an Internet connection.
then restarting the app.
The phone is operated from the Microphone.
• When a telephone is connected to Android
centre display, but some opera-
Auto it is still possible to playback media via Phone.
Bluetooth to another media player. The tions are also available via voice
Bluetooth function is on when Android Auto recognition and the app menu, Phone operation from centre display.
is used. which are accessed from the
right-hand steering wheel key- Keypad for operating phone functions that
Related information pad. are shown in the driver display and voice rec-
• Android Auto* (p. 515) ognition.
Driver display.
Related information
• Managing phone calls (p. 522)
• Managing the phone book (p. 524)
• Managing text messages (p. 523)
}}
• Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth Connecting a phone to the car via 2. To connect the car to the Internet via the
automatically (p. 520) Bluetooth for the first time phone’s Bluetooth, activate tethering (porta-
• Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth Connect a phone with Bluetooth activated to ble/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the
manually (p. 520) then be able to make calls from the car, send/ phone.
receive messages, play back media wirelessly 3. Open the tile for the phone.
• Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 521) and connect the car to the Internet.
It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices con- • If there is no phone connected to the car,
• Switch between Bluetooth-connected nected at once, in which case one of them can tap on Add phone.
phones (p. 521) only play back wirelessly. The most recently con- • If there is a phone connected to the car,
• Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone nected phone will automatically be connected to tap on Change . In the pop-up win-
(p. 522) make calls, send/receive messages, play back dow, tap on Add phone.
• Settings for phone (p. 525) media and provide an Internet connection. It is > Available Bluetooth devices are listed. The
possible to change the use of the phone in the list is updated as new devices are
settings for Bluetooth Devices. detected.
After the device has been connected/registered
display (p. 96) 4. Tap on the name of the phone to be con-
a first time via Bluetooth, it no longer needs to be nected.
• Audio settings (p. 492) visible/discoverable, but only have Bluetooth acti-
• Connecting the car to the Internet via a vated. To connect the car to the Internet via a 5. Check that the specified number code in the
mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 527) phone, tethering must also be activated on the car matches that in the phone. In which case,
phone. A maximum of 20 connected Bluetooth choose to accept in both places.
devices can be stored in the car. 6. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any
There are two options for connecting. Either options for phone contacts and messages.
search the phone from the car or search the car
from the phone. NOTE
Option 1 - search phone from car • The message function must be activated
1. Make the phone searchable/visible via in certain phones.
Bluetooth. • Not all mobile phones are fully compati-
ble and may therefore not show contacts
and messages in the car.
518
Option 2 - search car from phone NOTE • Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone

1. Open the tile for the phone. (p. 522)
• The message function must be activated
• If there is no phone connected to the car, in certain phones. • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526)
tap on Add phone Make car
• Not all mobile phones are fully compati- • Connecting the car to the Internet via a
discoverable. mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 527)
ble and may therefore not show contacts
• If there is a phone connected to the car, and messages in the car.
tap on Change . In the pop-up win-
dow, tap on Add phone Make car NOTE
discoverable.
If the phone's operating system is updated
2. Activate Bluetooth on the phone. then the connection may be broken. In which
3. To connect the car to the Internet via the case, delete the phone from the car and then
phone’s Bluetooth, activate tethering (porta- connect again.
ble/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the
phone. Compatible phones
4. Search on the phone for Bluetooth devices. Many phones on the market now have wireless
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed. Bluetooth technology, but not all of them are fully
compatible with the car. For compatibility, see
5. Select the name of the car on the phone. support.volvocars.com.
6. A pop-up window for the connection is
Related information
shown in the car. Confirm the connection.
• Phone (p. 517)
7. Check that the specified number code in the
car matches that in the external device. In
automatically (p. 520)
which case, choose to accept in both places.
8. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any manually (p. 520)
options for phone contacts and messages.
(p. 521)
• Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 521)
519
Connecting a phone to the car via • Connecting the car to the Internet via a Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth automatically mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 527) Bluetooth manually
It is possible to connect a phone to the car auto- • Ignition positions (p. 420) It is possible to connect a phone to the car man-
matically via Bluetooth. The phone has to have ually via Bluetooth. The phone has to have been
been connected to the car for the first time. connected to the car for the first time.
It is only the two last connected phones that can 1. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
be connected automatically.
To connect the car to the Internet at the
1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone before set- same time, tethering (portable/personal hot-
ting the car in ignition position I. spot) in the phone must be activated.
To connect the car to the Internet at the 2. Open the tile for the phone.
same time, tethering (portable/personal hot- > Connected phones are listed.
spot) in the phone must be activated.
3. Tap on the name of the phone to be con-
2. Set the car in ignition position I or higher. nected.
> The phone will connect. > The phone will connect.
• Phone (p. 517) • Phone (p. 517)
• Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 518) for the first time (p. 518)
• Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
manually (p. 520) automatically (p. 520)
• Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 521) (p. 521)
• Switch between Bluetooth-connected • Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 521) phones (p. 521)
• Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone • Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 522) (p. 522)
• Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526)
520
• Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526) Disconnecting a Bluetooth- Switch between Bluetooth-
• Connecting the car to the Internet via a connected phone connected phones
mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 527) Disconnect a Bluetooth-connected phone from It is possible to switch between a number of
the car by deactivating Bluetooth on your phone. Bluetooth-connected phones.
When the phone is out of range of the car it is 1. Open the tile for the phone.
automatically disconnected. If disconnection
occurs during an active call then the call can be 2. Tap on Change or drag down the top
continued on the phone. view and tap on Settings
Communication Bluetooth Devices
Related information Add device.
• Phone (p. 517)
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
• Settings for phone (p. 525)
3. Tap on the phone to be connected.
phones (p. 521) Related information
• Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone • Phone (p. 517)
(p. 522) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
• Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526) for the first time (p. 518)
(p. 521)
• Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 522)
521
Removing a Bluetooth-connected Managing phone calls Making multi-party calls

phone Call handling in the car for a Bluetooth-con- During a call:
It is possible to remove phones from the list of nected phone. 1. Press Add call.
registered Bluetooth devices.
1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Choose to make a call from the call log,
favourites or the contact list.
2. Press Communication Bluetooth
3. Tap on an entry/row in the call log, or tap on
Devices.
alongside the contact in the contact list.
> Registered Bluetooth devices are listed.
4. Tap on Swap call to switch between the
3. Tap on the phone to be removed.
parties.
4. Tap on Remove device and confirm your
selection. 5. Tap on to end the active call.
> The phone is no longer registered to the Conference calls
car. During an active multi-party call:
1. Tap on Join calls to merge the active multi-
Related information Generic illustration.
party call.
• Phone (p. 517)
Making phone calls
1. Open the tile for the phone.
2. Tap on to end the call.
2. Select call from: call history, enter number Incoming phone calls
using the keypad or via the contact list. It is Incoming phone calls are shown in the driver dis-
(p. 521) play and the centre display. Manage the call on
possible to search or browse in the contact
list. Tap on in the contact list in order to
the right-hand steering wheel keypad or in the
phones (p. 521) centre display.
add a contact under Favourites.
• Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526) 1. Tap on Answer/Reject.
3. Press .
Incoming phone call during an active call
You can also make calls from the call log via the
1. Tap on Answer/Reject.
app menu, which is accessed from the right-hand
steering wheel keypad . 2. Tap on to end the call.
522
Private call Managing text messages Sending text messages in the centre
– During the current call, press Privacy and Message handling in the car for a Bluetooth- display12
select setting: connected phone. 1. You can reply to a message or create a new
• Switch to mobile phone - the hands- In some phones, the message function must be message.
activated. Not all phones are compatible. In such
free function is disconnected and the call
cases, they cannot display contacts and mes-
• Reply to message — tap on the contact
continues on your mobile phone. whose message you wish to reply to, then
sages in the car. For compatibility, see
• Driver focused - the microphone in the tap on Answer.
roof on the passenger side is switched off • Create new message - tap on Create
and the call continues with the car's Managing text messages in the centre new. Select a contact or enter a number.
handsfree function. display 2. Compose the message.
Text messages are only shown in the centre dis-
Related information play if the setting is selected. 3. Press Send.
• Phone (p. 517)
Press Messages in the app Managing text messages in the driver
view to manage text messages
for the first time (p. 518) display
in the centre display. Text messages are only shown in the driver dis-
• Controlling a telephone with voice recogni-
play if the setting is selected.
tion (p. 139)
• Handling the application menu in the driver Reading a new text message in the driver
display (p. 96) display
Reading text messages in the centre display – To have the message read aloud – select
• Enter the characters, letters and words man- Press the icon to get the message Read out with the steering wheel keypad.
ually in the centre display (p. 121) read aloud.
Dictating a reply in the driver display
• Managing the phone book (p. 524)
After the text message has been read out, it is
• Managing text messages (p. 523) possible to reply briefly with dictation if the car is
• Audio settings (p. 492) connected to the Internet.
– Press Answer with the steering wheel key-
pad. A dictation dialogue starts.
12 Only certain phones can broadcast messages from the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. }}
523
|| Message notification Settings for text messages Managing the phone book
It is possible to activate and deactivate notifica- Settings for text messages on connected phone. Contact handling in the car for a Bluetooth-con-
tions in the text message settings. 1. Press Settings in the top view. nected phone.
Related information 2. Press Communication Text Messages
• Phone (p. 517) and select settings:
• Settings for text messages (p. 524) • Notification in centre display - shows
• Settings for phone (p. 525) message notifications in the centre dis-
play's status bar.
• Controlling a telephone with voice recogni- • Notification in driver display - displays
notifications in the driver's display and
tion (p. 139)
incoming messages can be managed
• Enter the characters, letters and words man- using the steering wheel's right-hand key-
ually in the centre display (p. 121) pad.
• Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth • Text message tone - select tone for
for the first time (p. 518) incoming text messages. Browse between the letters and to find
a matching contact. Depending on existing
Related information contacts in the phone book, only matching
• Phone (p. 517) letters are shown.
• Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth Search contacts - tap on to search for
for the first time (p. 518) a phone number of name in the contact list.
• Managing text messages (p. 523)
Favourites - tap on to add/remove a
• Settings for phone (p. 525) contact to/from the favourites list.
NOTE
Only contacts from an active Bluetooth-con-
nected phone are shown in the centre display.
Up to 3000 contacts can be shown.
Sorting Settings for phone • Head-up display* (p. 134)

The contact list is sorted in alphabetical order When the telephone is connected to the car, the • Audio settings (p. 492)
where special characters and numbers are sorted following settings can be made:
under . It is possible to sort by first name or
surname, and this setting is adjusted in the tele- 1. Press Settings in the top view.
phone setup.
2. Press Communication Phone and
Related information select settings:
• Phone (p. 517)
• Ringtones - select ringtone. It is possible
• Settings for phone (p. 525) to use a ringtone from the phone or the
• Controlling a telephone with voice recogni- car. Some phones are not fully compatible
tion (p. 139) and their ringtones may therefore not be
• Enter the characters, letters and words man- available for use in the car. For compatibil-
ually in the centre display (p. 121) ity, see support.volvocars.com.
• Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth • Sort order - select sort order of contact
for the first time (p. 518) list.
Call notifications in head up display*

view.
2. Press My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options.
3. Select Show Phone.
Related information
• Phone (p. 517)
• Settings for text messages (p. 524)
Settings for Bluetooth devices Internet-connected car* NOTE

Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices. When the car is connected to the Internet, it is
Data is transferred when using the internet
1. Press Settings in the top view. possible – for example – to use web radio and
(data traffic), which can have a cost.
music services via apps, download software and
2. Press Communication Bluetooth contact your retailer from the car. Activation of data roaming can result in fur-
Devices and select settings: ther charges.
The car is connected via Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or with
• Add device - starts the pairing of a new Contact your network operator about the cost
device. the car's built-in modem*.
for data traffic.
• Previously paired devices - lists con- When the car is online, its Internet connection
nected devices. (Wi-Fi hotspot) can be shared to allow other devi-
ces to use the Internet connection13. NOTE
• Remove device - removes the connected
device. Connection status is indicated by a symbol in the When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible
centre display's status bar. to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi
• Allowed services for this device - sets
or the car modem*.
device usage options: calling, sending/
receiving messages, streaming media and as
Internet connection.
NOTE
• Internet connection - connects the car to
the Internet via the device's Bluetooth con- When using Android Auto, it is possible to
nection. connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth or the car modem*.
Related information
• Phone (p. 517)
Read Terms and Conditions for Services and
• Settings for phone (p. 525) Customer Privacy Policy at
• Internet-connected car* (p. 526) support.volvocars.com before connecting the car
to the Internet.
13 This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.
Related information Connecting the car to the Internet Related information

• Symbols in the centre display's status bar via a mobile device (Bluetooth) • Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
(p. 116) Create an Internet connection via Bluetooth by • Connect the car to the Internet via car
• Connecting the car to the Internet via a sharing your phone's Internet access and modem (SIM card) (p. 528)
mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 527) access several online services in the car.
The phone and network operator must support
• Connecting the car to the Internet via a
tethering (sharing the Internet connection) and
mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 528)
the subscription plan must include data. • Connecting the car to the Internet via a
• Connect the car to the Internet via car mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 528)
modem (SIM card) (p. 528) 1. To be able to connect the car to the Internet
via a Bluetooth-connected phone, the phone • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 511)
• Apps (p. 493) has to have already been connected to the • No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)
• No or poor Internet connection (p. 531) car via Bluetooth for a first time. Ensure that
• Sharing Internet access from the car via a the personal hotspot (portable/personal hot-
Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 530) spot) is activated in your phone.
• Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 531) 2. If the phone has been connected via Blue-
tooth previously, press Settings in the cen-
• Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 532)
tre display top view.
• Volvo ID (p. 26)
3. In the centre display: Press Communication
(p. 532) Bluetooth Devices.
4. Tick the box for Bluetooth Internet
connection under the heading Internet
connection.
> Your car is now connected to the Internet
via the Bluetooth-connected phone.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible
to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi
or the car modem*.
Connecting the car to the Internet Note that certain phones switch off tethering Connect the car to the Internet via
via a mobile device (Wi-Fi) after the contact with the car has been discon- car modem (SIM card)
Create an Internet connection via Wi-Fi by shar- nected, e.g. when leaving the car and until the For cars equipped with Volvo On Call*, it is pos-
ing your phone's Internet access and access next time it is used. The tethering in the phone sible to establish an Internet connection via the
several online services in the car. therefore needs to be reactivated the next time it car modem and a personal SIM card (P-SIM).
The phone and network operator must support is used. When the car is connected to the Internet via the
tethering (sharing the Internet connection) and When a phone is connected to the car, it is saved car modem, Volvo On Call services will use this
the subscription plan must include data. for future use. When the maximum number of connection.
saved phones (50) is reached, the first con- 1.
nected phones are deleted. To show a list of
saved networks or manually delete saved net-
works, go to Settings Communication
Wi-Fi Saved networks.
Technical and safety requirements for Wi-Fi con-
1. Activate tethering (portable/personal hot- nection, are described in a separate section.
spot) on the phone.
Related information
3. Continue to Communication Wi-Fi. • Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 531)
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the • No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)
box for Wi-Fi. • Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 532)
5. Tap on the network name of the network to Fit a personal SIM card into the holder by the
be connected. floor on the passenger side.
6. Enter the network password. 2. Press Settings in the top view.
7. If another connection source has been used 3. Press Communication Car Modem
in the past - confirm the option to change Internet.
connection.
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
> The car connects to the network. box for Car modem Internet.
5. If another connection source has been used Settings for car modem14 • Send request code — used e.g. to top up
in the past - confirm the option to change The car is equipped with a modem that can be or check the balance on a prepaid card.
connection. used to connect the car to the Internet. It is also Functionality depends on the provider.
6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code. possible to share the Internet connection via Related information
Wi-Fi.
> The car connects to the network. • Connect the car to the Internet via car
1. Press Settings in the top view. modem (SIM card) (p. 528)
Related information
• Internet-connected car* (p. 526) 2. Press Communication Car Modem
• No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)
• No or poor Internet connection (p. 531) Internet and select settings:

• Settings for car modem (p. 529) • Car modem Internet - select whether to
use the car modem as Internet connection.
• Data usage - tap on Reset resets the
counters for received and sent data volume.
• Network
Select network operator - automatic or
manual selection of network operator.
Data roaming - if the box is ticked, the car
modem will attempt to connect to the Inter-
net when the car is abroad and outside its
home network. Note that this may result in
heavy costs. Check your roaming agreement
for data traffic abroad with your network pro-
vider in your home country.
• SIM card PIN
Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can be
entered.
Disable PIN - select whether the PIN code
shall be required for access to the SIM card.
14 Only cars with Volvo On Call.
Sharing Internet access from the 2. Press Communication Car Wi-Fi Press Connected devices to see a list of the
car via a Wi-Fi hotspot Hotspot. currently connected devices.
When the car is online, its Internet connection 3. Tap on Network name and name the Related information
can be shared to allow other devices to use the
Internet connection15.
shared connection. • Symbols in the centre display's status bar
4. Tap on Password and select a password to (p. 116)
be entered on connecting devices. • Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
5. Tap on Frequency band and select the fre- • No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)
quency on which the hotspot is to transmit
data. Note that selection of frequency band
is not available in all markets.
6. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
box for Car Wi-Fi Hotspot.
7. If Wi-Fi has previously been used as a con-
nection source, confirm the option to change
connection.
> It is now possible for external devices to
connect to the car's tethering (Wi-Fi hot-
spot).
NOTE
Activation of Wi-Fi-hotspot can result in fur-
ther charges from your network operator.
Contact your network operator about the cost
The network operator (SIM card) must support for data traffic.
tethering (sharing of the Internet connection).
1. Press Settings in the top view. Connection status is indicated by the symbol in
the centre display's status bar.
15 Does not apply when the car is online via Wi-Fi.
No or poor Internet connection Related information Remove Wi-Fi network

Factors that affect the Internet connection. • Internet-connected car* (p. 526) Removing a network that is not to be used.
The amount of data transferred is dependent on • Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 532)
the services or apps in use in the car. For exam-
ple, streaming audio can require large amounts of 2. Continue to Communication Wi-Fi
data which requires a good connection and good Saved networks.
signal strength. 3. Tap on Forget alongside the network to be
removed.
Phone to car
The speed of the Internet connection may vary 4. Confirm the selection.
depending on the location of the phone in the > The car will no longer connect to the net-
car. Move the phone closer to the centre display work in future.
in order to increase the signal strength. Ensure
that there is no source of interference in Remove all networks
between. All networks can be removed simultaneously by
restoring factory settings. Please note that all
Phone to network operator user data and system settings are reset to origi-
The speed of the mobile network varies depend- nal factory settings.
ing on the coverage in the present location. Poor
network coverage may occur, for example in tun- Related information
nels, in mountainous country, in deep valleys or • Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
indoors. The speed also depends on the agree- • No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)
ment you have with your network.
(p. 127)
NOTE
• Connecting the car to the Internet via a
In the event of problems with data traffic, con- mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 528)
tact your network operator.
Restarting the phone

If there are problems with the Internet connection
then it may help to restart the phone.
Wi-Fi technologies and security User terms and conditions and data Activating and deactivating data
Possible network types to connect to. sharing sharing
The first time certain services and apps are Data sharing for services and apps required can
It is only possible to connect to the following started, a pop-up window with the headings be set in the centre display's settings menu.
types of network: Terms and conditions and Data sharing may 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
• Frequency — 2.4 or 5 GHz16. be shown. display.
The purpose is to inform about Volvo's user
• Standards — 802.11 a/b/g/n.
terms and conditions and policy for data sharing. 2. Press System Privacy and data.
• Security type - WPA2-AES-CCMP. By accepting data sharing, the user accepts that 3. Select Data sharing to activate or deacti-
The car’s Wi-Fi system is designed to handle certain information is sent from the car. This is vate data sharing.
Wi-Fi devices inside the car. required so that certain services and apps can
4. When data sharing is activated, settings for
have full functionality.
If several devices operate on the frequency at the individual services and apps can be changed
same time then it may result in reduced perform- Data sharing can be set from the centre display's in the list below.
ance. settings menu.
When data sharing is deactivated, the earlier set-
Related information Related information tings for individual services and apps remain
• Internet-connected car* (p. 526) • Activating and deactivating data sharing available when data sharing is reactivated.
(p. 532)
Related information
(p. 532)
16 Selection of frequency is not available on all markets.
Compatible media formats Format File extension Max file size 4 GB

The following file formats must be used for
media playback. AVI .avi Audio codec MP3, AC3
AVI (DivX) .avi, divx Subtitles XSUB
Audio files
For- File extension Codec ASF .asf, .wmv Special func- Multiple subtitles, multiple
mat tions audio, resume play
MKV .mkv
MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III, Reference Meets all requirements of
MPEG2 Layer III, Subtitles the DivX Home Theater pro-
MP3 Pro (mp3 file. Visit divx.com for more
Format File extension information and software
compatible),
MP3 HD (mp3 SubViewer .sub tools to convert your files
compatible) into DivX Home Theater
SubRip .srt video.
AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC (MPEG-4
part III Audio), SSA .ssa
Related information
HE-AAC (aacPlus DivX® • Media player (p. 502)
v1/v2)
DivX certified devices have been tested for high- • Video (p. 507)
WMA .wma WMA8/9, quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you
• Playing back DivX® (p. 508)
WMA9/10 Pro see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play
DivX films.
WAV .wav LPCM
FLAC .flac FLAC Profile DivX Home Theater
Video codec DivX, MPEG-4
Video files
Format File extension Resolution 720x576
MP4 .mp4, m4v Bit rate 4.8Mbps
MPEG-PS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v Frame rate 30 fps

File extension .divx, .avi
533
Technical specifications for USB Storage space on hard disk

devices It is possible to view how much free space there
The following specifications must be met to is on the car's hard disk.
allow the contents of the USB devices to be Storage information for the car's hard disk,
read. including total capacity, available capacity and
No folder structure will be shown in the centre how much space is used for installed apps can
display during playback. be shown. The information is available under
Settings System System Information
Max number Storage.
Files 15 000 Related information

Folders 1 000
• Apps (p. 493)
Folder levels 8
Playlists 100
Items in a playlist 1 000
Subfolders No limit
Technical specification for USB A

connector
• Type A socket
• Version 2.0
• Voltage supply 5 V
• Current supply max. 2.1 A
Related information
• Media via USB port (p. 509)
534
License agreement for audio and Dirac Unison® DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logotypes
media are trademarks belonging to DivX, LLC and are
A license is an agreement for the right to oper- used under licence.
ate a certain activity or the right to use someone This DivX Certified® device can play back DivX®
else's entitlement according to the terms and Home Theater video files up to 576p (includ-
conditions in the agreement. The following texts ing .avi, .divx). Download free software on
are Volvo's agreements with manufacturers/ www.divx.com to create, play back and stream
developers. digital video.
Bowers & Wilkins ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified® device must be registered in order to
Dirac Unison co-optimises the loudspeakers in play back purchased DivX Video-on-Demand
frequency, time and space for the best possible (VOD) films. Get the registration code by locating
bass integration and clarity. It enables a faithful the DivX VOD section in the device's settings
reproduction of the acoustic characteristics of menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on
specific performance venues. Using advanced how to complete the registration.
algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all loudspeak-
ers digitally based on acoustic high-precision Patent numbers
measurements. Like a conductor of an orchestra, Protected by one or more of the following US
it guarantees that the loudspeakers perform in patents. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks of perfect unison. 8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.
the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trademark of
B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered trademark DivX® Gracenote®
of DuPont.
}}
535
|| Parts of the content are copyright © of note servers will be terminated if you violate note has no obligation to provide you with new,
Gracenote or its suppliers. these restrictions. If your license is terminated improved or additional data types or categories
you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data, that Gracenote may provide in the future, and the
Gracenote,Gracenote logo and logotype,
Gracenote software and Gracenote servers. company reserves the right to discontinue its
"Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID
Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all Gracenote services at any time.
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
data, all Gracenote software and all Gracenote
Gracenote, Inc. in the USA and/or other coun- GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES,
servers, including all ownership rights. Gracenote
tries. EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
will under no circumstances have any obligation
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRAN-
Gracenote® End User License Agreement to pay you for any information you provide. You
TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
This program or device contains software from agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce the com-
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-
Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA pany's rights under this agreement against you
INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROP-
("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote directly in its own name.
ERTY RIGHTS. GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUAR-
("Gracenote software") activates this program to The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to ANTEE THE RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH
perform disc and/or file identification and obtain track enquiries for statistical purposes. The pur- YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
music-related information, including name, artist, pose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is OR A GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE
track and title ("Gracenote data") from online to enable the Gracenote service to count enqui- WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CON-
servers or embedded databases (together called ries without knowing anything about who you are. SEQUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST
"Gracenote servers") and in order to perform Additional information is available on the web PROFITS OR REVENUES.
other actions. You may only use Gracenote data page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Grace-
in accordance with the intended end-user func- © Gracenote, Inc. 2009
note service.
tions for this program or this device.
The Gracenote software and everything included Sensus software
You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote in Gracenote data are licensed to you "as is". This software uses parts of sources from clib2
software and Gracenote servers for your own Gracenote provides no undertakings or warran- and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source
personal non-commercial use. You agree not to ties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994),
assign, copy, transfer or transmit this Gracenote Gracenote data contained in the Gracenote serv- and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990,
software or any Gracenote data to any third party. ers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data 1993), The Regents of the University of
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT from the Gracenote servers or to change data California. All or some portions are derived from
GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE SOFTWARE categories for any reason that Gracenote deems material licensed to the University of California by
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS sufficient. No warranty is provided that the Grace- American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN THIS AGREEMENT. note software or Gracenote servers are fault-free System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced
You agree that your non-exclusive right to use or that the Gracenote software or Gracenote herein with the permission of UNIX System
Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Grace- servers will operate without interruption. Grace- Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in
536
source and binary forms, with or without THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
modification, are permitted provided that the POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
following conditions are met: Redistributions of SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
This software is based in part on the work of the
source code must retain the above copyright CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
Independent JPEG Group.
notice, this list of conditions and the following WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must This software uses parts of sources from TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
conditions and the following disclaimer in the Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
documentation and/or other materials provided 26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice,
with the distribution. Neither the name of the Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be
<ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
contributors may be used to endorse or promote by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. sale, use or other dealings in this Software
products derived from this software without All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] without prior written authorization from Silicon
specific prior written permission. THIS Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Graphics, Inc.
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
This software is based in parts on the work of the
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND any person obtaining a copy of this software and
FreeType Team.
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, associated documentation files (the "Software"),
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE to deal in the Software without restriction, This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY including without limitation the rights to use, Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, ([email protected]). All rights reserved
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE and to permit persons to whom the Software is Linux software
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, furnished to do so, subject to the following This product contains software licensed under
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR conditions: The above copyright notice including GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, the dates of first publication and either this Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in You have the right of acquisition, modification,
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
all copies or substantial portions of the Software. and distribution of the source code of the GPL/
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", LGPL software.
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, You may download Source Code from the
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT following website at no charge: http://
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A download/TVM_8351_013
}}
537
|| The website provides the Source Code "As Is" PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN the above copyright notice(s) and this permission
and without warranty of any kind. NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
By downloading Source Code, you expressly
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES and this permission notice appear in associated
assume all risk and liability associated with
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in
downloading and using the Source Code and
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR each modified Data File or in the Software as
complying with the user agreements that
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; well as in the documentation associated with the
accompany each Source Code.
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER Data File(s) or Software that the data or software
Please note that we cannot respond to any CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, has been modified.
inquiries regarding the source code. WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
camellia:1.2.0 PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
Copyright (c) 2006, 2007 ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Corporation). All rights reserved. DAMAGE.
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
Redistribution and use in source and binary Unicode: 5.1.0 NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
forms, with or without modification, are permitted COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
provided that the following conditions are met: COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS
Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
1. Redistributions of source code must retain reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
the above copyright notice, this list of http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
conditions and the following disclaimer as
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
the first lines of this file unmodified.
any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER
2. Redistributions in binary form must files and any associated documentation (the IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list "Data Files") or Unicode software and any OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
of conditions and the following disclaimer in associated documentation (the "Software") to OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
the documentation and/or other materials deal in the Data Files or Software without PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
provided with the distribution. restriction, including without limitation the rights SOFTWARE.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT `ÀS to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, copyright holder shall not be used in advertising
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a)
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
538
dealings in these Data Files or Software without Declaration of Conformity

prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
}}
539
|| Country/
Area
Brazil:
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não pode
causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br
EU:
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city. Hyogo, 669-1513, Japan
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation hereby declares that this type of radio equipment [Audio Navigation Unit] conforms with directive 2014/53/EU.
For more information, see support.volvocars.com.
The Uni-
ted Arab
Emirates:
540
Country/
Area
Kazakh-
stan:
Model name: NR 0V
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Exporting country: Japan
}}
541
|| Country/
Area
China: 1.
■ 使用频率 2.4 - 2.4835 GHz
■ 等效全向辐射率(EIRP) 天线增益 10dBi 时 ≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ①
■ 最大率谱密度天线增益 10dBi 时 ≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ①
■ 载频容限 20 ppm
■ 帯外发射率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP)
■ 杂散发射(辐射) 率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外)
• ≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)
• ≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)
• ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)
• ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)
• ≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz)
2.不得擅自更改发射频率大发射率(包括额外装射频率放大器)，不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线
3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业产生有害干扰一旦发现有干扰现象时，应立即停止使用，并采措施消除干扰后方可继续
使用
4.使用微率无线电设备，必须忍各种无线电业的干扰或工业科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰
5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用
542
Country/
Area
Korea: B 급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재)
이 기기는 가정용(B 급) 전자파적합기기로서 주로
가정에서 사용하는 것을 적으로 하며, 든
지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다.
해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없습니다.
Malaysia
This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical Standards)
Regulations 2000.To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (support.volvocars.com) and search for “SIRIM Label Verification”.
Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth)
Model: NR-0V
Type Approval No.:
RBAY/18A/1015S(15-4067)
}}
543
|| Country/
Area
Mexico:
Taiwan: 低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司商號或使用者均不得擅自
變更頻率加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能
第十四條
低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應
立停用，改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線
電通信低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備
之干擾
Related information
• Sound, media and Internet (p. 492)
• Gracenote® (p. 506)
• Sensus - online connectivity and entertain-
ment (p. 32)
WHEELS AND TYRES
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres New tyres are stored for future use. Examples of external
Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for
to carry load, provide grip on the road surface, use are cracks or discolouration.
dampen vibration and protect the wheel from
Tyre economy
wear.
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte- • Maintain the correct tyre pressure.
ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure • Avoid fast starts, heavy braking and squeal-
and speed rating are important for how the car ing tyres.
performs. • Tyre wear increases with speed.
The car is fitted with tyres according to the tyre • Correct wheel alignment is very important.
information sticker found on the driver's side door • Unbalanced wheels worsen tyre economy
pillar (between the front door and the rear door). and travelling comfort.
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin • The tyres must have the same direction of
WARNING rotation during their entire service life.
to harden at the same time as the friction
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
over the car. capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For • When you change tyres, the tyres with the
this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible best tread must be fitted on the rear wheels
when you replace them. This is especially impor- to reduce the risk of oversteer during heavy
Recommended tyres tant with regard to winter tyres. The last four dig- braking.
On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo origi- its in the sequence mean the week and year of • If you drive over kerbstones or deep holes
nal tyres that have the VOL1 marking on the side manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking you can damage the tyres and/or wheel rims
of the tyres. These tyres are carefully adapted to (Department of Transportation), and this is stated permanently.
the car. In the event of changing tyres, it is there- with four digits, for example 0717. The tyre is
fore important that the new tyres also have this then manufactured in week 07, year 2017. Tyre rotation
marking in order for the car's driving characteris- The car has no mandatory tyre rotation. Driving
tics, comfort and fuel consumption to be main- Tyre age style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition
tained. All tyres older than 6 years old should be affect how quickly the tyres age and wear. Cor-
checked by an expert even if they seem undam- rect tyre pressure results in more even wear.
aged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are
To avoid differences in tread depth and to pre-
hardly ever or never used. The function can
vent wear patterns forming on the tyres, the front
therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that
1 There may be deviations for certain tyre dimensions.
546
WHEELS AND TYRES
and rear wheels should be switched with each WARNING Dimension designation for tyre
other. A suitable distance for the first change is Designations for tyre dimension, load index and
approx. 5000 km (approx. 3100 miles) and then • Wheel rim size and tyre size for your
speed rating.
at 10000 km (approx. 6200 miles) intervals. Volvo are specified to meet stringent
requirements for stability and driving cha- The car has an approval for the complete vehicle
Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo work- racteristics. Unapproved combinations of with certain combinations of wheel rims and
shop is contacted for checking if you are uncer- wheel rim size and tyre size may have a tyres.
tain about tread depth. If significant differences in negative effect on the car's stability and
wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between driving characteristics. Designation of dimensions
tyres have already occurred, then the least worn All tyres have a dimension designation, such as:
tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Under- • Any damage caused by the fitting of
unapproved combinations of wheel rim 235/60 R18 103 V.
steer is normally easier to correct than oversteer,
and leads to the car continuing forwards in a size and tyre size is not covered by the
new car warranty. Volvo accepts no liabil- 235 Tyre width (mm)
straight line rather than having the rear end skid-
ding to one side, resulting in possible complete ity for death, personal injury or any costs
60 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre
loss of control over the car. This is why it is caused by such installations.
width (%)
important for the rear wheels never to lose grip
before the front wheels. Related information R Radial ply
• Checking tyre pressure (p. 550) 18 Rim diameter in inches
Storing wheels and tyres
When you store complete wheels (tyres fitted on • Tyres' rotation direction (p. 549)
103 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre
wheel rims) they should be hung up or positioned • Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 549) load, tyre load index (LI)
lying on their sides on the floor. • Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 552)
V Speed rating for maximum permitted
Tyres not fitted on rims must be stored lying on • Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 565) speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case
their sides or standing upright, but not hung up.
• Dimension designation for tyre (p. 547) 240 km/h (149 mph).)
IMPORTANT • Recommendations for loading (p. 579)

Load index
Tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and dark Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a
place, and should never be stored close to load index (LI). The car's weight determines the
solvents, petrol, oils, etc. load capacity required of the tyres.
}}
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| Speed rating WARNING Dimension designation for wheel

Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum rim
speed. Tyre speed rating, SS (Speed Symbol), The lowest permitted load index (LI) and
speed rating (SS) for the tyres for each Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in
must at least correspond with the car's top respective engine variant are shown in the accordance with the examples in the table
speed. The table below shows the maximum per- car's registration document. If a tyre with too below.
mitted speed for each speed rating (SS). The low a load index or speed rating is used, it The car has an approval for the complete vehicle
only exception to these regulations is winter may overheat and be damaged. with certain combinations of wheel rims and
tyres2, where a lower speed rating may be used. tyres.
If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be Related information All wheel rims have a dimension designation, for
driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for • Tyres (p. 546) example: 7.5Jx18x50.5.
example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of
160 km/h (100 mph).) The top speed at which • Dimension designation for wheel rim
the car can be driven depends on road condi- (p. 548) 7,5 Rim width in inches
tions, not the speed rating of the tyres. J Rim flange profile
NOTE 18 Rim diameter in inches
The maximum permitted speed is specified in 50,5 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
the table. centre to wheel contact surface against
the hub)
Q 160 km/h (100 mph) (used only on win- Related information

ter tyres)
• Tyres (p. 546)
T 190 km/h (118 mph) • Dimension designation for tyre (p. 547)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
W 270 km/h (168 mph)
Y 300 km/h (186 mph)
2 Both those with metal studs and those without.
548
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres' rotation direction NOTE Tread wear indicators on the tyres

Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to Tread wear indicators show the status of the
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the
only turn in one direction have the direction of tyre's tread depth.
same type and dimension, and also the same
rotation marked with an arrow.
make.
Related information
• Tyres (p. 546)
A tread wear indicator is a narrow elevation

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread
• The tyre must always rotate in the same pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters
direction throughout its lifespan. TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread
• Tyres should only be switched between front depth is down to 1.6 mm (1/16 inch), the tread
and rear positions, never between left and will be level in height with the tread wear indica-
right-hand sides, or vice versa. tors. Change to new tyres as soon as possible.
Remember that tyres with little tread depth pro-
• If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's
vide very poor grip in rain and snow.
braking characteristics and capacity to force
rain and slush out of the way are adversely Related information
affected. • Tyres (p. 546)
• Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
decrease the risk of skidding).
549
WHEELS AND TYRES
Checking tyre pressure Tyres are considered cold when they have the Adjusting tyre pressure
Correct tyre pressure helps to improve driving same temperature as the surrounding air. Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a nat-
stability, saves fuel and extends the service life of This temperature is normally reached when the ural phenomenon. The tyre pressure must there-
the tyres. car has been parked for at least three hours. fore sometimes be adjusted in order to maintain
the recommended tyre pressure.
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natu- After having driven approximately 1.6 km (1 mile) Use the tyre pressure recommended for cold
ral phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies these tyres are considered as warm. If you have tyres in order to achieve optimal tyre performance
depending on ambient temperature. Driving on to drive further than this to inflate the tyres, first and optimal wear.
tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could check and record the tyre pressure and inflate to
result in the tyres overheating and being dam- a suitable tyre pressure when you arrive at the
aged. Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, pump. NOTE
road noise and driving characteristics. To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure
When the outside temperature changes, the tyre
should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres"
Check the tyre pressures monthly. Use the tyre pressure also changes. A decrease in tempera-
means the tyres are the same temperature as
pressure recommended for cold tyres in order to ture of 10 degrees causes the tyre pressure to
the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours
achieve optimal tyre performance and optimal decrease 1 psi (7 kPa). Check the tyre pressure
after the car has been driven). After a few kil-
wear. Tyre pressure that is too low or too high regularly and adjust to the correct pressure,
ometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the
may cause uneven wear on the tyres. which is specified on the car's tyre information
pressure increases.
plate or certification label.
WARNING If you check the tyre pressure when the tyres are
1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tyre
• Tyre pressure that is too low is the most warm then you must never release any air. The
and then press the tyre pressure gauge
common cause of tyre failure and may tyres are warm due to driving and it is normal for
firmly down onto the valve.
result in serious cracks in the tyre, the the pressure to increase above the recom-
tread loosening or the tyre exploding, with mended pressure for cold tyres. A warm tyre with 2. Inflate to the recommended pressure.
unexpected loss of control of the car and tyre pressure equal to or below the recommenda-
increased risk of personal injury. tion for cold tyres may have a pressure that is far
too low.
• Tyres with pressure that is too low reduce
the load capacity of the car. Related information
• Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 550)
Cold tyres • Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551)
The tyre pressure must be checked when the
tyres are cold. • Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 552)
• Tyres (p. 546)
WHEELS AND TYRES
3. Refit the dust cap. Related information Recommended tyre pressure

• Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551) The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
NOTE • Checking tyre pressure (p. 550) pillar (between frame and rear door) shows
which pressures the tyres should have at differ-
• After a tyre has been inflated, always refit • Inflating tyres with the compressor from the
ent loads and speed conditions.
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to puncture repair kit (p. 569)
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
• Approved tyre pressures (p. 662)
• Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
4. Check the tyres visually for any implanted

nails or other objects that could puncture the
tyre and cause leakage.
5. Check the sidewalls for any cavities, cuts,
bumps or other irregularities.
6. Repeat this for all tyres, including the spare
tyre*. The plate displays the designation for the factory-
fitted tyres on the car, as well as load limits and
tyre pressure.
NOTE
Improved fuel economy with ECO pressure
If you have over-inflated, release air by press-
ing in the metal pin in the centre of the valve. For a light load (max. 3 people) and a speed of
Then check the pressure again using the tyre up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pressures
pressure gauge. can be chosen for optimum fuel economy. How-
ever, the lower comfort pressures are recom-
Some spare tyres require a higher tyre pres- mended instead if optimum noise and travelling
sure than other tyres. Check in the tyre pres- comfort are desired.
sure table or on the tyre pressure plate.
Related information
• Approved tyre pressures (p. 662)
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyre pressure monitoring system* Each tyre, including the spare tyre*, should be will flash for about one minute and then remain
The tyre pressure monitoring system, Indirect checked once a month. When checking, the tyre illuminated. This procedure will be repeated when
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), gives should be cold and have the air pressure recom- the car is started until the fault has been rectified.
a warning with an indicator symbol in the driver mended by the car manufacturer specified on the When the symbol is illuminated, the system's abil-
display when the pressure in one or more of the tyre pressure label or in the tyre pressure table. If ity to detect or warn of low tyre pressure may be
car's tyres is too low. the car has tyres of a different size than that rec- affected.
ommended by the manufacturer, find out what A TPMS system fault can occur for several rea-
Symbol Explanation
the correct air pressure level is for these. sons, such as after changing to a spare tyre, or
The symbol illuminates to indicate As an extra safety feature, the car is equipped changing tyres or wheels that prevent TPMS from
low tyre pressure. with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS), functioning correctly.
If there is a fault in the system the which shows when the air pressure in one or Always check the indicator symbol for TPMS
tyre pressure warning symbol more tyres is too low. When the indicator symbol after changing one or more tyres in order to
flashes for approximately one for low air pressure is lit, stop and check the tyres ensure the new tyre or wheel is working correctly
minute and then remains illumi- as soon as possible and inflate to the correct air with TPMS.
nated. pressure.
Driving with tyres that have tyre pressure that is Messages on the instrument panel
System description too low may cause the tyre to overheat, which When the tyre pressure is too low, the indicator
The tyre pressure monitoring system measures can cause a puncture. Low tyre pressure also symbol for low tyre pressure is illuminated in the
differences in rotation speed between the differ- reduces fuel efficiency as well as tyre service life, driver display and a message is shown.
ent wheels via the ABS system in order to be and can affect car handling and stopping ability. • Tyre pressure low Check tyres, calibrate
able to determine whether they have the correct Note that TPMS does not replace regular tyre after fill
tyre pressure. If the tyre pressure is too low, the maintenance. It is the driver's responsibility to
tyre's diameter is changed and, as a result, so is maintain correct tyre pressure, even if the limit for • Tyre pressure system Temporarily
its rotation speed. By comparing the tyres with low tyre pressure has not been reached so that
unavailable
each other the system can determine whether the indicator symbol illuminates. • Tyre pressure system Service required
one or more tyres have pressure that is too low.
The car is also equipped with a TPMS system To bear in mind
General information on the tyre monitoring fault indicator, which indicates when the system • Always calibrate the system after a wheel
system is not functioning correctly. The TPMS system change or tyre pressure adjustment. See the
In the information below, the tyre monitoring sys- fault indicator is combined with the indicator sym- tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
tem is referred to generically as TPMS. bol for low tyre pressure. When the system
detects a fault, the symbol in the driver display
WHEELS AND TYRES
pillar for Volvo's recommended tyre pres- • Calibrate the system for tyre pressure moni- Calibrate the system for tyre
sures. toring* (p. 553) pressure monitoring*
• If you change to tyres of a different size to In order for the system for tyre pressure monitor-
the ones fitted at the factory, the system ing, Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
must be calibrated for these tyres to avoid (ITPMS) to work correctly, a reference value for
false warnings. the tyre pressure must be determined. This must
• If a spare wheel* is used, it is possible that be performed each time the tyres are changed
the tyre pressure monitoring system does not or the tyre pressure is changed.
work correctly due to the differences For example, when driving with a heavy load or at
between the wheels. high speed above 160 km/h (100 mph), the tyre
• The system does not replace the need for pressure should be adjusted in accordance with
regular tyre inspection and maintenance. Volvo's recommended tyre pressure values. Fol-
• It is not possible to switch off the tyre pres- lowing which, the system must be recalibrated.
sure monitoring system. 1. Switch off the car.
2. Inflate the tyres to the desired pressure in
WARNING accordance with the tyre pressure label on
• Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre the door pillar on the driver's side.
failure, which could result in the driver 3. Start the car.
losing control of the car.
4. Open the Car status app in the app view.
• The system cannot indicate sudden tyre
damage in advance.
Related information
• Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551)
• See tyre pressure statue in the centre dis-
play* (p. 555)
• Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 556)
}}
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| 5. Press TPMS. 8. Run the car until calibration is complete. NOTE

Calibration is performed when the car is Remember to always calibrate the tyre pres-
driven at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph). sure monitoring system when you have
> When sufficient data has been collected changed a wheel or if the tyre pressure has
to enable the system to detect low tyre been changed according to the tyre pressure
pressure, the tyres in the centre display label or tyre pressure table.
change colour from grey to green. The
If correct reference values have not been set,
system provides no additional confirma-
the system may not warn correctly about low
NOTE tion that the calibration is complete.
tyre pressure.
The car must be stationary when calibration is If the car's ignition is switched off before
The car must be stationary with the engine
started. calibration is complete, the tyres in the
running for you to have access to the calibra-
centre display change colour from grey to
tion button and start the calibration process.
green upon next start-up, even if calibra-
6. Press Calibrate.
tion is not complete. Perform calibration
7. Tap on OK to confirm that the tyre pressure again and allow it to complete within the WARNING
in all four tyres has been checked and same operating cycle to ensure that the
adjusted. calibration is carried out correctly. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
which is invisible and odourless, but highly
If start-up of calibration fails, the following toxic. For this reason, calibration must always
message appears: Calibration be performed outside or in a workshop with
unsuccessful. Try again.. exhaust extraction.
Related information
• See tyre pressure statue in the centre dis-
play* (p. 555)
• Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 556)
• Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 552)
WHEELS AND TYRES
See tyre pressure statue in the All tyres grey:

centre display* • Calibration in progress.
With the system for tyre pressure monitoring,
Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
• Unknown status.
(ITPMS), tyre pressure status can be viewed in Several minutes driving above 35 km/h (22 mph)
the centre display. may be required for the system to become active.
All tyres grey and a message:
Checking status
1. Open the Car status app in the app view. • Tyre pressure system Temporarily
unavailable. The indicator symbol flashes
and changes to constant glow after approx. 1
minute. The system is currently unavailable,
activated shortly.
Green tyre:
• Tyre pressure system Service required.
• The tyre pressure is above the limit value for The indicator symbol flashes and changes to
a warning. constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The
2. Tap on TPMS to show the status of the Yellow tyre: system is not working correctly, contact a
tyres. workshop4.
• The tyre's pressure is too low. Stop and
check/rectify the tyre pressure by inflating as Related information
soon as possible. Calibrate the system after • Calibrate the system for tyre pressure moni-
the tyre pressure has been adjusted. toring* (p. 553)
All tyres yellow: • Action in the event of warning for low tyre
• The pressure is too low in two or more tyres. pressure (p. 556)
Status indication
Stop and check/rectify the tyre pressures by • Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 552)
inflating as soon as possible. Calibrate the
The graphics in the centre display show the sta-
system after the tyre pressures have been • Car status (p. 592)
tus for each tyre3. adjusted.
3 The figure is schematic. Layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.
4 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Action in the event of warning for NOTE • Calibrate the system for tyre pressure moni-
low tyre pressure toring* (p. 553)
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure
When the tyre pressure monitoring system,
should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" • See tyre pressure statue in the centre dis-
Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
means the tyres are the same temperature as play* (p. 555)
(ITPMS) gives a warning, the tyre pressure in
one or more of the car's tyres is too low and
the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours • Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 552)
after the car has been driven). After a few kil- • Inflating tyres with the compressor from the
action is required.
ometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the puncture repair kit (p. 569)
Check and rectify the tyre pressure
pressure increases.
when the indicator symbol for the sys-
tem is illuminated and the Tyre
pressure low message is shown. NOTE
1. Switch off the car. • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
2. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres with the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
a tyre pressure gauge. the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
3. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure as • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
indicated on the tyre pressure label on the
unscrew.
door pillar on the driver's side.
4. Perform calibration of the system via the
centre display after tyre pressure adjustment. WARNING
Note that the indicator symbol does not • Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
extinguish until the low tyre pressure has failure, which could result in the driver
been rectified and new calibration has been losing control of the car.
performed. • The system cannot indicate sudden tyre
damage in advance.
Related information
WHEELS AND TYRES
When changing wheels Tool kit Jack*

The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to winter Tools that can be useful during towing, wheel The jack can be used to raise the car, for exam-
wheels or a spare wheel. Follow the relevant changes or similar are found in the car's cargo ple, to change to the spare wheel.
instructions for removing and fitting wheels. area.
When changing to another tyre

dimension
Check that the tyre dimension is approved for
use on the car.
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for updat-
ing the software at each change of tyre dimen-
sion. A software download may be necessary
both when changing to larger and smaller dimen-
sions, and also when switching between summer
and winter wheels.
Related information The figure is schematic - the version may vary.

The foam block under the cargo area floor con-
• Removing a wheel (p. 559)
tains the car's towing eye, puncture repair kit, tool
• Fitting the wheels (p. 561) for removing the plastic caps from the wheel
• Tool kit (p. 557) bolts and a socket for the lockable wheel bolts.
• Winter wheels (p. 563) If the car is equipped with spare wheel* then a
• Spare wheel* (p. 562) jack and wheel wrench are included, as well as a
package with disposable gloves and a bag for the
• Wheel bolts (p. 558)
damaged wheel.
Related information
• When changing wheels (p. 557)
• Jack* (p. 557)
}}
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| IMPORTANT Wheel bolts Related information

Wheel bolts are used to attach the wheels to the • Removing a wheel (p. 559)
• When the jack* is not in use it must be
stored in its storage space under the
hubs. • Fitting the wheels (p. 561)
cargo area floor.
IMPORTANT
• The jack included with the car is only
The wheel bolts must be tightened to
designed for occasional, short-term use,
140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). Overtightening or loose
such as when changing a wheel after a
tightening may damage the nuts and the
puncture. Only the jack belonging to the
bolts.
specific model is to be used to jack up
the car. If the car is to be jacked up more
often, or for a longer time than is required Only use rims that are tested and approved by
just to change a wheel, use of a garage Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories.
jack is recommended. In this instance, Check the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
follow the instructions for use that come with a torque wrench.
with the equipment.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel
bolts.
The jack needs to be cranked together to the
correct position in order to have space.
WARNING
Models with self-levelling*
The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened
If the car is equipped with the air suspension several days after the change. Temperature
option then this function must be deactivated differences and vibration may mean that they
before the car is raised with the jack. are not attached equally as tightly.
Related information
• Tool kit (p. 557) Locking wheel bolts*
In the foam block under the cargo area floor
there is space for the sleeve for the lockable
wheel bolts.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Removing a wheel WARNING 1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the
Instructions for removing a wheel when chang- hazard warning lights if a tyre is being
ing wheels. Wheel changes must always be per- • Apply the parking brake and set the gear changed in a trafficked location.
selector in Park position (P).
formed correctly. 2. Apply the parking brake and engage gear
IMPORTANT • Chock the wheels standing on the ground position P, or engage first gear if the car has
using solid wood blocks or large stones. a manual gearbox.
• When the jack* is not in use it must be
• Check that the jack is not damaged, that
stored in its storage space under the Applies to cars with Leveling Control*: If
the threads are thoroughly lubricated and
cargo area floor. the car is equipped with air suspension, this
that it is free from dirt.
must be disabled before the car is raised
• The jack included with the car is only
• Check that the jack is resting on a firm, with a jack*.
designed for occasional, short-term use, level surface that is not slippery and is
such as when changing a wheel after a not slanted. 3. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and tools
puncture. Only the jack belonging to the for the wheel bolts' plastic caps that are fitted
specific model is to be used to jack up • The jack must be correctly attached in
in the foam block.
the car. If the car is to be jacked up more the jack's bracket.
often, or for a longer time than is required • Never position anything between the
just to change a wheel, use of a garage ground and the jack, nor between the
jack is recommended. In this instance, jack and the car's jacking point.
follow the instructions for use that come • Passengers must leave the car when it is
with the equipment. raised on the jack.
• If a wheel must be changed in a traf-
ficked environment, passengers must
stand in a safe place.
• Use a jack designed for the car when
changing tyres. Use supports to secure
the car for all other work.
Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
• Never crawl under the car or reach under
with a part of your body when it is raised 4. Chock in front of and behind the wheels that
on a jack. remain on the ground. Use, for example,
heavy wooden blocks or large stones.
}}
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| 5. Screw together the towing eye with the 8. When raising the car, it is important that the 11. Turn the jack so that the crank is as far away
wheel wrench* until the stop position as per jack* or lifting arms are fitted in the intended from the side of the car as possible, at which
the instructions. points on the car's underbody. The triangle point the jack's arms are perpendicular to the
markings in the plastic cover indicate the direction of the car.
locations of the jacking/lifting points. There 12. Raise the car high enough to allow the wheel
are two jacking points on each side of the to be removed to move freely. Remove the
car. There is a recess for the jack at each wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.
point.
Related information
• Raise the car (p. 595)
• Jack* (p. 557)
IMPORTANT
• Tool kit (p. 557)
The towing eye must be screwed into the
• Fitting the wheels (p. 561)
wheel bolt wrench* as far as possible.
6. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel

bolts with the intended tool.
7. With the car still on the ground, use the 9. Position the jack on level, firm and non-slip-
wheel bolt wrench/towing eye to undo the pery ground under the jacking point that will
wheel bolts ½-1 turn by pressing downwards be used.
(anticlockwise). 10. Crank up until it is correctly aligned and so
that it makes contact with the car's jacking
point. Check that the head of the jack (or the
lift arms at a workshop) is correctly posi-
tioned in the jacking point so that the bump
in the centre of the head fits into the jacking
point hole and the base is positioned verti-
cally below the jacking point.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Fitting the wheels WARNING 1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel
Instructions for fitting a wheel when changing and hub.
wheels. • Apply the parking brake and set the gear
selector in Park position (P). 2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
NOTE thoroughly.
• Chock the wheels standing on the ground
The jack included with the car is only using solid wood blocks or large stones. Do not use lubricant on the threads of the
designed for occasional, short-term use, such wheel bolts.
• Check that the jack is not damaged, that
as when changing a wheel after a puncture. the threads are thoroughly lubricated and 3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
Only the jack belonging to the specific model that it is free from dirt. rotate.
is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to
be jacked up more often, or for a longer time • Check that the jack is resting on a firm, 4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is impor-
than is required just to change a wheel, use level surface that is not slippery and is tant that the wheel bolts are tightened prop-
of a garage jack is recommended. In this not slanted. erly. Tighten to 140 Nm (103 ft.lbs.). Check
instance, follow the instructions for use that • The jack must be correctly attached in the tightening torque with a torque wrench.
come with the equipment. the jack's bracket.
• Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the
jack and the car's jacking point.
• Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
• If a wheel must be changed in a traf-
ficked environment, passengers must
stand in a safe place.
• Use a jack designed for the car when
changing tyres. Use supports to secure
the car for all other work.
5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
• Never crawl under the car or reach under
with a part of your body when it is raised
on a jack.
}}
561
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| WARNING Spare wheel* WARNING

The spare wheel, the Temporary spare type, can
The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened
be used to temporarily replace a punctured nor-
• Never drive faster than 80 km/h
several days after the change. Temperature (50 mph) with a spare wheel fitted on the
differences and vibration may mean that they mal wheel.
car.
are not attached equally as tightly. The spare tyre is only designed for temporary
use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as • The car must never be driven fitted with
possible. more than one spare wheel of the type
NOTE "Temporary Spare" at the same time.
The car's driving characteristics can be changed
• After a tyre has been inflated, always refit when the spare wheel is used and the ground • The car may have different driving charac-
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to clearance is reduced. Do not wash the car in an teristics while driving with the spare
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. automatic car wash if the Temporary Spare is wheel. The spare wheel must be replaced
with a normal wheel as soon as possible.
• Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust being used.
Recommended tyre pressure must be maintained • The spare wheel is smaller than the nor-
unscrew. mal wheel, which affects the car's ground
regardless of the position of the temporary spare
clearance. Look out for high kerbs and do
wheel on the car.
not machine-wash the car.
Related information If the spare tyre is damaged then a new one can
• Settings for level control* (p. 452) be purchased from a Volvo dealer.
• Follow the manufacturer's recommended
tyre pressure for the spare wheel.
• Raise the car (p. 595) • On all-wheel drive cars, the drive on the
rear axle can be disengaged.
• Jack* (p. 557)
• If the spare wheel is fitted to the front
• Tool kit (p. 557) axle then it is not possible to use snow
• Removing a wheel (p. 559) chains at the same time.
• The spare wheel must not be repaired.
WHEELS AND TYRES
IMPORTANT Taking out the spare wheel Winter wheels

Follow these instructions for handling the spare Winter wheels are adapted for winter road con-
The car must not be driven with tyres of dif-
wheel. ditions.
ferent sizes or with a spare tyre other than
1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear
the one supplied with the car. Using different- Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular
and forwards.
sized wheels can cause serious damage to dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on
the car's transmission. 2. Undo the straps and lift out the spare wheel. engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the
correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four
Storing the punctured tyre
wheels.
1. Take out the wheel bag enclosed in the foam
block and put the wheel in the bag.
NOTE
2. Put the tools back in their right place in the
foam block and lift it back into the car. Contact a Volvo dealer for advice about which
wheel rim and type of tyre are most suitable.
3. Screw in the foam block using the mounting
screws and then fold down the cargo area
floor. Tips for changing to winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are changed,
4. Place the punctured tyre in the cargo area. mark which side of the car they were mounted
on, for example L for left and R for right.
Storing the punctured tyre
1. Take out the wheel bag enclosed in the foam Studded tyres
block and put the wheel in the bag. Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
The spare wheel is located under the cargo area 500-1000 km (300-600 miles), so the studs
2. Put the tools back in their right place in the
floor and is attached by two straps. The foam settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre,
foam block and lower the cargo area floor.
block contains all the tools for changing a wheel. and especially the studs, a longer service life.
3. Place the punctured tyre in the cargo area.
Related information
• When changing wheels (p. 557) Related information NOTE
• Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551) • Spare wheel* (p. 562) The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
}}
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| Tread depth Snow chains IMPORTANT

Road conditions with ice, slush and low tempera- Use of snow chains and/or winter tyres can help
tures place considerably higher demands on tyres Snow chains can be used on the car with the
to improve the traction in winter conditions.
than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recom- following restrictions:
WARNING
mends not to drive on winter tyres that have a • Volvo does not recommend the use of
tread depth of less than 4 mm (0.15 inches). Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent show chains on wheel dimensions
chains designed for the car model, and tyre greater than 18 inches.
Related information and rim dimensions. Only single-sided snow
• When changing wheels (p. 557) chains are permitted. • Always follow the mounting instructions
from the manufacturer carefully. Fit the
• Winter driving (p. 457) In the event of uncertainty about the show
chain, Volvo recommends that an authorised chains as tensioned as possible and ten-
• Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 549) Volvo workshop should be contacted. The sion them at regular intervals.
wrong snow chains may cause serious dam- • Snow chains must only be used on the
age to the car and lead to an accident. front wheels (also applies to all-wheel
drive cars).
• In some cases, snow chains must NOT
be used, such as if accessory, aftermar-
ket or "special" tyres and wheels are fit-
ted that have a different size to the origi-
nal tyres and wheels. Sufficient distance
must be maintained between the chains
and brakes, suspension and body compo-
nents.
• Check local regulations with regard to
using snow chains before fitting them.
• Never exceed the chain manufacturer's
specified maximum speed. You must
never exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) under
any circumstances.
• Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns when
driving with snow chains.
564
WHEELS AND TYRES
• Avoid driving on bare ground as this Emergency puncture repair kit

wears out both the snow chains and The emergency puncture repair kit5, is used to
tyres. seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust
• Driving with snow chains may have a the air pressure in the tyre.
negative effect on the car's driving cha-
Cars equipped with spare tyre* do not have the
racteristics. Avoid fast or sharp turns, as
puncture repair kit.
well as braking with locked wheels.
• Some types of chain that are firmly ten- The puncture repair kit consists of a compressor
sioned affect brake components and and a bottle with sealing fluid. The sealing works
must therefore NOT be used. as a temporary repair.
You can obtain more information on snow chains NOTE

from a Volvo retailer. The sealing fluid is effective at sealing tyres Sealing fluid bottle
with tread punctures but has limited ability to The bottle of sealing fluid must be replaced if the
Related information seal tyres with sidewall punctures. Do not use bottle's expiry date has passed (see the decal on
• Winter driving (p. 457) the emergency puncture repair kit on tyres the bottle). Treat the old bottle as environmentally
displaying larger slits, cracks or similar dam- hazardous waste.
age. The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced after
use. Volvo recommends that the replacement is
NOTE performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
The compressor is intended for temporary Related information

emergency puncture repair and is approved • Using a puncture repair kit (p. 566)
by Volvo. • Inflating tyres with the compressor from the
puncture repair kit (p. 569)
Location • Tyres (p. 546)
The puncture repair kit is located in the foam
block under the floor in the cargo area.
5 Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK)
WHEELS AND TYRES
Using a puncture repair kit Connecting WARNING

Seal a puncture with the emergency puncture
Please keep the following points in mind
repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK). when using the tyre sealing system:
Overview • The sealing fluid bottle contains 1) rubber
latex, natural and 2) ethanediol. These
substances are harmful if swallowed.
• The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the respiratory tract,
the skin, the central nervous system, and
the eyes.
Precautions:
• Store out of the reach of children.
NOTE
• Harmful if ingested.
Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The
seal is broken automatically when the bottle is • Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with
Electrical cable the skin. If sealing fluid has come into
screwed in.
contact with your clothes, remove them.
Air hose
• Wash thoroughly after handling.
Pressure reducing valve First aid:
Protective cap • Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention if
Label, maximum permitted speed symptoms occur.
Bottle holder (orange cap) • Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least
15 minutes, occasionally lifting the upper
Pressure gauge and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if
symptoms occur.
Sealing fluid bottle
Switch
566
WHEELS AND TYRES
• Inhalation: Move the exposed person to 3. Check that the switch is in position 0 (Off), 7. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical and locate the electrical cable and the air 12 V socket and start the car.
attention. hose.
• Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting 4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the NOTE
unless directed to do so by medical per- compressor, and unscrew the cork from the Make sure that none of the other 12 V sock-
sonnel. Get medical attention. sealing fluid bottle. ets is in use when the compressor is operat-
• Disposal: Dispose of this material and its 5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bot- ing.
container at a hazardous or special waste tle holder.
collection point.
The bottle and the bottle holder are equip- WARNING
ped with a reverse catch to prevent sealant Do not leave children in the car without
WARNING leakage. When the bottle is screwed in it supervision when the engine is running.
cannot be unscrewed from the bottle holder
• Do not remove the bottle when the punc-
again. Bottle removal must be performed at a
ture repair kit is being used.
workshop, Volvo recommends an authorised
• Do not remove the air hose when the Volvo workshop.
puncture repair kit is being used.
WARNING
1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with
hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed
a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
in a trafficked location.
If the puncture was caused by a nail or simi- 6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the
lar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to air hose's valve connection to the bottom of
seal the hole. the thread on the tyre's air valve.
2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted Check that the pressure reducing valve on
speed that is affixed on one side of the com- the air hose is fully screwed in.
pressor. Affix it visibly on the windscreen as a
reminder to observe the speed limit. You
should not drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit
has been used.
}}
567
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| 8. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to 10. Switch off the compressor to check the pres- 14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km
position I (On). sure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pres- (2 miles) at a maximum speed of 80 km/h
sure is 1.8 bar (22 psi) and maximum is (50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal
WARNING 3.5 bar (51 psi). Release air using the pres- the tyre, and then perform a follow-up check.
sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too
Never stand next to the tyre when the com- high.
pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness NOTE
arise then the compressor must be switched Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during
off immediately. The journey should not be WARNING the first few rotations of the tyre.
continued. Call roadside assistance for recov-
If the bottle is removed in the wrong order,
ery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an
sealing fluid could spill out.
authorised tyre centre.
WARNING
Make sure that nobody is standing near the
NOTE WARNING car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar (22 psi) then them when the car is driven away. The dis-
When the compressor starts, the pressure the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey tance should be at least 2 metres (7 feet).
can increase up to 6 bar (88 psi) but the should not be continued. Call roadside assis-
pressure drops after approximately tance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo rec-
30 seconds. ommends an authorised tyre centre. 15. Follow-up inspection
Connect the air hose on the tyre valve and
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes. 11. Switch off the compressor and detach the screw in the valve connection to the bottom
electrical cable. of the tyre valve's thread. The compressor
must be switched off.
IMPORTANT 12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre valve and
The compressor must not be operated for refit the dust cap on the tyre.
longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating. 13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order
to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing
fluid. Place the equipment in the cargo area.
568
WHEELS AND TYRES
16. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure WARNING Inflating tyres with the compressor
gauge. from the puncture repair kit
Maximum mileage with tyres containing seal-
• If it is below 1.3 bar (19 psi) then the tyre ing fluid is 200 km (120 miles). The car's original tyres can be inflated using the
is insufficiently sealed. The journey should compressor in the emergency puncture repair
not be continued. Call roadside assistance kit.
for recovery. NOTE
1. The compressor must be switched off. Make
• If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar The compressor is an electrical device. Follow sure that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and
(19 psi), the tyre must be inflated to the local regulations related to waste manage- take out the electrical cable and the air hose.
pressure specified in accordance with the ment.
tyre pressure label on the driver's side 2. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the
door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa = 14.5 psi). air hose's valve connection to the bottom of
Related information the thread on the tyre's air valve.
Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high. Check that the pressure reducing valve on
• Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 565)
the air hose is fully screwed in.
NOTE • Inflating tyres with the compressor from the
3. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
puncture repair kit (p. 569)
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be 12 V socket and start the car.
replaced after use. Volvo recommends that
this replacement is performed by an author- WARNING
ised Volvo workshop.
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running
in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient
WARNING ventilation.
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the
nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the Do not leave children in the car without
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise supervision when the engine is running.
the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I (On).
}}
569
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| IMPORTANT Related information

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not
run for more than 10 minutes. • Using a puncture repair kit (p. 566)
• Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 565)
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on
the tyre pressure label on the driver side
door pillar. Release air using the pressure
reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and the electrical cable.
7. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
NOTE
• After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
• Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
unscrew.
NOTE
The compressor is an electrical device. Follow
local regulations related to waste manage-
ment.
570
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COM-
PARTMENT
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Passenger compartment interior Rear seat Related information

Overview of the passenger compartment's inte- • Electrical sockets (p. 574)
rior and storage locations. • Using the glovebox (p. 577)
Front seat • Sun visors (p. 579)
• Tunnel console (p. 573)
• Connecting a device via USB port (p. 509)
Storage compartment in door panel, cup holder* in cen-

tre seat backrest, storage pocket* on front seat backrest,
electrical sockets in tunnel console, as well as storage
compartment under seat.
Storage compartment in the door panel, glovebox and
sun visor. WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc.
in the glove compartment or other compart-
ments. Otherwise they may injure people in
the car in the event of sudden braking or a
collision.
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for
example, are easily scratched by metal
objects. Do not place keys, phones and other
items on sensitive surfaces.
Storage spaces with cup holder, electrical socket and
USB port in the tunnel console.
Tunnel console WARNING

The tunnel console is located between the front
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
seats. cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc.
in the glove compartment or other compart-
ments. Otherwise they may injure people in
the car in the event of sudden braking or a
collision.
NOTE
One of the detectors for the alarm* is located
under the tunnel console's cup holder. Avoid
leaving coins, keys and other metal objects in
the cup holder, since this may trigger the
alarm.
Storage compartment with hatch*. The hatch
is opened/closed with a push on the handle. IMPORTANT
Storage compartment with cup holder for Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for
driver and passenger as well as 12V socket. example, are easily scratched by metal
Storage compartment and USB port under objects. Do not place keys, phones and other
the armrest. items on sensitive surfaces.
Climate controls for the rear seat climate
functions* or storage compartment. Related information
• Passenger compartment interior (p. 572)
• Electrical sockets (p. 574)
Electrical sockets High voltage socket*

There are two 12 V electrical sockets and one
230 V electrical socket* in the tunnel console,
and there is one 12 V electrical socket* in the
cargo area.
If a problem occurs with an electrical socket,
contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended.
12 V electrical socket
12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, rear seat.

Electrical socket in the tunnel console, rear seat.
The high-voltage socket* can be used for various
accessories designed for this, such as chargers
or laptops.
Status indication, high-voltage socket

An LED1 lamp on the socket indicates the status
of the socket:
12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, front seat.

The 12 V sockets can be used for various acces-
sories designed for this, such as music players,
cooler boxes and mobile phones. 12 V electrical socket in cargo area*.
Status indication Reason Action

Steady green light The socket is delivering current to a connected device. None.
Blinking orange light The temperature of the socket's voltage converter is too high (because for Remove the plug and let the voltage converter cool
example the accessory draws too high a current or the passenger compart- down before reinserting the plug.
ment is too warm).
The connected accessory draws too much current (intermittently or continu- None. The accessory cannot be connected to the
ously) or is defective. socket.
Extinguished lamp The socket does not sense that a plug has been inserted. Check that the plug is properly inserted into the
socket.
The socket is not active. Switch the car's electrical system to the lowest igni-
tion position I.
The socket has been active but is now deactivated. Start the engine and/or charge the starter battery.
Related information
• Using electrical sockets (p. 576)
575
Using electrical sockets NOTE Using 12 V sockets

12 V sockets can be used for various accesso- 1. Remove the blanking plug (tunnel console)
Remember that use of the electrical socket or fold down the cover (cargo area) in front
ries designed for this, such as music players,
with the engine switched off entails a risk of of the socket and plug in the accessory's
cooler boxes and mobile phones.
discharging the starter battery, which can limit connector.
High-voltage sockets* can be used for various functionality.
accessories designed for this, such as chargers 2. Unplug the accessory's connector and refit
Accessories that are connected to the electri- the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold up
and portable computers.
cal sockets may be activated even when the the cover (cargo area) when the socket is
For the sockets to supply current, the car's elec-
car's electrical system is disconnected or if not in use or if the socket is left unattended.
trical system must be set in the lowest ignition
preconditioning is used. For this reason, dis-
position I. The sockets are then active as long as
connect the connectors when they are not in
the starter battery level does not become too low.
use in order to avoid the starter battery being IMPORTANT
If the engine is switched off and the car is locked, discharged. Maximum socket output is 120 W (10 A) per
the sockets are deactivated. If the engine is socket.
switched off and the car is not locked, or is
locked with double lock temporarily deactivated, WARNING
Using high-voltage sockets
then the sockets continue to be active for a fur- • Do not use accessories with large or 1. Pull down the socket cover and insert the
ther seven minutes. heavy connectors - they can damage the accessory's plug.
socket or come loose when driving.
> The LED2 lamp on the socket indicates
• Do not use accessories that can cause the status.
interference to the car's radio receiver or
electrical system for example. 2. Check that the lamp is illuminated with a
steady green light - only then is current avail-
• Position the accessory so that it is not at
able at the socket.
risk of injuring the driver or passengers in
the event of heavy braking or collision. 3. Disconnect the accessory by pulling out the
plug - do not pull on the cable.
• Keep an eye on connected accessories
as they can generate heat that can burn Pull up the cover when the socket is not
passengers or the interior. being used or the socket is left unattended.
IMPORTANT WARNING Using the glovebox

The glovebox is located on the passenger side.
Maximum socket output is 150 W. • Only use accessories that are undam-
The printed owner's manual and maps can be
aged and fault-free. The accessories
kept in the glovebox, for example. There is also
must be rated for 230 V and 50 Hz with
WARNING space for a pen and card holder.
connectors designed for the socket. The
Never modify or repair the high-voltage accessories must have a CE marking, UL
socket yourself. Volvo recommends that an marking or an equivalent safety marking.
authorised Volvo workshop should be contac-
ted. • Never allow sockets, connectors or
accessories to come into contact with
water or other liquids. Do not touch or
use the socket if it appears to be dam-
aged or has come into contact with water
or other liquid.
• Do not connect junction sockets, adapt-
ers or extension cables to the socket as
these can override the socket's safety
features.
• The socket is equipped with a protective
cover, ensure that nothing protrudes in or
damages the socket preventing the cover
from doing its job. Do not leave children
in the car unsupervised when the socket
is active.
lead to severe or fatal electric shocks.
Related information
• Electrical sockets (p. 574)
}}
577
|| Locking and unlocking the glovebox*

The glovebox can be locked, e.g. when the car is
taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar. The
glovebox can only be locked/unlocked with the
accompanying key.
The figure is schematic - the design may vary. The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
Locking the glovebox: Activating cooling
Insert the key in the glovebox lock cylinder.
Deactivating cooling
Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise. Activate or deactivate the cooling by moving
–
The key's designated storage space. The figure is sche- Pull out the key. the control to the end position toward the
matic - the design may vary. passenger compartment/glovebox.
– Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.
Related information
Using the glovebox as a cooled area*
The glovebox can be used for cooling of e.g.
drinks or food. The cooling works when the cli- • Private locking (p. 272)
mate control system is active (i.e. when the car is
set in ignition position II or when the engine is
running).
Sun visors Cargo area Recommendations for loading

There are sun visors in the roof in front of the The car has a flexible cargo area that makes it There are a number of things to remember when
driver and the front seat passenger which can possible to transport and secure large objects. loading the car.
be folded down and angled out to the side when By folding down the backrests in the rear seat, Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
necessary. the cargo area can become quite spacious. To total of the weight of the passengers and all
facilitate loading and unloading, the rear section accessories reduces the car's payload by a cor-
of the car can be lowered with the level control responding weight.
function*. Use load retaining eyelets or bag hold-
ers to secure the load, and the extendable cargo WARNING
cover* to conceal the load if desired.
The car’s driving properties change depend-
The car's towing eye and puncture repair kit or ing on the weight and positioning of the load.
spare wheel* are stored under the cargo area
floor. Loading in the cargo area
Related information • Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
• Recommendations for loading (p. 579)
• Bag hooks (p. 581) • Centre the load.
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
• Load retaining eyelets (p. 581) • Heavy objects should be placed as low as
The mirror lighting* is switched on automatically possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on low-
when the lid is lifted. • Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 582) ered backrests.
The mirror frame incorporates a holder for e.g. • Cover sharp edges with something soft to
cards or tickets. avoid damaging the upholstery.
• Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets
Related information with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds)
can, in a frontal collision at a speed of
50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an
item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds).
}}
|| WARNING Level control of the car's rear section* NOTE

The car's rear section can be lowered/raised in
Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the order to create a better working height for the It is not possible to adjust the height of the
load and the side windows if the car is loaded rear section when one or more of the doors
to above the top edge of the door windows. car's cargo area or to assist when a trailer shall
be coupled/uncoupled to/from the towbar*. or the bonnet is open. This does not apply to
Otherwise, the intended protection of the the tailgate.
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the Level control is performed via a control at the
headlining, may be compromised.
rear on the right-hand side in the cargo area's
side panel. WARNING
WARNING Pay attention to ensure that there is no per-
Always secure the load. During heavy braking son, animal or object under the car when low-
the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to ering. This would involve danger to life and
the car's occupants. damage to the car or object.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with

something soft. Related information
Switch off the engine and apply the parking
• Load retaining eyelets (p. 581)
brake when loading/unloading long items. • Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
Otherwise you may accidentally knock the (p. 186)
gear lever or gear selector with the load into a
drive position - and the car could then move • Through-load hatch in the rear seat
off. (p. 582)
Controls for raising/lowering the car's rear section. • Roof load and loading on load carriers
Increasing the space in the cargo area (p. 581)
The control consists of two buttons - one button
To expand the cargo area and simplify loading, that lowers and one button that raises the rear
• Level control* and shock absorption (p. 449)
the rear seat's backrest can be lowered. Note section of the car. For raising or lowering, each • Weights (p. 651)
that objects must not prevent the function of the button must be held depressed until the rear sec-
WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the tion has reached the desired level.
rear seat's backrests is folded down.
It is not possible to raise the car's rear section
A through-load hatch in the rear seat can be higher than its normal level.
folded down for carrying long and narrow loads.
During driving, the rear section height will return
to the normal level.
Roof load and loading on load Bag hooks Load retaining eyelets
carriers Bag hooks keep carrier bags in place and pre- The folding load retaining eyelets are used to
For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers vent them from overturning and spreading their fasten straps in order to anchor items in the
that Volvo have developed are recommended. contents across the cargo area. cargo area.
This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in
order to achieve the maximum possible safety Along the sides
during a journey. Volvo's load carriers are availa-
ble for purchase at authorised Volvo retailers.
Carefully follow the installation instructions sup-
plied with the carriers.
• Check periodically that the load carriers and
load are properly secured. Lash the load
securely with retaining straps.
• Distribute the load evenly over the load carri-
ers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.
• The size of the area exposed to the wind, and
therefore fuel consumption, increase with the
size of the load. There is a bag hook in the side panel on each WARNING
side of the cargo area. Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which pro-
• Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy
trude may cause injury under violent braking.
braking and hard cornering. IMPORTANT
Always secure large and heavy objects with a
The bag hooks may be loaded with a maxi- seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
WARNING mum of 5 kg (11 lbs).
The car's centre of gravity and driving charac-
teristics are altered by roof loads. Related information
Related information • Recommendations for loading (p. 579)
Follow the car's specifications with regard to
weights and maximum permitted load.
• Weights (p. 651)
• Fitting and removing the safety net*
(p. 586)
Related information
• Recommendations for loading (p. 579) • Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 582)
• Weights (p. 651) • Fitting and removing safety grilles* (p. 585)
Through-load hatch in the rear seat Fitting and removing cargo cover* Then insert the other end piece in the recess
The hatch in the rear seat's backrest can be In the extended position, the cargo cover and in the side panel on the opposite side.
opened to transport long narrow items, e.g. skis. the rear panel prevent visual access to the cargo Ensure that the front panel is pointing down
area. behind the backrests before the cassette is
put in place.
Fitting cargo cover
1. In the cargo area, grip the hatch's handle and Press down the end pieces on both sides -
fold down the hatch. one by one.
> When a "click" is heard and the red mark-
2. Fold forward the armrest in the rear seat.
ing on each end piece has disappeared,
Insert one of the cargo cover's end pieces in
If the private locking* function is used then the the cargo cover is attached - check that it
the recess in the side panel in the cargo
hatch must be closed. is affixed securely.
area.
Related information
• Private locking (p. 272)
• Load retaining eyelets (p. 581)
Installation of the tailgate panel 3. Press the two upper clips into the respective 1. Pull the panel's upper clips straight out from
sockets in the tailgate so that they click into the tailgate.
place.
2. Carefully pull the panel away from the

Removing cargo cover bracket on one side of the tailgate, and then
A panel must be fitted on the tailgate when using from the other side. If necessary, clamp the
the cargo cover. In retracted position:
panel slightly so that it is more flexible and to
1. Turn the panel in the right direction with the 1. Depress the button on one of the retracted facilitate removal.
screw side downward and guide the pin into cargo cover's end pieces and lift out that
the bracket on one side of the tailgate. end.
2. Angle the cover up/out carefully.
> The other end piece loosens automatically
and the cover can be lifted out of the
cargo area.
Removal of the tailgate panel
If the cargo cover is not in use then the rear
panel can be removed.
Related information
• Operating cargo cover* (p. 584)
2. Clamp the panel slightly to facilitate guiding
the pin into the equivalent bracket on the • Recommendations for loading (p. 579)
other side.
Operating cargo cover* Loading mode

There are two extended positions for the cargo From the full-cover position:
cover - a full-cover position and a loading posi-
–
tion, where it is partially extended to make it eas-
ier to reach further into the cargo area.
Full-cover position
Cargo cover in full-cover position.
Press the cargo cover's handle section

upwards slightly.
> The cover goes up until it stops in the
Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover out
loading position.
to the end position.
Returning to full-cover position from loading posi-
Hook the attachment pins into the recesses
tion:
at the cargo area's rear pillars.
> The cargo cover is locked in the full-cover 1. Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover
position. down to the end position. To facilitate, angle
up the handle slightly so that the attachment
pins pass the stops.
The rear panel fitted to the inside of the tailgate comple- 2. Release the handle so that the attachment
ments the cargo cover. pins engage.
> The cover is locked in the full-cover posi-
tion.
IMPORTANT Fitting and removing safety grilles* Installation

The safety grille prevents loads or pets in the
The cargo cover may obscure the view to the
rear when in the loading position. Make sure
cargo area from being thrown forward in the IMPORTANT
passenger compartment.
the cargo cover is fully extended or fully The safety grille must only be used in the rear
The safety grille is crash-tested in accordance
retracted when driving. position (behind the rear seat) described
with the ECE R17 legal requirement and fulfils
here.
Volvo's strength requirements.
Retracting
1. From the full-cover position: Before first installing the safety grille, the existing
plastic roof mountings must be replaced with
Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis-
steel roof mountings. Volvo recommends that
engage the cargo cover's attachment pins
replacing roof mountings is performed at an
and then release.
authorised Volvo workshop or retailer.
From loading position:
1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward.
Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover
2. Make sure that the safety grille is turned in
in the grooves - pull to the full-cover position.
the right direction. Lift in the safety grille
Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis-
through one of the rear side doors.
engage the attachment pins and then
release.
2. Retract the cover with its attachment pins
For safety reasons, the safety grille must always
outside of the side panels until it stops in the
be attached and anchored correctly.
retracted position.

• Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 582) Under no circumstances may anybody remain
in the cargo area while the car is moving. This
is to avoid injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident.
3. Position the safety grille's brackets on the
roof mountings.
The next step is facilitated if two people hold
the safety grille in the right position.
}}
|| Fitting and removing the safety net* Fitting the safety net
The safety net prevents loads from being thrown
forward in the passenger compartment in the WARNING
event of sudden braking. It is necessary to ensure that the upper secur-
The safety net is fitted into four mounting points. ing points of the safety net are fitted correctly
and that the puller-straps are hooked in prop-
erly.
Damaged safety nets must not be used.
4. Insert the supplied screw and tighten using

the supplied 6 mm Allen key. Repeat on the
NOTE
other side. Recommended tightening torque: With forward mounting, the safety net is most
20 Nm (15 foot-pounds). easily mounted via one of the rear doors.
> Check that the safety grille is properly fit-
ted. 1. Unfold the safety net and make sure that the
5. Restore the backrest to the upright position. split upper rod in the net is locked in its
extended position.
For more information about the tools required
For reasons of safety, the safety net must always 2. Hook one retaining hook of the net into the
and methods for fitting/removal, see the installa-
be fastened and anchored as described below. front or rear roof mounting with the anchor-
tion instructions that were included with the initial
purchase. The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can ing strap locks turned towards you.
be secured two different locations in the car: 3. Hook the net's other retaining hook into the
IMPORTANT roof mounting on the opposite side - the
• Rear fitting - behind the rear seat.
telescopic spring-loaded retaining hooks
The protective grille cannot be folded up or • Front fitting - behind the front seats. facilitate alignment.
down when a cargo cover is fitted.
Take care to press forward the net's retain-
WARNING
ing hooks for each respective roof moun-
Related information Loads in the luggage compartment must be ting's front end position.
• Recommendations for loading (p. 579) anchored well, and also using a correctly fit-
• Load retaining eyelets (p. 581) ted safety net.
4. Rear fitting: With the net fitted in the rear Removing the safety net
roof mountings, hook the safety net's anchor- The safety net can be easily removed and folded
ing straps into the front floor eyes in the up.
cargo area.
1. Reduce safety net tension by pressing the
button in the anchoring strap lock and feed-
ing out a little of the anchoring strap on each
side.
2. Press in the catches and detach both of the
anchoring strap's hooks.
3. Undo the upper attachments and release the
net from the roof mountings.
Front fitting.
4. Press the red button on the rod to enable
Pay attention to make sure that you do not folding and then roll up the net. Store the net
press the seat and backrest hard against the in its case.
net when they are moved back again - only
Rear fitting.
adjust until the seat or backrest makes con- Related information
tact with the net. • Recommendations for loading (p. 579)
Front fitting: With the net fitted in the front
roof mountings, hook the anchoring straps • Load retaining eyelets (p. 581)
into the outer eyes on the rear of the seat IMPORTANT
slide rails - it is easier if the backrests are If a seat or backrest is pushed backwards
straightened and the seats are moved for- hard into the safety net, the net and roof
ward slightly. mounts may be damaged.
5. Tension the safety net with the anchoring

straps.
587
First aid kit Warning triangle

The first aid kit contains first aid equipment. Use the warning triangle to warn other road
Store the first aid kit behind the elastic strap on users if the car is stationary in traffic.
the right-hand side of the cargo area. Also activate the hazard warning flashers.
Storage spaces
The warning triangle is located in the compart-
ment on the inside of the tailgate.
Folding up the warning triangle

Open the hatch by first turning the knob a
quarter turn and then pulling the hatch from
its brackets in the top and bottom edges.
Press the latch that secures the warning tri-
angle slightly to the right and remove the
case.
Remove the warning triangle from the case,
Related information unfold it and put the ends together.
• Cargo area (p. 579) Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning

triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suita-
ble place with regard to traffic.
Make sure that the warning triangle and case are
properly secured in their storage space and that
the hatch is fully closed after use.
Related information
• Cargo area (p. 579)
588
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme Data transfer between car and WARNING

To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, workshop via Wi-Fi
The car must not be driven when connected
follow the Volvo service programme as specified Volvo's workshops have a specific Wi-Fi network to the workshop's networks and systems.
in the Service and Warranty Booklet. for secure data transfer between your car and
the workshop. Your workshop visit will be sim-
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo pler and more efficient when the transfer of diag- Related information
workshop to perform the service and mainte- nostic information and software can take place • Managing system updates via the Download
nance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, via the workshop's network. Centre (p. 591)
special tools and service literature to guarantee When you reach the workshop for your visit, your • Book service and repair (p. 592)
the highest quality of service. technician may want to connect your car to the
workshop's network via Wi-Fi to perform fault-
IMPORTANT tracing and software download. For this type of
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and communication, the car only connects to the
follow the instructions in the Service and workshop's network. It is therefore not possible
Warranty Booklet. to connect the car to another Wi-Fi network, such
as at home, but only the workshop's specific net-
work.
Related information
• Car status (p. 592) Manual connection to the workshop
• Book service and repair (p. 592) Manual connection is normally handled by the
service technician. The technician uses your
• Connection of equipment to the car's diag- remote control key's buttons to connect the car,
nostic socket (p. 38) which is why it is important to bring a key with
• Servicing the climate control system buttons with you for the workshop visit. Press
(p. 598) three times on the lock button on the remote
• Brake system maintenance (p. 425) control key to connect the car to the workshop's
network via Wi-Fi.
• Engine compartment overview (p. 599)
When the car is connected to a Wi-Fi network,
the symbol appears in the centre display.
590
Download Center Managing system updates via the NOTE

Several of the car's systems can be updated Download Centre
Data download may affect other services that
from the centre display with an online car1. System updates are intended for the online and
transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
infotainment components in the car. If system
The Download Centre app is on other services is experienced as disruptive
software updates are available, the updates can
started from app view in the then the download can be interrupted. Alter-
be made all at once or one at a time.
centre display and enables: natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or
Searching for update interrupt other services.
For system updates to be pos-
sible, the car must be con-
NOTE
nected to the Internet2.
• searching for and updating system software An update can be interrupted when the igni-
System updates are handled
• updating map data for Sensus Navigation*
via the Download Centre app
tion is switched off and the car is left.
• downloading, updating and uninstalling apps. in the centre display's applica- However, the update does not have to be
tion view. If no search for available updates has completed before the car is left, this is
Related information because the update is resumed the next time
been performed since the last time the infotain-
ment system was started, a search is performed. the car is used.
Centre (p. 591)
No search is performed if a software installation
• Downloading apps (p. 494) is in progress. A number on the System Update all system software
• Updating apps (p. 495) updates button shows how many updates are – Select Install all at the bottom of the list.
available. A tap on the button shows a list of the
updates that can be installed in the car. If an If no list is desired, then the Install all option can
• Internet-connected car* (p. 526) update is available, the New software updates be selected at the System updates button
instead.
• Navigating in the centre display's views available message is also shown in the centre
(p. 107) display's status bar. Update individual system software
programs
– Select Install for the software required.
1 Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
2 Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. }}
|| Cancelling software download Car status Book service and repair4

– Tap on X in the activity indicator that has The car's general status can be shown in the This service provides a convenient way to book
replaced the button Install at the start of the centre display along with the opportunity to book a service and workshop visit directly in the car.
download. service3. When it is time for service, and in some cases
Note that only the download can be cancelled, when the car is in need of repair, a message will
The Car status app is started appear in the driver display and at the top of the
when the installation phase has started, this can-
from app view in the centre dis- centre display. The service date is determined by
not be cancelled.
play and has four tabs: how much time has passed, hours that the
Deactivating the background search for engine has been running, or distance driven
software update since the last service.
Automatic background search for software
updates is activated when the car is delivered • Messages - status messages
from the factory, but this function can be deacti-
vated. • Status - checking the oil level

• TPMS - checking the tyre pressure
view. • Appointments - appointment information
and car information3.
2. Press System Download Centre.
3. Deselect Auto Software Update.
Related information
• Handling a message saved from the driver
Related information display (p. 99)
• Download Center (p. 591) • Checking and filling with engine oil
• Internet-connected car* (p. 526) (p. 601)
• Navigating in the centre display's views • Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 552)
(p. 107) • Book service and repair (p. 592)
• Sending car information to a workshop
(p. 594)
(p. 107)

Before the service can be used 3. Press the Request appointment button. The retailer comes back with a digital booking
• Create a Volvo ID and register the Volvo ID 4. Make sure that the correct Volvo ID is filled
proposal. You also have information on your
to the car. retailer available in the car and can contact your
in.
workshop at any time.
• Select the Volvo retailer you would like to
5. Make sure that the desired Workshop is
contact by going to www.volvocars.com and Accept the appointment suggestion
filled in.
logging in. When the car has received an appointment sug-
6. Fill in the field Tap to write information to
• To send and receive booking information, the gestion, a message will be shown at the top of
car must be connected to the Internet5. the workshop if there is anything you would the centre display.
like done during the workshop visit or any
Book a service other important information to your work- 1. Tap the message.
When you decide to book a service from your car, shop. 2. If the suggested booking is acceptable, tap
the information will be sent via you Internet con- 7. Press the Send appointment request but- on the Accept button. Otherwise press
nection5. ton. either of the Send new proposal or
Fill in the appointment request when desired or > You will receive an appointment sugges- Decline buttons.
when a message stating that service or repairs tion to your car within a couple of days6. For certain markets, the system reminds you of a
are needed is shown in the driver display and at You will also receive the same communi- scheduled appointment time as it approaches
the top of the centre display. cation via e-mail and when you go to and the navigation system7 can also guide you to
www.volvocars.com and log in. the workshop when the time comes.
In certain markets, once you have sent the Related information
appointment request, the message that
• Car status (p. 592)
the car needs service is extinguished in
the driver display. • Sending car information to a workshop
(p. 594)
8. Press the Cancel request button to cancel
1. Open the Car status app from the app view your request. • Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 107)
in the centre display.
The booking enquiry sent from the car includes
2.
• Volvo ID (p. 26)
Press the Appointments button. car information that facilitates workshop planning.
6 This time frame may vary depending on market.
7 Applies to Sensus Navigation*.
Sending car information to a Car information content

workshop8 The data sent is the last information saved (the
It is possible to send information for the car at last time the car was running) and includes infor-
any time, e.g. if you book a workshop appoint- mation in the following areas:
ment and want to help your workshop by provid- • service requirement
ing them with better data so that your visit can
be planned. Sending car information is not the
• time since last service
same as booking a service appointment. • function status
• fluid levels
• meter reading
• the car's vehicle identification number
(VIN10)
• the car's software version
1. Open the Car status app from the app view • the car's diagnostics data.
in the centre display.
Related information
2. Press the Appointments button. • Book service and repair (p. 592)
3. Press the Send car data button. • Car status (p. 592)
> A message that vehicle data are being • Navigating in the centre display's views
sent is shown at the top of the centre dis- (p. 107)
play. You can cancel data transmission by
tapping the X in the activity indicator.
The information is sent via the car's Inter-

net connection9.
This car information can be accessed by any
retailer if they have the car's identification num-
ber (VIN10).

10 Vehicle Identification Number.
Raise the car NOTE

When raising the car it is important that the car
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
jack or the workshop/garage jack is fitted to the
belongs to the car model in question. If a jack
intended points on the car’s underbody.
is selected other than the one recommended
For cars with level control*, air suspension, if fit- by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with
ted, must be switched off before the car is raised. the equipment.
Deactivating the function via the centre display. The normal car jack is only designed for occa-
sional, short-term use, such as when chang-
WARNING ing a wheel after a puncture. If the car is to be
If the car is raised using a workshop jack, this jacked up more often, or for a longer time
must be placed beneath one of the four jack- than is required just to change a wheel, use
ing points. Take care to position the workshop of a garage jack is recommended. In this
jack so that the car cannot slip off. Make sure instance, follow the instructions for use that
that the jack plate is fitted with a rubber guard come with the equipment.
so that the car remains stable and is not dam-
aged. Always use axle stands or similar.
}}
||
The triangles in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the lifting points (marked in red).
Related information
• Removing a wheel (p. 559)
• Jack* (p. 557)
Opening and closing the bonnet Close the bonnet

The bonnet can be opened using the handle in 1. Push the bonnet down until it starts to fall
the passenger compartment and a handle under from its own weight.
the bonnet. 2. When the bonnet stops against the lock
catch, push the bonnet to close it completely.
Open the bonnet
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Ensure that the closing path
under the bonnet is not obstructed, otherwise
there is a risk of personal injury.
Sweep from left to right in the opening under WARNING

the bonnet, move the handle up and to the Check that the bonnet locks properly when
side to release the bonnet from the bonnet closed. The bonnet must engage at both
lock's catch and lift the bonnet. sides audibly.
Warning - bonnet not closed

Pull the handle near the foot pedals to When the bonnet is released, the warn-
release the bonnet from its fully closed posi- ing symbol and the graphics in the
tion. driver display will light up and an
acoustic reminder will sound. If the car
starts rolling, an acoustic warning signal will
repeat.
NOTE
If the warning symbol is lit or the warning sig-
nal is heard despite the bonnet being closed
properly, contact an authorised Volvo work-
shop. Bonnet not completely closed. The figure is schematic -
parts may vary depending on car model.
}}
597
|| Servicing the climate control system Related information

The air conditioning system must only be serv- • Volvo service programme (p. 590)
iced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
Troubleshooting and repair

The air conditioning system contains fluorescent
tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used dur-
ing leak detection.
workshop is contacted.
Cars with R134a refrigerant
Bonnet completely closed. The figure is schematic -
parts may vary depending on car model. WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
WARNING ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
Never drive with an open bonnet! be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop.
If there are any signs that the bonnet is not
properly closed whilst driving, stop immedi-
ately and close it. Cars with R1234yf refrigerant

• Engine compartment overview (p. 599) The air conditioning system contains pressur-
• Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 47) ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
598
Head-up display when replacing the Engine compartment overview WARNING

windscreen* The overview shows some service-related com-
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
Cars with head-up display are equipped with a ponents. the front of the engine compartment, behind
special type of windscreen that meets the the radiator) may start or continue to operate
requirements for displaying the projected image. automatically for up to approx. 6 minutes after
the engine has been switched off.
Volvo recommends that you contact an author-
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
ised Volvo workshop when replacing the wind-
shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
screen. The correct version of the windscreen ommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine
must be fitted in order that the head-up display's is hot.
graphics shall be displayed correctly.

• Head-up display* (p. 134) The ignition system works at a very high and
• Cleaning the head up display* (p. 627) hazardous voltage. The car's electrical system
must always be in ignition position 0 when
The appearance of the engine compartment may differ
depending on model and engine variant.
work is being performed in the engine com-
partment.
Coolant expansion tank
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil
Reservoir for brake fluid (located on the driv- when the car's electrical system is in ignition
er's side) position II or when the engine is hot.
Washer fluid filler pipe11

Related information
Central electrical unit • Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 597)
Air filter • Filling washer fluid (p. 642)

Engine oil filler pipe
• Fuses in engine compartment (p. 616)
• Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 601)
11 Fill the washer fluid at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling.
Engine oil If the engine oil cannot be checked on a regular warning symbol for low oil pressure is
An approved engine oil must be used in order basis and the level falls too low, there is a risk used. Other variants have an oil level sensor,
that the recommended service intervals and war- that this will cause serious damage to the engine. when the driver is informed via the driver display's
ranty can be applied. warning symbol and display texts. Certain
IMPORTANT variants have both systems. Contact a Volvo
In order to fulfil the requirements for the retailer for more information.
engine's service intervals all engines are filled Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil with the intervals specified in the Service and
at the factory. The choice of oil has been Warranty Booklet. Using oil of a higher than
made very carefully with regard to service life, specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an
environmental impact. oil of a higher grade than the one specified.
An approved engine oil must be used in order
Related information
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil • Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 601)
for both filling and oil change, otherwise there
is a risk of the service life, starting characte- • Engine oil — specifications (p. 655)
Volvo recommends:
ristics, fuel consumption and environmental • Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
impact of the car being affected. (p. 657)
If engine oil of the prescribed grade and vis-
cosity is not used, engine related components
may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation
disclaims any liability for any such damage.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems to warn about the

oil level if it is too low/high, or in the event of low
oil pressure. Certain engine variants have an oil
pressure sensor, and then the driver display's
600
Checking and filling with engine oil IMPORTANT

The oil level is detected with the electronic oil
If this symbol is shown together
level sensor.
with a message about low oil level,
such as Engine oil level low
Refill 1 litre for example, then only
fill the volume specified, e.g. 1 litre (1 quart).
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
Graphics for oil level in the centre display.
See oil level in the centre display
The oil level is visualised using the electronic oil NOTE
Filler pipe12.
level gauge in the centre display when the car
has been started. The oil level should be checked The system cannot directly detect changes
In some cases, oil may need to be topped up regularly. when the oil is filled or drained. The car must
between service intervals. have been driven approx. 30 km (approx.
20 miles) and have been stationary for
No action with regard to engine oil level needs to
5 minutes with the engine switched off and
be taken until a message is shown in the driver
on level ground before the oil level indication
display.
is correct.
WARNING
If this symbol is shown together
with the message Engine oil level 1. Open the Car status app from the app view
Service required, visit a workshop in the centre display.
- an authorised Volvo workshop is 2. Press Status to show the oil level.
recommended. The oil level may be too high.
12 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick. }}
601
|| NOTE Topping up coolant

The coolant cools the internal combustion
If the right conditions for measuring the oil
engine to the correct operating temperature. The
level (time after engine shutdown, the car's
heat that is transferred from the engine to the
inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are not
coolant can be used to heat the passenger com-
met, then the message No value available
partment.
will be shown in the centre display. This does
not mean that there is something wrong in When topping up the coolant, follow the instruc-
the car's systems. tions on the packaging. Never top up with water
only. The risk of freezing increases with both too
Related information little and too much coolant concentrate.
• Engine oil (p. 600) If there is coolant under the car, if there is cool-
ant smoke, or if more than 2 litres (approx. Coolant expansion tank, left-hand drive car.
• Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 657) 2 quarts) have been filled, always call for recovery
to avoid the risk of engine damage due to a
• Engine oil — specifications (p. 655)
defective cooling system when attempting to
• Ignition positions (p. 420) start the car.
• Car status (p. 592)
WARNING
The coolant may be very hot. Never open the
cap when the coolant is hot. If a top-up is
required, unscrew the expansion tank cap
slowly to allow any overpressure to disappear.
602
Screw off the cap in the plastic cover. IMPORTANT

Screw off the cap and top up with coolant if • Mix the coolant with approved quality
necessary. The coolant level must not exceed water. In the event of any doubt about
the yellow MAX mark inside the expansion water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in
tank. accordance with Volvo recommendations.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order. • Make sure that the coolant mixture is
50% water and 50% coolant.
• Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
Grip the hatch's handle and lift/jiggle the agent as recommended by Volvo.
hatch from the plastic cover. • Only new coolant should be used when
replacing major cooling system compo-
Screw off the cap and top up with coolant if
nents to ensure the system has sufficient
necessary. The coolant level must not exceed
corrosion protection.
the yellow MAX mark inside the expansion
tank. • The engine must only be run with a well-
filled cooling system. Otherwise, tempera-
Reinstall the parts in reverse order. tures that are too high may occur result-
ing in the risk of damage (cracks) in the
cylinder head.
Coolant expansion tank, right-hand drive car. • A high content of chlorine, chlorides and
other salts may cause corrosion in the
cooling system.
Related information
• Coolant — specifications (p. 658)
603
Bulb replacement IMPORTANT • Replacing the front direction indicator bulb

The bulb in the halogen headlamp can be (p. 607)
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
replaced without assistance from a workshop.
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is • Bulb specifications (p. 608)
Halogen headlamps are not available for all vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
models and markets. Contact a Volvo retailer for and then causing damage.
more information.
An LED13 type lamp must be replaced by a NOTE
workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended. If an error message remains after the broken
bulb has been replaced then we recommend
NOTE visiting an authorised Volvo workshop.
For information about bulbs not covered in

this article, contact a Volvo dealer or a certi- NOTE
fied Volvo service technician. Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
The dipped beam bulb becomes accessible when the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte-
the headlamp's round rubber cover is removed. rior lighting is designed to withstand this.
Condensation is normally vented out of the
Contact a workshop14 if faults other than bulbs
lamp housing when the lamp has been
occur in lamps. If a fault occurs in LED13 lamps, switched on for a time.
the entire lamp unit usually must be replaced.
Related information
WARNING
• Exterior lamp positions (p. 605)
The car's electrical system must be in ignition
position 0 when replacing bulbs. • Replacing the dipped beam bulb (p. 605)
• Replacing the main beam lamp (p. 606)
tion lamp bulb, front (p. 607)
13 LED (Ligth Emitting Diode)

604
Exterior lamp positions Lamps, rear Replacing the dipped beam bulb
The exterior lighting of the car uses a number of The dipped beam bulb in the halogen headlamp
different lamps. An LED15 type lamp must be can be replaced without assistance from a work-
replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo shop.
IMPORTANT
Lamps, front (car with halogen
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
headlamps)
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
Position lamps (LED15)

Direction indicator (LED)
Position lamps (LED)
Fog lamp (LED)
Indicator Reversing lamps (LED)
Daytime running lights/position lamps Brake light (LED)
Main beam Brake light - central, high-level (LED) Left-hand headlamp.
Dipped beam 1. Detach the headlamp's round rubber cover.

Related information
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (LED15)
• Bulb replacement (p. 604) 2. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
• Bulb specifications (p. 608) 3. Detach the bulb by pushing it gently upwards
• Lighting control (p. 144) and pulling it straight out.
15 LED (Light Emmitting Diod) }}
|| 4. Fit a new bulb in the socket. The bulb's guide Replacing the main beam lamp 4. Replace the bulb.
pin must be aimed straight upwards. The main beam bulb in the halogen headlamp 5. Fit the bulb in the socket and turn downward.
5. Press in the connector. can be replaced without assistance from a work-
shop. Related information
6. Refit the headlamp's round rubber cover.
Related information IMPORTANT • Bulb specifications (p. 608)
• Exterior lamp positions (p. 605) Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
• Bulb specifications (p. 608) your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
Left-hand headlamp.
1. Detach the bulb by turning the bulb holder
upward and then pulling straight out.
2. Carefully prize the plastic cover at the con-
nector's lock lug so that the lock lug relea-
ses.
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
606
Replacing daytime running light Replacing the front direction

bulb/position lamp bulb, front indicator bulb
The daytime running light bulb/position lamp The direction indicator bulb in the halogen head-
bulb in the halogen headlamp can be replaced lamp can be replaced without assistance from a
without assistance from a workshop. workshop.
NOTE Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic

cover over the headlamp must be removed.
The bulb for the daytime running light/posi-
tion lamp is easier to access if the main beam
bulb is detached. The main beam bulb is fitted
diagonally above the daytime running light
bulb/position lamp bulb. Detach the main
Left-hand headlamp.
beam bulb by rotating its bulb holder upwards
and then pulling straight out. 1. Pull the bulb holder for the daytime running
light bulb/position lamp bulb straight out.
2. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with 3. Replace the bulb.
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is 4. Fit the bulb holder into the socket and press
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector it into place.
and then causing damage. Left-hand headlamp.
5. If the main beam bulb's bulb holder has been
removed, fit it into the socket and screw in. 1. Press the catches together and pull the bulb
holder straight out.
Related information 2. Replace with a new bulb holder with bulb.
3. Fit the bulb holder into the socket and press
• Bulb specifications (p. 608)
it into place.
Related information
• Bulb specifications (p. 608)
607
Bulb specifications
The specifications apply to bulbs in halogen
headlamps.
Contact a workshop16 if faults occur in other
lamps.
Function WA Type
Dipped beam 55 H7
Main beam 65 H9
Front direction indicators 24 PWY24W
daytime running lights/ 21/5 W21/5W
position lamps, front
A Watt
Related information
• Bulb replacement (p. 604)
608
Starter battery WARNING

The electrical system is single-pole and uses the
chassis and engine casing as a conductor. • The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
The starter battery is used to start up the electri- be formed if a jump lead is connected
cal system and drive the starter motor as well as incorrectly, and this can be enough for
other electrical equipment in the car. the battery to explode.
The starter battery should be replaced by a • Do not connect the jump leads to any
workshop17. fuel system component or any moving
part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
• The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
The starter battery is a 12 V battery, designed for can cause serious burns.
the carbon dioxide reducing functions Start/Stop Positive charging point
• If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
and regenerative charging, and to support the eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
functionality of the car's different systems. Negative charging point
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
The service life and function of the starter battery the eyes - seek medical attention imme-
is influenced by factors such as the number of diately. IMPORTANT
starts, discharging, driving style, driving condi- • Never smoke near the battery. When charging the starter battery and the
tions, climatic conditions etc.
support battery, only use a modern battery
• Never disconnect the starter battery when Charging points charger with controlled charging voltage. Fast
the engine is running. When connecting an external starter battery or charging function must not be used since it
• Check that the cables to the starter battery battery charger, use the car's charging points in may damage the battery.
are correctly connected and properly tight- the engine compartment.
ened. The battery terminals on the car's starter battery
in the luggage/cargo area must not be used.
During charging, both the starter battery and the
support battery are charged.
609
|| IMPORTANT NOTE Location

If the following instruction is not observed The life of the battery is shortened if it
then the energy saving function for infotain- becomes discharged repeatedly.
ment may be temporarily disengaged, and/or
The life of the battery is affected by several
the message in the driver display about the
factors, including driving conditions and cli-
starter battery's state of charge may be tem-
mate. Battery starting capacity decreases
porarily inapplicable, following the connection
gradually with time and therefore needs to be
of an external starter battery or battery
recharged if the car is not used for a longer
charger:
time or when it is only driven short distances.
• The negative battery terminal on the car's Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
starter battery must never be used for
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
connecting an external starter battery or
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom-
battery charger - only the car's negative The starter battery is located in the cargo area.
mended or that the battery is connected to a
charging point may be used as the
battery charger with automatic trickle charg-
grounding point. WARNING
ing.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a If the starter battery is disconnected, the
maximum service life. automatic opening and closing function must
be reset to work properly. A reset must take
Specifications
Battery H7 AGM H8 AGM
Voltage (V) 12 12
Cold start capacityA - CCAB (A) 800 850
610
Battery H7 AGM H8 AGM

Size, L×B×H 315×175×190 mm (12.4×6.9×7.5 inches) 353×175×190 mm (13.9×6.9×7.5 inches)
Capacity (Ah) 80 95
A According to EN standard.
B Cold Cranking Amperes.
Volvo recommends entrusting battery replace- Related information

ment to an authorised Volvo workshop. • Symbols on the batteries (p. 613)
• Support battery (p. 612)
IMPORTANT
• Using jump starting with another battery
When replacing the starter battery or support (p. 470)
battery, a battery of AGM18 type must be fit-
ted.
IMPORTANT
If the starter battery is replaced, make sure
you replace it with a battery with the same
cold starting capacity and type as the original
battery (see the label on the battery).
NOTE
The starter battery's container size must be
consistent with the dimensions for the origi-
nal battery.
18 Absorbed Glass Mat.
611
Support battery NOTE IMPORTANT

Cars with Start/Stop function, in addition to the
starter battery, are equipped with a support bat- • The higher the current take-off in the car, If the following instruction is not observed
the more the alternator must be working then the Start/Stop function may temporarily
tery.
and the batteries charging = Increased cease to work after the connection of an
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped fuel consumption. external starter battery or battery charger:
with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful • When the capacity of the starter battery • The negative battery terminal on the car's
starter battery for starting and one support bat- has fallen below the lowest permissible starter battery must never be used for
tery that helps during the Start/Stop function's level then the Start/Stop function is disconnecting an external starter battery or
starting sequence. engaged. battery charger - only the car's negative
charging point may be used as the
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due to grounding point.
high current take-off means:
• The engine auto-starts without the driver lift-
ing his/her foot from the foot brake pedal.
The support battery normally requires no more
service than the normal starter battery. A work-
shop should be contacted in the event of ques-
tions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
The support battery is located in a box next to the strut

tower.
612
NOTE Specifications Symbols on the batteries

Voltage (V) 12 There are information and warning symbols on
If the starter battery has been discharged so
the batteries.
much that the car has no normal electrical Cold start capacityA -
functions and the engine is then jump-started 170
CCAB (A)
with an external battery or a battery charger,
the Start/Stop function may continue to be 150×90×130 mm
activated. If the Start/Stop function then Size, L×B×H (5.9×3.5×5.1 Use protective goggles.
auto-stops the engine shortly after, there is a inches)
great risk that engine auto-start will fail due
to insufficient battery capacity, because the Capacity (Ah) 10
battery has not had the opportunity to A According to EN standard.
recharge. B Cold Cranking Amperes.
Further information in the
If the car has been jump-started, or if there is owner's manual for the car.
insufficient time to charge the battery with a IMPORTANT
battery charger, the recommendation is to When replacing the starter battery or support
temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function battery, a battery of AGM19 type must be fit-
until the battery has been recharged by the ted.
car. In an outside temperature of approx.
+15 °C (approx. 60 °F), the battery needs to Store the battery out of the
be charged for at least 1 hour by the car. In a Related information reach of children.
lower outside temperature, the charging time • Starter battery (p. 609)
may increase to 3-4 hours. The recommenda- • Start/Stop function (p. 444)
tion is to charge the battery using an external • Symbols on the batteries (p. 613)
battery charger.
The battery contains corro-
sive acid.
19 Absorbed Glass Mat. }}
613
|| Fuses and central electrical units Location of central electrical units

All electrical functions and components are pro-
Avoid sparks and naked tected by a number of fuses in order to protect
flames. the car's electrical system from damage by short
circuiting or overloading.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
Risk of explosion. replacing a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possibly
lead to fire.
If an electrical component or function does not

The figure is schematic - appearance may vary depend-
work, it may be because the component's fuse ing on car model.
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
Must be taken for recycling. same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand
the circuit. Volvo recommends contacting an drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central
authorised Volvo workshop for checking. electrical units under the glovebox change sides.
Engine compartment
NOTE Under the glovebox
An expended starter battery or support bat-
Cargo area
tery must be recycled in an environmentally
safe manner since it contains lead.
Related information
• Replacing a fuse (p. 615)
Related information
• Starter battery (p. 609) • Fuses in cargo area (p. 622)
• Support battery (p. 612) • Fuses in engine compartment (p. 616)

• Fuses under glovebox (p. 619)
614
Replacing a fuse • Fuses under glovebox (p. 619)

All electrical functions and components are pro-
tected by a number of fuses in order to protect
the car's electrical system from damage by short
circuiting or overloading.
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.

2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to
see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possibly
lead to fire.
WARNING
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop about
the fuses not mentioned in the owner's man-
ual. If this is not performed correctly, it can
cause serious damage to the electrical sys-
tems.
Related information
• Fuses and central electrical units (p. 614)
• Fuses in cargo area (p. 622)
• Fuses in engine compartment (p. 616)
615
Fuses in engine compartment

Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine
and brake functions, amongst other things.
616
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that Function Function
AA AA
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting
of fuses. Vacuum regulators; Valve; Valve 7,5 Starter motor Shunt
The fuse box also provides space for several for output pulse (diesel)
Fuel filter heater (diesel) 30
spare fuses. Engine control module; Actuator; 20
Throttle unit; EGR valve (diesel); – –
Positions
Position sensor for turbo (die-
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows – –
sel); Valve for turbocharger (pet-
the location of the fuses.
rol)
• Fuses 1-13, 18-30, 35-37 and 46-54 are of – –
the "Micro" type. Engine Control Module (ECM) 5
– –
• Fuses 14-17, 31-34 and 38-45 are of the – –
"MCase" type and should be replaced by a – –
workshop20. Solenoids (petrol); Valve; Ther- 10
mostat for engine cooling sys- – –
Function AA tem (petrol); EGR cooling pump
(diesel); Glow control module – –
– –
(diesel)
12 V socket in tunnel console, 15
– – Control module for spoiler roller 5 front
cover; Control module for radia-
– – 12 V socket in tunnel console, 15
tor roller cover; Relay coils for
by legroom for second seat row
Ignition coils (petrol); Spark 15 output pulse (diesel)
plugs (petrol) 12 V socket in cargo area* 15
Lambda-sond, front; Lambda- 15
Solenoid for engine oil pump; 15 sond, rear (petrol) – –
Solenoid clutch A/C; Lambda Engine Control Module (ECM) 20
sond, centre (petrol); Lambda Left-hand headlamp, certain 15
sond, rear (diesel) Starter motor 40 variants of LEDB
|| Function AA Function AA Function AA

Right-hand headlamp, certain 15 Control unit for brake system 40 Left-hand headlamp 7,5
variants of LEDB (ABS pump)
Left-hand headlamp, certain 15
– – – – variants of LEDB
Heated windscreen* left-hand Shunt Heated windscreen* right-hand Shunt Accelerator pedal sensor 5
side side
A Ampere
Supplied when the ignition is 5 B LED (Light Emitting Diode)
Heated windscreen* left-hand 40
side switched on: Engine control
Related information
module; Transmission compo-
Headlamp washers* 25 nents; Electric steering servo;
Central electronic module; Con- • Replacing a fuse (p. 615)
Windscreen washers 25
trol module for brake system
Transmission control module 15 – –
Horn 20 Right-hand headlamp 7,5
Siren* 5 Right-hand headlamp, certain 15
variants of LEDB
Control module for brake system 40
(valves, parking brake) Alcohol lock 5
Windscreen wipers 30 – –
Rear window washer 25 Module for controlling battery 5

engagement
Heated windscreen* right-hand 40
side Airbags 5
Parking heater* 20
Fuses under glovebox

Fuses under the glovebox protect, amongst
other things, electrical sockets, displays and
door modules.
}}
619
|| On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that Function Function
AA AA
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting
of fuses. – – USB HUB 5
The fuse box in the engine compartment also
– – Controls lighting; Interior lighting; 7,5
provides space for several spare fuses.
Dimming of interior rearview mir-
Steering wheel module 5 ror*; Rain and light sensor*; Keypad
Positions
• Fuses 1, 3-21, 23-36, 39-53 and 55-59 are in tunnel console, by legroom for
Module for start knob and for park- 5
of the "Micro" type. rear seat*; Power front seats*; Con-
ing brake control
trol panels in rear doors; Fan mod-
• Fuses 2, 22, 37-38 and 54 are of the
Steering wheel module for heated 15 ule for climate control left/right
"MCase" type and should be replaced by a
steering wheel* Control module for driver support 5
workshop21.
– – functions
Function AA
Panorama roof with sun blind* 20
– – – –
Head-up display* 5
Electrical socket in tunnel console, 30 – –
by legroom for rear seat* Passenger compartment lighting 5
– –
– – – –
Control module for climate control 10
Movement detector* 5 system Display in roof console (Seatbelt 5
Steering lock 7,5 reminder/Indicator for airbag on
Media player 5 the front passenger seat)
Driver display 5 Diagnostic socket OBDII 10
– –
Keypad in centre console 5 Centre display 5
Humidity sensor 5
Sun sensor 5 Fan module for climate control sys- 40
Door module in right-hand rear 20
tem, front
door
Function AA Function AA
Fuses in cargo area 10 – –
Control module for online car; Con- 5 Door module in left-hand front door 20
trol module for Volvo On Call
Control module for suspension 20
Door module in left-hand rear door 20 (active chassis)*
Audio control module (amplifier) 40 – –
(certain variants)
Sensus control module 10
– –
– –
Module for multi-band antenna 5
– –
Modules for seat comfort (mas- 5
sage) front* Door module in right-hand front 20
door
Alcohol lock 5
– –
Rear window wiper 15
TV* (certain markets) 5
Control module for fuel pump 15
Primary fuse for fuses 53 and 58 15
– –
A Ampere
– –
Related information
Seat heating, driver's side front 15 • Fuses and central electrical units (p. 614)
Seat heating, passenger side front 15 • Replacing a fuse (p. 615)
Coolant pump 10
Fuses in cargo area

Fuses in the cargo area protect, amongst other
things, power seats*, airbags and seatbelt ten-
sioners.
The central electrical unit is located on the right-hand side.

On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that The fuse box in the engine compartment also
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting provides space for several spare fuses.
of fuses.
}}
623
|| Positions Function AA Function AA

• Fuses 13-17 and 21-36 are of the "Micro"
type. Towbar control module* 40 – –
• Fuses 1-12, 18-20 and 37 are of the
Seatbelt pretensioner module, 40 – –
"MCase" type and should be replaced by a
right-hand side
workshop22. Control module for airbags and 5
Internal relay coils 5 seatbelt tensioners
Function AA
Control module for reduction of 15 – –
Rear window defroster 30
nitrous oxides (diesel)
Seat heating left-hand side rear* 15
– – Module for detecting foot move- 5
ment* (for opening the power oper- – –
Compressor for air suspension* 40
ated tailgate)
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*: 5
Lock motor for backrest on rear 15 Alcohol lock, USB hub/accessory 5 control module, exterior reversing
right-hand side port sound
– – – – – –
Lock motor for backrest on rear 15 Towbar control module* 25 Seatbelt pretensioner modules 5
left-hand side
Power driver seat* 20 Actuator for exhaust gases (petrol, 5
– –
certain engine variants)
Seatbelt pretensioner module, left- 40
Control module for reduction of 30
hand side – –
nitrous oxides (diesel)
Parking camera* 5 All Wheel Drive (AWD) control 15
Power operated tailgate* 25
module*
– –
Electrically operated front passen- 20
ger seat* – –
Function AA
Seat heating right-hand side rear* 15
– –
A Ampere
Related information
• Replacing a fuse (p. 615)
Cleaning the interior • Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 628) Cleaning the centre display
Only use cleaning agents and car care products • Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 629) Dirt, stains and grease from fingers can affect
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and the centre display's performance and readability.
• Cleaning the leather steering wheel
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming (p. 630) Clean the screen frequently with a microfibre
is important prior to using cleaning agents. cloth.
• Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
IMPORTANT parts (p. 630)
• Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g.

dark jeans and suede garments) may
stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is
important to clean and treat these parts
of the upholstery as soon as possible.
• Never use strong solvents such as
washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit or
concentrated alcohol to clean the interior,
since this may damage the upholstery as
well as other interior materials.
• Never spray the cleaning agent directly To clean the centre display:
onto components that have electrical but-
tons and controls. Wipe them instead 1. Turn off the centre display with a long press
using a moistened cloth containing the on the home button.
cleaning agent. 2. Wipe the screen with the microfibre cloth
• Sharp objects and Velcro may damage supplied or use another microfibre cloth of
the fabric upholstery. equivalent quality. The screen should be
wiped with a clean and dry microfibre cloth
with small circular movements. If necessary,
Related information
lightly moisten the microfibre cloth with clean
water.
• Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
3. Activate the display with a short press on the
(p. 628)
home button.
• Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 628)
626
IMPORTANT • Cleaning the leather steering wheel Cleaning the head up display*
(p. 630) Gently wipe the display's cover glass with a
The microfibre cloth used to clean the centre
display must be free from sand and dirt. • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood clean and dry microfibre cloth. If necessary,
parts (p. 630) lightly moisten the microfibre cloth.
Never use strong stain removers. A special clean-

IMPORTANT ing agent available from Volvo retailers can be
When cleaning the centre display, only use used for more difficult cleaning.
gentle pressure on the screen. Heavy pres-
sure can damage the screen. Related information
• Activating and deactivating the head-up dis-
play* (p. 136)
IMPORTANT
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the centre display. Do not use win-
dow cleaning agent, other cleaning agents,
aerosol spray, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or
cleaning agent containing abrasive.
Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or tis-
sue paper, these can scratch the centre dis-
play.
Related information
• Cleaning the interior (p. 626)
(p. 628)
• Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 628)
• Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 629)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and Cleaning the seatbelts Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
headlining Only use cleaning agents and car care products Only use cleaning agents and car care products
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. is important prior to using cleaning agents.
is important prior to using cleaning agents.
Seatbelts Inlay mats and floor mat
Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
Never scrape or rub a stain since this risks textile cleaning agent is available from Volvo the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vac-
destroying the upholstery. Never use strong stain retailers. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before uum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay
removers since this risks destroying the colour of allowing it to retract. mat is secured with pins.
the upholstery. Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay
Related information
mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up.
Related information • Cleaning the interior (p. 626)
• Cleaning the interior (p. 626) • Cleaning the centre display (p. 626) Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each
• Cleaning the centre display (p. 626) pin.
• Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 628) (p. 628)
WARNING
• Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 628) • Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 628)
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
• Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 629) • Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 629) check before setting off that the mat by the
• Cleaning the leather steering wheel • Cleaning the leather steering wheel driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in
(p. 630) (p. 630) the pins so that it does not get caught adja-
cent to and under the pedals.
• Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 630) parts (p. 630)
A special textile cleaner is recommended for
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
mats should be cleaned with agents recom-
mended by Volvo retailers.
Related information
628
• Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining Cleaning leather upholstery 3. Thoroughly dampen the stain using the
(p. 628) Only use cleaning agents and car care products sponge, allow the sponge to absorb the stain
• Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 628) recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and without scrubbing.
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming 4. Wipe the stain with a soft cloth and allow the
is important prior to using cleaning agents. leather to dry thoroughly
• Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 630) Leather upholstery* Protecting the leather upholstery
Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve 1. Apply a small amount of leather protective
• Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
agent to a cloth and then apply it to the
parts (p. 630) its original appearance.
leather in light circular motions.
Leather upholstery is a natural product that
changes and acquires a beautiful patina over 2. Allow to dry for about 20 minutes.
time. Regular cleaning and treatment are Protecting the leather upholstery makes it more
required in order that the properties and colours resistant to the stresses from the sun's UV radia-
of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a tion.
comprehensive product – Volvo Leather Care Kit/
Wipes – for the cleaning and treatment of leather Related information
upholstery which, when used in accordance with • Cleaning the interior (p. 626)
the instructions, preserves the leather's protective • Cleaning the centre display (p. 626)
coating.
To achieve best results, Volvo recommends (p. 628)
cleaning and application of the protective cream
one to four times per year (or more if required).
Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available from • Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 628)
Volvo retailers. • Cleaning the leather steering wheel
Cleaning the leather upholstery (p. 630)
1. Apply the leather cleaner to a damp sponge • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
and squeeze until a foam is created. parts (p. 630)
2. Use the sponge on the stain in a circular
motion.
Cleaning the leather steering wheel Cleaning interior plastic, metal and • Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
Only use cleaning agents and car care products wood parts (p. 628)
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and Only use cleaning agents and car care products • Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 628)
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
• Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 628)
is important prior to using cleaning agents. treat stains at once for best results.
Leather steering wheel Interior plastic, metal and wood parts • Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 630)
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly mois-
leather steering wheel with protective plastic. We tened with water, available from Volvo retailers, is
recommend Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes for recommended for cleaning interior parts and sur-
cleaning the leather steering wheel. First remove faces.
dirt, dust, etc. with a damp sponge or cloth.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects, e.g. rings, can damage the IMPORTANT
leather on the steering wheel.
Do not use solvent that contains alcohol
when cleaning the glass for the driver display.
Related information
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces are
easily scratched. Clean these surfaces with a
(p. 628)
clean, dry microfibre cloth using small, circular
• Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 628) motions. If needed, dampen the microfibre
• Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 628) cloth with a little clean water.
• Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood Related information
parts (p. 630) • Cleaning the interior (p. 626)
630
Cleaning the exterior Polishing and waxing IMPORTANT

The car should be washed as soon as it Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or
Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to give the paintwork extra protection. The car
should be used. Other treatment such as pre-
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. does not need to be polished until it is at least
serving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps one year old. However, the car can be waxed
similar could damage the paintwork. Paint-
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in
work damage caused by such treatments is
separator. Use car shampoo. direct sunlight, the surface being polished
not covered by Volvo warranty.
should be a maximum of 45 °C (113 °F).
Related information
• Cleaning the exterior (p. 631) • Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you Related information
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt •
• Polishing and waxing (p. 631)
and tar stains using tar remover or white spi-
Cleaning the exterior (p. 631)
• Handwashing (p. 632) rit. More stubborn stains can be removed • Handwashing (p. 632)
• Automatic car wash (p. 633) using fine rubbing paste designed for car • Automatic car wash (p. 633)
paintwork. •
• High-pressure washing (p. 634) High-pressure washing (p. 634)
• Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 634) • Polish first with a polish and then wax with • Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 634)
liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on
• Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim the packaging carefully. Many preparations • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 635) components (p. 635)
contain both polish and wax.
• Cleaning wheel rims (p. 636) • Cleaning wheel rims (p. 636)
• Rustproofing (p. 636) IMPORTANT • Rustproofing (p. 636)
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber,
only rub with light pressure if it is necessary.
Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
631
Handwashing • Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and NOTE

The car should be washed as soon as it plenty of lukewarm water.
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier • Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. solution or car shampoo.
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte-
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
• Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a rior lighting is designed to withstand this.
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of Condensation is normally vented out of the
separator. Use car shampoo. water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce lamp housing when the lamp has been
Handwashing the risk of water drying stains which may switched on for a time.
The following steps are good to remember when need to be polished out.
washing the car: • After the car has been washed, tar from
IMPORTANT
asphalt may remain. Use tar remover to get
• Avoid washing the car in direct sunlight. This
rid of the last spots after the car has been • Make sure that the panoramic roof and
can cause the detergent or wax to dry and
washed. sun visor are closed before washing the
have an abrasive effect.
car.
• Remove bird droppings from the paintwork
WARNING • Never use polishing agent with abrasive
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain
Always have the engine cleaned by a work- properties on the panoramic roof.
chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork
very quickly. For example, use soft paper or shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot. • Never use wax on the rubber mouldings
sponge soaked in plenty of water. An author- around the panoramic roof.
ised Volvo workshop is recommended for the IMPORTANT
removal of any discolouration.
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. IMPORTANT
• Wash the underbody, including wheel hous- Clean them regularly, e.g. when refuelling. Remember to remove dirt from the drain
ings and bumpers.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but holes in the doors and in the sills after wash-
• Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt
use water and a non-scratching sponge ing the car.
has been removed so as to reduce the risk of
instead.
scratches from washing. Do not spray directly
onto the locks. Related information
• Cleaning the exterior (p. 631)
• If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on
very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the • Polishing and waxing (p. 631)
surfaces must not be hot from the sun. • Automatic car wash (p. 633)
• High-pressure washing (p. 634)
632
• Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 634) Automatic car wash IMPORTANT
• Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim The car should be washed as soon as it
For car washes where the car is pulled for-
components (p. 635) becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
ward with rolling wheels, the following applies:
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly.
• Cleaning wheel rims (p. 636)
1. Before washing the car, make sure that
• Rustproofing (p. 636) the car fresh. the automatic rain sensor is deactivated,
otherwise there is the risk of it starting
Automatic car wash and damaging the wiper arms.
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way
2. Make sure that the door mirrors are
of washing the car, but it cannot reach every-
retracted, any auxiliary lamps secured,
where. Washing the car by hand is recommended
antennas retracted or removed, otherwise
to achieve a good result, or to supplement auto-
they risk being damaged by the auto-
matic car washes with washing by hand.
matic car wash.
3. Drive into the car wash.
NOTE
4. Switch off the "Automatic braking at
Volvo recommends that the car is not washed
standstill" function using the switch on
in an automatic car wash during the first few
the tunnel console.
months (this is because the paintwork has
not fully hardened). 5. Switch off the "Automatic parking brake
application" function via the top view of
the centre display.
IMPORTANT 6. Switch off the engine by turning the start
Before driving the car into an automatic car knob in the tunnel console clockwise.
wash, deactivate the functions for automatic Hold the knob in place for at least
braking when stationary and automatic park- 2 seconds.
ing brake application. If these functions are The car is ready for the car wash.
not deactivated, the brake system will jam
when the car is stationary and the car will not
be able to move. Related information
• Cleaning the exterior (p. 631)
}}
633
• Handwashing (p. 632) High-pressure washing Cleaning the wiper blades

• High-pressure washing (p. 634) The car should be washed as soon as it The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
• Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 634)
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly.
• Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
components (p. 635) the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
• Cleaning wheel rims (p. 636) separator. Use car shampoo. separator. Use car shampoo.
• Rustproofing (p. 636)
High-pressure washing Wiper blades
When using high-pressure washing, use sweep- Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as
ing movements and make sure that the nozzle well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair
does not come closer than 30 cm (13 in.) to the the service life of wiper blades.
surface of the car. Do not spray directly onto the
When cleaning, set the wiper blades in service
locks.
position.
Related information
• Cleaning the exterior (p. 631) NOTE
• Polishing and waxing (p. 631) Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regu-
• Handwashing (p. 632) larly with a lukewarm soap solution or car
shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents.
• Automatic car wash (p. 633)
Related information
• Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim • Cleaning the exterior (p. 631)
components (p. 635)
• Cleaning wheel rims (p. 636)
• Handwashing (p. 632)
• Rustproofing (p. 636)
• Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 635)
634
• Cleaning wheel rims (p. 636) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and
• Rustproofing (p. 636) trim components
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
separator. Use car shampoo.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim

components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
retailers is recommended for the cleaning and Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent with
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
components, e.g. glossy trim mouldings. When
using such a cleaning agent the instructions IMPORTANT
must be followed carefully.
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
Avoid washing the car with detergent with a pH rubber.
value below 3.5 or above 11.5. This can cause
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber,
discolouration of anodised aluminium compo-
only rub with light pressure if it is necessary.
nents*, as illustrated. We advise against use of
Use a soft washing sponge.
abrasive polishing agents, as illustrated.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
}}
|| IMPORTANT Cleaning wheel rims Rustproofing

The car should be washed as soon as it The car has effective protection against corro-
Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier sion.
with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than
11.5. This may result in discolouration of ano- Anti-corrosion protection for the body consists of
dised aluminium parts such as roof rack and metallic protective coatings on the sheet metal, a
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
around the side windows. high-quality painting process, corrosion-protected
separator. Use car shampoo.
Never use metal polishing agent on anodised and minimised metal overlap, and shielding plas-
aluminium parts, this can result in discoloura- Rims tic components, abrasion protection and supple-
tion and destroy the surface treatment. Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by mental rust inhibitor on exposed areas. In the
Volvo. chassis, exposed components of the wheel sus-
pension are made of corrosion-resistant cast alu-
Related information Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the sur-
minium.
• Cleaning the exterior (p. 631) face and cause stains on chrome-plated alumi-
nium rims. Inspection and maintenance
The car's anti-corrosion protection normally
• Handwashing (p. 632) Related information
requires no maintenance, but a good way to fur-
• Automatic car wash (p. 633) • Cleaning the exterior (p. 631)
ther reduce the risk of corrosion is to keep the
• High-pressure washing (p. 634) • Polishing and waxing (p. 631) car clean. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solu-
• Handwashing (p. 632) tions must always be avoided on glossy trim com-
ponents. Any stone chips should be rectified as
• Cleaning wheel rims (p. 636) • Automatic car wash (p. 633)
soon as they are discovered.
• Rustproofing (p. 636) • High-pressure washing (p. 634)
• Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim Related information
components (p. 635) • Cleaning the exterior (p. 631)
• Cleaning wheel rims (p. 636) • Polishing and waxing (p. 631)
• Rustproofing (p. 636) • Handwashing (p. 632)

636
• Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim Car paintwork Touching up minor paintwork
components (p. 635) The paintwork consists of several layers and is damage
• Cleaning wheel rims (p. 636) an important part of the car's rustproofing, and Paint is an important part of the car's rustproof-
should therefore be checked regularly. ing and should therefore be checked regularly.
The most common types of paintwork damage
The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings, doors and bumpers.
edges of wings, doors and bumpers. To avoid the
onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rec- When repairing paint damage, the car must be
tified immediately. clean, dry and have a temperature of over 15 °C.
Related information Touching up minor paintwork damage

• Touching up minor paintwork damage To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork
(p. 637) should be rectified immediately.
• Colour codes (p. 639)
NOTE
When repairing the paintwork, it must be
clean and dry and at a temperature of at least
15°C.
}}
637
|| Materials that may be needed 3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
• Primer23 - a special adhesive primer in a brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with
spray can is available for e.g. plastic-coated a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer
bumpers. has dried.
• Basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray For scratches, proceed as described above, but
cans or as touch-up pens/sticks24. mask around the damaged area to protect the
undamaged paintwork.
• Masking tape.
fine sand paper23. Touch-up pens and spray paints are available
• from Volvo retailers.
If the damage has not reached down to the
metal, the touch-up paint can be applied directly
after the surface has been cleaned.
NOTE
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the dam- If the stone chip has not penetrated down to
NOTE aged surface. Then remove the tape to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint
remove any loose paint. remains in place, fill in with base coat and
When paint is repaired the surface must be clear coat as soon as the surface has been
clean and dry. The temperature of the surface If the damage is down to the metal, use of a cleaned.
should be at least 15 °C (60 °F). primer is appropriate. In the event of damage
to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer
should be used to give better results - spray Related information
into the lid of the spray can and brush on • Car paintwork (p. 637)
thinly. • Colour codes (p. 639)
2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a very
fine polishing agent may be carried out
locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven
edges). The surface is cleaned thoroughly
and left to dry.
23 If required.
24 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
638
Colour codes Replacing the wiper blade, rear 1. Grip the centre of the wiper arm and lift it
window from the windscreen to lock position.
Colour code The wiper blades sweep water away from the
The colour code label is located on the car's windscreen and rear window. Together with the NOTE
right-hand rear door pillar and becomes visible washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure
when the right-hand rear door is opened. There is a lock position at half extension
visibility for driving. Windscreen and rear window
angle that may feel like resistance, this lock
wiper blades can be replaced.
prevents the arm from falling back against the
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window windscreen. The wiper arm must be pulled
past the lock for wiper blade replacement.
2. Grip the lower part of the blade and pull

to the right until the blade loosens from the
arm.
3. Press the new wiper blade into place. You
should hear a click. Check that it is firmly
installed.
4. Lower the wiper arm.
Exterior colour code
Any secondary exterior colour code IMPORTANT

Lift the wiper arm from the window and pull the lower
It is important that the correct colour is used. section of the blade to the right. Check the blades regularly. Neglected main-
tenance shortens the service life of the wiper
Related information blades.
• Car paintwork (p. 637)
• Touching up minor paintwork damage Related information
(p. 637) • Using the rain sensor (p. 172)
(p. 174)
}}
639
• Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 172) Replacing windscreen wiper blades 3. Press and hold the lock button located
• Using the rain sensor's memory function The wiper blades sweep water away from the on the wiper blade mounting and at the
(p. 173) windscreen and rear window. Together with the same time pull the blade straight out par-
washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure allel with the wiper arm.
visibility for driving. Windscreen and rear window
(p. 175) 4. Slide in the new wiper blade until the lock
wiper blades can be replaced.
• Filling washer fluid (p. 642) button engages.
• Wiper blades in service position (p. 641) Replacing a windscreen wiper blade 5. Angle the blade in towards the arm until a
• Replacing windscreen wiper blades click sound is heard. The blade is then no
(p. 640) longer in the removal position and can be
moved again.
6. Check that the wiper blade is firmly installed.
7. Fold the wiper arm back towards the wind-
screen.
1. Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service

position. Service position is activated/deacti-
vated via the function view in the centre dis-
play when the car is stationary and the wind-
screen wipers are not on.
2. Set the wiper blade in removal position by

angling it out from the arm until a click sound The wiper blades are different lengths.
can be heard.
NOTE Wiper blades in service position are not on. Service mode is activated/deactivated
The windscreen wiper blades must be in service via the function view in the centre display:
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
position (vertical position) when, for example, Press the Wiper Service
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
they are being replaced. Position button. The light indi-
the passenger side.
cator in the button illuminates
when the service position is
Related information activated. Upon activation, the
• Using the rain sensor (p. 172) wipers move to standing
• Using windscreen and headlamp washers straight up. To deactivate the
(p. 174) service mode, press Wiper Service Position
again. The light indicator in the button extin-
when reversing (p. 176) guishes when the service position is deactivated.
• Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 172) The wiper blades also exit service position if:
• Using the rain sensor's memory function • Windscreen wiping is activated.
(p. 173)
• Windscreen washing is activated.
• Using the rear window wiper and washer Wiper blades in service position. • Rain sensor activated.
(p. 175)
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades • The car is driven away.
• Filling washer fluid (p. 642) (e.g. for scraping off ice from the windscreen)
• Wiper blades in service position (p. 641) they must be in service position. IMPORTANT
• Replacing the wiper blade, rear window If the wiper arms in service position have
(p. 639) IMPORTANT been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the wind-
• Using windscreen wipers (p. 171) Before placing the wiper blades in the service
screen before the activation of wiping, wash-
position, make sure that they are not frozen
ing or the rain sensor, as well as before driv-
down.
ing. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the
bonnet.
Activating/deactivating service mode
Service mode can be activated/deactivated when
the car is stationary and the windscreen wipers
}}
|| Related information Filling washer fluid Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended
• Using the rain sensor (p. 172) Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps by Volvo - with frost protection during cold
weather and below freezing point.
• Using windscreen and headlamp washers as well as the windscreen and rear window.
(p. 174) Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used when
the temperature is under the freezing point. IMPORTANT
when reversing (p. 176) Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent
with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8,
in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral
• Using the rain sensor's memory function water).
(p. 173)
(p. 175) IMPORTANT
• Filling washer fluid (p. 642) Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the
temperature is below freezing to avoid freez-
ing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
(p. 639)
Volume:
Filling of washer fluid takes place in the reservoir • Cars with headlamp washing: 5.3 litres (5.6
with a blue cap. The reservoir is used for wind- qts).
screen washer, rear window washer and head- • Cars without headlamp washing: 3.5 litres
lamp washers* (3.7 qts).
NOTE Related information

When approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid
remains in the reservoir, the message • Using windscreen and headlamp washers
Washer fluid Level low, refill is shown in (p. 174)
the driver display, together with the • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
symbol. when reversing (p. 176)

(p. 173)
(p. 175)
(p. 639)
643
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Type designations
The decals in the car contain information such
as chassis number, type designation, colour
code, etc.
Label location
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle iden-
tification and engine numbers can facilitate all
contact with an authorised Volvo retailer regar-
ding the car and when ordering spare parts and
accessories.
646
SPECIFICATIONS
Decal for type designation, vehicle identifica- Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant Decal for engine code and the engine's serial
tion number, permissible maximum weights and R134a. number.
code designation for exterior colour and date of
manufacture. The decal is positioned on the door
pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand rear
door is opened.
Label for parking heater. Label for engine oil.
Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant

R1234yf.
}}
647
SPECIFICATIONS
|| NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and locations
in the car. The information that applies to your
particular car can be found on the decal on
the car.
Decal for gearbox type designation and serial

Related information
number.
• Air conditioning — specifications (p. 659)
Decal for the car's identification number - VIN

(Vehicle Identification Number).
Further information on the car is presented in the
registration document.
648
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be
read in the table.
Dimensions mm inches Dimensions mm inches Dimensions mm inches

A Ground clearanceA 211 8,3 G Load height 776 30,6 I Rear track 1657B 65,2B
B Wheelbase 2865 112,8 H Front track 1653B 65,1B 1653C 65,1C
C Length 4688 184,6 1649C 64,9C 1659D 65,3D
D Load length, floor, 1746 68,7 1655D 65,2D 1673E 65,9E

folded seat 1668E 65,7E J Load width, floor 1010 39,8
E Load length, floor 960 37,8 K Width 1902 74,9
F Height 1658 65,3
}}
649
SPECIFICATIONS
|| Dimensions mm inches
L Width including door 2117 83,3
mirrors
M Width including folded- 1999 78,7
in door mirrors
A For kerb weight + 1 person. Varies slightly depending on tyre
dimension, chassis alternative, etc.).
B Applies to cars with 17/19 inch wheels.
C Applies to cars with 20 inch wheels.
D Applies to cars with 21 inch wheels.
E Applies to cars with 22 inch wheels.
Related information
650
SPECIFICATIONS
Weights NOTE
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a
The documented kerb weight applies to cars
label in the car.
in the standard version - i.e. a car without
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank extra equipment or accessories. This means
90% full and all fluids. that for every accessory added the loading
capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly
The weight of passengers and accessories, and by the weight of the accessory.
towball load (when a trailer is hitched) influence
the load capacity and are not included in the kerb Examples of accessories that reduce load
weight. capacity are the different equipment levels
(e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight - as other accessories such as towbar, load
Kerb weight. carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be
lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille, visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.
carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc. Max. gross vehicle weight
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- Max. train weight (car+trailer)
taining the kerb weight of your own particular
car. Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load

WARNING
Equipment level
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and Max. load: See registration document.
how the load is distributed.
Max. roof load: 100 kg.
Related information
• Type designations (p. 646)
651
SPECIFICATIONS
Towing capacity and towball load Max. weight braked trailer

Towing capacity and towball load for driving with
a trailer can be read in the tables. NOTE
Use of vibration dampers on the towbar is
recommended for trailers heavier than 1800
kg.
Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
T5 B4204T23 Automatic 2400 110B

T5 B4204T26 Automatic 2400 110B
T5 AWD B4204T23 Automatic 2400 110B
D4 AWD D4204T14 Manual select 2400 110B
D4 AWD D4204T14 Automatic 2400 110B
D5 AWD D4204T23 Automatic 2400 110B
A The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
B For Australia, the max. permitted ball pressure is 10% of the permitted towing weight or max. 240 kg.
652
SPECIFICATIONS
IMPORTANT
When driving with a trailer, it is permitted to
exceed the vehicle's gross vehicle weight
(including towball load) by a maximum of
100 kg (220 lbs), provided that speed is lim-
ited to 100 km/h (62 mph). National legal
requirements for the vehicle combination,
such as speed, etc. must be observed.
Max. weight unbraked trailer

Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
750 50
Related information
• Trailer stability assist* (p. 477)
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine specifications NOTE

Engine specifications (power, etc.) for each
Not all engines are available in all markets.
respective engine alternative can be found in the
table below.
Engine Engine codeA Output Output Max. rated power Max. rated power Torque No. of cylinders
(kW/rpm) (hp/rpm) (kW/rpm) (hp/rpm) (Nm/rpm)
T4 B4204T44 140/5000 190/5000 156/5000 211/5000 300/1400-4000 4
T5 / T5 AWD B4204T23 187/5500 254/5500 208/5500 282/5500 350/1500–4800 4
T5 / T5 AWD B4204T26 184/5500 250/5500 – – 350/1800-4800 4
T5 AWD B4204T20 183/5500 249/5500 – – 350/1500-4500 4
T6 AWD B4204T27 235/5700 320/5700 – – 400/2200-5400 4
T6 AWD B4204T29 228/5700 310/5700 – – 400/2200-5100 4
D4 AWD D4204T14 140/4250 190/4250 – – 400/1750-2500 4
D5 AWD D4204T23 173/4000 235/4000 – – 480/1750-2250 4
Related information
• Coolant — specifications (p. 658)
• Performance (p. 663)
654
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine oil — specifications

Engine oil grade and volume for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
Volvo recommends:
Engine Engine codeA Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter

(litres)
T4 B4204T44 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 approx. 5.6
T5 / T5 AWD B4204T23 approx. 5.6
T5 / T5 AWD B4204T26 approx. 5.6
T5 AWD B4204T20 approx. 5.6
D4 AWD D4204T14 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 approx. 5.2
D5 AWD D4204T23 approx. 5.2
}}
655
SPECIFICATIONS
|| Related information
• Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 657)
• Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 601)
• Engine oil (p. 600)
656
SPECIFICATIONS
Adverse driving conditions for IMPORTANT

engine oil
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-
engine's service intervals all engines are filled
mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil
Below are some examples of adverse driving
at the factory. The choice of oil has been
conditions.
made very carefully with regard to service life,
Check the oil level more frequently for long jour- starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
neys: environmental impact.
• towing a caravan or trailer An approved engine oil must be used in order

that the recommended service intervals can
• in mountainous regions
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
• at high speeds for both filling and oil change, otherwise there
• in temperatures colder than -30 °C (-22 °F) is a risk of the service life, starting characte-
or hotter than +40 °C (+104 °F). ristics, fuel consumption and environmental
impact of the car being affected.
The above also apply to shorter driving distances
at low temperatures. If engine oil of the prescribed grade and vis-
cosity is not used, engine related components
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation
driving conditions. It provides extra protection for
disclaims any liability for any such damage.
the engine.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
Volvo recommends:
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
• Engine oil (p. 600)
657
SPECIFICATIONS
Coolant — specifications Transmission fluid — specifications Brake fluid — specifications

Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by Under normal driving conditions, the transmis- The medium in a hydraulic brake system is
Volvo mixed with 50% water1, see the packag- sion fluid does not need to be changed during called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer pres-
ing. Consult a Volvo retailer if unsure. its service life. However, it may be necessary in sure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master brake
adverse driving conditions. cylinder to one or more slave cylinders, which in
To avoid health risks, different types of glycol
turn act on a mechanical brake.
must not be mixed. Manual gearbox
Prescribed transmission BOT 350M3 Prescribed grade: Volvo Original Dot 4 class 6
Related information fluid: or equivalent.
Automatic gearbox NOTE
Prescribed transmission fluid: AW1 It is recommended that brake fluid is changed
or filled by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
1 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
658
SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel tank - volume Tank capacity for AdBlue®2 Air conditioning — specifications
The fuel tank's filling capacity can be read in the The refillable tank capacity for the additive The car's climate control system uses a freon-
table below. AdBlue is approx. 11.5 litres. free refrigerant, either R1234yf or R134a
depending on market. Information about which
Engine Litres refrigerant the car's climate control system uses
Related information is printed on a decal located on the inside of the
(approx.)
• Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 465) bonnet.
Petrol: T6 AWD 71
(B4204T27) Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and
lubricants in the air conditioning system can be
T6 AWD
read in the tables below.
(B4204T29)
other 60 A/C decal
Decal for R134a
Diesel: D4 AWD 60
(D4204T14)
D5 AWD 71
(D4204T23)
Related information
2 Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA) }}
659
SPECIFICATIONS
|| Decal for R1234yf Symbol Meaning WARNING

A trained and certified technician is The air conditioning system contains pressur-
required in order to service the ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
mobile air conditioning system Service and Containment of Refrigerants
(MAC) Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
Flammable refrigerants
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
Compressor oil
Symbol explanation R1234yf Refrigerant
Volume Prescribed grade
Symbol Meaning Cars with R134a refrigerant
125 ml (4.23 fl. oz.) PAG SP-A2
Caution Weight Prescribed grade
700 g (1.54 lbs) R134a Evaporator
Mobile air conditioning system WARNING IMPORTANT

(MAC) The A/C system's evaporator must never be
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only repaired or replaced with a previously used
be serviced and repaired by an authorised evaporator. A new evaporator must be certi-
Lubricant type workshop. fied and labelled in accordance with SAE
J2842.
Cars with R1234yf refrigerant
Weight Prescribed grade Related information
• Servicing the climate control system (p. 598)
650 g R1234yf
660
SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel consumption and CO2

emissions
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions can be
negatively impacted by a number of factors.
Examples of causes of increased fuel consump-
tion include:
• If the car is equipped with extra equipment
that affects its weight.
• Driving style.
• If the customer chooses wheels other than
those mounted as standard on the basic ver-
sion of the model, as this could increase roll-
ing resistance.
• High speed causes increased air resistance.
• Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
A combination of the examples above could
increase consumption considerably.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina-
tion with fuel quality are factors that consider-
ably increase the car's fuel consumption.
Related information
661
SPECIFICATIONS
Approved tyre pressures NOTE

Approved tyre pressures for each engine alterna-
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
tive can be found in the table.
are not always available in all markets.
Engine Tyre size Speed Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA
Front Rear Front Rear Front/rear
(kPa)B (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa)
235/65 R17 0-160 km/h (0-100 mph) 230 230 270 270 270
235/60 R18
235/55 R19
All engines
255/45 R20 160+ km/h (100+ mph) 250 250 270 270 –
255/40 R21
265/35 R22
Temporary Spare Tyre max 80 km/h (max 50 mph) 420 420 420 420 –
A Economical driving.
B In certain countries the "bar" unit is used alongside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
Related information
662
SPECIFICATIONS
Performance
Top speed can be read in the table below.
Engine Engine codeA Top speed

(km/h) (mph)
T5 B4204T23 210 130
T5 AWD B4204T23 220 137
T6 AWD B4204T27 230 140
D4 AWD D4204T14 205 127
D5 AWD D4204T23 220 137
NOTE
If there are no performance data then they
are available in the accompanying supple-
ment.
Related information
• Engine specifications (p. 654)
663
ALPHABETICAL INDEX ALPHABETICAL INDEX
function 302 Recirculation 212

1, 2, 3 ... managing speed 306, 307 table of options 203
4WD 439 overtaking 311 Air quality 197, 198
radar sensor 333 allergies and asthma 198
setting the time interval 308, 309 passenger compartment filter 199
A AdBlue 464 Air recirculation 212
filling 465
A/C (Air conditioning) 221 Alarm 273
operation 464
deactivation 275
ABS Symbols and messages 467
motion and tilt sensors 274
anti-lock brakes 423 tank volume 659
reduced alarm level 276
ACC – Adaptive cruise control 302, 305, Additional heater (Auxiliary heater) 231
Alcohol lock 422, 423
306, 307, 308, 309, 311, 312, 313, 314, 316 Adjusting the steering wheel 191
Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 198
Accessories and extra equipment 37 Aerial
installation 37 All Wheel Drive (AWD) 439
location 262
Active bending lights 152 Ambience lights 157
Airbag 49
Active main beam 149 Activating/deactivating 52 Android Auto 515, 517
Active Park Assist 408, 409, 412, 413, driver's side 49 Apple CarPlay 511, 512, 514
414, 415 passenger side 50, 52 Approach lighting 155
function 408, 409, 413, 414, 415 Airbag, see Airbag 49 Apps 493
Limitations 413 Air conditioning 221 Assistance at risk of collision 385, 386,
operation 409, 412
Air conditioning, fluid 387, 388, 389, 390, 391, 393
Symbols and messages 415
volume and grade 659 Audio and media 492
Active Yaw Control 282
Air conditioning system 194, 206 Audio settings 492, 524
Adapting driving characteristics 280, 439 repair 598 phone 525
Adaptive Cruise Control 302, 305, 306, Air distribution 200 play media 503, 504
307, 308, 309, 311, 312, 313, 314, 316 Air vents 200, 201 Text message 524
change cruise control functionality 314 change 200 Auto climate control 212
fault tracing 313 defrosting 213
665
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Auto hold 429 Battery 470, 609 brake light 154

Automatic brake 429 jump starting 470 brake system 423
activate and deactivate 430 maintenance 609 emergency brake lights 154
after collision 431 overload 470 handbrake 426
start 609 maintenance 425
Automatic car wash 633
support 612 on gritted roads 425
Automatic car washes 633 symbols on the battery 613 on wet roads 425
Automatic engine stop warning symbols 613 Brake system
auto-stop 445 Bicycle rack fluid 658
Automatic gearbox 433 towbar mounted 479 bulbs, specifications 608
kickdown 437 BLIS 360, 361, 362 bypass alcohol lock 422
oil 658
Bluetooth
trailer 476
connect 509
Automatic locking 266 connect car to Internet 527
Automatic relocking 237, 260 phone 517
C
Automatic speed limiter 290, 292, 293 settings 526 Camera sensor 355
Auxiliary heater 231 Bonnet, opening 597 Camera unit 342
AWD, All Wheel Drive 439 Book service and repair 592 Car care 631, 632, 633, 634, 635, 636
Brake assist Leather upholstery 629
after collision 431 Car functions
Brake fluid in centre display 114
B
grade 658 Cargo area 579
Backrest electrical socket 574, 576
Brake functions 423
front seat, adjusting 178, 179, 181, lighting 157
182, 183, 184 Brake light 154
mounting points 581
rear seat, lowering 186 Brakes 423 protective net 586
Bag holder 581 Anti-lock braking system, ABS 423
Cargo cover 582, 584
automatic when stationary 429
brake assist system, BAS 424 Cargo grille 585
666
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Car holiday 456 Checking the engine oil level 601 Clean Zone 197
Car key battery low 241 Checking the level 449 Clean Zone Interior Package 198
Car modem Child safety 57 Climate control 194, 206
connect car to Internet 528 Child safety locks 265 auto-regulation 212
settings 529 centre display 206
Child seat 57, 58, 60, 62
Car status 592 experienced temperature 195
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points 60
Tyre pressure 555 fan control 217, 218
lower mounting points 59
Parking 222
Car upholstery 626, 628, 629, 630 positioning/fitting 60, 62
rear seat 206
Car washing 631, 632, 633, 634, 635, 636 table for location 64
sensors 195
table of i-Size 66
Catalytic converter temperature control 219, 220
table of ISOFIX 67
Recovery 481 voice control 196
Upper mounting points 58
CD player 507 zones 194
City Safety in crossing traffic 352, 353
central locking 263 Climate control system
City Safety with evasive manoeuvre 353, 354 Refrigerant 659
Centre display
City Safety with obstructed evasive Clock, adjustment 85
change appearance 123
manoeuvre 354
cleaning 626 CO2 emissions 661
climate control 206 City Safety™ 346, 347, 349, 350, 355, 358
Collision 42, 44, 49, 55
function view 114 Cleaning 628, 630
Collision warning 346, 359
Keyboard 118 automatic car wash 633
messages 132, 133, 134 car washing 631, 632, 633, 634, 635, 636 Collision warning system
operation 104, 107, 111, 116 centre display 626 Pedestrian detection 350
overview 101 Fabric upholstery 626, 628, 629 Radar sensor 333
settings 124, 125, 126 rims 636 Colour code, paint 639
switch off and change volume 123 Seatbelts 628 Colour codes 639
symbols in status bar 116 upholstery 626, 628, 629, 630
Combined instrument panel 75
views 107 Cleaning wheel rims 636 settings 79
Change of owner 126 Cleaning wiper blades 634
667
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Compass 487, 488 Cyclist detection 350 Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor 436
calibration 488 CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package) 198 Display lighting 157
Condensation in headlamps 632, 633, Distance Warning 299, 300
634, 635 Limitations 301
Connect car to Internet D DivX® 508
no or poor connection 531
Data Door mirrors 163, 165
via a mobile device (WiFi) 528
recording 35 Dipping 164
via car modem 528
transfer between car and workshop 590 resetting 165
via mobile device (Bluetooth) 527
Data link connector 38 Drive-E
Connect phone 518
Environmental philosophy 28
Controls lighting 157 Data sharing 532
Driver Alert Control 375
Coolant 658 Daytime running lights 147
operation 376, 377
Coolant, filling 602 Deadlock 276
Driver display
deactivation 277
Cooling system application menu 95, 96
overheating 469 Defrosting 213 messages 97
Cornering lights 153 Diesel 461 Driver performance 83, 84
run out of fuel 462
Corner Traction Control 282 Driver profile 129
Diesel particle filter 463 edit 131
Cover
cargo area 584 Digital radio (DAB) 501 select 130
Crash, see Collision 42 Dimensions 649 driver support system 280
Towbar 472 Drivetrain
Cross Traffic Alert – CTA 365, 366, 367, 368
dipped beam 148 Gearbox 431
Cruise control 294, 295
deactivate 298 Dipstick, electronic 601 Driving
managing speed 295, 296 Direction indicator 151 cooling system 469
temporary deactivation 297 with a tailer 476
Direction indicators 151
CTA – Cross Traffic Alert 365, 366, 367, 368 Driving economy 455
direction of rotation 549
Driving in water 457
668
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Driving mode 439 Emissions of carbon dioxide 661 Exhaust system 464
change 441 Engine External dimensions 649
Driving with a trailer deactivate 419
towball load 652 overheating 469
towing capacity 652 start 418
Start/Stop 444
F
Engine braking, automatic 454 Fan
Air distribution 200
E Engine compartment
Air vents 201
coolant 602
ECO climate 442 Control 217, 218
Engine oil 600
ECO mode 442 overview 599 Fault tracing for the camera sensor 343
activate with function button 444 Ferry transport 449
Engine drag control 282
Economical driving 442, 455 First aid 588
Engine oil 600, 657
ECO pressure 551, 662 adverse driving conditions 657 First aid kit 588
Electrical socket 574 filling 601 Flooded road 457
using 576 filter 600
Fluids, capacities 642, 659
Electrical system 609 grade and volume 655
Fluids and oils 658, 659
Electric parking brake 426 Engine specifications 654
Fog lamp
emergency brake lights 154 Engine temperature
front 152
high 469
Emergency equipment rear 153
first aid kit 588 Environment 28
Foot brake 423
warning triangle 588 Error messages
Four-C 449
Emergency puncture repair kit 566 Adaptive Cruise Control 316
see Messages and symbols 316, 332 Front seat
implementation, follow-up inspection 566
Climate control 206
location 565 Error messages in BLIS 364
Fan 217
overview 565 Ethanol content heating 208, 209
Pump up tyre 569 maximum 10 percent by volume 460
sealing fluid 565
669
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Temperature 219 in engine compartment 616 Hazard warning flashers 154

Ventilation 210 under glovebox 619 HDC 454
Front seat, manual 178 Headlamp beam
Front seat, power 179 height adjustment 146
adjusting seat 179 G Headlamp control 144, 157
adjusting the passenger seat from the
Gearbox 431 Headlamp levelling of headlamps 146
driver's seat 185
automatic 433 head restraint 189
Lumbar support 184
manual 432
massage 181, 182, 183 Head up display
memory function 180, 181 Gear positions activate and deactivate 136
multi-function control 181, 182, 183, 184 automatic gearbox 433 cleaning 627
Side supports 183 Gear selector inhibitor 436 settings 136
FSC, ecolabelling 23 deactivate 436 windscreen replacement 599
Fuel 459, 460, 461 Gear shift indicator 437 Head-up display 134
fuel consumption 661 Glass Heated washer nozzles 172
identifier 461 laminated/reinforced 160 Heater 229
fuel gauge 80 Glovebox 577 auxiliary heater 231
Fuelling Gracenote® 506 parking heater 230
filling 458 Gross vehicle weight 651 Heating
fuel filler flap 458 seats 208, 209
GSI - Gear selector assistance 437
Fuel tank steering wheel 211
volume 659 Windows 215, 216
Fuel vapour 459 Height adjustment 449, 452

H High engine temperature 469
Fuse box 614
Fuses Handbrake 426 High-pressure washing 634
changing 615 Handwash 632 Hill descent control 454
General 614 Hard disk activate with function button 455
in cargo area 622 space 534
670
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Hill Descent Control 453, 454, 455 Infotainment system (Audio and media) 492 Jump starting 470
Hill start assist Instrument lighting 157
Hill Start Assist (HSA) 430 Instrument overview
Hill Start Assist 430 left-hand drive car 72 K
HomeLink® 484 right-hand drive car 73
Kerb weight 651
program 484 Instruments and controls 72, 73
Key 235
using 486 IntelliSafe
Keyboard 118, 121
Home safe light duration 155 Driver support 31
change language 121
Horn 190 Interior Air Quality System 198
Keyless
Interior lighting 156, 157 Locking/unlocking 260
Interior rearview mirror 163 settings 261
I Dipping 164 touch-sensitive surfaces 259
IAQS (Interior Air Quality System) 198 Intermittent wiping 171 Keypad in the steering wheel 190
IC (Inflatable Curtain) 55 Internet, see Internet-connected car 526 Key tag 235
ID, Volvo 26 Internet-connected car

book service and repair 592
Identification number 39
send car information 594 L
Ignition position 420, 421 system updates 591
Immobiliser 248 Labels
iPod®, connection 509
location of 646
Immobilizer ITPMS - Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring
Immobiliser 248 Laminated glass 160
System 552
Indicator symbols 86 Lamps
change 604
Individual drive mode 439
location 605
Inflatable curtain 55 J specifications 608
Inflatable Curtain 55 Jack 557 trailer 478
Information display 75, 79 Journey statistics 83
671
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Lane assistance fog lamp 152 Lock

operation 380 Hazard warning flashers 154 locking 237
Lane assistance – Lane Keeping Aid headlamp levelling 146 unlocking 237
(LKA) 377, 379, 380, 382, 384 home safe lighting 155 Lockable wheel bolts 558
instrument lighting 157
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) 377, 379, 380, Lock confirmation 234
in the passenger compartment 156, 157
382, 384 setting 235
lamp positions 605
Language 124 main beam 149 Locking/unlocking
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 629 position lamps 147 tailgate 239, 261
Level control rear fog lamp 153 Low battery voltage

settings 452 settings 145 Battery 470
License agreement 89, 535 Lighting, bulb replacement 604 Lowering the rear section 580
daytime running lights/position lamps Low speed control 452
Lifting tool 557
front 607 activate with function button 453
Lighting dipped beam 605
active bending lights 152 direction indicators front 607
approach lighting 155 main beam 606
automatic lighting, passenger compart-
Limitations for Driver Alert Control 377
M
ment 156
Limp home 431 Main beam 149
Automatic main beam 149
brake light 154 Load carriers 581 Maintained climate comfort 227
bulbs, specifications 608 start/shut-off 227
Loading
controls 144, 156, 157 General 579 maintenance
controls lighting 157 load retaining eyelets 581 Rustproofing 636
cornering lights 153 long load 580 Manual gearbox 432
daytime running lights 147 oil 658
Loading hooks 581
dipped beam 148
Load retaining eyelets Max. roof load 651
direction indicators 151
display lighting 157 cargo area 581
emergency brake lights 154
672
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Media player 502, 503, 504 Panorama roof

compatible file formats 533, 534
O opening and closing 168
voice control 140 octane rating 460 pinch protection 160
Messages and symbols Oil, see also Engine oil 655, 657 sun blind 166, 170
Adaptive Cruise Control 316 ventilation position 169
Oil level low 601
Collision Warning with Auto Brake 358 PAP - Active Park Assist 408, 409, 412,
Online car 526
Messages in BLIS 364 413, 414, 415
no or poor connection 531
Messages in displays 97, 132 Park Assist 394, 395, 396, 397, 398
Option/accessory 21
manage 98, 133 function 394, 395, 396
Output 654
saved 99, 134 Park assist camera 399, 400, 402, 404,
outside temperature gauge 85 405, 406, 407
Meters
fuel gauge 80 Overheating 469, 476 settings 404
Mileage 80 Overtaking Assistance 311, 328, 329 Park assist camera's limitations 405
Misting Owner's manual 21 Park assist lines for Park assist camera 402
condensation in headlamps 631, 633 ecolabelling 23 Parking
in centre display 17, 18 on hill 428
Mobile phone, see Phone 518
in mobile 20
Mood lighting 157 Parking brake 426
Owner information 16 activate and deactivate 426
Motion sensor 274
automatic activation 428
low battery voltage 428
P Parking climate 222
N Symbols and messages 228
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch) 52
Net Parking heater 230
Paddle on the steering wheel 190
cargo area 586 Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch 52
Paintwork
colour code 639 Passenger compartment filter 199
damage and touch-up 637, 639 Passenger compartment heater (Parking
heater) 230
673
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Passenger compartment interior 572 Polishing 631 Radio 496

electrical socket 574 Position lamp 147 change radio frequency and radio sta-
glovebox 577 tion 497
Power operated tailgate 266
Sun visor 579 DAB 501
tunnel console 573 Power panorama roof 166 search for radio station 498
Passenger compartment lighting Power save mode 470 settings 499
automatic 156 Power seat 179 start 497
voice control 140
Personal information (Privacy policy) 36 Power windows 161, 162
pinch protection 160 Radio favourites 499
petrol 460
Preconditioning 222 Rain sensor 172, 173
Petrol particle filter 461
start/shut-off 223 Rain sensor memory function 173
Phone 517
Timer 224 Raising the car 595
Calls 522, 524
change to another 521 Privacy policy 36 Raising the rear section 580
connect 518 Private locking 272 Rear seat
connect automatically 520 Activating/deactivating 272 Climate control 206
connect manually 520 Protective grille 585 Fan 218
disconnect 521 head restraint 189
Protective net 586
remove 522 heating 209
text message 523 Pump up tyre 569
lowering the backrest 186
voice control 139 Puncture 565 Temperature 219
Pilot Assist 318, 321, 322, 323, 324, Rearview and door mirrors
325, 326, 328, 329, 330, 332 compass 487, 488
overtaking 328, 329 R Dipping 164
Pinch protection 160 door 163, 165
resetting 161 Radar sensor 305, 333 electrically retractable 165
Limitations 334 heating 216
PIN code 529
Radar unit 333 interior 163
Pocket park assist - PAP 408, 409, 412,
413, 414, 415
674
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
rear window Restore settings 127 Seatbelt 44

heating 216 change of owner 126 buckle/unbuckle 45
Washers 175, 176 Driver profile 131 pregnancy 42
Wiper 175, 176 Retractable power door mirrors 165 seatbelt reminder 47
Recommendations during driving 456 seatbelt tensioner 46
Reversing camera 399, 400, 402, 404,
Recommendations for loading 579 405, 406, 407 Seatbelt, see Seatbelts 44
Recovery 483 Reversing sensors 394, 395, 396, 397, 398 Seatbelt reminder 47
Red Key 244 Road run-off protection 386, 387 seatbelt tensioner
settings 245 Resetting 47
Road sign information 369, 370, 372
Refrigerant 598 Limitations 374 Seatbelt tensioner 46
climate control system 659 operation 370, 372, 373, 374 Seats
Refuelling 458, 465 Roll Stability Control 281 heating 208, 209
AdBlue 465 manual front seat 178
Roof load, max. weight 651
memory function front seat 180, 181
Regeneration 461, 463 RSC (Roll Stability Control) 281 power front seat 179
Remote control, HomeLink® Run out of fuel Ventilation 210
programmable 484 diesel 462 whiplash protection 43
Remote control immobiliser 248 Rustproofing 636 sensors
Remote control key 235 Air quality 199
battery replacement 241 Climate control 195
connect to driver profile 131 Sensus
detachable key blade 246
S
connection and entertainment 32
loss 244 Safety 42
Sensus Navigation 372
range 240 pregnancy 42
Service position 641
Remote control key system, type approval 250 Safety mode 55
start/movement 56 Service programme 590
Remote updates 591
Sealing fluid 565 Set time interval 300
Resetting, trip meter 83
Resetting the door mirrors 165 Seat, see Seats 178
675
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Settings 127 Stability system 282 Stop/start function 444

Categories 128 Stains 626, 628, 629, 630 Storage spaces 572
contextual 125 glovebox 577
Start/Stop 444
Resetting 127 Sun visor 579
deactivate 446
settings menu 127 tunnel console 573
Driving 445
Side airbag 54 Limitations 447 Sun blind
Side Impact Protection System 54, 55 Starting the engine 418 panorama roof 166, 170
SIM card 529 after collision 56 pinch protection 160
SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) 54, 55 Start the car 418 Sunroof
pinch protection 160
Skidding 457 Steering assistance at risk of colli-
sion 385, 386, 387, 388, 389, 390, 391, 393 Sun visor 579
Ski hatch 582
mirror lighting 157
slippery driving conditions 457 Steering assistance at risk of head-on colli-
sion 388, 389 Support battery 612
Software updates 35
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end col- Switching off the engine 419
Soot filter 463
lision 390, 391 Switch off engine 419
spare wheel 562, 563
Steering force, speed related 280 Symbols
Speed camera 374 indicator symbols 86
Steering force level, see Steering force 280
Speed limiter 286, 289, 290, 293 Symbols and messages
Steering lock 191
deactivation 289 Adaptive Cruise Control 316
getting started 287 Steering wheel 190, 191
centre display status field 116
temporary deactivation 288 heating 211
Collision Warning with Auto Brake 358
keypad 190
Speed ratings, tyres 547 parking climate 228
paddle 190
Spin control 282 steering wheel adjustment 191 Symbols and messages for Assistance at
Stabiliser risk of collision 393
Steering wheel paddles 434
trailer 477 system updates 591
Stickers
Stability and traction control system 282, 285 location of 646
operation 283, 284
Stone chips and scratches 637, 639
676
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Towing a trailer Tunnel console 573

T Towbar 475 Tunnel detection 148
Tailgate Towing bracket 475 TV 510
Locking/unlocking 239, 261
Towing capacity and towball load 652 settings 511
opening/closing with foot movement 270
Towing eye 481 watch 510
power 266
unlock from inside 264 Traction control 282 Type approval
radar system 338
Temperature Traffic information 499
remote control key system 250
Control 219, 220 Trailer 477
experienced 195 Type designations 646
cable 476
Temporary spare driving with a trailer 476 Tyre dimension 547, 557
spare wheel 562 Lamps 478 Tyre load index 547
Terms and conditions snaking 477 Tyre pressure
services 36 Trailer stability assist 282, 477 Adjust 550
user 532 Transmission 431 Check 550
Through-load hatch 582 recommended 551
Transmission oil
Tilt detector 274 grade 658 Tyre pressure label 551
Tools 557 Tread 549 Tyre pressure monitoring 552

action 556
Top speed 663 Tread depth 549, 563
Calibrate 553
Total airing function 235, 263 Tread wear indicators 549 Status 555
Towbar 471 Trip computer 80, 82 Tyre pressure table 662
detachable, attachment 475 Trip meter 80 Tyres 546
detachable, removal 475
Trip meter, resetting 83 direction of rotation 549
foldable 473
Troubleshooting installation 561
specifications 472
Adaptive Cruise Control 313 pressure 662
Towing 480, 483 puncture repair 565
TSA - trailer stability assist 477
removal 559
TSA - Trailer stability assist 282
677
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
rotation 546 Voice control Warning triangle 588

specifications 662 Climate control 196 Washer fluid 642
storage 546 phone 139
Washer nozzles, heated 172
tread depth 563 radio and media 140
tread wear indicators 549 settings 140 Washers
tyre pressure monitoring 552 Headlamps 174
Voice recognition 137
tyre pressure table 662 rear window 175, 176
VOL marking 546 washer fluid, filling 642
winter tyres 563
Volvo ID 26 windscreen 174
create and register 26 Waxing 631
U Weights
kerb weight 651
Units 124 W Wheel bolts 558
Unknown car part 277 lockable 558
Warning lamp
Unlocking Adaptive Cruise Control 305 Wheel change 557
settings 239 stability and traction control system 282 Wheel rim, dimensions 548
with key blade 247
Warning lamps Wheel rims
USB Airbags – SRS 88 cleaning 636
jack for connecting media 509 alternator not charging 88
Wheels
Fault in brake system 88
installation 561
Low oil pressure 88
removal 559
V Parking brake applied 88
snow chains 564
seatbelt reminder 88
Ventilation 200, 201 starter battery not charging 88 Wheels and tyres
seats 210 Warning 88 tyre load index and speed rating 547
Vibration damper 471 Warning sound whiplash protection 43
Video 507, 509 Parking brake 428 Whiplash Protection System 43
settings 508 Warning symbols 88 WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) 43
Safety 42
678
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Wi-Fi
connect car to Internet 528
delete network 531
share internet connection, hotspot 530
technology and security 532
Windows and glass 160
Windscreen
heating 215
projected image 134, 136
Windscreen washing 174
Windscreen wiper 171
rain sensor 172, 173
Winter driving 457
Winter tyres 563
Winter wheels 563
Wiper blades
changing 639, 640
Service position 641
679
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
680
TP 24641 (English Int.), AT 1746, MY18, Copyright © 2000-2017 Volvo Car Corporation

XC60 OwnersManual MY18 en-InT TP24641

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

XC60 OwnersManual MY18 en-InT TP24641

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

XC60 OwnersManual MY18 en-InT TP24641

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

XC60

Owner information The car's centre display1 Printed information

2 Applies for most markets. }}

Quick Guide 2. Tap on a hotspot. Information

3 For certain mobile devices.

Log in to Volvo Cars website Reading the owner's manual Options/accessories

Procedure lists • Coolant The owner's manual and the

Bulleted lists • Volvo Cars support site (p. 20)

Volvo ID Related information Creating and registering a Volvo ID

Registering your Volvo ID to the car

2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your

4 Cars with Volvo On Call*.

Contributing to a better environment type of waste should be discarded - an author- Interior

5 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.

Sensus - online connectivity and Information when it is needed, where it

Sensus offers an intelligent interface and online

12-inch* driver display.

|| Many of the main functions of the car are con-

Important information on WARNING Installation of accessories

Data link connector (On-board Diagnostic, OBDII) is

Showing the car's identification Driver distraction WARNING

We wish to give the following warnings regarding

6 Vehicle Identification Number

Safety WARNING Safety during pregnancy

|| Seating position Seatbelts WARNING

|| Seatbelt reminder Rear seat Related information

Airbags Deployed airbags Driver airbags

1 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets. }}

|| WARNING Related information Passenger airbag

1 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.

WARNING Label for passenger airbag WARNING

Activating and deactivating WARNING Activating passenger airbag

Pull the switch outward and turn from ON

|| Related information Side airbags WARNING

The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest WARNING

Airbags WARNING Safety mode

Related information Child safety NOTE

WARNING Lower mounting points for child

Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.

2 Names and symbols change depending on market.

NOTE Label for passenger airbag Related information

WARNING • Table for location of i-Size child seats

Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label

Child seat mounting NOTE Installation in the rear seat

3 The accessory range varies depending on market.

Table for location of child seats NOTE

WARNING NOTE NOTE

• Table for location of child seats using the

Instruments and controls in left- Steering wheel adjustment

Display lighting, tailgate unlocking/opening*/

Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media

Right-hand steering wheel keypad Centre and tunnel console

Instruments and controls in right- Display lighting, tailgate unlocking/opening*/

Left-hand steering wheel keypad

Memories for power front seat*, door mirror

Power windows, door mirrors, electric child

Start knob Power windows, door mirrors, electric child

Driver display The driver display is available in two versions, 12-

Location in the driver display:

OdometerB Clock Drive mode